Scribd
Upload
241 views

Tedds Function Reference

This document is a reference for the functions and fields available in Tedds 2020. It begins with an overview of math functions, including general functions like average, ceiling, floor, as well as trigonometric functions like sin, cos, tan. It then covers Tedds specific functions for 2D analysis. The document provides detailed documentation on the usage of over 50 individual functions within Tedds.

Uploaded by

CSEC Uganda Ltd.
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
241 views

Tedds Function Reference

This document is a reference for the functions and fields available in Tedds 2020. It begins with an overview of math functions, including general functions like average, ceiling, floor, as well as trigonometric functions like sin, cos, tan. It then covers Tedds specific functions for 2D analysis. The document provides detailed documentation on the usage of over 50 individual functions within Tedds.

Uploaded by

CSEC Uganda Ltd.
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
You are on page 1/ 903

Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Tedds 2020
Function and Field
Reference

Page 1 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Page 2 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Math functions ............................................................................................................................................ 23


General Functions ................................................................................................................................................... 24
 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 25

Abs ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 26

Average ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 27

Ceiling........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 28

Degrees ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 29

Extremum.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 30

Exp............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 31

Floor .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 32

Int .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 33

InterpLinear............................................................................................................................................................................................... 34

Ln............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 35

Log............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 36

Max ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 37

Median ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 38

Min ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 39

Mod ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 40

Quotient .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 41

Rand .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 42

Round ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 43

RoundUp ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 44

RoundDown .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 45

Sqrt ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 46

Sum ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 47

xy ............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 48

Trignometric Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 49


Sin ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 50

Cos............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 51

Tan ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 52

Cosec ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 53

Sec ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 54

Cot ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 55

Asin ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 56

Acos ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 57

Atan ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 58

Sinh ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 59

Page 3 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
Cosh .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 60

Tanh .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 61

Asinh ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 62

Acosh......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 63

Atanh ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 64

Tedds functions ........................................................................................................................................... 65


2D analysis functions ............................................................................................................................................... 66
Introduction .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 67

SolvCreateSolver ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 71

SolvSetActiveSolver ................................................................................................................................................................................... 72

SolvGetActiveSolver .................................................................................................................................................................................. 73

SolvGetSolverCount .................................................................................................................................................................................. 74

SolvAnalyse/SolvAnalyze ........................................................................................................................................................................... 75

SolvAddCoordinateSystem ........................................................................................................................................................................ 76

SolvAddMaterial ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 77

SolvSetMaterial ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 78

SolvAddSection ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 79

SolvSetSection ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 80

SolvAddNode............................................................................................................................................................................................. 81

SolvAddNodes ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 83

SolvSetDefaultNodeFreedom .................................................................................................................................................................... 84

SolvSetDefaultNodeCoordSystem ............................................................................................................................................................. 85

SolvSetNodeLabel ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 86

SolvAddSpringX ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 87

SolvAddSpringZ ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 88

SolvAddRotationalSpring........................................................................................................................................................................... 89

SolvAddElement ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 90

SolvAddElements ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 92

SolvAddSpan ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 93

SolvAddMember ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 94

SolvSetDefaultElementSection .................................................................................................................................................................. 95

SolvSetDefaultElementMaterial ................................................................................................................................................................ 96

SolvSetDefaultElementRotation ................................................................................................................................................................ 97

SolvSetDefaultElementReleases................................................................................................................................................................ 98

SolvSetElementRotation ........................................................................................................................................................................... 99

SolvSetMemberRotation ......................................................................................................................................................................... 100

SolvAddLoadCase .................................................................................................................................................................................... 101

Page 4 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
SolvAddCombination............................................................................................................................................................................... 102

SolvAddCombinationLoadCase ............................................................................................................................................................... 103

SolvAddNodeLoad ................................................................................................................................................................................... 104

SolvAddNodeDisplacement ..................................................................................................................................................................... 105

SolvAddElementPointLoad ...................................................................................................................................................................... 106

SolvAddElementPointMoment................................................................................................................................................................ 107

SolvAddElementUDL ............................................................................................................................................................................... 108

SolvAddElementVDL ................................................................................................................................................................................ 109

SolvAddElementTrapezoidalLoad............................................................................................................................................................ 110

SolvAddElementUniformTemperature.................................................................................................................................................... 111

SolvAddSpanPointMoment ..................................................................................................................................................................... 112

SolvAddSpanPointLoad ........................................................................................................................................................................... 113

SolvAddSpanUDL ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 114

SolvAddSpanVDL ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 115

SolvAddSpanTrapezoidalLoad ................................................................................................................................................................. 116

SolvAddSpanUniformTemperature ......................................................................................................................................................... 117

SolvAddMemberPointMoment ............................................................................................................................................................... 118

SolvAddMemberPointLoad ..................................................................................................................................................................... 119

SolvAddMemberRollingPointLoads ......................................................................................................................................................... 120

SolvAddMemberUDL ............................................................................................................................................................................... 121

SolvAddMemberVDL ............................................................................................................................................................................... 122

SolvAddMemberTrapezoidalLoad ........................................................................................................................................................... 123

SolvAddMemberUniformTemperature ................................................................................................................................................... 124

SolvDeleteAllCombinations ..................................................................................................................................................................... 125

SolvDeleteAllLoadCases .......................................................................................................................................................................... 126

SolvCreateDrawing .................................................................................................................................................................................. 127

SolvDrawAttach....................................................................................................................................................................................... 129

SolvDrawCoordinateSystem .................................................................................................................................................................... 131

SolvDraw ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 132

SolvDrawGetWidth ................................................................................................................................................................................. 133

SolvDrawGetHeight ................................................................................................................................................................................. 134

SolvDrawAxis ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 135

SolvDrawNodes ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 137

SolvDrawElements .................................................................................................................................................................................. 139

SolvDrawLoading..................................................................................................................................................................................... 141

SolvDrawDiagram .................................................................................................................................................................................... 143

SolvDrawDiagrams .................................................................................................................................................................................. 145

SolvDrawEnvelope .................................................................................................................................................................................. 146

Page 5 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
SolvDrawEnvelopes ................................................................................................................................................................................. 148

SolvDrawLegend...................................................................................................................................................................................... 149

SolvDrawMembers .................................................................................................................................................................................. 150

SolvDrawStringOrientation ..................................................................................................................................................................... 152

SolvDrawLockDiagramScaleFactor .......................................................................................................................................................... 153

SolvDrawUnlockDiagramScaleFactor ...................................................................................................................................................... 154

SolvDrawScaleFactor ............................................................................................................................................................................... 155

SolvDrawTitle .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 156

SolvDrawBounds ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 158

SolvDrawResult ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 159

SolvSelectClear ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 160

SolvSelectLoadCases ............................................................................................................................................................................... 161

SolvSelectCombinations .......................................................................................................................................................................... 162

SolvSelectCombinationsType .................................................................................................................................................................. 163

SolvSelectElements ................................................................................................................................................................................. 164

SolvSelectSpans ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 165

SolvSelectMembers................................................................................................................................................................................. 166

SolvSelectResultsPosition........................................................................................................................................................................ 167

SolvSelectResultsRange ........................................................................................................................................................................... 168

SolvGetSelectionDescription ................................................................................................................................................................... 169

SolvGetMaxAxialForce ............................................................................................................................................................................ 170

SolvGetMinAxialForce ............................................................................................................................................................................. 171

SolvGetMaxAxialForcePos ....................................................................................................................................................................... 172

SolvGetMinAxialForcePos ....................................................................................................................................................................... 173

SolvGetMaxAxialForceIndex.................................................................................................................................................................... 174

SolvGetMinAxialForceIndex .................................................................................................................................................................... 175

SolvGetMaxAxialForceLoadContext ........................................................................................................................................................ 176

SolvGetMinAxialForceLoadContext ......................................................................................................................................................... 177

SolvGetMaxAxialForceIndex.................................................................................................................................................................... 178

SolvGetMinAxialForceIndex .................................................................................................................................................................... 179

SolvGetMaxShear .................................................................................................................................................................................... 180

SolvGetMinShear .................................................................................................................................................................................... 181

SolvGetMaxShearPos .............................................................................................................................................................................. 182

SolvGetMinShearPos ............................................................................................................................................................................... 183

SolvGetMaxShearIndex ........................................................................................................................................................................... 184

SolvGetMinShearIndex ............................................................................................................................................................................ 185

SolvGetMaxShearForceLoadContext ....................................................................................................................................................... 186

SolvGetMinShearForceLoadContext ....................................................................................................................................................... 187

Page 6 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
SolvGetMaxShearIndex ........................................................................................................................................................................... 188

SolvGetMinShearIndex ............................................................................................................................................................................ 189

SolvGetMaxMomentShear ...................................................................................................................................................................... 190

SolvGetMinMomentShear ...................................................................................................................................................................... 191

SolvGetMaxMoment ............................................................................................................................................................................... 192

SolvGetMinMoment................................................................................................................................................................................ 193

SolvGetMaxMomentPos ......................................................................................................................................................................... 194

SolvGetMinMomentPos .......................................................................................................................................................................... 195

SolvGetMaxMomentIndex ...................................................................................................................................................................... 196

SolvGetMinMomentIndex ....................................................................................................................................................................... 197

SolvGetMaxMomentLoadContext ........................................................................................................................................................... 198

SolvGetMinMomentLoadContext ........................................................................................................................................................... 199

SolvGetMaxMomentIndex ...................................................................................................................................................................... 200

SolvGetMinMomentIndex ....................................................................................................................................................................... 201

SolvGetMaxShearMoment ...................................................................................................................................................................... 202

SolvGetMinShearMoment ...................................................................................................................................................................... 203

SolvGetMaxDeflection ............................................................................................................................................................................ 204

SolvGetMinDeflection ............................................................................................................................................................................. 205

SolvGetMaxDeflectionPos ....................................................................................................................................................................... 206

SolvGetMinDeflectionPos ....................................................................................................................................................................... 207

SolvGetMaxDeflectionIndex.................................................................................................................................................................... 208

SolvGetMinDeflectionIndex .................................................................................................................................................................... 209

SolvGetMaxDeflectionLoadContext ........................................................................................................................................................ 210

SolvGetMinDeflectionLoadContext ......................................................................................................................................................... 211

SolvGetMaxDeflectionIndex.................................................................................................................................................................... 212

SolvGetMinDeflectionIndex .................................................................................................................................................................... 213

SolvGetMaxAxialDeflection ..................................................................................................................................................................... 215

SolvGetMinAxialDeflection ..................................................................................................................................................................... 216

SolvGetMaxAxialDeflectionPos ............................................................................................................................................................... 217

SolvGetMinAxialDeflectionPos ................................................................................................................................................................ 218

SolvGetMaxAxialDeflectionIndex ............................................................................................................................................................ 219

SolvGetMinAxialDeflectionIndex............................................................................................................................................................. 220

SolvGetMaxAxialDeflectionLoadContext ................................................................................................................................................ 221

SolvGetMinAxialDeflectionLoadContext ................................................................................................................................................. 222

SolvGetMaxAxialDeflLoadIndex .............................................................................................................................................................. 223

SolvGetMinAxialDeflLoadIndex ............................................................................................................................................................... 224

SolvGetMaxHorizontalDeflection ............................................................................................................................................................ 225

SolvGetMinHorizontalDeflection ............................................................................................................................................................ 226

Page 7 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
SolvGetMaxVerticalDeflection ................................................................................................................................................................ 227

SolvGetMinVerticalDeflection ................................................................................................................................................................. 228

SolvGetMaxRotationalDeflection ............................................................................................................................................................ 229

SolvGetMinRotationalDeflection ............................................................................................................................................................ 230

SolvGetMaxHorizontalReaction .............................................................................................................................................................. 231

SolvGetMinHorizontalReaction ............................................................................................................................................................... 232

SolvGetMaxVerticalReaction................................................................................................................................................................... 233

SolvGetMinVerticalReaction ................................................................................................................................................................... 234

SolvGetMaxMomentReaction ................................................................................................................................................................. 235

SolvGetMinMomentReaction.................................................................................................................................................................. 236

SolvGetMaxHorizontalBaseReaction ....................................................................................................................................................... 237

SolvGetMinHorizontalBaseReaction ....................................................................................................................................................... 238

SolvGetMaxVerticalBaseReaction ........................................................................................................................................................... 239

SolvGetMinVerticalBaseReaction ............................................................................................................................................................ 240

SolvGetMaxMomentBaseReaction ......................................................................................................................................................... 241

SolvGetMinMomentBaseReaction .......................................................................................................................................................... 242

SolvGetMaxEndAxialForce ...................................................................................................................................................................... 243

SolvGetMaxEndShear .............................................................................................................................................................................. 244

SolvGetMaxEndMoment ......................................................................................................................................................................... 245

SolvGetOutputOption ............................................................................................................................................................................. 246

SolvSetOutputOption .............................................................................................................................................................................. 249

SolvGetCombinationCount...................................................................................................................................................................... 252

SolvGetCombinationDisplayName .......................................................................................................................................................... 253

SolvGetCombinationSource .................................................................................................................................................................... 254

SolvGetCombinationSourceCount ........................................................................................................................................................... 255

SolvGetElementCount ............................................................................................................................................................................. 256

SolvGetElementLength ............................................................................................................................................................................ 257

SolvGetLoadCaseCount ........................................................................................................................................................................... 258

SolvGetMaterialSource ........................................................................................................................................................................... 259

SolvGetMaterialSourceCount .................................................................................................................................................................. 260

SolvGetMaterialSourceName .................................................................................................................................................................. 261

SolvGetMemberCantilevered .................................................................................................................................................................. 262

SolvGetMemberCount ............................................................................................................................................................................ 263

SolvGetMemberElements ....................................................................................................................................................................... 264

Parameters .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 264

SolvGetMemberLength ........................................................................................................................................................................... 265

SolvGetModifiedTimeStamp ................................................................................................................................................................... 266

SolvGetNodeCount .................................................................................................................................................................................. 267

Page 8 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
SolvGetSectionSource ............................................................................................................................................................................. 268

SolvGetSectionSourceCount ................................................................................................................................................................... 270

SolvGetSectionSourceName.................................................................................................................................................................... 271

SolvGetSpanCount .................................................................................................................................................................................. 272

SolvGetSpanElements ............................................................................................................................................................................. 273

SolvGetSpanLength ................................................................................................................................................................................. 274

SolvIdFromIndex ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 275

SolvIdFromName ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 277

SolvIndexFromId ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 279

SolvIndexFromName ............................................................................................................................................................................... 281

SolvSelectTable ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 283

SolvGetTableRowValue ........................................................................................................................................................................... 289

SolvGetValue ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 290

SolvSelectRow ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 296

SolvSelectRowParent .............................................................................................................................................................................. 297

SolvSelectNextRow ................................................................................................................................................................................. 298

SolvGetXml .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 299

SolvSetXml .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 300

Calc library functions ............................................................................................................................................. 301


CalcItemExists ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 302

CalcLibraryExists ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 303

DeleteCalcItem ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 304

GetActiveCalcItemInfo ............................................................................................................................................................................ 305

GetCalcItemAuthor ................................................................................................................................................................................. 306

GetCalcItemDescription .......................................................................................................................................................................... 307

GetCalcItemLongName ........................................................................................................................................................................... 308

GetCalcItemProperties ............................................................................................................................................................................ 309

GetCalcItemsStrList ................................................................................................................................................................................. 310

GetCalcItemStatus................................................................................................................................................................................... 311

GetCalcItemText...................................................................................................................................................................................... 312

GetCalcItemVersion ................................................................................................................................................................................ 313

SaveSectionVarsCalcItem ........................................................................................................................................................................ 314

SaveVerifySectionVarsCalcItem .............................................................................................................................................................. 315

SelectCalcItem ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 316

SelectCalcLibrary ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 317

SetCalcItemAuthor .................................................................................................................................................................................. 318

SetCalcItemDescription ........................................................................................................................................................................... 319

Page 9 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
SetCalcItemLongName ............................................................................................................................................................................ 320

SetCalcItemStatus ................................................................................................................................................................................... 321

SetCalcItemText ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 322

SetCalcItemVersion ................................................................................................................................................................................. 323

Calc section functions............................................................................................................................................ 324


AddSection .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 325

DeleteSection .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 326

DeleteVarsInAllSections .......................................................................................................................................................................... 327

DeleteVarsInSectionExcept ..................................................................................................................................................................... 329

DeleteVarsInSection ................................................................................................................................................................................ 331

GetSectionID ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 333

GetSectionName ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 334

GetSectionVar ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 335

ListAllSections ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 337

ListVarsInSection ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 338

SetSection ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 339

SetSectionVar .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 340

Calculating ............................................................................................................................................................. 342


CancelIf ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 343

Eval/EvalString ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 344

EvalCalcItem ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 346

EvalCalcItemIf.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 347

EvalCalcItemIfExists................................................................................................................................................................................. 348

EvalDo ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 349

EvalDoWhile ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 351

EvalFile .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 353

EvalFor .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 354

EvalIf........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 356

EvalWhile ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 358

ReturnArg ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 360

Cubic solver function ............................................................................................................................................. 361


RootOfCubic ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 362

Database functions................................................................................................................................................ 364


DBOpen ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 365

DBClose ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 366

DBConnectionString ................................................................................................................................................................................ 367

DBGetConnectionCount .......................................................................................................................................................................... 368

Page 10 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
DBGetActiveConnection .......................................................................................................................................................................... 369

DBSetActiveConnection .......................................................................................................................................................................... 370

DBExecute ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 371

DBExecuteQueryGetValue ...................................................................................................................................................................... 372

DBExecuteQuery ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 373

DBGetValue ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 374

DBNextRow ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 375

DBCreateTable ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 376

DBCreateTableColumn ............................................................................................................................................................................ 377

DBCreateTableReference ........................................................................................................................................................................ 378

DBCreateTableConstraint ........................................................................................................................................................................ 379

DBInsert .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 380

DBAddParameter .................................................................................................................................................................................... 381

DBSetParameter ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 382

DBListProviders ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 383

DBRegisterProvider ................................................................................................................................................................................. 384

DBGetProvider ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 385

DBSetProvider ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 386

DBSetProviderBoolKeywords .................................................................................................................................................................. 387

DBSetProviderConnectionKeywords ....................................................................................................................................................... 388

DBSetProviderCreateTableKeywords ...................................................................................................................................................... 389

DBSetProviderInsertKeywords ................................................................................................................................................................ 390

DBSetProviderParameterKeywords ........................................................................................................................................................ 391

DataList functions .................................................................................................................................................. 392


DListDeleteVars ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 393

DListFileExists .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 395

DListGetColumnStrList ............................................................................................................................................................................ 396

DListGetFile ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 398

DListGetFootNote ................................................................................................................................................................................... 399

DListGetFootNoteSymbol ........................................................................................................................................................................ 400

DListGetItemColumnValue ...................................................................................................................................................................... 401

DListGetItemDescription ......................................................................................................................................................................... 402

DListGetItemFootNotes .......................................................................................................................................................................... 403

DListGetItemName .................................................................................................................................................................................. 404

DListGetItemStrList ................................................................................................................................................................................. 405

DListGetPageColumnName ..................................................................................................................................................................... 406

DListGetPageName ................................................................................................................................................................................. 407

Page 11 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
DListGetPageNumColumns ..................................................................................................................................................................... 408

DListGetPageShortName ......................................................................................................................................................................... 409

DListGetPageStrList ................................................................................................................................................................................. 410

DListGetVar ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 411

DListGetVarMax ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 412

DListGetVarMin ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 413

DListGetVarName.................................................................................................................................................................................... 414

DListGetVarUnits ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 415

DListItemExists ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 416

DListNumFootNotes ................................................................................................................................................................................ 417

DListNumItems ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 418

DListNumPages ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 419

DListNumVars.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 420

DListPageExists ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 421

DListSelect ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 422

DListSelectUI ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 423

DListSetFile .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 424

DListSetItem ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 425

DListSetItemFilter.................................................................................................................................................................................... 426

DListSetPage............................................................................................................................................................................................ 427

DListSetPageFilter ................................................................................................................................................................................... 428

DListShowUI ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 429

DListWriteVars ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 430

Data tools .............................................................................................................................................................. 431


DataGraph ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 432

DataList ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 433

DataTable ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 434

Date and time ........................................................................................................................................................ 435


Date ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 436

DateTime ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 439

Time ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 442

Drawing functions ................................................................................................................................................. 444


DrawArc .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 445

DrawArcAlignment .................................................................................................................................................................................. 447

DrawArcIf ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 449

DrawClipClear.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 451

DrawClipPath .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 452

Page 12 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
DrawClipRectangle .................................................................................................................................................................................. 453

DrawCreateColor / DrawCreateColour ................................................................................................................................................... 454

DrawCreateDrawing ................................................................................................................................................................................ 458

DrawCreatePath ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 459

DrawCreateTransform ............................................................................................................................................................................ 462

DrawCurve .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 464

DrawDestroyDrawing .............................................................................................................................................................................. 466

DrawDestroyPath .................................................................................................................................................................................... 467

DrawDestroyTransform........................................................................................................................................................................... 468

DrawDimensionAlignment ...................................................................................................................................................................... 470

DrawDimensionLine ................................................................................................................................................................................ 472

DrawDimensionLineCap .......................................................................................................................................................................... 474

DrawDimensionLineCapSize .................................................................................................................................................................... 476

DrawDimensionLineIf .............................................................................................................................................................................. 478

DrawDimensionStringAlignment ............................................................................................................................................................. 480

DrawDimensionStringFit ......................................................................................................................................................................... 482

DrawDimensionStringFormat .................................................................................................................................................................. 484

DrawDimensionStringFormatVar ............................................................................................................................................................ 486

DrawDimensionStringOrientation ........................................................................................................................................................... 488

DrawDimensionStringRotate................................................................................................................................................................... 490

DrawEllipse.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 491

DrawEllipseAlignment ............................................................................................................................................................................. 492

DrawEllipseIf ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 495

DrawFillColor / DrawFillColour ................................................................................................................................................................ 497

DrawFillColourBackground / DrawFillColorBackground .......................................................................................................................... 499

DrawFillColor / DrawFillColour ................................................................................................................................................................ 501

DrawFillColourBackground / DrawFillColorBackground .......................................................................................................................... 503

DrawFillEllipse ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 505

DrawFillEllipseIf ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 506

DrawFillMode .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 508

DrawFillOutline ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 510

DrawFillPath ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 512

DrawFillPathIf .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 514

DrawFillPattern ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 516

DrawFillPatternOrigin ............................................................................................................................................................................. 518

DrawFillPolygon ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 520

DrawFillPolygonIf .................................................................................................................................................................................... 521

DrawFillPolygonIf .................................................................................................................................................................................... 522

Page 13 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
DrawFillRectangle ................................................................................................................................................................................... 523

DrawFillRectangleIf ................................................................................................................................................................................. 524

DrawFillStyle ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 525

DrawFont ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 528

DrawFontColor / DrawFontColour .......................................................................................................................................................... 530

DrawFontColor / DrawFontColour .......................................................................................................................................................... 532

DrawGetActiveDrawing ........................................................................................................................................................................... 534

DrawGridIf ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 536

DrawLabel ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 538

DrawLabelIf ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 540

DrawLabelLineCap................................................................................................................................................................................... 542

DrawLabelStringOrientation ................................................................................................................................................................... 544

DrawLine ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 547

DrawLineCap ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 549

DrawLineCapAlignment........................................................................................................................................................................... 551

DrawLineCapSize ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 553

DrawLabelLineCapSize ............................................................................................................................................................................ 554

DrawLineColor / DrawLineColour............................................................................................................................................................ 556

colour Color value created using DrawCreateColor. ........................................................................................................................ 556

Return Value ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 556

Remarks .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 556

DrawLineColor / DrawLineColour............................................................................................................................................................ 558

colour Color value created using DrawCreateColor. ........................................................................................................................ 558

Return Value ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 558

Remarks .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 558

DrawLineIf ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 560

DrawLineStyle ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 561

DrawLineWidth ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 563

DrawMeasureStringHeight ...................................................................................................................................................................... 565

DrawMeasureStringWidth ...................................................................................................................................................................... 566

DrawMove............................................................................................................................................................................................... 567

DrawPath ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 569

DrawPathIf .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 571

DrawPathStartFigure ............................................................................................................................................................................... 573

DrawPolygon ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 574

DrawRectangle ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 575

DrawRectangleIf ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 577

DrawSaveCalcItem .................................................................................................................................................................................. 578

Page 14 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
DrawSaveEMF ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 579

DrawSetActiveDrawing ........................................................................................................................................................................... 580

DrawSetActivePath ................................................................................................................................................................................. 581

DrawString .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 583

DrawStringAlignment .............................................................................................................................................................................. 585

DrawStringIf ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 587

DrawStringOrientation ............................................................................................................................................................................ 588

Example which ensures when a rotation transformation is used to replicate a shape the text remains horizontal .............................. 589

DrawTransformRotate ............................................................................................................................................................................ 590

DrawTransformScale ............................................................................................................................................................................... 592

DrawTransformTranslate ........................................................................................................................................................................ 593

Engineering functions............................................................................................................................................ 595


Classify_I_5950:2000 .............................................................................................................................................................................. 596

Classify_C_5950:2000 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 597

Classify_HR_5950:2000 ........................................................................................................................................................................... 598

Classify_A_5950:2000 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 599

Classify_T_5950:2000 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 600

Classify_HC_5950:2000 ........................................................................................................................................................................... 601

Py_5950:2000 ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 602

US_5950:2000 ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 603

Pbs_5950:2000........................................................................................................................................................................................ 604

Pbg_5950:2000 ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 605

Pw_5950:2000 ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 606

Classify_5950 .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 607

Classify_5950 .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 608

Classify_5950 .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 609

Classify_5950 .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 610

Classify_5950 .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 611

Classify_5950 .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 612

Py_5950 .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 613

Us_5950 .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 614

Pbs_5950 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 615

Pbg_5950 ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 616

Pw_5950 ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 617

Classify_EC3 ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 618

Classify_EC3 ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 619

Classify_EC3 ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 620

Page 15 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
Fy_EC3 ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 621

Ec_5400 ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 622

Vtmin_5400............................................................................................................................................................................................. 623

Sigmay_5400:2006 .................................................................................................................................................................................. 624

Taulimit_5400:2006 ................................................................................................................................................................................ 625

I_finplate ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 626

F_NDS_Cfb .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 627

F_NDS_CFc .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 628

F_NDS_Cft ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 629

F_NDS_CFu .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 630

F_NDS_CL ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 631

F_NDS_CP ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 632

F_NDS_CV ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 633

F_NDS_RB ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 634

Import/Export........................................................................................................................................................ 635
SaveSectionVarsCalcItem ........................................................................................................................................................................ 636

SaveSectionVarsTextFile ......................................................................................................................................................................... 637

SaveVerifySectionVarsCalcItem .............................................................................................................................................................. 638

SelectFile ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 639

Locale functions..................................................................................................................................................... 640


GetLocale ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 641

Log ......................................................................................................................................................................... 642


LogText .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 643

Logic functions....................................................................................................................................................... 644


And .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 645

Equal/_Eq ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 646

EqualsOneOf ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 647

GreaterOrEqual/_Ge ............................................................................................................................................................................... 648

GreaterThan/_Gt ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 649

If .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 650

IfElseIf...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 651

LessOrEqual/_Ge ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 652

LessThan/_Lt ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 653

Not .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 654

Or ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 655

Select ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 656

Message................................................................................................................................................................. 657

Page 16 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
Message .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 658

WaitMessage .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 659

Miscellaneous........................................................................................................................................................ 660
ClearCalcItemUsage ................................................................................................................................................................................ 661

GetCountry .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 662

GetLanguage ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 663

GetTeddsAppName ................................................................................................................................................................................. 664

GetTimer ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 665

LogCalcItemUsage ................................................................................................................................................................................... 666

Pause ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 667

ProgressText............................................................................................................................................................................................ 668

ResetTimer .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 669

SubCall .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 670

ToHex ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 671

Section property functions .................................................................................................................................... 672


SectionAddAngle ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 673

SectionAddBoxSection ............................................................................................................................................................................ 675

SectionAddChannelSection ..................................................................................................................................................................... 677

SectionAddCircle ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 679

SectionAddCircularSection ...................................................................................................................................................................... 681

SectionAddHoleCircle .............................................................................................................................................................................. 683

SectionAddHoleRectangle ....................................................................................................................................................................... 685

SectionAddDoubleAngle ......................................................................................................................................................................... 687

SectionAddISection ................................................................................................................................................................................. 689

SectionAddRectangle .............................................................................................................................................................................. 691

SectionAddTee ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 693

SectionAddTriangle ................................................................................................................................................................................. 695

SectionCreate .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 697

SectionDestroy ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 698

SectionGetAngleOfRotation .................................................................................................................................................................... 699

SectionGetArea ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 700

SectionGetCombinedCentroidX .............................................................................................................................................................. 701

SectionGetCombinedCentroidY .............................................................................................................................................................. 702

SectionGetElasticModulusXX .................................................................................................................................................................. 703

SectionGetElasticModulusYY................................................................................................................................................................... 704

SectionGetEqualAreaAxisX ...................................................................................................................................................................... 705

SectionGetEqualAreaAxisY ...................................................................................................................................................................... 706

Page 17 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
SectionGetMajorRadiusOfGyration......................................................................................................................................................... 707

SectionGetMajorSecondMoment ........................................................................................................................................................... 708

SectionGetMinorRadiusOfGyration ........................................................................................................................................................ 709

SectionGetMinorSecondMoment ........................................................................................................................................................... 710

SectionGetPlasticModulusXX .................................................................................................................................................................. 711

SectionGetPlasticModulusYY .................................................................................................................................................................. 712

SectionGetRadiusOfGyrationXX .............................................................................................................................................................. 713

SectionGetRadiusOfGyrationYY .............................................................................................................................................................. 714

SectionGetSecondMomentXX ................................................................................................................................................................. 715

SectionGetSecondMomentYY ................................................................................................................................................................. 716

SectionGetTotalMass .............................................................................................................................................................................. 717

SectionSetShapeAlignment ..................................................................................................................................................................... 718

Settings .................................................................................................................................................................. 721


GetBendingMomentFace ........................................................................................................................................................................ 722

GetDebug ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 723

GetSketchAlignment ............................................................................................................................................................................... 724

GetSketchScaleHeight ............................................................................................................................................................................. 725

GetSketchScaleWidth .............................................................................................................................................................................. 726

GetTolerance ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 727

ListAddIns ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 728

ListFields .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 729

ListFunctions ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 730

MinTolerance .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 731

SetDebug ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 732

SetDebugTrace ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 733

SetDecimalSymbol .................................................................................................................................................................................. 735

SetDimAnal.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 736

SetErrorMode.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 737

SetErrorOnUndefinedVar ........................................................................................................................................................................ 738

SetFormats .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 739

SetListSeparator ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 740

SetShowDataGraphs ............................................................................................................................................................................... 741

SetShowDataLists .................................................................................................................................................................................... 742

SetShowDataTables................................................................................................................................................................................. 743

SetSketchAlignment ................................................................................................................................................................................ 744

SetSketchScale ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 745

SetTolerance ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 746

Page 18 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

String functions ..................................................................................................................................................... 747


Str ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 748

StrCompare ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 749

StrDecode................................................................................................................................................................................................ 750

StrEncode ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 751

StrEnd ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 752

StrEndsWith ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 753

StrFirstIndexOf ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 754

StrFormat ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 755

StrFromChar ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 758

StrIndexOf ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 759

String ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 760

StrInsert .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 761

StrLastIndexOf ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 762

StrLength ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 763

StrPadLeft................................................................................................................................................................................................ 764

StrPadRight ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 765

StrRemove ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 766

StrReplace ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 767

StrStart .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 768

StrStartsWith ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 769

StrSubstring ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 770

StrToChar ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 771

StrToLower .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 772

StrToUpper .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 773

StrTrim .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 774

StrTrimEnd .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 775

StrTrimStart ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 776

String list functions ................................................................................................................................................ 777


StringList ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 778

StringListRange........................................................................................................................................................................................ 779

StrList ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 780

StrListAdd ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 781

StrListCount ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 782

StrListFind ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 783

StrListGet................................................................................................................................................................................................. 784

StrListInsert ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 785

Page 19 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
StrListRange ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 786

StrListRemove ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 787

StrListRemoveEmpty ............................................................................................................................................................................... 788

StrListReplace .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 789

StrListSort ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 790

StrListToString ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 792

StrListTrimItems ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 793

StrListWrapItems .................................................................................................................................................................................... 794

Testing functions ................................................................................................................................................... 795


GetVerifyFailedCount .............................................................................................................................................................................. 796

GetVerifyPassedCount ............................................................................................................................................................................ 797

GetVerifyTotalCount ............................................................................................................................................................................... 798

ResetVerifyCounters ............................................................................................................................................................................... 799

Verify ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 800

VerifyEqual .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 801

Unit functions ........................................................................................................................................................ 802


AddUnit ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 803

GetBaseUnits........................................................................................................................................................................................... 804

GetUnit .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 805

ListAllUnits .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 806

RemoveUnit ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 807

ShowDims ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 808

User Interface ........................................................................................................................................................ 809


CalcWindow ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 810

VariablesWindow .................................................................................................................................................................................... 811

Variable functions ................................................................................................................................................. 812


ClearVarModified .................................................................................................................................................................................... 813

CopyVar ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 814

DeleteVarsInAllSections .......................................................................................................................................................................... 816

DeleteVarsInSectionExcept ..................................................................................................................................................................... 818

DeleteVarsInSection ................................................................................................................................................................................ 820

GetDocumentVar .................................................................................................................................................................................... 822

GetExpr ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 824

GetSectionVar ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 825

GetVar ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 827

GetVarAttributes ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 829

Increment ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 831

Page 20 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
InitializeVar ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 833

InitializeVars ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 835

IsValidVarName ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 837

ListVarsInSection ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 838

PromoteVar ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 839

RenameVar.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 840

SaveSectionVarsCalcItem ........................................................................................................................................................................ 843

SaveSectionVarsTextFile ......................................................................................................................................................................... 844

SetDocumentVar ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 845

SetSectionVar .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 846

SetVar ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 848

SetVarAttributes ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 850

SetVarIf ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 852

VarExists .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 854

VarModified ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 855

WatchFunction ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 856

WatchVar ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 858

Version functions .................................................................................................................................................. 860


GetTeddsVersion ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 861

GetTeddsSPVersion ................................................................................................................................................................................. 862

GetExcelVersion ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 863

VersionCompare ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 864

Tedds fields ............................................................................................................................................... 865


Calculating ............................................................................................................................................................. 866
EvalCalcItem ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 867

EvalScriptCalcItem ................................................................................................................................................................................... 868

EvalMetaFileCalcItem.............................................................................................................................................................................. 869

EvalRTFCalcItem ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 870

EvalInterfaceCalcItem ............................................................................................................................................................................. 871

Data tools .............................................................................................................................................................. 872


DataGraph ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 873

DataList ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 874

DataTable ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 875

Date and time ........................................................................................................................................................ 877


Time ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 878

DateTime ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 882

Drawing ................................................................................................................................................................. 885


Page 21 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
ShowDrawing .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 886

ShowDrawings......................................................................................................................................................................................... 888

Excel....................................................................................................................................................................... 890
Excel_Link ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 891

Input ...................................................................................................................................................................... 893


Input ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 894

Log ......................................................................................................................................................................... 895


LogText .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 896

Message................................................................................................................................................................. 897
Message .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 898

Miscellaneous........................................................................................................................................................ 899
RunMacro................................................................................................................................................................................................ 900

Output ................................................................................................................................................................... 901


Output ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 902

Show ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 903

Page 22 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Math functions

Page 23 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

General Functions

Page 24 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference


Returns a positive square root.

Syntax
( number )

Parameters
number is the number for which you want the square root

Remarks
If number is negative  throws an error.

Examples
sqrt(16) = 4.000
sqrt(-9) = ?<Error: square root of a negative number>
sqrt(abs(-25)) = 5.000

Page 25 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Abs
Returns the absolute value of a number. The absolute value of a number if the value without its sign.

Syntax
Abs( number )

Parameters
number the number for which you want the absolute value.

Examples
abs(-4) = 4.000
abs(9) = 9.000

Page 26 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Average
Returns the average (arithmetic mean) of a set of values.

Syntax
Average( number1, number[n], …)

Parameters
number1, number[n] are 1 to n numbers for which you want to return the average.

Examples
average( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 ) = 3.000
average( 12, 6, 2, 19 ) = 9.750

Page 27 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Ceiling
Returns a value rounded up to the specified multiple of significance.

Syntax
Ceiling( number, significance )

Parameters
number is the numeric value you want to round.

significance is the multiple to which you want to round

Examples
ceiling(pi, 1) = 4.000
ceiling(pi, 0.5) = 3.500
ceiling(pi, 0.01) = 3.150
ceiling(1.234 m, 1 cm) = 1.240 m

Page 28 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Degrees
Returns degrees, minutes and seconds in decimal degrees.

Syntax
Degrees( degrees, minutes, seconds )

Parameters
degrees number of degrees.

minutes number of minutes.

seconds number of seconds.

Examples
degrees( 360, 0, 0 ) = 360.000
degrees( 30, 10, 5 ) = 30.168

Page 29 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Extremum
Returns the number furthest away from zero in a set of values.

Syntax
Extremum( number1, number[n], …)

Parameters
number1, number[n] are 1 to n numbers for which you want to find the extremum.

Examples
extremum( -1, 90, -32, 8 ) = 90.000
extremum( -100, 56, -3 ) = -100.000

Page 30 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Exp
Returns the exponential value of a number. That is, the result is e to the power x, where e is the base of the natural
logarithm.

Syntax
Exp( number )

Parameters
number is the exponent applied to the bas e.

Examples
exp(1) = 2.718
exp(2) = 7.389

Page 31 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Floor
Returns a value rounded down to the specified multiple of significance.

Syntax
Floor( number, significance )

Parameters
number is the numeric value you want to round.

significance is the multiple to which you want to round

Examples
floor(pi, 1) = 3.000
floor(pi, 0.5) = 3.000
floor(pi, 0.01) = 3.140
floor(1.234m, 1cm) = 1.230 m

Page 32 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Int
Returns the integer part of a number.

Syntax
Int( number, units )

Parameters
number is the number for which you want the integer part.

units is the optional name of the units you want to be used for the calculation of the integer part.

Examples
int( 10.6 ) = 10.000
int( 1.1 ) = 1.000
int( -3.9 ) = -3.000
int( 1006mm, “m” ) = 1.000 m
int( 106mm, “in” ) = 4.000 in
int( -3.9in, “mm” ) = -99.000 mm

Page 33 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

InterpLinear
For the specified value of x and a list of x,y pairs return the interpolated value for y. x values must be ordered from
lowest to highest.

Syntax
InterpLinear( x, x1, y1, x2, y2, …xn, yn… )

Parameters
x is the value of x for which the interpolated y value should be returned.

x1 is the x value of the first pair of coordinates.

y1 is the y value of the first pair of coordinates.

x2 is the x value of the second pair of coordinates.

y2 is the y value of the second pair of coordinates.

xn is the x value of the nth pair of coordinates.

yn is the y value of the nth pair of coordinates.

Return Value
Returns the linear interpolation of y. If x < x1 then y1 is returned. If x > xn then yn is returned

Example
InterpLinear (5, 0, 0, 20, 20, 40, 20, 50, 70) = 5.000
InterpLinear (20, 0, 0, 20, 20, 40, 20, 50, 70) = 20.000
InterpLinear (40, 0, 0, 20, 20, 40, 20, 50, 70) = 20.000
InterpLinear (45, 0, 0, 20, 20, 40, 20, 50, 70) = 45.000
InterpLinear (48, 0, 0, 20, 20, 40, 20, 50, 70) = 60.000
InterpLinear (50, 0, 0, 20, 20, 40, 20, 50, 70) = 70.000

Page 34 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Ln
Returns the natural logarithm of a number.

Syntax
Ln( number )

Parameters
number is the positive number for which you want the natural logarithm

Remarks
Ln is the inverse of the Exp function.

Examples
ln( 2.718 ) = 1.000
ln( 7.389 ) = 2.000

Page 35 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Log
Returns the logarithm of a number to base 10.

Syntax
Log( number )

Parameters
number is the positive number for which you want the logarithm.

Examples
log(10) = 1.000
log(100) = 2.000

Page 36 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Max
Returns the largest number in a set of values.

Syntax
Max( number1, number[n], …)

Parameters
number1, number[n] are 1 to n numbers for which you want to find the maximum.

Examples
max( 1, 90, 32, 8 ) = 90.000
max( -100, -56, -3 ) = -3.000

Page 37 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Median
Returns the median of a set of values. The median is the number in the middle of the set of values.

Syntax
Median( number1, number[n], …)

Parameters
number1, number[n] are 1 to n numbers for which you want to return the median.

Examples
median( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 ) = 3.000
median( 12, 6, 2, 19 ) = 4.000

Page 38 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Min
Returns the smallest number in a set of values.

Syntax
Min( number1, number[n], …)

Parameters
number1, number[n] are 1 to n numbers for which you want to find the minimum.

Examples
min( 1, 90, 32, 8 ) = 1.000
min( -100, -56, -3 ) = -100.000

Page 39 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Mod
Returns the remainder after number is divided by divisor.

Syntax
Mod( number, divisor )

Parameters
number is the number for which you want to find the remainder.

divisor is the number by which you want to divide the number.

Examples
mod( 7, 2 ) = 1.000
mod( 16.5, 3 ) = 1.500
mod( -12, 5 ) = -2.000

Page 40 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Quotient
Returns the integer part of a division. Use this function when you want to discard the remainder of a division.

Syntax
Quotient( numerator, denominator )

Parameters
numerator is the dividend.

denominator is the divisor.

Examples
quotient( 7, 2 ) = 3.000
quotient( 16.5, 3 ) = 5.000
quotient( -12, 5 ) = -2.000

Page 41 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Rand
Returns a pseudorandom integer number greater than or equal to 0 and less than or equal to 1000.

Syntax
Rand()

Examples
rand()=648.000

Page 42 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Round
Returns a number rounded to the specified number of digits.

Syntax
Round( number, numDigits, units )

Parameters
number is the number you want to round

numDigits is the number of digits to round to.

units is the optional units used when rounding.

Remarks
If numDigits is greater than zero, then number is rounded to the specified number of decimal places.

If numDigits is zero, then number is rounded to the nearest integer.

if numDigits is less than zero, then number is rounded to the left of the decimal point

Examples
round( 2.13, 1 ) = 2.100
round( 3.186, 1 ) = 3.200
round( -1.798, 1 ) = -1.800
round( 21.66, 0 ) = 22.000
round( 21.8, -1 ) = 20.000
round( 2.13m, 1, “m” ) = 2.100m
round( 2137mm, 1, “in” ) = 84.100in
round( 2.1378m, 0, “mm” ) = 2138.000mm
round( -1.798kN/m, 1, “kN/m” ) = -1.800kN/m
round( 21.66m, 0, “m” ) = 22.000m
round( 21.8m, -1, “m” ) = 20.000m

Page 43 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

RoundUp
Returns a number rounded up to the specified number of digits.

Syntax
RoundUp( number, numDigits, units )

Parameters
number is the number you want to round

numDigits is the number of digits to round to.

units is the optional units used when rounding.

Remarks
RoundUp behaves like Round, expect that it always rounds a number up.

If numDigits is greater than zero, then number is rounded up to the specified number of decimal places.

If numDigits is zero, then number is rounded up to the nearest integer.

if numDigits is less than zero, then number is rounded up to the left of the decimal point

Examples
roundup( 2.13, 1 ) = 2.200
roundup( 3.186, 1 ) = 3.200
roundup( -1.798, 1 ) = -1.800
roundup( 21.66, 0 ) = 22.000
roundup( 21.8, -1 ) = 30.000
roundup( 2.13m, 1, "m" ) = 2.200m
roundup( 2137mm, 1, "in" ) = 84.200in
roundup( 2.1378m, 0, "mm" ) = 2138.000mm
roundup( -1.798kN/m, 1, "kN/m" ) = -1.800kN/m
roundup( 21.66m, 0, "m" ) = 22.000m
roundup( 21.8m, -1, "m" ) = 30.000m

Page 44 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

RoundDown
Returns a number rounded down to the specified number of digits.

Syntax
RoundDown( number, numDigits, units )

Parameters
number is the number you want to round

numDigits is the number of digits to round to.

units is the optional units used when rounding.

Remarks
RoundDown behaves like Round, expect that it always rounds a number down.

If numDigits is greater than zero, then number is rounded down to the specified number of decimal places.

If numDigits is zero, then number is rounded down to the nearest integer.

if numDigits is less than zero, then number is rounded down to the left of the decimal point

Examples
rounddown( 2.13, 1 ) = 2.100
rounddown( 3.186, 1 ) = 3.100
rounddown( -1.798, 1 ) = -1.700
rounddown( 21.66, 0 ) = 21.000
rounddown( 21.8, -1 ) = 20.000
rounddown( 2.13m, 1, "m" ) = 2.100m
rounddown( 2137mm, 1, "in" ) = 84.100in
rounddown( 2.1378m, 0, "mm" ) = 2137.000mm
rounddown( -1.798kN/m, 1, "kN/m" ) = -1.700kN/m
rounddown( 21.66m, 0, "m" ) = 21.000m
rounddown( 21.8m, -1, "m" ) = 20.000m

Page 45 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Sqrt
Returns a positive square root.

Syntax
Sqrt( number )

Parameters
number is the number for which you want the square root

Remarks
If number is negative Sqrt throws an error.

Examples
sqrt(16) = 4.000
sqrt(-9) = ?<Error: square root of a negative number>
sqrt(abs(-25)) = 5.000

Page 46 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Sum
Returns the sum of a set of values.

Syntax
Sum( number1, number[n], …)

Parameters
number1, number[n] are 1 to n numbers for which you want to return the sum.

Examples
sum( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 ) = 15.000
sum( 12, -2, 8, -4 ) = 14.000

Page 47 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

xy
Returns the result of x raised to the power y

Parameters
x is the base number.

y is the exponent to which the base number is raised.

Examples
52 = 25.000
33 = 27.000

Page 48 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Trignometric Functions

Page 49 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Sin
Returns the sine of the given angle.

Syntax
Sin( number )

Parameters
number is the angle in degrees for which you want the sine.

Return Value
Sine in degrees.

Examples
sin(1)=0.017
sin(45) = 0.707
sin(90)=1.000

Page 50 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Cos
Returns the cosine of the given angle.

Syntax
Cos( number )

Parameters
number is the angle in degrees for which you want the cosine.

Return Value
Cosine in degrees.

Examples
cos(1)=1.000
cos(45) = 0.707
cos(90)=0.000

Page 51 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Tan
Returns the tangent of the given angle.

Syntax
Tan( number )

Parameters
number is the angle in degrees for which you want the tangent.

Return Value
Tangent in degrees.

Examples
tan(1)=0.017
tan(45) = 1.000
tan(60)=1.732

Page 52 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Cosec
Returns the cosecant of the given angle.

Syntax
Cosec( number )

Parameters
number is the angle in degrees for which you want the cosecant.

Return Value
Cosecant in degrees.

Examples
cosec(1)=57.299
cosec(45) = 1.414
cosec(90)=1.000

Page 53 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Sec
Returns the secant of the given angle.

Syntax
Sec( number )

Parameters
number is the angle in degrees for which you want the secant.

Return Value
Secant in degrees.

Examples
sec(1)=1.000
sec(45) = 1.414
sec(60)=2.000

Page 54 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Cot
Returns the cotangent of the given angle.

Syntax
Cot( number )

Parameters
number is the angle in degrees for which you want the cotangent.

Return Value
Cotangent in degrees.

Examples
cot(1)=57.290
cot(45) = 1.000
cot(60)=0.577

Page 55 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Asin
Returns the inverse sine of a number.

Syntax
Asin( number )

Parameters
number is the number for which you want the inverse sine.

Return Value
Inverse sine in degrees.

Examples
asin(1)=90.000
asin(0.5) = 30.000

Page 56 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Acos
Returns the inverse cosine of a number.

Syntax
Acos( number )

Parameters
number is the number for which you want the inverse cosine.

Return Value
Inverse cosine in degrees.

Examples
acos(1)=0.000
acos(0.5) = 60.000

Page 57 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Atan
Returns the inverse tangent of a number.

Syntax
Atan( number )

Parameters
number is the number for which you want the inverse tangent.

Return Value
Inverse tangent in degrees.

Examples
atan(1)=45.000
atan(0.5) = 26.565

Page 58 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Sinh
Returns the hyperbolic sine of the given angle.

Syntax
Sinh( number )

Parameters
number is the angle in degrees for which you want the hyperbolic sine.

Return Value
Hyperbolic sine in degrees.

Examples
sinh(1)=1.175
sinh(0) = 0.000
sinh(0.5) = 0.521

Page 59 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Cosh
Returns the hyperbolic cosine of the given angle.

Syntax
Cosh( number )

Parameters
number is the angle in degrees for which you want the hyperbolic cosine.

Return Value
Hyperbolic cosine in degrees.

Examples
cosh(1)=1.543
cosh(0) = 1.000
cosh(0.5) = 1.128

Page 60 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Tanh
Returns the hyperbolic tangent of the given angle.

Syntax
Tanh( number )

Parameters
number is the angle in degrees for which you want the hyperbolic tangent.

Return Value
Hyperbolic tangent in degrees.

Examples
tanh(1)=0.762
tanh(0) = 0.000
tanh(0.5) = 0.462

Page 61 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Asinh
Returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of a number.

Syntax
Asinh( number )

Parameters
number is the number for which you want the inverse hyperbolic sine.

Return Value
Inverse hyperbolic sine in degrees.

Examples
asinh(1)=0.881
asinh(90) = 0.000
asinh(45) = 4.500

Page 62 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Acosh
Returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a number.

Syntax
Acosh( number )

Parameters
number is the number for which you want the inverse hyperbolic cosine.

Return Value
Inverse hyperbolic cosine in degrees.

Examples
acosh(1)=0.000
acosh(90) = 5.193
acosh(45) = 4.500

Page 63 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Atanh
Returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number.

Syntax
Atanh( number )

Parameters
number is the number for which you want the inverse hyperbolic tangent.

Return Value
Inverse hyperbolic tangent in degrees.

Examples
atanh(0) = 0.000
atanh(0.5) = 0.549

Page 64 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Tedds functions

Page 65 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

2D analysis functions

Page 66 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Introduction
The solver is a 2D (XZ plane) linear static analytical solver with shear deformation checking capability.

To use the solver you construct a geometric model from supported and unsupported nodes in 2D space connected by
linear 1D elements that have material and section properties. To simplify loading and results for design purposes
elements can optionally be grouped into spans which are grouped to form design members.

Loading the solver model is achieved by defining load cases that contain node, element and member (point, distributed
and selfweight) loads and moments. Load combinations can also be defined.

More advanced models can be created by adding springs to nodes, using custom coordinate systems, creating elements
from rotated sections, applying element end releases and applying thermal loads.

Once the model has been analysed, it can be queried for base reactions, nodal deflections and reactions. Elements and
members can be queried for axial and shear forces, moments and deflections. By default when results are requested
they are retrieved for all elements in the model and all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations,
otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of the model you can select specific elements, spans or members.
You can also select specific load cases or load combinations.

Models can be saved and re-loaded using the Import/Export functions. For example the 2D Analysis calculation saves
models to a variable named "_analysisModel". Therefore if you create a model using the solver functions and save it
using the expression _analysisModel = SolvGetXml(), then you can view and modify that model using the 2D analysis
calculation.

Example
Geometry
Models are created using SolvCreateSolver
SolvCreateSolver( ) = 1.000

Define the material(s) and section(s) that will be used in the model
SolvAddMaterial( "Steel", 210 kN/mm2, 7850 kg/m3, 81 kN/mm2 ) = 1.000
SolvAddSection( "UC 203x203x60", 76.37307936 cm2, 6124.513488 cm4,
2064.59815 cm4,
52.60248 cm2, 19.7024 cm2 ) = 1.000
SolvAddSection( "UC 203x203x46", 58.73147936 cm2, 4567.816776 cm4,
1548.2057 cm4,
40.3128 cm2, 14.6304 cm2) = 2.000
SolvAddSection( "UB 406x178x60", 76.51867936 cm2, 21596.26278 cm4,
1203.064151 cm4,
40.98816 cm2, 32.1056 cm2 ) = 3.000
SolvAddSection( "UB 305x127x37", 47.18053864 cm2, 7170.682187 cm4,
336.1743038 cm4,
23.76684 cm2, 21.6124 cm2) = 4.000
SolvAddSection( "CHS 168.3x6.3", 32.06309462 cm2, 1053.420549 cm4,
1053.420549 cm4,
16.03154731 cm2, 16.03154731 cm2 ) = 5.000

Page 67 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Define the nodes


SolvSetDefaultNodeFreedom( "Pinned" ) = 1.000
SolvAddNodes( 0 m, 0 m,
3.5 m, 0 m ) = 1.000
SolvSetDefaultNodeFreedom( "Free" ) = 1.000
SolvAddNodes( 0 m, 3.5 m, 3.5 m, 3.5 m,
0 m, 6.5 m, 3.5 m, 6.5 m,
0 m, 9.5 m, 3.5 m, 9.5 m,
0 m, 12.5 m, 3.5 m, 12.5 m ) = 3.000

Define the analysis elements that connect the nodes


SolvSetDefaultElementSection( "UC 203x203x60" ) = 1.000
SolvAddElements( 1, 3,
3, 5,
2, 4,
4, 6 ) = 1.000
SolvSetDefaultElementSection( "UC 203x203x46" ) = 1.000
SolvAddElements( 5, 7,
7, 9,
6, 8,
8, 10 ) = 5.000
SolvSetDefaultElementSection( "UB 406x178x60" ) = 1.000
SolvAddElements( 3, 4,
5, 6,
7, 8 ) = 9.000
SolvAddElement( 9, 10, "UB 305x127x37" ) = 12.000
SolvSetDefaultElementSection( "CHS 168.3x6.3" ) = 1.000
SolvSetDefaultElementReleases( "Free", "Free", "Fixed" ) = 1.000
SolvAddElements( 2, 3,
3, 6,
6, 7,
7, 10 ) = 13.000

Define members to collate results and simplify subsequent design


calculations
SolvAddMember( "Lift 1 Left", True, True, 1, 2 ) = 1.000
SolvAddMember( "Lift 1 Right", True, True, 3, 4 ) = 2.000
SolvAddMember( "Lift 2 Left", True, True, 5, 6 ) = 3.000
SolvAddMember( "Lift 2 Right", True, True, 7, 8 ) = 4.000

Loading
Roof
Dead wdr = 3.5 kN/m2
Imposed wir = 1.0 kN/m2

Page 68 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Floor
Dead wdf = 3.5 kN/m2
Imposed wif = 6.0 kN/m2

NHF = 0.005  0.5  28 m  49 m

Define dead load case and loads


SolvAddLoadCase( "Dead NHF" ) = 1.000
SolvAddNodeLoad( 3, "Dead NHF", NHF  wdf, 0 kN ) = 1.000
SolvAddNodeLoad( 5, "Dead NHF", NHF  wdf, 0 kN ) = 1.000
SolvAddNodeLoad( 7, "Dead NHF", NHF  wdf, 0 kN ) = 1.000
SolvAddNodeLoad( 9, "Dead NHF", NHF  wdr, 0 kN ) = 1.000

Define imposed load case and loads


SolvAddLoadCase( "Imposed NHF" ) = 2.000
SolvAddNodeLoad( 3, "Imposed NHF", NHF  wif, 0 kN ) = 1.000
SolvAddNodeLoad( 5, "Imposed NHF", NHF  wif, 0 kN ) = 1.000
SolvAddNodeLoad( 7, "Imposed NHF", NHF  wif, 0 kN ) = 1.000
SolvAddNodeLoad( 9, "Imposed NHF", NHF  wir, 0 kN ) = 1.000

Define additional load case which in this examlpe contains no loads


SolvAddLoadCase( "Wind" ) = 3.000

Define combination for dead and imposed


SolvAddCombination( "Dead & Imposed", "None" ) = 1.000
SolvAddCombinationLoadCase( 1, "Dead NHF", 1.4 ) = 1.000
SolvAddCombinationLoadCase( 1, "Imposed NHF", 1.6 ) = 1.000

Define combination for dead and wind


SolvAddCombination( "Dead & Wind", "None" ) = 2.000
SolvAddCombinationLoadCase( 2, "Dead NHF", 1.0 ) = 1.000
SolvAddCombinationLoadCase( 2, "Wind", 1.4 ) = 1.000

Define combination for dead, imposed and wind


SolvAddCombination( "Dead & Imposed & Wind", "None" ) = 3.000
SolvAddCombinationLoadCase( 3, "Dead NHF", 1.2 ) = 1.000
SolvAddCombinationLoadCase( 3, "Imposed NHF", 1.2 ) = 1.000
SolvAddCombinationLoadCase( 3, "Wind", 1.2 ) = 1.000

Results
Once the model is complete you must analyse the model to obtain the
results

Page 69 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAnalyse( ) = 1.000

Create the expressions that when evaluated will obtain the results
for specific nodes
$1=Sqrt(SolvGetMaxHorizontalDeflection(3)2+SolvGetMaxVerticalDeflect
ion(3)2);$1=1
$2=Sqrt(SolvGetMaxHorizontalDeflection(5)2+SolvGetMaxVerticalDeflect
ion(5)2);$2=2-1
$3=Sqrt(SolvGetMaxHorizontalDeflection(7)2+SolvGetMaxVerticalDeflect
ion(7)2);$3=3-2
$roof=Sqrt(SolvGetMaxHorizontalDeflection(9)2+SolvGetMaxVerticalDefle
ction(9)2);$roof=roof-3
Select the first combination then output the results
SolvSelectCombinations( 1 ) = 1.000
1 = 3.354 mm 1 = 3.354 mm
2 = 6.067 mm 2 = 2.713 mm
3 = 8.386 mm 3 = 2.319 mm
roof = 10.388 mm roof = 2.002 mm

Select the second combination then output the results


SolvSelectCombinations( 2 ) = 1.000
1 = 0.966 mm 1 = 0.966 mm
2 = 1.795 mm 2 = 0.830 mm
3 = 2.575 mm 3 = 0.780 mm
roof = 3.320 mm roof = 0.745 mm

Select the third combination then output the results


SolvSelectCombinations( 3 ) = 1.000
1 = 2.660 mm 1 = 2.660 mm
2 = 4.819 mm 2 = 2.159 mm
3 = 6.676 mm 3 = 1.856 mm
roof = 8.289 mm roof = 1.614 mm

When finished destroy the solver model to free the computer


resources that Tedds is using
SolvDestroySolver() = 1.000

Page 70 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvCreateSolver
Creates a new solver model. A solver model must be created before any other solver functions can be used.

Syntax
SolvCreateSolver( areaLoading, units )

Parameters
areaLoading optional, True to use area loading, default is False
units optional “SI” or “US” units used in interfaces and drawings, if omitted defaults to Tedds base unit setting

Remarks
The area loading parameter is used to replicate a basic 3D model within the 2D solver by treating the model as having
unit length depth. Once a model has been created with area loading a few changes are made to the dimensions
expected/returned by certain solver functions to incorporate this per unit length change:

 SolvAddSection
Area parameter: (mm, in) this is now the thickness of the section (as it has unit length depth)

Inertia parameters: (cm3, in3) this is now the inertia per unit length

ShearArea parameters: (mm, in) this is now the shear area per unit length

 SolvAddSpringX/SolvAddSpringZ
Stiffner parameters: (kN/m2, kip/ft2) this is now the stiffner tension per unit length

 SolvAddRotationalSpring
Stiffner parameter: (kN/°, kip/°) this is now the stiffner tension per unit length

 All add load functions


Load parameters: are now the load per unit length

 All SolvGetMin/Max functions that return forces or moments


Return values: are now force or moment per unit length

Return Value
Numeric identifier that uniquely identifies the newly created solver model.

Page 71 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSetActiveSolver
Sets the currently active solver model.

Syntax
SolvSetActiveSolver( id )

Parameters
id unique identifier of the solver model to activate (as returned by SolvCreateSolver).

Remarks
If a solver model is deactivated (by setting another solver model as the active model) analysis will have to be repeated to
request results at custom locations, using SolvSelectResultsPosition.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 72 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetActiveSolver
Returns the Id of the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetActiveSolver()

Return Value
Unique Id of the active solver model or zero if a solver model does not exist.

Page 73 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetSolverCount
Returns the number of solver models that currently exist.

Syntax
SolvGetSolverCount()

Return Value
Total number of solver models that currently exist.

Page 74 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAnalyse/SolvAnalyze
Analyses the solver model so that the calculated results can be returned using the other functions in the solver function
library.

Syntax
SolvAnalyse/SolvAnalyze()

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 75 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddCoordinateSystem
Adds a new coordinate system to the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvAddCoordinateSystem( name, rotation )

SolvAddCoordinateSystem( name, originX, originZ, xAxisX, xAxisZ )

Parameters
name name of the coordinate system which must be unique
rotation angle of rotation () of the new coordinate systems X axis from the global x axis
originX x coordinate (m, ft) of the origin of the new coordinate system
originZ z coordinate (m, ft) of the origin of the new coordinate system
xAxisX x coordinate (m, ft) of a point on the new coordinate systems X axis
xAxisZ z coordinate (m, ft) of a point on the new coordinate systems X axis

Return Value
Unique numeric identifier of the created coordinate system; 0 if a coordinate system could not be created.

Materials
SolvAddMaterial( name, youngs, density, shear, thermal )

Page 76 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddMaterial
Adds a new material to the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvAddMaterial( name, youngs, density, shear, thermalCoefficient, source )

Parameters
name name of material which must be unique
youngs youngs modulus (kN/mm2, ksi)
density optional density (kg/m3, lbm/ft3), default is 0
shear optional shear modulus (kN/mm2, ksi) which is required to calculate shear deformation (The corresponding
element section must have a shear area value provided), default is 0 – no shear deformation check
thermalCoefficient optional thermal coefficient (C-1) required for uniform temperature loads, default is 0
source optional source reference data which specifies the source of the material properties, default is “”

Return Value
Unique numeric identifier of the created material; 0 if a material could not be created.

Remarks
In order that the solver can perform shear deformation checks on elements the material must have a shear modulus
provided and the section must have shear area provided.

SolvSetMaterial( name, youngs, density, shear, thermal, source )

Page 77 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSetMaterial
Sets the material of all the elements in the current selection in the active solver model. To use a material that already
exists all parameters must match those of the pre-existing material, otherwise a new material will be created. Any
materials that were referenced by the selected elements which are no longer referenced by any elements within the
model after the new material has been set will be removed from the model.

Syntax
SolvSetMaterial( name, youngs, density, shear, thermalCoefficient, source )

Parameters
name name of material which must be unique for a new material
youngs youngs modulus (kN/mm2, ksi)
density optional density (kg/m3, lbm/ft3), default is 0
shear optional shear modulus (kN/mm2, ksi) which is required to calculate shear deformation (The corresponding
element section must have a shear area value provided), default is 0 – no shear deformation check
thermalCoefficient optional thermal coefficient (C-1) required for uniform temperature loads
source optional source reference data which specifies the source of the material properties

Return Value
Unique numeric identifier of the material now in use; 0 if the function failed to assign a material because a material with
the specified name was already in use with different properties.

Remarks
In order that the solver can perform shear deformation checks on elements the material must have a shear modulus
provided and the section must have shear area provided.

Sections
SolvAddSection( name, area, majorInertia )

Page 78 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddSection
Adds a new section to the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvAddSection( name, area, majorInertia )

SolvAddSection( name, area, majorInertia, minorInertia, source )

SolvAddSection( name, area, majorInertia, shearAreaParallelMinor, source )

SolvAddSection( name, area, majorInertia, minorInertia, shearAreaParallelMajor, shearAreaParallelMinor, source )

Parameters
name name of the section which must be unique
area cross sectional area (mm2, in2)
majorInertia second moments of area (Major axis) (cm4, in4)
minorInertia optional Second moments of area (Minor axis) (cm4, in4) required for elements using rotated sections
shearAreaParallelMinor optional Effective shear area (mm2, in2) when loading parallel to the Minor axis. Corresponding section must
provide a shear modulus for a shear deformation check
shearAreaParallelMajor optional Effective shear area (mm2, in2) when loading parallel to the Major axis, required for elements using
rotated sections. Corresponding section must provide a shear modulus for a shear deformation check
source optional source reference data which specifies the source of the section properties

Return Value
Unique numeric identifier of the created section; 0 if a section could not be created.

Remarks
In order that the solver can perform shear deformation checks on elements the material must have a shear modulus
provided and the section must have shear area provided.

Elements can be created with rotated (90) sections using SolvAddElement. To do this the section must have been
created with additional values for the second moments of area (minor axis) and, if shear deformation checks are
required, the effective shear area when loading parallel to the major axis.

SolvSetSection( name, area, majorInertia )

Page 79 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSetSection
Sets the section of all the elements in the current selection in the active solver model. To use a section that already exists
all parameters must match those of the pre-existing section, otherwise a new section will be created. Any sections that
were referenced by the selected elements which are no longer referenced by any elements within the model after the
new section has been set will be removed from the model.

Syntax
SolvSetSection( name, area, majorInertia )

SolvSetSection( name, area, majorInertia, minorInertia, source )

SolvSetSection( name, area, majorInertia, shearAreaParallelMinor, source )

SolvSetSection( name, area, majorInertia, minorInertia, shearAreaParallelMajor, shearAreaParallelMinor, source )

Parameters
name name of the section which must be unique for a new section
area cross sectional area (mm2, in2)
majorInertia second moments of area (Major axis) (cm4, in4)
minorInertia optional Second moments of area (Minor axis) (cm4, in4) required for elements using rotated sections
shearAreaParallelMinor optional Effective shear area (mm2, in2) when loading parallel to the Minor axis. Corresponding section must
provide a shear modulus for a shear deformation check
shearAreaParallelMajor optional Effective shear area (mm2, in2) when loading parallel to the Major axis, required for elements using
rotated sections. Corresponding section must provide a shear modulus for a shear deformation check
source optional source reference data which specifies the source of the section properties

Return Value
Unique numeric identifier of the section now in use; 0 if the function failed to assign a section because a section with the
specified name was already in use with different properties.

Remarks
In order that the solver can perform shear deformation checks on elements the material must have a shear modulus
provided and the section must have shear area provided.

Elements can be created with rotated (90) sections using SolvAddElement. To do this the section must have been
created with additional values for the second moments of area (minor axis) and, if shear deformation checks are
required, the effective shear area when loading parallel to the major axis.

Nodes
SolvAddNode( x, z )
Page 80 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddNode
Adds a new node to the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvAddNode( x, z )

SolvAddNode( x, z, freedom )

SolvAddNode( x, z, coordinateSystem )

SolvAddNode( x, z, freedom, coordinateSystem )

SolvAddNode( x, z, freedomX, freedomZ, freedomRotational )

SolvAddNode( x, z, freedomX, freedomZ, freedomRotational, coordinateSystem )

Parameters
x x location of the node
z z location of the node
freedom optional freedom of the node
freedomX optional translational freedom in the x direction
freedomZ optional translational freedom in the z direction
freedomRotational optional rotational freedom
coordinateSystem optional name or index of a user defined coordinate system for the node. The default is none, (the global
coordinate system), but can be changed with the SolvSetDefaultNodeCoordSystem function

Remarks
The following table lists the possible values for freedom. The default freedom is pinned, but can be changed with the
SolvSetDefaultNodeFreedom function.

Name Description
“Fixed” Node cannot translate or rotate.
“Free” Node is free to translate and rotate.
“Pinned” Node cannot translate but can rotate.
“RollerPinX” Node can translate in x direction and
rotate.
“RollerPinZ” Node can translate in z direction and
rotate.

The following table lists the possible values for freedomX, freedomZ and freedomRotational.

Page 81 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Name Description
“Fixed” Node cannot translate or rotate.
“Free” Node is free to translate or rotate.

Return Value
Unique numeric identifier of the created node; 0 if a node could not be created.

SolvAddNodes( x1, z1, ... x[n], z[n] )

Page 82 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddNodes
Adds new nodes to the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvAddNodes( x1, z1, … x[n], z[n] )

SolvAddNodes( coordinates, units )

Parameters
x1 x location of the first node
z1 z location of the first node
coordinates comma separated list of the coordinates in x1, z1, x2, z2, … x[n], z[n] format
units optional string containing the unit of length in which the coordinates are specified

Remarks
Nodes will be added using the default node freedom and user coordinate system. These defaults can be changed using
the SolvSetDefaultNodeFreedom and SolvSetDefaultNodeCoordSystem functions.

Return Value
Unique numeric identifier of the first created node; 0 if nodes could not be created. The subsequent nodes will have
sequential identifiers.

SolvSetDefaultNodeFreedom( freedom )

Page 83 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSetDefaultNodeFreedom
Sets the default freedom for new nodes added to the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvSetDefaultNodeFreedom( freedom )

SolvSetDefaultNodeFreedom( freedomX, freedomZ, freedomRotational )

Parameters
freedom freedom for new nodes
freedomX translational freedom in the x direction for new nodes
freedomZ translational freedom in the z direction for new nodes
freedomRotational rotational freedom for new nodes

Remarks
The following table lists the possible values for freedom. The default freedom is initially pinned.

Name Description
“Fixed” Node cannot translate or rotate.
“Free” Node is free to translate and rotate.
“Pinned” Node cannot translate but can rotate.
“RollerPinX” Node can translate in x direction and
rotate.
“RollerPinZ” Node can translate in z direction and
rotate.
The following table lists the possible values for freedomX, freedomZ and freedomRotational.

Name Description
“Fixed” Node cannot translate or rotate.
“Free” Node is free to translate or rotate.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

SolvSetDefaultNodeCoordSystem( coordinateSystem )

Page 84 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSetDefaultNodeCoordSystem
Sets the default user coordinate system for new nodes added to the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvSetDefaultNodeCoordSystem( coordinateSystem )

Parameters
coordinateSystem name or index of a user defined coordinate system for new nodes. The default is initially none, (the global
coordinate system)

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

SolvSetNodeLabel( node, label )

Page 85 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSetNodeLabel
Sets a user defined label for the specified node in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvSetNodeLabel( node, label )

Parameters
node index of the node to label
label label to attach to the specified node, maximum of 4 characters

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

SolvAddSpringX( node, stiffner )

Page 86 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddSpringX
Adds a support spring to a node along the local x axis of the node. This function also ensures that the node is free to
move along its x axis so that the spring is effective.

Syntax
SolvAddSpringX( node, stiffner )

Parameters
node identifier or label of node to add a spring to
stiffner stiffner value (kN/m, kip/ft) of the spring

Return Value
Unique numeric identifier of the created spring; 0 if a spring could not be created.

SolvAddSpringZ( node, stiffner )

Page 87 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddSpringZ
Adds a support spring to a node along the local z axis of the node. This function also ensures that the node is free to
move along its z axis so that the spring is effective.

Syntax
SolvAddSpringZ( node, stiffner )

Parameters
node identifier or label of node to add a spring to
stiffner stiffner value (kN/m, kip/ft) of the spring

Return Value
Unique numeric identifier of the created spring; 0 if a spring could not be created.

SolvAddRotationalSpring( node, stiffner )

Page 88 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddRotationalSpring
Adds a rotational support spring to a node. This function also ensures that the node is free to rotate so that the spring is
effective.

Syntax
SolvAddRotationalSpring( node, stiffner )

Parameters
node identifier or label of node to add a spring to
stiffner stiffner value (kNm/°, kip_ft/°) of the spring

Return Value
Unique numeric identifier of the created spring; 0 if a spring could not be created.

Elements/spans/members
SolvAddElement( nodeStart, nodeEnd, section, material, rotated )

Page 89 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddElement
Adds a new 1D element to the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvAddElement( nodeStart, nodeEnd, section, material, rotated )

SolvAddElement( nodeStart, nodeEnd, section, material, rotated, momentReleaseStart, momentReleaseEnd, axialRelease


)

Parameters
nodeStart identifier of node at start of element
nodeEnd identifier of node at end of element
section optional name or identifier of element section. The default section is the first section added to the model but
can be changed using SolvSetDefaultElementSection
material optional name or identifier of element material. The default material is the first material added to the model
but can be changed using SolvSetDefaultElementMaterial
rotated optional value, True(1) or False(0), to specify whether the section used for this element should be rotated.
The default is an non-rotated section but can be changed using SolvSetDefaultElementRotation. If true the
section must have been defined with a second moments of area (Minor axis)
momentReleaseStart optional moment release of start of element
momentReleaseEnd optional moment release of end of element
axialRelease optional axial release of element

Remarks
The following table lists the possible moment releases. The default moment releases are fixed, but can be changed using
SolvSetDefaultElementReleases.

Name Description
“Fixed” End of element can transmit bending moments to
the node.
“Free” End of element cannot transmit bending
moments to the node.

The following table lists the possible axial releases. The default axial release is fixed, but can be changed using
SolvSetDefaultElementReleases.

Name Description
“Fixed” Ends of element can transmit axial forces to the
node.
“Start” Start of element cannot transmit axial forces to
the node.

Page 90 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

“End” End of element cannot transmit axial forces to


the node.

Return Value
Unique numeric identifier of the created element; 0 if an element could not be created.

SolvAddElements( nodeStart, nodeEnd, ...nodeStart[n], nodEnd[n])

Page 91 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddElements
Adds new 1D elements to the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvAddElements( nodeStart1, nodeEnd1, … nodeStart[n], nodeEnd[n] )

SolvAddElements( nodes )

Parameters
nodeStart1 identifier of node at start of first element
nodeEnd1 identifier of node at end of first element
nodes comma separated list of the nodes in nodeStart1, nodeEnd1, nodeStart2, nodeEnd2, … nodeStart[n],
nodeEnd[n] format

Remarks
The elements added will have the default element section, material, rotation and releases. These defaults can be
changed using the SolvSetDefaultElementSection, SolvSetDefaultElementMaterial, SolvSetDefaultElementRotation and
SolvSetDefaultElementReleases functions.

Return Value
Unique numeric identifier of the first created element; 0 if elements could not be created. The subsequent elements will
have sequential identifiers.

SolvAddSpan( member, element1, ...element[n] )

Page 92 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddSpan
Adds a new span to the specified member.

Syntax
SolvAddSpan( member, element1, … element[n] )

Parameters
member name or identifier of the member to which the span should be added
element1 identifier of the first element in the elements first span
element[n] optional identifier of the nth element in the elements first span

Remarks
A span must consist of one or more collinear elements that all have the same rotation. The end node of element (n) must
be the first node of element (n+1). Flexural deflection and rotation is continuous within a span. Rotational releases may
be applied at the start, and/or end of span but not internally. Additionally, if the span is a cantilever no rotational
releases should be applied to that span or the next. An axial/torsional release may be applied at either the start or end of
a span but not internally. Additionally, if the span is a cantilever no axial/torsional releases should be applied to that span
at all.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

SolvAddMember( name, supportedStart, supportedEnd, element1,...)

Page 93 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddMember
Adds a new member to the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvAddMember( name, supportedStart, supportedEnd, element1, … element[n] )

Parameters
name name of member
supportedStart optional whether the first span of the member is supported at the start (rather than a cantilever), default is
True(1). If the member only has one span one of supportedStart and supportedEnd must be True(1)
supportedEnd optional whether the last span of the member is supported at the end (rather than a cantilever), default is
True(1). If the member only has one span one of supportedStart and supportedEnd must be True(1)
element1 optional identifier of the first element in the elements first span
element[n] optional identifier of the nth element in the elements first span

Remarks
A member must consist of 1 or more spans, which themselves consist of one or more elements that all have the same
rotation. The end node of the last element of span (n) must be the first node of the first element of span (n+1). When
creating the member the elements that make up the first span can be provided (as above) if desired. If no elements are
provided then a member will be created with no spans. Additional spans can be added using SolvAddSpan. See
SolvAddSpan for the constraints placed on elements within a span.

Return Value
Unique numeric identifier of the created member; 0 if a member could not be created.

SolvSetDefaultElementSection( section )

Page 94 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSetDefaultElementSection
Sets the default section used when adding new elements to the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvSetDefaultElementSection( section )

Parameters
section name or identifier of section for new elements. The default section is initially the first section added to the
model

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

SolvSetDefaultElementMaterial( material )

Page 95 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSetDefaultElementMaterial
Sets the default material used when adding new elements to the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvSetDefaultElementMaterial( material )

Parameters
material name or identifier of material for new elements. The default material is initially the first material added to the
model

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

SolvSetDefaultElementRotation( rotated )

Page 96 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSetDefaultElementRotation
Sets the default rotation for new elements added to the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvSetDefaultElementRotation( rotated )

Parameters
rotated True(1) or False(0), to specify whether the section used for new elements should be rotated. The default is
initially non-rotated sections. If true the section must have been defined with a second moments of area
(Minor axis)

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

SolvSetDefaultElementReleases( momentStart, momentEnd, axial )

Page 97 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSetDefaultElementReleases
Sets the default releases for new elements added to the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvSetDefaultElementReleases( momentReleaseStart, momentReleaseEnd, axialRelease )

Parameters
momentReleaseStart moment release of start of new elements
momentReleaseEnd moment release of end of new elements
axialRelease axial release of new elements

Remarks
The following table lists the possible moment releases. The default moment releases are initially fixed.

Name Description
“Fixed” End of element can transmit bending moments to
the node.
“Free” End of element cannot transmit bending
moments to the node.

The following table lists the possible axial releases. The default axial release is initially fixed.

Name Description
“Fixed” Ends of element can transmit axial forces to the
node.
“Start” Start of element cannot transmit axial forces to
the node.
“End” End of element cannot transmit axial forces to
the node.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

SolvSetElementRotation( element, rotated)

Page 98 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSetElementRotation
Sets the section rotation of the specified element.

Syntax
SolvSetElementRotation( element, rotated )

Parameters
element the Index of the element
rotated True(1) or False(0), to specify whether the section used for the element should be rotated. If True the section
must have been defined with a second moment of area (Minor axis)

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

SolvSetMemberRotation( member, rotated )

Page 99 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSetMemberRotation
Sets the section rotation of all the elements in the specified design member.

Syntax
SolvSetMemberRotation( member, rotated )

Parameters
member the name or index of the member
rotated True(1) or False(0), to specify whether the section used for the members elements should be rotated. If True
the section must have been defined with a second moment of area (Minor axis)

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Loads
SolvAddLoadCase( name, selfWeight )

Page 100 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddLoadCase
Adds a new load case to the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvAddLoadCase( name, selfWeight )

Parameters
name name of load case
selfWeight optional self weight load factor, default is 0

Return Value
Unique numeric identifier of the created load case; 0 if a load case could not be created.

SolvAddCombination( name )

Page 101 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddCombination
Adds a new load combination to the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvAddCombination( name, type, source )

Parameters
name name of load combination
type type of load combination
source optional source reference data which specifies the source of the load combination

Remarks
The following table lists the possible values for type.

Name
“None”
“Strength”
“Service”
“Quasi”

Return Value
Unique numeric identifier of the created load combination; 0 if a load combination could not be created.

SolvAddCombinationLoadCase( combination, loadCase, factor )

Page 102 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddCombinationLoadCase
Adds a load case to the specified load combination in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvAddCombinationLoadCase( combination, loadCase, factor )

Parameters
combination identifier of the load combination, created using SolvAddCombination, to add to
loadCase name or identifier of the load case to add to the load combination
factor load factor to apply to the load case in this load combination

Remarks
Adds a load case to a load combination in the active solver model that was created using SolvAddCombination.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Node
SolvAddNodeLoad( node, loadCase, loadX, loadZ, moment )

Page 103 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddNodeLoad
Adds a new point load to the specified node.

Syntax
SolvAddNodeLoad( node, loadCase, loadX, loadZ, moment )

Parameters
node identifier or label of the node that the load applies to
loadCase name or identifier of the load case to add load to
loadX load (kN, kips) to be applied to node in local x direction
loadZ load (kN, kips) to be applied to node in local z direction
moment optional moment (kNm, kip_ft) to be applied to node

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

SolvAddNodeDisplacement( node, loadCase, X, Z, rotation )

Page 104 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddNodeDisplacement
Adds a new displacement/settlement load to the specified node.

Syntax
SolvAddNodeDisplacement( node, loadCase, translationX, translationZ, rotation)

Parameters
node identifier or label of node that the load applies to
loadCase name or identifier of load case to add load to
translationX displacement (m, ft) to be applied to node in local x direction
translationZ displacement (m, ft) to be applied to node in local z direction
rotation optional rotation () to be applied to node

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Element
SolvAddElementPointLoad( element, loadCase, load, pos, orient )

Page 105 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddElementPointLoad
Adds a new point load to the specified element.

Syntax
SolvAddElementPointLoad( element, loadCase, load, position, orientation )

Parameters
element identifier of element that the load applies to
loadCase name or identifier of load case to add load to
load load (kN, kips) to be applied
position distance from start node of element to point load (m, ft), OR, ratio of position from node start to end where
point load is applied (dimensionless)
orientation optional orientation of load

Remarks
The following table lists the possible orientations. The default orientation is “LocalZ”.

Name Description
“LocalX” Load is applied parallel to element x axis.
“LocalZ” Load is applied parallel to element z axis.
“GlobalX” Load is applied parallel to global x axis.
“GlobalZ” Load is applied parallel to global z axis.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

SolvAddElementPointMoment( element, loadCase, moment, pos )

Page 106 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddElementPointMoment
Adds a new point moment to the specified element.

Syntax
SolvAddElementPointMoment( element, loadCase, moment, position )

Parameters
element identifier of element that the moment applies to
loadCase name or identifier of load case to add moment to
moment moment (kNm, kip_ft) to be applied (+ve is clockwise)
position distance from start node of element to point moment (m, ft), OR, ratio of position from start to end where
point moment is applied (dimensionless)

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

SolvAddElementUDL( element, loadCase, load, start, end, orient )

Page 107 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddElementUDL
Adds a new universally distributed load (UDL) to the specified element.

Syntax
SolvAddElementUDL( element, loadCase, load, startPosition, endPosition, orientation )

Parameters
element identifier of element that the load applies to
loadCase name or identifier of load case to add load to
load load (kN/m, kips/ft) to be applied across range
startPosition distance from start node of element to where load starts (m, ft), OR, ratio of position from start to end where
load starts (dimensionless)
endPosition distance from start node of element to where load ends (m, ft), OR, ratio of position from start to end where
load ends (dimensionless)
orientation optional orientation of load

Remarks
The following table lists the possible orientations. The default orientation is “LocalZ”.

Name Description
“LocalX” Load is applied parallel to element x axis.
“LocalZ” Load is applied parallel to element z axis.
“GlobalX” Load is applied parallel to global x axis.
“GlobalZ” Load is applied parallel to global z axis.
“ProjectedX” Load is applied parallel to global x axis, over the
projected length.
“ProjectedZ” Load is applied parallel to global z axis, over the
projected length.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

SolvAddElementVDL( element, loadCase, startLoad, endLoad, ... )

Page 108 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddElementVDL
Adds a new variable distributed load (VDL) to the specified element.

Syntax
SolvAddElementVDL( element, loadCase, startLoad, endLoad, startPosition, endPosition, orientation )

Parameters
element identifier of element that the load applies to
loadCase name or identifier of load case to add load to
startLoad load (kN/m, kips/ft) to be applied at start of range
endLoad load (kN/m, kips/ft) to be applied at end of range
startPosition distance from start node of element to where load starts (m, ft), OR, ratio of position from start to end where
load starts (dimensionless)
endPosition distance from start node of element to where load ends (m, ft), OR, ratio of position from start to end where
load ends (dimensionless)
orientation optional orientation of load

Remarks
The following table lists the possible orientations. The default orientation is “LocalZ”.

Name Description
“LocalX” Load is applied parallel to element x axis.
“LocalZ” Load is applied parallel to element z axis.
“GlobalX” Load is applied parallel to global x axis.
“GlobalZ” Load is applied parallel to global z axis.
“ProjectedX” Load is applied parallel to global x axis, over the
projected length.
“ProjectedZ” Load is applied parallel to global z axis, over the
projected length.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

SolvAddElementTrapezoidalLoad( element, loadCase, load, ... )

Page 109 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddElementTrapezoidalLoad
Adds a new variable trapezoidal load to the specified element.

Syntax
SolvAddElementTrapezoidalLoad( element, loadCase, load, startPosition, endPosition, orientation )

Parameters
element identifier of element that the load applies to
loadCase name or identifier of load case to add load to
load load (kN/m, kips/ft) to be applied between start and end position
startPosition distance from start node of element to where uniform load starts (m, ft), OR, ratio of position from start to
end where uniform load starts (dimensionless)
endPosition distance from start node of element to where uniform load ends (m, ft), OR, ratio of position from start to
end where uniform load ends (dimensionless)
orientation optional orientation of load

Remarks
The following table lists the possible orientations. The default orientation is “LocalZ”.

Name Description
“LocalX” Load is applied parallel to element x axis.
“LocalZ” Load is applied parallel to element z axis.
“GlobalX” Load is applied parallel to global x axis.
“GlobalZ” Load is applied parallel to global z axis.
“ProjectedX” Load is applied parallel to global x axis, over the
projected length.
“ProjectedZ” Load is applied parallel to global z axis, over the
projected length.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

SolvAddElementUniformTemperature( element, loadCase, temp )

Page 110 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddElementUniformTemperature
Adds a new variable uniform temperature load to the specified element.

Syntax
SolvAddElementUniformTemperature( element, loadCase, temperature )

Parameters
element identifier of element that the load applies to
loadCase name or identifier of load case to add load to
temperature temperature (C) to apply to element

Remarks
In order to add a temperature load the material must have been defined with a temperature coefficient when it was
created using SolvAddMaterial.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Span
SolvAddSpanPointMoment( member, span, loadCase, moment, pos )

Page 111 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddSpanPointMoment
Adds a new point moment to the specified span.

Syntax
SolvAddSpanPointMoment( member, span, loadCase, moment, position )

Parameters
member name or identifier of member that the moment applies to
span identifier of span that the moment applies to
loadCase name or identifier of load case to add moment to
moment moment (kNm, kip_ft) to be applied
position distance from start node of span to point moment (m, ft), OR, ratio of position where point moment is
applied (dimensionless)

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

SolvAddSpanPointLoad( member, span, loadCase, load, pos, orie )

Page 112 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddSpanPointLoad
Adds a new point load to the specified span.

Syntax
SolvAddSpanPointLoad( member, span, loadCase, load, position, orientation )

Parameters
member name or identifier of member that the load applies to
span identifier of span that the load applies to
loadCase name or identifier of load case to add load to
load load (kN, kips) to be applied
position distance from start node of span to point load (m, ft), OR, ratio of position from start to end where point load
is applied (dimensionless)
orientation optional orientation of load

Remarks
The following table lists the possible orientations. The default orientation is “LocalZ”.

Name Description
“LocalX” Load is applied parallel to element x axis.
“LocalZ” Load is applied parallel to element z axis.
“GlobalX” Load is applied parallel to global x axis.
“GlobalZ” Load is applied parallel to global z axis.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

SolvAddSpanUDL( member, span, loadCase, load, start, end, orie )

Page 113 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddSpanUDL
Adds a new universally distributed load (UDL) to the specified span.

Syntax
SolvAddSpanUDL( member, span, loadCase, load, startPosition, endPosition, orientation )

Parameters
Member name or identifier of member that the load applies to
span identifier of span that the load applies to
loadCase name or identifier of load case to add load to
load load (kN/m, kips/ft) to be applied across range
startPosition distance from start node of span to where load starts (m, ft), OR, ratio of position from start to end where
load starts (dimensionless)
endPosition distance from start node of span to where load ends (m, ft), OR, ratio of position from start to end where load
ends (dimensionless)
orientation optional orientation of load

Remarks
The following table lists the possible orientations. The default orientation is “LocalZ”.

Name Description
“LocalX” Load is applied parallel to element x axis.
“LocalZ” Load is applied parallel to element z axis.
“GlobalX” Load is applied parallel to global x axis.
“GlobalZ” Load is applied parallel to global z axis.
“ProjectedX” Load is applied parallel to global x axis, over the
projected length.
“ProjectedZ” Load is applied parallel to global z axis, over the
projected length.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

SolvAddSpanVDL( member, span, loadCase, startLoad, endLoad,...)

Page 114 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddSpanVDL
Adds a new variable distributed load (VDL) to the specified span.

Syntax
SolvAddSpanVDL( member, span, loadCase, startLoad, endLoad, startPosition, endPosition, orientation )

Parameters
member name or identifier of member that the load applies to
span identifier of span that the load applies to
loadCase name or identifier of load case to add load to
startLoad load (kN/m, kips/ft) to be applied at start of range
endLoad load (kN/m, kips/ft) to be applied at end of range
startPosition distance from start node of span to where load starts (m, ft), OR, ratio of position from start to end where
load starts (dimensionless)
endPosition distance from start node of span to where load ends (m, ft), OR, ratio of position from start to end where load
ends (dimensionless)
orientation optional orientation of load

Remarks
The following table lists the possible orientations. The default orientation is “LocalZ”.

Name Description
“LocalX” Load is applied parallel to element x axis.
“LocalZ” Load is applied parallel to element z axis.
“GlobalX” Load is applied parallel to global x axis.
“GlobalZ” Load is applied parallel to global z axis.
“ProjectedX” Load is applied parallel to global x axis, over the
projected length.
“ProjectedZ” Load is applied parallel to global z axis, over the
projected length.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

SolvAddSpanTrapezoidalLoad( member, span, loadCase, load, .... )

Page 115 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddSpanTrapezoidalLoad
Adds a new variable trapezoidal load to the specified span.

Syntax
SolvAddSpanTrapezoidalLoad( member, span, loadCase, load, startPosition, endPosition, orientation )

Parameters
member name or identifier of member that the load applies to
span identifier of span that the load applies to
loadCase name or identifier of load case to add load to
load load (kN/m, kips/ft) to be applied between start and end position
startPosition distance from start node of span to where uniform load starts (m, ft), OR, ratio of position from start to end
where uniform load starts (dimensionless)
endPosition distance from start node of span to where uniform load starts (m, ft), OR, ratio of position from start to end
where uniform load ends (dimensionless)
orientation optional orientation of load

Remarks
The following table lists the possible orientations. The default orientation is “LocalZ”.

Name Description
“LocalX” Load is applied parallel to element x axis.
“LocalZ” Load is applied parallel to element z axis.
“GlobalX” Load is applied parallel to global x axis.
“GlobalZ” Load is applied parallel to global z axis.
“ProjectedX” Load is applied parallel to global x axis, over the
projected length.
“ProjectedZ” Load is applied parallel to global z axis, over the
projected length.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

SolvAddSpanUniformTemperature( member, span, loadCase, temp )

Page 116 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddSpanUniformTemperature
Adds a new variable uniform temperature load to the specified span.

Syntax
SolvAddSpanUniformTemperature( member, span, loadCase, temperature )

Parameters
member name or identifier of member that the load applies to
span identifier of span that the load applies to
loadCase name or identifier of load case to add load to
temperature temperature (C) to apply to span

Remarks
In order to add a temperature load the material must have been defined with a temperature coefficient in
SolvAddMaterial.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Member
SolvAddMemberPointMoment( member, loadCase, moment, pos )

Page 117 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddMemberPointMoment
Adds a new point moment to the specified member.

Syntax
SolvAddMemberPointMoment( member, loadCase, moment, position )

Parameters
member name or identifier of member that the moment applies to
loadCase name or identifier of load case to add moment to
moment moment (kNm, kip_ft) to be applied
position distance from start node of member to point moment (m, ft), OR, ratio of position where point moment is
applied (dimensionless)

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

SolvAddMemberPointLoad( member, loadCase, load, pos, orient )

Page 118 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddMemberPointLoad
Adds a new point load to the specified member.

Syntax
SolvAddMemberPointLoad( member, loadCase, load, position, orientation )

Parameters
member name or identifier of member that the load applies to
loadCase name or identifier of load case to add load to
load load (kN, kips) to be applied
position distance from start node of member to point load (m, ft), OR, ratio of position from start to end where point
load is applied (dimensionless)
orientation optional orientation of load

Remarks
The following table lists the possible orientations. The default orientation is “LocalZ”.

Name Description
“LocalX” Load is applied parallel to element x axis.
“LocalZ” Load is applied parallel to element z axis.
“GlobalX” Load is applied parallel to global x axis.
“GlobalZ” Load is applied parallel to global z axis.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

SolvAddMemberRollingPointLoads( member, allowOffBeam, ... )

Page 119 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddMemberRollingPointLoads
Adds a new rolling load train consisting of multiple point loads to the specified member.

Syntax
SolvAddMemberRollingPointLoads( member, allowOffEnd, intervals, load1, position[n], load[n], … )

Parameters
member name or identifier of the member to which the loads should be added
allowOffEnd When positioning the load train close to the start or end of the beam this option determines whether the
loads in the load train are allowed to lie off the beam or whether they must lie completely on the beam.
intervals Determines the number of locations to position the load train on each span. The load train is positioned at
the end of each interval with each load in the load train located at that position. The load train is also
positioned at the mid span about the centre of gravity of the load train.
load1 First load in the load train (kN or kips).
position[n] Position of the nth load in the load train (m or ft)
load[n] nth load in the load train (kN or kips).

Remarks
Rolling loads are simulated by positioning the load train at numerous intervals along the member. The load train is
positioned at the end of each interval with each load in the load train located at that position. The load train is also
positioned at the mid span about the centre of gravity of the load train. For each position of the load train a separate
load case is created which includes the point loads for that position. The function returns the number of load cases which
were added so that the caller can then set the load combination factors which may be required to combine the rolling
loads with the member self weight or any other applied loading.

The sequence of wheel loads is defined in the opposite direction to the sequence of spans, i.e. the first defined load is at
the front of the load train. For non-symmetrical load trains, the analysis should be repeated with a mirror image of the
load train (where this is physically possible in the real structure) to obtain the worst load effects at each location.

Return Value
The number of load cases which were created to simulate the rolling loads.

SolvAddMemberUDL( member, loadCase, load, start, end, orien )

Page 120 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddMemberUDL
Adds a new universally distributed load (UDL) to the specified member.

Syntax
SolvAddMemberUDL( member, loadCase, load, startPosition, endPosition, orientation )

Parameters
Member name or identifier of member that the load applies to
loadCase name or identifier of load case to add load to
load load (kN/m, kips/ft) to be applied across range
startPosition distance from start node of member to where load starts (m, ft), OR, ratio of position from start to end where
load starts (dimensionless)
endPosition distance from start node of member to where load ends (m, ft), OR, ratio of position from start to end where
load ends (dimensionless)
orientation optional orientation of load

Remarks
The following table lists the possible orientations. The default orientation is “LocalZ”.

Name Description
“LocalX” Load is applied parallel to element x axis.
“LocalZ” Load is applied parallel to element z axis.
“GlobalX” Load is applied parallel to global x axis.
“GlobalZ” Load is applied parallel to global z axis.
“ProjectedX” Load is applied parallel to global x axis, over the
projected length.
“ProjectedZ” Load is applied parallel to global z axis, over the
projected length.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

SolvAddMemberVDL( member, loadCase, startLoad, endLoad, ... )

Page 121 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddMemberVDL
Adds a new variable distributed load (VDL) to the specified member.

Syntax
SolvAddMemberVDL( member, loadCase, startLoad, endLoad, startPosition, endPosition, orientation )

Parameters
member name or identifier of member that the load applies to
loadCase name or identifier of load case to add load to
startLoad load (kN/m, kips/ft) to be applied at start of range
endLoad load (kN/m, kips/ft) to be applied at end of range
startPosition distance from start node of member to where load starts (m, ft), OR, ratio of position from start to end where
load starts (dimensionless)
endPosition distance from start node of member to where load ends (m, ft), OR, ratio of position from start to end where
load ends (dimensionless)
orientation optional orientation of load

Remarks
The following table lists the possible orientations. The default orientation is “LocalZ”.

Name Description
“LocalX” Load is applied parallel to element x axis.
“LocalZ” Load is applied parallel to element z axis.
“GlobalX” Load is applied parallel to global x axis.
“GlobalZ” Load is applied parallel to global z axis.
“ProjectedX” Load is applied parallel to global x axis, over the
projected length.
“ProjectedZ” Load is applied parallel to global z axis, over the
projected length.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

SolvAddMemberTrapezoidalLoad( member, loadCase, load, start,...)

Page 122 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddMemberTrapezoidalLoad
Adds a new variable trapezoidal load to the specified member.

Syntax
SolvAddMemberTrapezoidalLoad( member, loadCase, load, startPosition, endPosition, orientation )

Parameters
member name or identifier of member that the load applies to
loadCase name or identifier of load case to add load to
load load (kN/m, kips/ft) to be applied between start and end position
startPosition distance from start node of member to where uniform load starts (m, ft), OR, ratio of position from start to
end where uniform load starts (dimensionless)
endPosition distance from start node of member to where uniform load starts (m, ft), OR, ratio of position from start to
end where uniform load ends (dimensionless)
orientation optional orientation of load

Remarks
The following table lists the possible orientations. The default orientation is “LocalZ”.

Name Description
“LocalX” Load is applied parallel to element x axis.
“LocalZ” Load is applied parallel to element z axis.
“GlobalX” Load is applied parallel to global x axis.
“GlobalZ” Load is applied parallel to global z axis.
“ProjectedX” Load is applied parallel to global x axis, over the
projected length.
“ProjectedZ” Load is applied parallel to global z axis, over the
projected length.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

SolvAddMemberUniformTemperature( member, loadCase, temp )

Page 123 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvAddMemberUniformTemperature
Adds a new variable uniform temperature load to the specified member.

Syntax
SolvAddMemberUniformTemperature( member, loadCase, temperature )

Parameters
member name or identifier of member that the load applies to
loadCase name or identifier of load case to add load to
temperature temperature (C) to apply to member

Remarks
In order to add a temperature load the material must have been defined with a temperature coefficient in
SolvAddMaterial.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 124 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvDeleteAllCombinations
Deletes all the load combinations defined in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvDeleteAllCombinations()

Return Value
The number of load combinations which were deleted.

Page 125 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvDeleteAllLoadCases
Deletes all the load cases defined in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvDeleteAllLoadCases( deleteCombinations )

Parameters
deleteCombinations Optional, determines whether all the load combinations are also deleted, default is True

Remarks
If the option to delete all of the load combinations is not enabled then the combinations which remain will effectively be
empty because there are no associated load cases. Subsequent processing can be used to add new load cases to these
existing combinations.

Return Value
The number of load cases which were deleted.

Page 126 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvCreateDrawing
Create a solver drawing.

Syntax
SolvCreateDrawing( output, type )

SolvCreateDrawing( output, type, results1, … results[n] )

SolvCreateDrawing( output, type, orientation, orientationElement, results1, … results[n] )

SolvCreateDrawing( output, type, orientation, orientationElement, stringOrientation, results1, … results [n] )

Parameters
output output medium to optimise the generated drawing for
type type of drawing to create
orientation optional orientation of the generated drawing. The default is “Global”
orientationElement optional identifier of the element to base orientation on when generating the drawing, or 0 to use the first
element in the current selection. This parameter is only used when orientation is “Local”. The default
orientation element is the first element in the current selection
stringOrientation optional orientation for strings in the generated drawing
results1 optional results to show. Only required if type is “Diagram” or “Envelope”

Remarks
The following table lists the possible values for output.

Name Description
“Document” Generated drawing is optimised for document
output.
“Screen” Generated drawing is optimised for screen
output.

The following table lists the possible values for type.

Name Description
“None” Blank drawing ready for subsequent drawing
layers to be drawn
“InputGeometry” Drawing will show the geometry of the input
model.
“Loading” Drawing will show the loading on the input
model.

Page 127 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

“DeflectedGeometry” Drawing will show the deflected geometry of the


model.
“Diagram” Drawing will show a results diagram for the
specified results.
“Envelope” Drawing will show a results envelope for the
specified results.

The following table lists the possible values for orientation. The default is “Global”.

Name Description
“Global” Generated drawing is created relative to global
axis.
“Local” Generated drawing is created relative to
orientationElement.

The following table lists the possible values for stringOrientation. The default is “Horizontal”.

Name Description
“Horizontal” Text is drawn horizontally.
“Parallel” Text is drawn parallel to element.
“Perpendicular” Text is drawn perpendicular to element.
“Vertical” Text is drawn vertically

The following table lists the possible values for results[n]. The default is “Moment”.

Name Description
“AxialDeflection” Draw axial deflection diagram/envelope.
“AxialForce” Draw axial force diagram/envelope.
“Deflection” Draw deflection diagram/envelope.
“Moment” Draw moment diagram/envelope.
“Shear” Draw shear diagram/envelope.

Return Value
Numeric identifier that uniquely identifies the newly created drawing.

Page 128 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvDrawAttach
Attach to an existing drawing.

Syntax
SolvDrawAttach( output, orientation, orientationElement, stringOrientation, includeOrigin, border )

Parameters
output optional output medium to optimise the drawing for
orientation optional orientation of the drawing. The default is “Global”
orientationElement optional identifier of the element to base orientation on when generating the drawing, or 0 to use the first
element in the current selection. This parameter is only used when orientation is “Local”. The default
orientation element is the first element in the current selection
stringOrientation optional orientation for strings in the drawing
includeOrigin optional If True the origin is included in the drawing even if it is outside the bounds of the model. If False the
origin is only included in the drawing if it is within the bounds of the model. The default is True
border optional size of border to include around the drawing. If dimensionless the border is treated as a percentage
of the model bounds, if a length, the border is treated as the absolute border width. The default border is
10% (0.1)

Remarks
The following table lists the possible values for output. The default is “Document”.

Name Description
“Document” Generated drawing is optimised for document
output.
“Screen” Generated drawing is optimised for screen
output.

The following table lists the possible values for orientation. The default is “Global”.

Name Description
“Global” Generated drawing is created relative to global
axis.
“Local” Generated drawing is created relative to
orientationElement.

The following table lists the possible values for stringOrientation. The default is “Horizontal”

Name Description
“Horizontal” Text is drawn horizontally.
“Parallel” Text is drawn parallel to element.
Page 129 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

“Perpendicular” Text is drawn perpendicular to element.


“Vertical” Text is drawn vertically

Return Value
Numeric identifier that uniquely identifies the drawing that was attached to.

Page 130 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvDrawCoordinateSystem
Sets the co-ordinate system to use for subsequent drawing operations.

Syntax
SolvDrawCoordinateSystem( orientation, orientationElement )

Parameters
orientation optional orientation of the drawing. The default is “Global”
orientationElement optional identifier of the element to base orientation on when generating the drawing, or 0 to use the first
element in the current selection. This parameter is only used when orientation is “Local”. The default
orientation element is the first element in the current selection

Remarks
The following table lists the possible values for orientation. The default is “Global”.

Name Description
“Global” Generated drawing is created relative to global
axis.
“Local” Generated drawing is created relative to
orientationElement.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 131 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvDraw
Draws a solver results drawing to the active drawing.

Syntax
SolvDraw( type, results1, … results[n] )

Parameters
type type of drawing
results1 optional results to show. Only required if type is “Diagram” or “Envelope”

Remarks
The following table lists the possible values for results[n]. The default is “Moment”.

Name Description
“AxialDeflection” Draw axial deflection diagram/envelope.
“AxialForce” Draw axial force diagram/envelope.
“Deflection” Draw deflection diagram/envelope.
“Moment” Draw moment diagram/envelope.
“Shear” Draw shear diagram/envelope.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 132 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvDrawGetWidth
Gets the width of the solver drawing bounds.

Syntax
SolvDrawGetWidth( includeBorder )

Parameters
includeBorder optional include the border in the width of the solver drawing bounds. Default is True

Return Value
The width of the solver drawing bounds.

Page 133 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvDrawGetHeight
Gets the height of the solver drawing bounds.

Syntax
SolvDrawGetHeight( includeBorder )

Parameters
includeBorder optional include the border in the height of the solver drawing bounds. Default is True

Return Value
The height of the solver drawing bounds.

Page 134 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvDrawAxis
Draws the global co-ordinate system axis to the active drawing.

Syntax
SolvDrawAxis()

SolvDrawAxis( invertedZ )

SolvDrawAxis( invertedZ, x, z )

SolvDrawAxis( invertedZ, x, z, units, colour )

SolvDrawAxis( invertedZ, x, z, units, colourX, colourZ )

Parameters
invertedZ optional parameter to invert the z axis for drawing loading diagrams etc, default is False
x optional x coordinate of where to draw the axis
z optional z coordinate of where to draw the axis
units length units used to label the position of the axis
colour colour to draw the axis
colourX colour to draw the X axis
colourZ colour to draw the Z axis

Remarks
The following table lists the predefined colour values.

"aliceblue" "antiquewhite" "aqua" "aquamarine" "azure"


"beige" "bisque" "black" "blanchedalmond" "blue"
"blueviolet" "brown" "burlywood" "cadetblue" "chartreuse"
"chocolate" "coral" "cornflowerblue" "cornsilk" "crimson"
"cyan" "darkblue" "darkcyan" "darkgoldenrod" "darkgray"
"darkgrey" "darkgreen" "darkkhaki" "darkmagenta" "darkolivegreen"
"darkorange" "darkorchid" "darkred" "darksalmon" "darkseagreen"
"darkslateblue" "darkslategray" "darkslategrey" "darkturquoise" "darkviolet"
"deeppink" "deepskyblue" "dimgray" "dimgrey" "dodgerblue"
"firebrick" "floralwhite" "forestgreen" "fuchsia" "gainsboro"
"ghostwhite" "gold" "goldenrod" "grey" "gray"
"green" "greenyellow" "honeydew" "hotpink" "indianred"
"indigo" "ivory" "khaki" "lavender" "lavenderblush"
"lawngreen" "lemonchiffon" "lightblue" "lightcoral" "lightcyan"

Page 135 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

"lightgoldenrodyell "lightgray" "lightgrey" "lightgreen" "lightpink"


ow"
"lightsalmon" "lightseagreen" "lightskyblue" "lightslategray" "lightslategrey"
"lightsteelblue" "lightyellow" "lime" "limegreen" "linen"
"magenta" "maroon" "mediumaquamari "mediumblue" "mediumorchid"
ne"
"mediumpurple" "mediumseagre "mediumslateblue "mediumspringgre "mediumturquoi
en" " en" se"
"mediumvioletred" "midnightblue" "mintcream" "mistyrose" "moccasin"
"navajowhite" "navy" "oldlace" "olive" "olivedrab"
"orange" "orangered" "orchid" "palegoldenrod" "palegreen"
"paleturquoise" "palevioletred" "papayawhip" "peachpuff" "peru"
"pink" "plum" "powderblue" "purple" "red"
"rosybrown" "royalblue" "saddlebrown" "salmon" "sandybrown"
"seagreen" "seashell" "sienna" "silver" "skyblue"
"slateblue" "slategray" "slategrey" "snow" "springgreen"
"steelblue" "tan" "teal" "thistle" "tomato"
"transparent" "turquoise" "violet" "wheat" "white"
"whitesmoke" "yellow" "yellowgreen"

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 136 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvDrawNodes
Draws the nodes within the current selection to the active drawing.

Syntax
SolvDrawNodes( deflected, icons, colour, labels, scaleFactor, label )

Parameters
deflected optional, True to show the deflected position of the nodes. The default value is False
icons optional, True to draw the node icons, False to draw a simple dot. The default is True
colour optional colour to draw the nodes. The default colour is “Black”
labels optional, True to draw the node labels, False to draw just the node. The default is True
scaleFactor optional scale factor used for size of node in drawing as a percentage of the drawing bounds. The default is
1% (0.01)
label optional text to use as the node labels when drawing deflected node positions. The default is the node label
(index)

Remarks
The following table lists the predefined colour values.

"aliceblue" "antiquewhite" "aqua" "aquamarine" "azure"


"beige" "bisque" "black" "blanchedalmond" "blue"
"blueviolet" "brown" "burlywood" "cadetblue" "chartreuse"
"chocolate" "coral" "cornflowerblue" "cornsilk" "crimson"
"cyan" "darkblue" "darkcyan" "darkgoldenrod" "darkgray"
"darkgrey" "darkgreen" "darkkhaki" "darkmagenta" "darkolivegreen"
"darkorange" "darkorchid" "darkred" "darksalmon" "darkseagreen"
"darkslateblue" "darkslategray" "darkslategrey" "darkturquoise" "darkviolet"
"deeppink" "deepskyblue" "dimgray" "dimgrey" "dodgerblue"
"firebrick" "floralwhite" "forestgreen" "fuchsia" "gainsboro"
"ghostwhite" "gold" "goldenrod" "grey" "gray"
"green" "greenyellow" "honeydew" "hotpink" "indianred"
"indigo" "ivory" "khaki" "lavender" "lavenderblush"
"lawngreen" "lemonchiffon" "lightblue" "lightcoral" "lightcyan"
"lightgoldenrodyell "lightgray" "lightgrey" "lightgreen" "lightpink"
ow"
"lightsalmon" "lightseagreen" "lightskyblue" "lightslategray" "lightslategrey"
"lightsteelblue" "lightyellow" "lime" "limegreen" "linen"
"magenta" "maroon" "mediumaquamari "mediumblue" "mediumorchid"
ne"
"mediumpurple" "mediumseagre "mediumslateblue "mediumspringgre "mediumturquoi
en" " en" se"
Page 137 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

"mediumvioletred" "midnightblue" "mintcream" "mistyrose" "moccasin"


"navajowhite" "navy" "oldlace" "olive" "olivedrab"
"orange" "orangered" "orchid" "palegoldenrod" "palegreen"
"paleturquoise" "palevioletred" "papayawhip" "peachpuff" "peru"
"pink" "plum" "powderblue" "purple" "red"
"rosybrown" "royalblue" "saddlebrown" "salmon" "sandybrown"
"seagreen" "seashell" "sienna" "silver" "skyblue"
"slateblue" "slategray" "slategrey" "snow" "springgreen"
"steelblue" "tan" "teal" "thistle" "tomato"
"transparent" "turquoise" "violet" "wheat" "white"
"whitesmoke" "yellow" "yellowgreen"
The following table lists the predefined label values.

Name Description
“Label” The label or index of the node.
“Horizontal” The horizontal deflection of the node.
“Vertical” The vertical deflection of the node.
“HorizontalVertical” The horizontal and vertical deflection of the node.
“LabelHorizontalVertical” The label or index of the node and the horizontal and vertical
deflection of the node.
“Total” The total deflection of the node.
“LabelTotal” The label or index of the node and the total deflection of the
node.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 138 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvDrawElements
Draws the currently selected element(s) to the active drawing.

Syntax
SolvDrawElements( deflected, colour, drawElementAxis, elementLabel, drawElementReleases, drawElementEnds,
scaleFactor, lineWidth )

Parameters
deflected optional, True to show the deflected position of the elements. The default value is False
colour optional colour to draw the elements. The default colour is “Black”
drawElementAxis optional, True to show the local element axis on each element. The default is False
elementLabel optional, Type of label to draw. The default is Index
drawElementReleases optional, True to show the element releases in the drawing. The default is False
drawElementEnds optional, True to show the entire element so nodes are drawn connected. False to leave a gap at element
ends to avoid clashes with node support diagrams. The default is True
scaleFactor optional scale factor used for size of element axis, releases and end gaps in drawing as a percentage of the
drawing bounds. The default is 1% (0.01)
lineWidth optional width of element line. Specify a negative number for fixed pixels and a positive number for a
measured width

Remarks
The following table lists the possible values for elementLabel. The default is “Index”.

If Length is specified an optional format string for displaying the length of each element can also be specified.

So for example if “Length,F1,mm” is passed the lengths of elements will be drawn in mm to 1 decimal place.

Name Description
“None” No label
“Index” Element Index
“Length” Element length
“Material” Element material
“Section” Element section

The following table lists the predefined colour values.

"aliceblue" "antiquewhite" "aqua" "aquamarine" "azure"


"beige" "bisque" "black" "blanchedalmond" "blue"
"blueviolet" "brown" "burlywood" "cadetblue" "chartreuse"
"chocolate" "coral" "cornflowerblue" "cornsilk" "crimson"
"cyan" "darkblue" "darkcyan" "darkgoldenrod" "darkgray"

Page 139 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

"darkgrey" "darkgreen" "darkkhaki" "darkmagenta" "darkolivegreen"


"darkorange" "darkorchid" "darkred" "darksalmon" "darkseagreen"
"darkslateblue" "darkslategray" "darkslategrey" "darkturquoise" "darkviolet"
"deeppink" "deepskyblue" "dimgray" "dimgrey" "dodgerblue"
"firebrick" "floralwhite" "forestgreen" "fuchsia" "gainsboro"
"ghostwhite" "gold" "goldenrod" "grey" "gray"
"green" "greenyellow" "honeydew" "hotpink" "indianred"
"indigo" "ivory" "khaki" "lavender" "lavenderblush"
"lawngreen" "lemonchiffon" "lightblue" "lightcoral" "lightcyan"
"lightgoldenrodyell "lightgray" "lightgrey" "lightgreen" "lightpink"
ow"
"lightsalmon" "lightseagreen" "lightskyblue" "lightslategray" "lightslategrey"
"lightsteelblue" "lightyellow" "lime" "limegreen" "linen"
"magenta" "maroon" "mediumaquamari "mediumblue" "mediumorchid"
ne"
"mediumpurple" "mediumseagre "mediumslateblue "mediumspringgre "mediumturquoi
en" " en" se"
"mediumvioletred" "midnightblue" "mintcream" "mistyrose" "moccasin"
"navajowhite" "navy" "oldlace" "olive" "olivedrab"
"orange" "orangered" "orchid" "palegoldenrod" "palegreen"
"paleturquoise" "palevioletred" "papayawhip" "peachpuff" "peru"
"pink" "plum" "powderblue" "purple" "red"
"rosybrown" "royalblue" "saddlebrown" "salmon" "sandybrown"
"seagreen" "seashell" "sienna" "silver" "skyblue"
"slateblue" "slategray" "slategrey" "snow" "springgreen"
"steelblue" "tan" "teal" "thistle" "tomato"
"transparent" "turquoise" "violet" "wheat" "white"
"whitesmoke" "yellow" "yellowgreen"

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 140 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvDrawLoading
Draws the loading for the current selection to the active drawing.

Syntax
SolvDrawLoading( colour )

Parameters
colour optional colour to draw the loading. The default colour is “Purple”

Remarks
The following table lists the predefined colour values.

"aliceblue" "antiquewhite" "aqua" "aquamarine" "azure"


"beige" "bisque" "black" "blanchedalmond" "blue"
"blueviolet" "brown" "burlywood" "cadetblue" "chartreuse"
"chocolate" "coral" "cornflowerblue" "cornsilk" "crimson"
"cyan" "darkblue" "darkcyan" "darkgoldenrod" "darkgray"
"darkgrey" "darkgreen" "darkkhaki" "darkmagenta" "darkolivegreen"
"darkorange" "darkorchid" "darkred" "darksalmon" "darkseagreen"
"darkslateblue" "darkslategray" "darkslategrey" "darkturquoise" "darkviolet"
"deeppink" "deepskyblue" "dimgray" "dimgrey" "dodgerblue"
"firebrick" "floralwhite" "forestgreen" "fuchsia" "gainsboro"
"ghostwhite" "gold" "goldenrod" "grey" "gray"
"green" "greenyellow" "honeydew" "hotpink" "indianred"
"indigo" "ivory" "khaki" "lavender" "lavenderblush"
"lawngreen" "lemonchiffon" "lightblue" "lightcoral" "lightcyan"
"lightgoldenrodyell "lightgray" "lightgrey" "lightgreen" "lightpink"
ow"
"lightsalmon" "lightseagreen" "lightskyblue" "lightslategray" "lightslategrey"
"lightsteelblue" "lightyellow" "lime" "limegreen" "linen"
"magenta" "maroon" "mediumaquamari "mediumblue" "mediumorchid"
ne"
"mediumpurple" "mediumseagre "mediumslateblue "mediumspringgre "mediumturquoi
en" " en" se"
"mediumvioletred" "midnightblue" "mintcream" "mistyrose" "moccasin"
"navajowhite" "navy" "oldlace" "olive" "olivedrab"
"orange" "orangered" "orchid" "palegoldenrod" "palegreen"
"paleturquoise" "palevioletred" "papayawhip" "peachpuff" "peru"
"pink" "plum" "powderblue" "purple" "red"
"rosybrown" "royalblue" "saddlebrown" "salmon" "sandybrown"
"seagreen" "seashell" "sienna" "silver" "skyblue"

Page 141 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

"slateblue" "slategray" "slategrey" "snow" "springgreen"


"steelblue" "tan" "teal" "thistle" "tomato"
"transparent" "turquoise" "violet" "wheat" "white"
"whitesmoke" "yellow" "yellowgreen"

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 142 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvDrawDiagram
Draws a results diagram to the active drawing.

Syntax
SolvDrawDiagram( results, colour, maxMin, legend, units, unitfactor )

Parameters
results results to show in the diagram
colour optional colour to draw the results diagram
maxMin optional, True to show the maximum and minimum values on the diagram. The default is True
legend optional legend entry for this results diagram
units optional units to use for values in this results diagram
unitFactor optional scale factor used with units

Remarks
The following table lists the possible values for results.

Name Description
“AxialDeflection” Draw axial deflection diagram.
“AxialForce” Draw axial force diagram.
“Deflection” Draw deflection diagram.
“Moment” Draw moment diagram.
“Shear” Draw shear diagram.

The following table lists the predefined colour values.

"aliceblue" "antiquewhite" "aqua" "aquamarine" "azure"


"beige" "bisque" "black" "blanchedalmond" "blue"
"blueviolet" "brown" "burlywood" "cadetblue" "chartreuse"
"chocolate" "coral" "cornflowerblue" "cornsilk" "crimson"
"cyan" "darkblue" "darkcyan" "darkgoldenrod" "darkgray"
"darkgrey" "darkgreen" "darkkhaki" "darkmagenta" "darkolivegreen"
"darkorange" "darkorchid" "darkred" "darksalmon" "darkseagreen"
"darkslateblue" "darkslategray" "darkslategrey" "darkturquoise" "darkviolet"
"deeppink" "deepskyblue" "dimgray" "dimgrey" "dodgerblue"
"firebrick" "floralwhite" "forestgreen" "fuchsia" "gainsboro"
"ghostwhite" "gold" "goldenrod" "grey" "gray"
"green" "greenyellow" "honeydew" "hotpink" "indianred"
"indigo" "ivory" "khaki" "lavender" "lavenderblush"
"lawngreen" "lemonchiffon" "lightblue" "lightcoral" "lightcyan"

Page 143 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

"lightgoldenrodyell "lightgray" "lightgrey" "lightgreen" "lightpink"


ow"
"lightsalmon" "lightseagreen" "lightskyblue" "lightslategray" "lightslategrey"
"lightsteelblue" "lightyellow" "lime" "limegreen" "linen"
"magenta" "maroon" "mediumaquamari "mediumblue" "mediumorchid"
ne"
"mediumpurple" "mediumseagre "mediumslateblue "mediumspringgre "mediumturquoi
en" " en" se"
"mediumvioletred" "midnightblue" "mintcream" "mistyrose" "moccasin"
"navajowhite" "navy" "oldlace" "olive" "olivedrab"
"orange" "orangered" "orchid" "palegoldenrod" "palegreen"
"paleturquoise" "palevioletred" "papayawhip" "peachpuff" "peru"
"pink" "plum" "powderblue" "purple" "red"
"rosybrown" "royalblue" "saddlebrown" "salmon" "sandybrown"
"seagreen" "seashell" "sienna" "silver" "skyblue"
"slateblue" "slategray" "slategrey" "snow" "springgreen"
"steelblue" "tan" "teal" "thistle" "tomato"
"transparent" "turquoise" "violet" "wheat" "white"
"whitesmoke" "yellow" "yellowgreen"

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 144 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvDrawDiagrams
Draws results diagrams to the active drawing.

Syntax
SolvDrawDiagram( results1, … results[n] )

Parameters
results1 results to draw

Remarks
The following table lists the possible values for results. The default is “Moment”.

Name Description
“AxialDeflection” Draw axial deflection diagram.
“AxialForce” Draw axial force diagram.
“Deflection” Draw deflection diagram.
“Moment” Draw moment diagram.
“Shear” Draw shear diagram.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 145 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvDrawEnvelope
Draws a results envelope to the active drawing.

Syntax
SolvDrawEnvelope( results, colour, maxMin, legend, units, unitfactor )

Parameters
results results to show in the envelope
colour optional colour to draw the results envelope
maxMin optional, True to show the maximum and minimum values on the envelope. The default is True
legend optional legend entry for this results envelope
units optional units to use for values in this results envelope
unitFactor optional scale factor used with units

Remarks
The following table lists the possible values for results.

Name Description
“AxialDeflection” Draw axial deflection envelope.
“AxialForce” Draw axial force envelope.
“Deflection” Draw deflection envelope.
“Moment” Draw moment envelope.
“Shear” Draw shear envelope.

The following table lists the predefined colour values.


"aliceblue" "antiquewhite" "aqua" "aquamarine" "azure"
"beige" "bisque" "black" "blanchedalmond" "blue"
"blueviolet" "brown" "burlywood" "cadetblue" "chartreuse"
"chocolate" "coral" "cornflowerblue" "cornsilk" "crimson"
"cyan" "darkblue" "darkcyan" "darkgoldenrod" "darkgray"
"darkgrey" "darkgreen" "darkkhaki" "darkmagenta" "darkolivegreen"
"darkorange" "darkorchid" "darkred" "darksalmon" "darkseagreen"
"darkslateblue" "darkslategray" "darkslategrey" "darkturquoise" "darkviolet"
"deeppink" "deepskyblue" "dimgray" "dimgrey" "dodgerblue"
"firebrick" "floralwhite" "forestgreen" "fuchsia" "gainsboro"
"ghostwhite" "gold" "goldenrod" "grey" "gray"
"green" "greenyellow" "honeydew" "hotpink" "indianred"
"indigo" "ivory" "khaki" "lavender" "lavenderblush"
"lawngreen" "lemonchiffon" "lightblue" "lightcoral" "lightcyan"

Page 146 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

"lightgoldenrodyell "lightgray" "lightgrey" "lightgreen" "lightpink"


ow"
"lightsalmon" "lightseagreen" "lightskyblue" "lightslategray" "lightslategrey"
"lightsteelblue" "lightyellow" "lime" "limegreen" "linen"
"magenta" "maroon" "mediumaquamari "mediumblue" "mediumorchid"
ne"
"mediumpurple" "mediumseagre "mediumslateblue "mediumspringgre "mediumturquoi
en" " en" se"
"mediumvioletred" "midnightblue" "mintcream" "mistyrose" "moccasin"
"navajowhite" "navy" "oldlace" "olive" "olivedrab"
"orange" "orangered" "orchid" "palegoldenrod" "palegreen"
"paleturquoise" "palevioletred" "papayawhip" "peachpuff" "peru"
"pink" "plum" "powderblue" "purple" "red"
"rosybrown" "royalblue" "saddlebrown" "salmon" "sandybrown"
"seagreen" "seashell" "sienna" "silver" "skyblue"
"slateblue" "slategray" "slategrey" "snow" "springgreen"
"steelblue" "tan" "teal" "thistle" "tomato"
"transparent" "turquoise" "violet" "wheat" "white"
"whitesmoke" "yellow" "yellowgreen"

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 147 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvDrawEnvelopes
Draws results envelopes to the active drawing.

Syntax
SolvDrawEnvelopes( results1, … results[n] )

Parameters
results1 results to show in the envelope

Remarks
The following table lists the possible values for results. The default is “Moment”

Name Description
“AxialDeflection” Draw axial deflection envelope.
“AxialForce” Draw axial force envelope.
“Deflection” Draw deflection envelope.
“Moment” Draw moment envelope.
“Shear” Draw shear envelope.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 148 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvDrawLegend
Draws a legend to the active drawing.

Syntax
SolvDrawLegend()

SolvDrawLegend( x, z )

Parameters
x optional x coordinate of where to draw the legend
z optional z coordinate of where to draw the legend

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 149 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvDrawMembers
Highlights any member elements within the active drawing.

Syntax
SolvDrawMembers( colour )

Parameters
colour optional colour in which to highlight the members

Remarks
The following table lists the predefined colour values. The default colour is “SkyBlue”.

"aliceblue" "antiquewhite" "aqua" "aquamarine" "azure"


"beige" "bisque" "black" "blanchedalmond" "blue"
"blueviolet" "brown" "burlywood" "cadetblue" "chartreuse"
"chocolate" "coral" "cornflowerblue" "cornsilk" "crimson"
"cyan" "darkblue" "darkcyan" "darkgoldenrod" "darkgray"
"darkgrey" "darkgreen" "darkkhaki" "darkmagenta" "darkolivegreen"
"darkorange" "darkorchid" "darkred" "darksalmon" "darkseagreen"
"darkslateblue" "darkslategray" "darkslategrey" "darkturquoise" "darkviolet"
"deeppink" "deepskyblue" "dimgray" "dimgrey" "dodgerblue"
"firebrick" "floralwhite" "forestgreen" "fuchsia" "gainsboro"
"ghostwhite" "gold" "goldenrod" "grey" "gray"
"green" "greenyellow" "honeydew" "hotpink" "indianred"
"indigo" "ivory" "khaki" "lavender" "lavenderblush"
"lawngreen" "lemonchiffon" "lightblue" "lightcoral" "lightcyan"
"lightgoldenrodyell "lightgray" "lightgrey" "lightgreen" "lightpink"
ow"
"lightsalmon" "lightseagreen" "lightskyblue" "lightslategray" "lightslategrey"
"lightsteelblue" "lightyellow" "lime" "limegreen" "linen"
"magenta" "maroon" "mediumaquamari "mediumblue" "mediumorchid"
ne"
"mediumpurple" "mediumseagre "mediumslateblue "mediumspringgre "mediumturquoi
en" " en" se"
"mediumvioletred" "midnightblue" "mintcream" "mistyrose" "moccasin"
"navajowhite" "navy" "oldlace" "olive" "olivedrab"
"orange" "orangered" "orchid" "palegoldenrod" "palegreen"
"paleturquoise" "palevioletred" "papayawhip" "peachpuff" "peru"
"pink" "plum" "powderblue" "purple" "red"
"rosybrown" "royalblue" "saddlebrown" "salmon" "sandybrown"
"seagreen" "seashell" "sienna" "silver" "skyblue"

Page 150 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

"slateblue" "slategray" "slategrey" "snow" "springgreen"


"steelblue" "tan" "teal" "thistle" "tomato"
"transparent" "turquoise" "violet" "wheat" "white"
"whitesmoke" "yellow" "yellowgreen"

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 151 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvDrawStringOrientation
Sets the string orientation for the active drawing.

Syntax
SolvDrawStringOrientation( orientation )

Parameters
orientation optional orientation for strings in the generated drawing

Remarks
The following table lists the possible values for orientation.

Name Description
“Horizontal” Text is drawn horizontally.
“Parallel” Text is drawn parallel to element.
“Perpendicular” Text is drawn perpendicular to element.
“Vertical” Text is drawn vertically

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 152 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvDrawLockDiagramScaleFactor
Lock the scale factor used when drawing results so that multiple results/envelopes can be drawn using the same scale
factor.

Syntax
SolvDrawLockDiagramScaleFactor()

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 153 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvDrawUnlockDiagramScaleFactor
Reset the diagram scale factor after drawing multiple diagrams/envelopes with the same scale factor.

Syntax
SolvDrawUnlockDiagramScaleFactor()

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 154 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvDrawScaleFactor
Set the scale factor used for diagrams/envelopes for the current active drawing.

Syntax
SolvDrawScaleFactor( scaling, factor )

Parameters
scaling method used for scaling
factor the scale factor to use, should be a length for the “Global” scaling method, dimensionless otherwise

Remarks
The following table lists the possible scaling methods.

Name Description
“Auto” The length of value axis for all
diagrams/envelopes is based on the size of the
border around the drawing.
All values will then be multiplied by the given
scale factor.
“Global” Scale factor should be the real world length to
use for the value axis for all diagrams/envelopes.
“RealWorld” This method only applies to deflection
diagrams/envelopes.
The deflection will be shown in real world
coordinates multiplied by the given scale factor.
Moment, shear , force diagrams/envelopes will
use “Auto”.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 155 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvDrawTitle
Draw a title on the current active drawing.

Syntax
SolvDrawTitle( title, colour, alignment )

Parameters
title the title of the drawing
colour optional colour of the title
alignment optional alignment for the title

Remarks
The following table lists the predefined colour values. The default colour is “Black”.
"aliceblue" "antiquewhite" "aqua" "aquamarine" "azure"
"beige" "bisque" "black" "blanchedalmond" "blue"
"blueviolet" "brown" "burlywood" "cadetblue" "chartreuse"
"chocolate" "coral" "cornflowerblue" "cornsilk" "crimson"
"cyan" "darkblue" "darkcyan" "darkgoldenrod" "darkgray"
"darkgrey" "darkgreen" "darkkhaki" "darkmagenta" "darkolivegreen"
"darkorange" "darkorchid" "darkred" "darksalmon" "darkseagreen"
"darkslateblue" "darkslategray" "darkslategrey" "darkturquoise" "darkviolet"
"deeppink" "deepskyblue" "dimgray" "dimgrey" "dodgerblue"
"firebrick" "floralwhite" "forestgreen" "fuchsia" "gainsboro"
"ghostwhite" "gold" "goldenrod" "grey" "gray"
"green" "greenyellow" "honeydew" "hotpink" "indianred"
"indigo" "ivory" "khaki" "lavender" "lavenderblush"
"lawngreen" "lemonchiffon" "lightblue" "lightcoral" "lightcyan"
"lightgoldenrodyell "lightgray" "lightgrey" "lightgreen" "lightpink"
ow"
"lightsalmon" "lightseagreen" "lightskyblue" "lightslategray" "lightslategrey"
"lightsteelblue" "lightyellow" "lime" "limegreen" "linen"
"magenta" "maroon" "mediumaquamari "mediumblue" "mediumorchid"
ne"
"mediumpurple" "mediumseagre "mediumslateblue "mediumspringgre "mediumturquoi
en" " en" se"
"mediumvioletred" "midnightblue" "mintcream" "mistyrose" "moccasin"
"navajowhite" "navy" "oldlace" "olive" "olivedrab"
"orange" "orangered" "orchid" "palegoldenrod" "palegreen"
"paleturquoise" "palevioletred" "papayawhip" "peachpuff" "peru"
"pink" "plum" "powderblue" "purple" "red"

Page 156 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

"rosybrown" "royalblue" "saddlebrown" "salmon" "sandybrown"


"seagreen" "seashell" "sienna" "silver" "skyblue"
"slateblue" "slategray" "slategrey" "snow" "springgreen"
"steelblue" "tan" "teal" "thistle" "tomato"
"transparent" "turquoise" "violet" "wheat" "white"
"whitesmoke" "yellow" "yellowgreen"
The following table lists the alignment types. The default alignment is “Centre”.

“Default” Use default alignment (centre).


“Near” Title is aligned so that the bottom left corner of the bounding
rectangle is nearest to the top left of the drawing.
“Centre” Title is aligned so that the bounding rectangle is centred about
“Center” drawing.
“Far” Title is aligned so that the bottom right corner of the bounding
rectangle is nearest to the top right of the drawing.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 157 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvDrawBounds
Draw the bounds on the current active drawing.

Syntax
SolvDrawBounds( horizontal, vertical )

Parameters
horizontal optional draw the bounds of the active drawing horizontally, default is True
vertical optional draw the bounds of the active drawing vertically, default is True

Remarks
If both horizontal and vertical are True then function will draw a bounding rectangle around the
drawing. Alternatively the function can be used to ensure that sets off drawings all have the same
extents, so that multiple drawings align correctly either horizontally or vertically.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 158 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvDrawResult
Draws a result value label on the active drawing.

Syntax
SolvDrawResult( result, maxMin )

Parameters
results results to show in the diagram
maxMin Show “max”, “min” or “max and min” result values

Remarks
Combine with SolvSelectResultsPosition to draw results values at specific positions

The following table lists the possible values for result.

Name Description
“AxialDeflection” Draw axial deflection diagram.
“AxialForce” Draw axial force diagram.
“Deflection” Draw deflection diagram.
“Moment” Draw moment diagram.
“Shear” Draw shear diagram.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 159 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSelectClear
Restores the current selection for obtaining analysis results to the default which is all elements in the model and all load
combinations, or all load cases if no combinations exist.

Syntax
SolvSelectClear()

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 160 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSelectLoadCases
Selects the load cases to be considered when obtaining results.

Syntax
SolvSelectLoadCases( loadCase1, … loadCase[n] )

Parameters
loadCase1

optional, name or index of loadCase to select. If no load cases are specified all active load cases will be selected

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
The number of active load cases selected.

Page 161 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSelectCombinations
Selects the load combinations to be considered when obtaining results.

Syntax
SolvSelectCombinations( combination1, … combination[n] )

Parameters
combination1 optional index of combination to select. If no load combinations are specified all active load combinations will
be selected

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations. To select load combinations of a specific type use SolvSelectCombinationsType.

Return Value
The number of active combinations selected.

Page 162 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSelectCombinationsType
Selects the load combinations of a specific type to be considered when obtaining results.

Syntax
SolvSelectCombinations( type, combination1, … combination[n] )

Parameters
type type of combinations to select "service", "strength" or "quasi"
combination1 optional index of load combination to select. If no load combinations are specified all active load
combinations of specified type will be selected

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations. To select load combinations regardless of the type use SolvSelectCombinations.

If no combinations of the specified type could be selected then 0 is returned and all the combinations are selected, this is
because it is not possible to have a model with no valid selection.

Return Value
The number of active combinations selected.

Page 163 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSelectElements
Sets the elements to be considered when obtaining results.

Syntax
SolvSelectElements( element1, … element[n] )

Parameters
element1 optional, index of element to select. If no elements are specified all elements will be selected

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 164 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSelectSpans
Sets the spans to be considered when obtaining results.

Syntax
SolvSelectSpans( member, span1, … span[n] )

Parameters
member name or index of member that contains the spans to be selected
span1 optional index of span to be selected. If no spans are specified all spans in given member will be selected

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 165 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSelectMembers
Sets the members to be considered when obtaining results.

Syntax
SolvSelectMembers( member1, … member[n] )

Parameters
member1 optional, name or index of member to select. If no members are specified all members will be selected

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 166 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSelectResultsPosition
Sets the specific position where results are obtained from.

Syntax
SolvSelectReslutsPosition( position )

Parameters
position optional distance from start node of current selection (m, ft), OR, ratio of position from start to end
(dimensionless) where results are to be retrieved. If omitted the selection is reset to retrieve results from entire selection

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 167 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSelectResultsRange
Sets the specific range where results are obtained from.

Syntax
SolvSelectReslutsRange( start, end )

Parameters
start distance from start node of current selection to start of range (m, ft), OR, ratio of position from start node to start
of range (dimensionless) where results are to be retrieved.

end distance from start node of current selection to end of range (m, ft), OR, ratio of position from start node to end
of range (dimensionless) where results are to be retrieved.

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Page 168 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetSelectionDescription
Gets a description of the current selection.

Syntax
SolvGetSelectionDescription()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

The selection can also be changed to only retrieve results at a specific position (either an absolute position or a ratio
from start to end) on the elements, spans or members.

Return Value
A three part string containing whether the current selection:

 contains load cases or load combinations and the names and identifiers of all selected load cases/combinations.
 contains elements, spans or members and the names (members only) and identifiers of all selected
elements/spans/members.
 will retrieve results at a specified position (optional).

Axial Force
SolvGetMaxAxialForce()

Page 169 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxAxialForce
Returns the maximum axial force for the current selection in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxAxialForce()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Maximum axial force (kN, kips).

SolvGetMinAxialForce()

Page 170 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinAxialForce
Returns the minimum axial force for the current selection in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMinAxialForce()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Minimum axial force (kN, kips).

SolvGetMaxAxialForcePos()

Page 171 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxAxialForcePos
Returns the distance along an element, span or member of the maximum axial force for the current selection in the
active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxAxialForcePos()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Distance (m, ft) from the start of the element, span or member (returned from SolvGetMaxAxialForceId) to where the
maximum axial force occurs.

SolvGetMinAxialForcePos()

Page 172 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinAxialForcePos
Returns the distance along an element, span or member of the minimum axial force for the current selection in the
active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMinAxialForcePos()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Distance (m, ft) from the start of the element, span or member (returned from SolvGetMinAxialForceId) to where the
minimum axial force occurs.

SolvGetMaxAxialForceIndex( type )

Page 173 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxAxialForceIndex
Returns the index of the element, span or member where the maximum axial force occurs for the current selection in the
active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxAxialForceIndex( type )

Parameters
type optional type of identifier to return

Remarks
The following table lists the possible type of identifiers to return. The default is “Default”.

Name Description
“Default” The index returned is based on the current
selection, be that element, span or member.
“Element” The index of the element is returned.
“Span” The index of the span is returned.
“Member” The index of the member is returned.

Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
The index of the element, span or member where the maximum axial force occurs.

SolvGetMinAxialForceIndex( type )

Page 174 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinAxialForceIndex
Returns the index of the element, span or member where the minimum axial force occurs for the current selection in the
active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMinAxialForceIndex( type )

Parameters
type optional type of identifier to return

Remarks
The following table lists the possible type of identifiers to return. The default is “Default”.

Name Description
“Default” The index returned is based on the current
selection, be that element, span or member.
“Element” The index of the element is returned.
“Span” The index of the span is returned.
“Member” The index of the member is returned.

Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
The index of the element, span or member where the minimum axial force occurs.

SolvGetMaxAxialForceLoadContext()

Page 175 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxAxialForceLoadContext
Returns whether the maximum axial force for the current selection in the active solver model occurs in a Load Case or a
Load Combination.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxAxialForceLoadContext()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Returns "LoadCases" if the maximum axial force occurs in a selected load case; otherwise returns "LoadCombinations" If
the maximum axial force occurs in a selected load combination.

SolvGetMinAxialForceLoadContext()

Page 176 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinAxialForceLoadContext
Returns whether the minimum axial force for the current selection in the active solver model occurs in a Load Case or a
Load Combination.

Syntax
SolvGetMinAxialForceLoadContext()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Returns "LoadCases" if the minimum axial force occurs in a selected load case; otherwise returns "LoadCombinations" If
the minimum axial force occurs in a selected load combination.

SolvGetMaxAxialForceLoadIndex()

Page 177 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxAxialForceIndex
Returns the index of the first load case or load combination in which the maximum axial force for the current selection in
the active solver model occurs.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxAxialForceLoadIndex()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

If both load cases and load combinations are selected the SolvGetMaxAxialForceLoadContext function can be used to
determine whether the index refers to a load case or a load combination.

Return Value
Returns the index of the first load case or load combination in which the maximum axial force occurs.

Example
SolvCreateSolver() = 1.000
SolvSetXml(_analysisModel) = 1.000
SolvSelectLoadCases() = 3.000
SolvAnalyse() = 1.000
SolvGetMaxAxialForce() = 200.000 kN
loadContext = SolvGetMaxAxialForceLoadContext() = "LoadCases"
index = SolvGetMaxAxialForceLoadIndex() = 3.000
SolvGetTableRowValue( loadContext, index, "Name" ) = "Imposed"
SolvGetMinAxialForceLoadIndex()

Page 178 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinAxialForceIndex
Returns the index of the first load case or load combination in which the minimum axial force for the current selection in
the active solver model occurs.

Syntax
SolvGetMinAxialForceLoadIndex()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

If both load cases and load combinations are selected the SolvGetMinAxialForceLoadContext function can be used to
determine whether the index refers to a load case or a load combination.

Return Value
Returns the index of the first load case or load combination in which the minimum axial force occurs.

Example
SolvCreateSolver() = 1.000
SolvSetXml(_analysisModel) = 1.000
SolvSelectLoadCases() = 3.000
SolvAnalyse() = 1.000
SolvGetMinAxialForce() = 0.000 kN
loadContext = SolvGetMinAxialForceLoadContext() = "LoadCases"
index = SolvGetMinAxialForceLoadIndex() = 1.000
SolvGetTableRowValue( loadContext, index, "Name" ) = "Self Weight"
Shear
SolvGetMaxShear()

Page 179 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxShear
Returns the maximum shear force for the current selection in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxShear()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Maximum shear force (kN, kips).

SolvGetMinShear()

Page 180 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinShear
Returns the minimum shear force for the current selection in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMinShear()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Minimum shear force (kN, kips).

SolvGetMaxShearPos()

Page 181 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxShearPos
Returns the distance along an element, span or member of the maximum shear force for the current selection in the
solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxShearPos( )

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations. To retrieve results for a subset of the model you can select specific elements, spans or members.
To retrieve results for specific load cases or load combinations you can select those load cases or load combinations. To
retrieve results at a specific location you can select that result position.

Return Value
Distance (m, ft) from the start of the element, span or member (returned from SolvGetMaxShearId) to where the
maximum shear force occurs.

SolvGetMinShearPos()

Page 182 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinShearPos
Returns the distance along an element, span or member of the minimum shear force for the current selection in the
active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMinShearPos()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Distance (m, ft) from the start of the element, span or member (returned from SolvGetMinShearId) to where the
minimum shear force occurs.

SolvGetMaxShearIndex( type )

Page 183 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxShearIndex
Returns the index of the element, span or member where the maximum shear force occurs for the current selection in
the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxShearIndex( type )

Parameters
type optional type of identifier to return

Remarks
The following table lists the possible type of identifiers to return. The default is “Default”.

Name Description
“Default” The index returned is based on the current
selection, be that element, span or member.
“Element” The index of the element is returned.
“Span” The index of the span is returned.
“Member” The index of the member is returned.

Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
The index of the element, span or member where the maximum shear force occurs.

SolvGetMinShearIndex( type )

Page 184 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinShearIndex
Returns the index of the element, span or member where the minimum shear force occurs for the current selection in
the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMinShearIndex( type )

Parameters
type optional type of identifier to return

Remarks
The following table lists the possible type of identifiers to return. The default is “Default”.

Name Description
“Default” The index returned is based on the current
selection, be that element, span or member.
“Element” The index of the element is returned.
“Span” The index of the span is returned.
“Member” The index of the member is returned.

Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
The index of the element, span or member where the minimum shear force occurs.

SolvGetMaxShearForceLoadContext()

Page 185 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxShearForceLoadContext
Returns whether the maximum shear force for the current selection in the active solver model occurs in a Load Case or a
Load Combination.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxShearForceLoadContext()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Returns "LoadCases" if the maximum shear force occurs in a selected load case; otherwise returns "LoadCombinations" If
the maximum shear force occurs in a selected load combination.

SolvGetMinShearForceLoadContext()

Page 186 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinShearForceLoadContext
Returns whether the minimum shear force for the current selection in the active solver model occurs in a Load Case or a
Load Combination.

Syntax
SolvGetMinShearForceLoadContext()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Returns "LoadCases" if the minimum shear force occurs in a selected load case; otherwise returns "LoadCombinations" If
the minimum shear force occurs in a selected load combination.

SolvGetMaxShearLoadIndex()

Page 187 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxShearIndex
Returns the index of the first load case or load combination in which the maximum shear force for the current selection
in the active solver model occurs.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxShearLoadIndex()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

If both load cases and load combinations are selected the SolvGetMaxShearLoadContext function can be used to
determine whether the index refers to a load case or a load combination.

Return Value
Returns the index of the first load case or load combination in which the maximum shear force occurs.

Example
SolvCreateSolver() = 1.000
SolvSetXml(_analysisModel) = 1.000
SolvSelectLoadCases() = 3.000
SolvAnalyse() = 1.000
SolvGetMaxShear() = 92.625 kN
loadContext = SolvGetMaxShearLoadContext() = "LoadCases"
index = SolvGetMaxShearLoadIndex() = 2.000
SolvGetTableRowValue( loadContext, index, "Name" ) = "Permanent"
SolvGetMinShearLoadIndex()

Page 188 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinShearIndex
Returns the index of the first load case or load combination in which the minimum shear force for the current selection
in the active solver model occurs.

Syntax
SolvGetMinShearLoadIndex()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

If both load cases and load combinations are selected the SolvGetMinShearLoadContext function can be used to
determine whether the index refers to a load case or a load combination.

Return Value
Returns the index of the first load case or load combination in which the minimum shear force occurs.

Example
SolvCreateSolver() = 1.000
SolvSetXml(_analysisModel) = 1.000
SolvSelectLoadCases() = 3.000
SolvAnalyse() = 1.000
SolvGetMinShear() = -92.625 kN
loadContext = SolvGetMinShearLoadContext() = "LoadCases"
index = SolvGetMinShearLoadIndex() = 2.000
SolvGetTableRowValue( loadContext, index, "Name" ) = "Permanent"
SolvGetMaxMomentShear()

Page 189 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxMomentShear
Returns the shear force at the position of the maximum moment for the current selection in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxMomentShear()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Shear force (kN, kips) at the position of the maximum moment.

SolvGetMinMomentShear()

Page 190 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinMomentShear
Returns the shear force at the position of the minimum moment for the current selection in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMinMomentShear()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Shear force (kN, kips) at the position of the minimum moment.

Moment
SolvGetMaxMoment()

Page 191 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxMoment
Returns the maximum moment for the current selection in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxMoment()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Maximum moment (kNm, kip_ft).

SolvGetMinMoment()

Page 192 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinMoment
Returns the minimum moment for the current selection in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMinMoment()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Minimum moment (kNm, kip_ft).

SolvGetMaxMomentPos()

Page 193 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxMomentPos
Returns the distance along an element, span or member of the maximum moment for the current selection in the active
solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxMomentPos()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Distance (m, ft) from the start of the element, span or member (returned from SolvGetMaxMomentId) to where the
maximum moment occurs.

SolvGetMinMomentPos()

Page 194 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinMomentPos
Returns the distance along an element, span or member of the minimum moment for the current selection in the active
solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMinMomentPos()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Distance (m, ft) from the start of the element, span or member (returned from SolvGetMinMomentId) to where the
minimum moment occurs.

SolvGetMaxMomentIndex( type )

Page 195 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxMomentIndex
Returns the index of the element, span or member where the maximum moment occurs for the current selection in the
active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxMomentIndex( type )

Parameters
type optional type of identifier to return

Remarks
The following table lists the possible type of identifiers to return. The default is “Default”.

Name Description
“Default” The index returned is based on the current
selection, be that element, span or member.
“Element” The index of the element is returned.
“Span” The index of the span is returned.
“Member” The index of the member is returned.

Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
The index of the element, span or member where the maximum moment occurs.

SolvGetMinMomentIndex( type )

Page 196 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinMomentIndex
Returns the index of the element, span or member where the minimum moment occurs for the current selection in the
active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMinMomentIndex( type )

Parameters
type optional type of identifier to return

Remarks
The following table lists the possible type of identifiers to return. The default is “Default”.

Name Description
“Default” The index returned is based on the current
selection, be that element, span or member.
“Element” The index of the element is returned.
“Span” The index of the span is returned.
“Member” The index of the member is returned.

Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
The index of the element, span or member where the minimum moment occurs.

SolvGetMaxMomentLoadContext()

Page 197 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxMomentLoadContext
Returns whether the maximum moment for the current selection in the active solver model occurs in a Load Case or a
Load Combination.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxMomentLoadContext()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Returns "LoadCases" if the maximum moment occurs in a selected load case; otherwise returns "LoadCombinations" If
the maximum moment occurs in a selected load combination.

SolvGetMinMomentLoadContext()

Page 198 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinMomentLoadContext
Returns whether the minimum moment for the current selection in the active solver model occurs in a Load Case or a
Load Combination.

Syntax
SolvGetMinMomentLoadContext()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Returns "LoadCases" if the minimum moment occurs in a selected load case; otherwise returns "LoadCombinations" If
the minimum moment occurs in a selected load combination.

SolvGetMaxMomentLoadIndex()

Page 199 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxMomentIndex
Returns the index of the first load case or load combination in which the maximum moment for the current selection in
the active solver model occurs.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxMomentLoadIndex()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

If both load cases and load combinations are selected the SolvGetMaxMomentLoadContext function can be used to
determine whether the index refers to a load case or a load combination.

Return Value
Returns the index of the first load case or load combination in which the maximum moment occurs.

Example
SolvCreateSolver() = 1.000
SolvSetXml(_analysisModel) = 1.000
SolvSelectLoadCases() = 3.000
SolvAnalyse() = 1.000
SolvGetMaxMoment() = 150.516 kNm
loadContext = SolvGetMaxMomentLoadContext() = "LoadCases"
index = SolvGetMaxMomentLoadIndex() = 2.000
SolvGetTableRowValue( loadContext, index, "Name" ) = "Permanent"
SolvGetMinMomentLoadIndex()

Page 200 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinMomentIndex
Returns the index of the first load case or load combination in which the minimum moment for the current selection in
the active solver model occurs.

Syntax
SolvGetMinMomentLoadIndex()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

If both load cases and load combinations are selected the SolvGetMinMomentLoadContext function can be used to
determine whether the index refers to a load case or a load combination.

Return Value
Returns the index of the first load case or load combination in which the minimum moment occurs.

Example
SolvCreateSolver() = 1.000
SolvSetXml(_analysisModel) = 1.000
SolvSelectLoadCases() = 3.000
SolvAnalyse() = 1.000
SolvGetMinMoment() = 0.000 kNm
loadContext = SolvGetMinMomentLoadContext() = "LoadCases"
index = SolvGetMinMomentLoadIndex() = 3.000
SolvGetTableRowValue( loadContext, index, "Name" ) = "Imposed"
SolvGetMaxShearMoment()

Page 201 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxShearMoment
Returns the moment at the position of the maximum shear force for the current selection in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxShearMoment()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Moment (kNm, kip_ft) at the position of the maximum shear force.

SolvGetMinShearMoment()

Page 202 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinShearMoment
Returns the moment at the position of the minimum shear force for the current selection in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMinShearMoment()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Moment (kNm, kip_ft) at the position of the minimum shear force.

Deflection
SolvGetMaxDeflection( global )

Page 203 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxDeflection
Returns the maximum deflection for the current selection in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxDeflection( global )

Parameters
global optional parameter to return global or local deflection if the current selection contains spans or members
rather than elements. The local deflection of a span is always 0 at supported ends. At the supported end of
cantilever spans the end rotation is equal to the end rotation of the adjoining span. If the member consists of
a single cantilever span then the end rotation is zero. If the selection contains elements then the global
deflection is always returned. The default value is True(1)

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Maximum deflection (m, ft).

SolvGetMinDeflection( global )

Page 204 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinDeflection
Returns the minimum deflection for the current selection in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMinDeflection( global )

Parameters
global optional parameter to return global or local deflection if the current selection contains spans or members
rather than elements. The local deflection of a span is always 0 at supported ends. At the supported end of
cantilever spans the end rotation is equal to the end rotation of the adjoining span. If the member consists of
a single cantilever span then the end rotation is zero. If the selection contains elements then the global
deflection is always returned. The default value is True(1)

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Minimum deflection (m, ft).

SolvGetMaxDeflectionPos( global )

Page 205 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxDeflectionPos
Returns the distance along an element, span or member of the maximum deflection for the current selection in the
active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxDeflectionPos( global )

Parameters
global optional parameter to return global or local deflection if the current selection contains spans or members
rather than elements. The local deflection of a span is always 0 at supported ends. At the supported end of
cantilever spans the end rotation is equal to the end rotation of the adjoining span. If the member consists of
a single cantilever span then the end rotation is zero. If the selection contains elements then the global
deflection is always returned. The default value is True(1)

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Distance (m, ft) from the start of the element, span or member (returned from SolvGetMaxDeflectionId) to where the
maximum deflection occurs.

SolvGetMinDeflectionPos( global )

Page 206 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinDeflectionPos
Returns the distance along an element, span or member of the minimum deflection for the current selection in the active
solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMinDeflectionPos( global )

Parameters
global optional parameter to return global or local deflection if the current selection contains spans or members
rather than elements. The local deflection of a span is always 0 at supported ends. At the supported end of
cantilever spans the end rotation is equal to the end rotation of the adjoining span. If the member consists of
a single cantilever span then the end rotation is zero. If the selection contains elements then the global
deflection is always returned. The default value is True(1)

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Distance (m, ft) from the start of the element, span or member (returned from SolvGetMinDeflectionId) to where the
minimum deflection occurs.

SolvGetMaxDeflectionIndex( type, global )

Page 207 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxDeflectionIndex
Returns the index of the element, span or member where the maximum deflection occurs for the current selection in the
active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxDeflectionIndex( type, global )

Parameters
type optional type of identifier to return
global optional parameter to return global or local deflection if the current selection contains spans or members
rather than elements. The local deflection of a span is always 0 at supported ends. At the supported end of
cantilever spans the end rotation is equal to the end rotation of the adjoining span. If the member consists of
a single cantilever span then the end rotation is zero. If the selection contains elements then the global
deflection is always returned. The default value is True(1)

Remarks
The following table lists the possible type of identifiers to return. The default is “Default”.

Name Description
“Default” The index returned is based on the current
selection, be that element, span or member.
“Element” The index of the element is returned.
“Span” The index of the span is returned.
“Member” The index of the member is returned.

Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
The index of the element, span or member where the maximum deflection occurs.

SolvGetMinDeflectionIndex( type, global )

Page 208 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinDeflectionIndex
Returns the index of the element, span or member where the minimum deflection occurs for the current selection in the
active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMinDeflectionIndex( type, global )

Parameters
type optional type of identifier to return
global optional parameter to return global or local deflection if the current selection contains spans or members
rather than elements. The local deflection of a span is always 0 at supported ends. At the supported end of
cantilever spans the end rotation is equal to the end rotation of the adjoining span. If the member consists of
a single cantilever span then the end rotation is zero. If the selection contains elements then the global
deflection is always returned. The default value is True(1)

Remarks
The following table lists the possible type of identifiers to return. The default is “Default”.

Name Description
“Default” The index returned is based on the current
selection, be that element, span or member.
“Element” The index of the element is returned.
“Span” The index of the span is returned.
“Member” The index of the member is returned.

Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
The index of the element, span or member where the minimum deflection occurs.

SolvGetMaxDeflectionLoadContext( global )

Page 209 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxDeflectionLoadContext
Returns whether the maximum deflection for the current selection in the active solver model occurs in a Load Case or a
Load Combination.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxDeflectionLoadContext( global )

Parameters
global optional parameter to return global or local deflection if the current selection contains spans or members
rather than elements. The local deflection of a span is always 0 at supported ends. At the supported end of
cantilever spans the end rotation is equal to the end rotation of the adjoining span. If the member consists of
a single cantilever span then the end rotation is zero. If the selection contains elements then the global
deflection is always returned. The default value is True(1)

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Returns "LoadCases" if the maximum deflection occurs in a selected load case; otherwise returns "LoadCombinations" If
the maximum deflection occurs in a selected load combination.

SolvGetMinDeflectionLoadContext( global )

Page 210 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinDeflectionLoadContext
Returns whether the minimum deflection for the current selection in the active solver model occurs in a Load Case or a
Load Combination.

Syntax
SolvGetMinDeflectionLoadContext( global )

Parameters
global optional parameter to return global or local deflection if the current selection contains spans or members
rather than elements. The local deflection of a span is always 0 at supported ends. At the supported end of
cantilever spans the end rotation is equal to the end rotation of the adjoining span. If the member consists of
a single cantilever span then the end rotation is zero. If the selection contains elements then the global
deflection is always returned. The default value is True(1)

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Returns "LoadCases" if the minimum deflection occurs in a selected load case; otherwise returns "LoadCombinations" If
the minimum deflection occurs in a selected load combination.

SolvGetMaxDeflectionLoadIndex()

Page 211 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxDeflectionIndex
Returns the index of the first load case or load combination in which the maximum deflection for the current selection in
the active solver model occurs.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxDeflectionLoadIndex( global )

Parameters
global optional parameter to return global or local deflection if the current selection contains spans or members
rather than elements. The local deflection of a span is always 0 at supported ends. At the supported end of
cantilever spans the end rotation is equal to the end rotation of the adjoining span. If the member consists of
a single cantilever span then the end rotation is zero. If the selection contains elements then the global
deflection is always returned. The default value is True(1)

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

If both load cases and load combinations are selected the SolvGetMaxDeflectionLoadContext function can be used to
determine whether the index refers to a load case or a load combination.

Return Value
Returns the index of the first load case or load combination in which the maximum deflection occurs.

Example
SolvCreateSolver() = 1.000
SolvSetXml(_analysisModel) = 1.000
SolvSelectLoadCases() = 3.000
SolvAnalyse() = 1.000
SolvGetMaxDeflection() = 7.003 mm
loadContext = SolvGetMaxDeflectionLoadContext() = "LoadCases"
index = SolvGetMaxDeflectionLoadIndex() = 2.000
SolvGetTableRowValue( loadContext, index, "Name" ) = "Permanent"
SolvGetMinDeflectionLoadIndex()

Page 212 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinDeflectionIndex
Returns the index of the first load case or load combination in which the minimum deflection for the current selection in
the active solver model occurs.

Syntax
SolvGetMinDeflectionLoadIndex( global )

Parameters
global optional parameter to return global or local deflection if the current selection contains spans or members
rather than elements. The local deflection of a span is always 0 at supported ends. At the supported end of
cantilever spans the end rotation is equal to the end rotation of the adjoining span. If the member consists of
a single cantilever span then the end rotation is zero. If the selection contains elements then the global
deflection is always returned. The default value is True(1)

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

If both load cases and load combinations are selected the SolvGetMinDeflectionLoadContext function can be used to
determine whether the index refers to a load case or a load combination.

Return Value
Returns the index of the first load case or load combination in which the minimum deflection occurs.

Example
SolvCreateSolver() = 1.000
SolvSetXml(_analysisModel) = 1.000
SolvSelectLoadCases() = 3.000
SolvAnalyse() = 1.000
SolvGetMinDeflection() = 0.000 mm
loadContext = SolvGetMinDeflectionLoadContext() = "LoadCases"
index = SolvGetMinDeflectionLoadIndex() = 2.000
SolvGetTableRowValue( loadContext, index, "Name" ) = "Permanent"
Axial Deflection

Page 213 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxAxialDeflection()

Page 214 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxAxialDeflection
Returns the maximum axial deflection for the current selection in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxAxialDeflection()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Maximum axial deflection (m, ft).

SolvGetMinAxialDeflection()

Page 215 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinAxialDeflection
Returns the minimum axial deflection for the current selection in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMinAxialDeflection()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Minimum axial deflection (m, ft).

SolvGetMaxAxialDeflectionPos()

Page 216 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxAxialDeflectionPos
Returns the distance along an element, span or member of the maximum axial deflection for the current selection in the
active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxAxialDeflectionPos()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Distance (m, ft) from the start of the element, span or member (returned from SolvGetMaxAxialDeflectionId) to where
the maximum axial deflection occurs.

SolvGetMinAxialDeflectionPos()

Page 217 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinAxialDeflectionPos
Returns the distance along an element, span or member of the minimum axial deflection for the current selection in the
active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMinAxialDeflectionPos()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Distance (m, ft) from the start of the element, span or member (returned from SolvGetMinAxialDeflectionId) to where
the minimum axial deflection occurs.

SolvGetMaxAxialDeflectionIndex( type )

Page 218 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxAxialDeflectionIndex
Returns the index of the element, span or member where the maximum axial deflection occurs for the current selection
in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxAxialDeflectionIndex( type )

Parameters
type optional type of identifier to return

Remarks
The following table lists the possible type of identifiers to return. The default is “Default”.

Name Description
“Default” The index returned is based on the current
selection, be that element, span or member.
“Element” The index of the element is returned.
“Span” The index of the span is returned.
“Member” The index of the member is returned.

Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
The index of the element, span or member where the maximum axial deflection occurs.

SolvGetMinAxialDeflectionIndex( type )

Page 219 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinAxialDeflectionIndex
Returns the index of the element, span or member where the minimum axial deflection occurs for the current selection
in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMinAxialDeflectionIndex( type )

Parameters
type optional type of identifier to return

Remarks
The following table lists the possible type of identifiers to return. The default is “Default”.

Name Description
“Default” The index returned is based on the current
selection, be that element, span or member.
“Element” The index of the element is returned.
“Span” The index of the span is returned.
“Member” The index of the member is returned.

Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
The index of the element, span or member where the minimum axial deflection occurs.

SolvGetMaxAxialDeflLoadContext()

Page 220 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxAxialDeflectionLoadContext
Returns whether the maximum axial deflection for the current selection in the active solver model occurs in a Load Case
or a Load Combination.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxAxialDeflectionLoadContext( global )

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Returns "LoadCases" if the maximum axial deflection occurs in a selected load case; otherwise returns
"LoadCombinations" If the maximum axial deflection occurs in a selected load combination.

SolvGetMinAxialDeflLoadContext()

Page 221 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinAxialDeflectionLoadContext
Returns whether the minimum axial deflection for the current selection in the active solver model occurs in a Load Case
or a Load Combination.

Syntax
SolvGetMinAxialDeflectionLoadContext( global )

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

Return Value
Returns "LoadCases" if the minimum axial deflection occurs in a selected load case; otherwise returns
"LoadCombinations" If the minimum axial deflection occurs in a selected load combination.

SolvGetMaxAxialDeflLoadIndex()

Page 222 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxAxialDeflLoadIndex
Returns the index of the first load case or load combination in which the maximum axial deflection for the current
selection in the active solver model occurs.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxAxialDeflLoadIndex()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

If both load cases and load combinations are selected the SolvGetMaxAxialDeflLoadContext function can be used to
determine whether the index refers to a load case or a load combination.

Return Value
Returns the index of the first load case or load combination in which the maximum axial deflection occurs.

Example
SolvCreateSolver() = 1.000
SolvSetXml(_analysisModel) = 1.000
SolvSelectLoadCases() = 3.000
SolvAnalyse() = 1.000
SolvGetMaxAxialDeflection() = 0.000 mm
loadContext = SolvGetMaxAxialDeflLoadContext() = "LoadCases"
index = SolvGetMaxAxialDeflLoadIndex() = 1.000
SolvGetTableRowValue( loadContext, index, "Name" ) = "Self Weight"
SolvGetMinAxialDeflLoadIndex()

Page 223 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinAxialDeflLoadIndex
Returns the index of the first load case or load combination in which the minimum axial deflection for the current
selection in the active solver model occurs.

Syntax
SolvGetMinAxialDeflLoadIndex()

Remarks
Once a model has been analysed, by default, the results retrieved from the solver are for all elements in the model and
all load combinations, if the model contains load combinations, otherwise load cases. To retrieve results for a subset of
the model you can select specific elements, spans or members. You can also select specific load cases or load
combinations.

If both load cases and load combinations are selected the SolvGetMinAxialDeflLoadContext function can be used to
determine whether the index refers to a load case or a load combination.

Return Value
Returns the index of the first load case or load combination in which the minimum axial deflection occurs.

Example
SolvCreateSolver() = 1.000
SolvSetXml(_analysisModel) = 1.000
SolvSelectLoadCases() = 3.000
SolvAnalyse() = 1.000
SolvGetMinAxialDeflection() = 0.000 mm
loadContext = SolvGetMinAxialDeflLoadContext() = "LoadCases"
index = SolvGetMinAxialDeflLoadIndex() = 1.000
SolvGetTableRowValue( loadContext, index, "Name" ) = "Self Weight"
Node Deflection
SolvGetMaxHorizontalDeflection( node, global )

Page 224 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxHorizontalDeflection
Returns the maximum horizontal deflection of the specified node in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxHorizontalDeflection( node, global )

Parameters
node identifier or label of the node
global optional parameter to return global deflection (True) or deflection in the nodes user coordinate system if the
node has one (False). The default value is True(1)

Return Value
Maximum horizontal deflection (m, ft) of the specified node.

SolvGetMinHorizontalDeflection( node, global )

Page 225 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinHorizontalDeflection
Returns the minimum horizontal deflection of the specified node in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMinHorizontalDeflection( node, global )

Parameters
node identifier or label of the node
global optional parameter to return global deflection (True) or deflection in the nodes user coordinate system if the
node has one (False). The default value is True(1)

Return Value
Minimum horizontal deflection (m, ft) of the specified node.

SolvGetMaxVerticalDeflection( node, global )

Page 226 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxVerticalDeflection
Returns the maximum vertical deflection of the specified node in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxVerticalDeflection( node, global )

Parameters
node identifier or label of the node
global optional parameter to return global deflection (True) or deflection in the nodes user coordinate system if the
node has one (False). The default value is True(1)

Return Value
Maximum vertical deflection (m, ft) of the specified node.

SolvGetMinVerticalDeflection( node, global )

Page 227 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinVerticalDeflection
Returns the minimum vertical deflection of the specified node in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMinVerticalDeflection( node, global )

Parameters
node identifier or label of the node
global optional parameter to return global deflection (True) or deflection in the nodes user coordinate system if the
node has one (False). The default value is True(1)

Return Value
Minimum vertical deflection (m, ft) of the specified node.

SolvGetMaxRotationalDeflection( node )

Page 228 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxRotationalDeflection
Returns the maximum rotational deflection of the specified node in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxRotationalDeflection( node )

Parameters
node identifier or label of the node

Return Value
Maximum rotational deflection (°) of the specified node.

SolvGetMinRotationalDeflection( node )

Page 229 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinRotationalDeflection
Returns the minimum rotational deflection of the specified node in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMinRotationalDeflection( node )

Parameters
node identifier or label of the node

Return Value
Minimum rotational deflection (°) of the specified node.

Node Reaction
SolvGetMaxHorizontalReaction( node, global )

Page 230 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxHorizontalReaction
Returns the maximum horizontal reaction of the specified node in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxHorizontalReaction( node, global )

Parameters
node identifier or label of the node
global optional parameter to return global reaction (True) or reaction in the nodes user coordinate system if the
node has one (False). The default value is True(1)

Return Value
Maximum horizontal reaction (kN, kips) of the specified node.

SolvGetMinHorizontalReaction( node, global )

Page 231 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinHorizontalReaction
Returns the minimum horizontal reaction of the specified node in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMinHorizontalReaction( node, global )

Parameters
node identifier or label of the node
global optional parameter to return global reaction (True) or reaction in the nodes user coordinate system if the
node has one (False). The default value is True(1)

Return Value
Minimum horizontal reaction (kN, kips) of the specified node.

SolvGetMaxVerticalReaction( node, global )

Page 232 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxVerticalReaction
Returns the maximum vertical reaction of the specified node in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxVerticalReaction( node, global )

Parameters
node identifier or label of the node
global optional parameter to return global reaction (True) or reaction in the nodes user coordinate system if the
node has one (False). The default value is True(1)

Return Value
Maximum vertical reaction (kN, kips) of the specified node.

SolvGetMinVerticalReaction( node, global )

Page 233 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinVerticalReaction
Returns the minimum vertical reaction of the specified node in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMinVerticalReaction( node, global )

Parameters
node identifier or label of the node
global optional parameter to return global reaction (True) or reaction in the nodes user coordinate system if the
node has one (False). The default value is True(1)

Return Value
Minimum vertical reaction (kN, kips) of the specified node.

SolvGetMaxMomentReaction( node )

Page 234 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxMomentReaction
Returns the maximum moment reaction of the specified node in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxMomentReaction( node )

Parameters
node identifier or label of the node

Return Value
Maximum moment reaction (kNm, kip_ft) of the specified node.

SolvGetMinMomentReaction( node )

Page 235 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinMomentReaction
Returns the minimum moment reaction of the specified node in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMinMomentReaction( node )

Parameters
node identifier or label of the node

Return Value
Minimum moment reaction (kNm, kip_ft) of the specified node.

Base Reaction
SolvGetMaxHorizontalBaseReaction()

Page 236 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxHorizontalBaseReaction
Returns the maximum horizontal base reaction of the solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxHorizontalBaseReaction()

Return Value
Maximum horizontal base reaction (kN, kips).

SolvGetMinHorizontalBaseReaction()

Page 237 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinHorizontalBaseReaction
Returns the minimum horizontal base reaction of the solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMinHorizontalBaseReaction()

Return Value
Minimum horizontal base reaction (kN, kips).

SolvGetMaxVerticalBaseReaction()

Page 238 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxVerticalBaseReaction
Returns the maximum vertical base reaction of the solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxVerticalBaseReaction()

Return Value
Maximum vertical base reaction (kN, kips).

SolvGetMinVerticalBaseReaction()

Page 239 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinVerticalBaseReaction
Returns the minimum vertical base reaction of the solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMinVerticalBaseReaction()

Return Value
Minimum vertical base reaction (kN, kips).

SolvGetMaxMomentBaseReaction()

Page 240 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxMomentBaseReaction
Returns the maximum moment base reaction of the solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMaxMomentBaseReaction()

Return Value
Maximum moment base reaction (kNm, kip_ft).

SolvGetMinMomentBaseReaction()

Page 241 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMinMomentBaseReaction
Returns the minimum moment base reaction of the solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMinMomentBaseReaction()

Return Value
Minimum moment base reaction (kNm, kip_ft).

Element end forces


SolvGetMaxEndAxialForce( elementEnd )

Page 242 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxEndAxialForce
Returns the maximum axial force exerted by the start/end of the selected element(s).

Syntax
SolvGetMaxEndForceAxial( elementEnd )

Parameters
elementEnd identifies the end of the element; start = 1, end = 2

Return Value
Maximum axial force exerted by the start/end of the element (kN, kips).

SolvGetMaxEndShear( elementEnd )

Page 243 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxEndShear
Returns the maximum shear exerted by the start/end of the selected element(s).

Syntax
SolvGetMaxEndShear ( elementEnd )

Parameters
elementEnd identifies the end of the element; start = 1, end = 2

Return Value
Maximum shear exerted by the start/end of the element (kN, kips).

SolvGetMaxEndMoment( elementEnd )

Page 244 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaxEndMoment
Returns the maximum moment at the start/end of the selected element(s).

Syntax
SolvGetMaxEndMoment( elementEnd )

Parameters
elementEnd identifies the end of the element; start = 1, end = 2

Return Value
Maximum moment exerted by the start/end of the element (kNm, kip_ft).

Page 245 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetOutputOption
Returns the value of the specified output option.

Syntax
SolvGetOutputOption( optionName )

Parameters
optionName Name of the option to return

Return Value
Option value

Remarks
A solver model includes a range of output options which correspond to the output options available in the 2D analysis
calculation. The output is only generated by the 2D analysis calculation but if you use the solver user interface then you
can query these options.

Option name Type Description


"LoadCaseResults" True/Fal Include results by load case
se
"CombinationResults" True/Fal Include results by combination
se
"ModelSketches" True/Fal Include sketches for the entire model
se
"MemberSketches" True/Fal Include sketches for every member
se
"ElementSketches" True/Fal Include sketches for every element
se
"MemberTables" True/Fal Include table results for every member
se
"ElementTables" True/Fal Include table results for every element
se
"IntermediateResults" 0 - 100 When outputting results tables for max/min results
also include additional intermediate results. The
value returned by this option is the number of
intermediate results to include.
"GeometryTables" True/Fal Include tables for the node, element, span and
se member details

Page 246 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

"GeometrySketches" True/Fal Include geometry sketch for the entire model


se
"LoadingTables" True/Fal Include tables for load cases, loads and combinations
se
"LoadingSketches" True/Fal Include loading sketches for each load case
se
"DeflectionTables" True/Fal Include tables for total deflection (perpendicular and
se axial combined)
"DeflectionSketches" True/Fal Include sketches for total deflection (perpendicular
se and axial combined)
"NodeDeflectionTables" True/Fal Include tables for nodal deflection results
se
"BaseReactionTable" True/Fal Include table for base reaction results
se
"ReactionTables" True/Fal Include tables for node reaction results
se
"ReactionSketches" True/Fal Include sketches for node reaction results
se
"EndForceTables" True/Fal Include tables for element end force results
se
"PerpendicularDeflectionT String Include load combinations of type
type" "All"/"Service"/Strength", for perpendicular
deflection results.
"PerpendicularDeflectionT True/Fal Include tables for perpendicular deflection results
ables" se
"PerpendicularDeflectionS True/Fal Include sketches for perpendicular deflection results
ketches" se
"DeflectionEnvelopeType" String Include load combinations of type
"All"/"Service"/Strength", for perpendicular
deflection envelope results.
"DeflectionEnvelopeTable True/Fal Include tables for perpendicular deflection envelope
s" se results
"DeflectionEnvelopeSketc True/Fal Include sketches for perpendicular deflection
hes" se envelope results
"AxialDeflectionType" String Include load combinations of type
"All"/"Service"/Strength", for axial deflection results.
"AxialDeflectionTables" True/Fal Include tables for axial deflection results
se
"AxialDeflectionSketches" True/Fal Include sketches for axial deflection results
se
"AxialDeflectionEnvelopeT String Include load combinations of type
ype" "All"/"Service"/Strength", for axial deflection
envelope results.
"AxialDeflectionEnvelopeT True/Fal Include tables for axial deflection envelope results
ables" se
"AxialDeflectionEnvelopeS True/Fal Include sketches for axial deflection envelope results
ketches" se

Page 247 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

"MomentShearEnvelopeT String Include load combinations of type


ype" "All"/"Service"/Strength", for moment and shear
envelope results.
"MomentShearEnvelopeT True/Fal Include tables for moment and shear envelope
ables" se results
"MomentShearEnvelopeSk True/Fal Include sketches for moment and shear envelope
etches" se results
"MomentShearType" String Include load combinations of type
"All"/"Service"/Strength", for moment and shear
results.
"MomentShearTables" True/Fal Include tables for moment and shear results
se
"MomentShearSketches" True/Fal Include sketches for moment and shear results
se
"AxialForceType" String Include load combinations of type
"All"/"Service"/Strength", for axial force results.
"AxialForceTables" True/Fal Include tables for axial force results
se
"AxialForceSketches" True/Fal Include sketches for axial force results
se
"AxialForceEnvelopeType" String Include load combinations of type
"All"/"Service"/Strength", for axial force envelope
results.
"AxialForceEnvelopeTable True/Fal Include tables for axial force envelope results
s" se
"AxialForceEnvelopeSketc True/Fal Include sketches for axial force envelope results
hes" se

Page 248 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSetOutputOption
Sets the value of the specified output option.

Syntax
SolvSetOutputOption( optionName, value )

Parameters
optionName Name of the option to set
value Value of the option to set

Remarks
A solver model includes a range of output options which correspond to the output options available in the 2D analysis
calculation. The output is only generated by the 2D analysis calculation but if you use the solver user interface then you
can query these options.

Option name Type Description


"LoadCaseResults" True/Fal Include results by load case
se
"CombinationResults" True/Fal Include results by combination
se
"ModelSketches" True/Fal Include sketches for the entire model
se
"MemberSketches" True/Fal Include sketches for every member
se
"ElementSketches" True/Fal Include sketches for every element
se
"MemberTables" True/Fal Include table results for every member
se
"ElementTables" True/Fal Include table results for every element
se
"IntermediateResults" 0 - 100 When outputting results tables for max/min results
also include additional intermediate results. The
value returned by this option is the number of
intermediate results to include.
"GeometryTables" True/Fal Include tables for the node, element, span and
se member details
"GeometrySketches" True/Fal Include geometry sketch for the entire model
se
"LoadingTables" True/Fal Include tables for load cases, loads and combinations
se

Page 249 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

"LoadingSketches" True/Fal Include loading sketches for each load case


se
"DeflectionTables" True/Fal Include tables for total deflection (perpendicular and
se axial combined)
"DeflectionSketches" True/Fal Include sketches for total deflection (perpendicular
se and axial combined)
"NodeDeflectionTables" True/Fal Include tables for nodal deflection results
se
"BaseReactionTable" True/Fal Include table for base reaction results
se
"ReactionTables" True/Fal Include tables for node reaction results
se
"ReactionSketches" True/Fal Include sketches for node reaction results
se
"EndForceTables" True/Fal Include tables for element end force results
se
"PerpendicularDeflectionT String Include load combinations of type
type" "All"/"Service"/Strength", for perpendicular
deflection results.
"PerpendicularDeflectionT True/Fal Include tables for perpendicular deflection results
ables" se
"PerpendicularDeflectionS True/Fal Include sketches for perpendicular deflection results
ketches" se
"DeflectionEnvelopeType" String Include load combinations of type
"All"/"Service"/Strength", for perpendicular
deflection envelope results.
"DeflectionEnvelopeTable True/Fal Include tables for perpendicular deflection envelope
s" se results
"DeflectionEnvelopeSketc True/Fal Include sketches for perpendicular deflection
hes" se envelope results
"AxialDeflectionType" String Include load combinations of type
"All"/"Service"/Strength", for axial deflection results.
"AxialDeflectionTables" True/Fal Include tables for axial deflection results
se
"AxialDeflectionSketches" True/Fal Include sketches for axial deflection results
se
"AxialDeflectionEnvelopeT String Include load combinations of type
ype" "All"/"Service"/Strength", for axial deflection
envelope results.
"AxialDeflectionEnvelopeT True/Fal Include tables for axial deflection envelope results
ables" se
"AxialDeflectionEnvelopeS True/Fal Include sketches for axial deflection envelope results
ketches" se
"MomentShearEnvelopeT String Include load combinations of type
ype" "All"/"Service"/Strength", for moment and shear
envelope results.
"MomentShearEnvelopeT True/Fal Include tables for moment and shear envelope
ables" se results

Page 250 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

"MomentShearEnvelopeSk True/Fal Include sketches for moment and shear envelope


etches" se results
"MomentShearType" String Include load combinations of type
"All"/"Service"/Strength", for moment and shear
results.
"MomentShearTables" True/Fal Include tables for moment and shear results
se
"MomentShearSketches" True/Fal Include sketches for moment and shear results
se
"AxialForceType" String Include load combinations of type
"All"/"Service"/Strength", for axial force results.
"AxialForceTables" True/Fal Include tables for axial force results
se
"AxialForceSketches" True/Fal Include sketches for axial force results
se
"AxialForceEnvelopeType" String Include load combinations of type
"All"/"Service"/Strength", for axial force envelope
results.
"AxialForceEnvelopeTable True/Fal Include tables for axial force envelope results
s" se
"AxialForceEnvelopeSketc True/Fal Include sketches for axial force envelope results
hes" se

Page 251 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetCombinationCount
Gets the total combination count for the current solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetCombinationCount()

Return Value
The total combination count for the current solver model.

Page 252 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetCombinationDisplayName
Returns the display name of the specified combination.

Syntax
SolvGetCombinationDisplayName( combination )

Parameters
combination name or numeric index of combination

Return Value
Combination display name.

Page 253 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetCombinationSource
Gets the requested source property value for the specified combination.

Syntax
SolvGetCombinationSource( combination, source, defaultValue )

Parameters
combination identifier of the combination
source optional name or index of the source property value to return, omit to return all names and values in a string
defaultValue optional default value to return if source property does not exist for the specified combination

Remarks
When a pre-defined combination is selected additional properties are associated with the combination which specify the
source data for the combination.

The possible source values names and their corresponding values are:

 “Design Code” – The design code of the combination


 “Region” – The region of the combination
 “Table” – The table from which the combination was selected
 “Name” – The name of the combination
 “Category” – The category of the combination
 “Type” – “Strength”, “Service”, “Quasi” or “None”

Return Value
The requested source property value, if the source value does not exist the default value is returned, If no default value
is specified an error will occur.

Page 254 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetCombinationSourceCount
Returns the number of source properties defined for the specified combination.

Syntax
SolvGetCombinationSourceCount( combination )

Parameters
combination identifier of the combination

Remarks
If a standard pre-defined combination has been selected the combination will include properties which define the source
data of that combination. This function can be used in conjunction with the SolvGetCombinationSource function to
retrieve all of the properties which are defined for a particular combination.

Return Value
The number of source properties associated with the specified combination.

Page 255 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetElementCount
Gets the total element count for the current solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetElementCount()

Return Value
The total element count for the current solver model.

Page 256 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetElementLength
Returns the length of the specified element.

Syntax
SolvGetElementLength( element )

Parameters
element the index of the element

Return Value
Length of element (m, ft).

Page 257 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetLoadCaseCount
Gets the total load case count for the current solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetLoadCaseCount()

Return Value
The total load case count for the current solver model.

Page 258 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaterialSource
Gets the requested source property value for the specified material.

Syntax
SolvGetMaterialSource( material, source, defaultValue )

Parameters
material name or identifier of the material
source optional name or index of the source property value to return, omit to return all names and values in a string
defaultValue optional default value to return if source property does not exist for the specified material

Remarks
When a pre-defined material is selected additional properties are associated with the material which specify the source
data for the material.

The possible source values names and their corresponding values are:

 “Name” – The material name as it appears in the Materials table droplist


 “Type” – “DataList”, “DataTable” or “None”
 “File” – The datalist or datatable from which the material was selected
 “Page” – The name of the datalist page from which the material was selected
 “Selection” – The name of the selected datalist entry

Return Value
The requested source property value, if the source value does not exist the default value is returned, If no default value
is specified an error will occur.

Page 259 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaterialSourceCount
Returns the number of source properties defined for the specified material.

Syntax
SolvGetMaterialSourceCount( material )

Parameters
material name or identifier of the material

Remarks
If a standard pre-defined material has been selected the material will include properties which define the source data of
that material. This function can be used in conjunction with the SolvGetMaterialSource function to retrieve all of the
properties which are defined for a particular material.

Return Value
The number of source properties associated with the specified material.

Page 260 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMaterialSourceName
Returns the source property name of the specified source property for the specified material.

Syntax
SolvGetMaterialSourceName( material, index )

Parameters
material name or identifier of the material
index identifier of the source property

Remarks
If a standard pre-defined material has been selected the material will include properties which define the source data of
that material. This function can be used in conjunction with the SolvGetMaterialSourceCount & SolvGetMaterialSource
functions to retrieve all of the properties which are defined for a particular material.

Return Value
The name of the source property associated with the specified material.

Page 261 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMemberCantilevered
Determines whether a member is cantilevered at the specified end.

Syntax
SolvGetMemberCantilevered( member, end )

Parameters
member the name or index of the member
end “Start” or “End” to check the start or end of the member

Return Value
True if the member is cantilevered, otherwise False.

If the member was defined with supportedStart / supportedEnd as False in SolvAddMember then the member is
deemed to be cantilevered at that end. If not then this function will check if the end node of the member is free and that
there are no other supported elements supporting the end of the member. Note, only elements that are directly
connected to the member are checked as supports. If the opposite end node of these elements are not supported they
are deemed to be ‘hanging’ from the member rather than supporting it.

Page 262 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMemberCount
Gets the total member count for the current solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetMemberCount()

Return Value
The total member count for the current solver model.

Page 263 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMemberElements
Gets a list of element identifiers for the specified member.

Syntax
SolvGetMemberElements( member )

Parameters
member the name or index of the member

Return Value
A list of identifiers for the elements in the specified member.

Page 264 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetMemberLength
Returns the length of the specified member.

Syntax
SolvGetMemberLength( member )

Parameters
member the name or index of the member

Return Value
Length of member (m, ft).

Page 265 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetModifiedTimeStamp
Gets the active solver models time stamp.

Syntax
SolvGetModifiedTimeStamp()

Remarks
Each solver model maintains a timestamp which is a numeric value that identifies when the model was last modified. By
retrieving and storing this value it is possible to verify at a later time whether a model has been modified or not by
comparing the stored value with the current value.

Example
_analysisModelTimeStamp = SolvGetModifiedTimeStamp()
…
Do some calcs
…
Message( If(_analysisModelTimeStamp <> SolvGetModifiedTimeStamp(),
"Model has been modified", "Model has not been modified") )

Return Value
The numeric timestamp which identifies the last time the model was modified.

Page 266 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetNodeCount
Returns the total number of nodes in the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetNodeCount()

Return Value
The total number of nodes in the active solver model.

Page 267 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetSectionSource
Gets the requested source property value for the specified section.

Syntax
SolvGetSectionSource( section, source, defaultValue )

Parameters
section name or identifier of the section
source optional name or index of the source property value to return, omit to return all names and values in a string
defaultValue optional default value to return if the source property does not exist for the specified material

Remarks
When a pre-defined section is selected additional properties are associated with the section which specify the source
data for the section.

The possible source values names and their corresponding values are:

 “Material” – Material type, “Concrete”, “Steel” or “Timber”


 “Type” – Source data type, “DataList”,“Variables” or "Custom"
For Datalists:

o “File” – The datalist from which the section was selected


o “Page” – The name of the datalist page from which the section was selected
o “Selection” – The name of the selected datalist entry
For Variables:

o “Shape” – Shape type, “Circular”, “Rectangular”, “Flanged L” or “Flanged T”


o “Diameter”
o “Breadth”
o “Depth”
o “FlangeWidth”
o “FlangeDepth”
For Custom:

o “ReservedCount” - Number of reserved internal source properties


First query the number of available properties using SolvGetSectionSourceCount and then query each property using
SolvGetSectionSourceName and SolvGetSectionSource using the appropriate property index. Note that the first few
properties are reserved for internal properties, you can use the source property "ReservedCount" to determine how
many.

Page 268 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
The following expression will write out all of the properties for the specified section as variables. Assign the variable
"section" with either the Id or the name of the section you're interested in.

EvalFor( "i", SolvGetSectionSource(section, "ReservedCount"), "i


<= SolvGetSectionSourceCount(section)", +1,
"SetVar(SolvGetSectionSourceName(section, i),
Eval(SolvGetSectionSource(section, i)))" ) = ?

Return Value
The requested source property value, if the source value does not exist the default value is returned, if no default value is
specified an error will occur.

Page 269 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetSectionSourceCount
Returns the number of source properties defined for the specified section.

Syntax
SolvGetSectionSourceCount( section )

Parameters
section name or identifier of the section

Remarks
If a standard pre-defined section has been selected the section will include properties which define the source data of
that section. This function can be used in conjunction with the SolvGetSectionSource function to retrieve all of the
properties which are defined for a particular section.

Return Value
The number of source properties associated with the specified section.

Page 270 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetSectionSourceName
Returns the source property name of the specified source property for the specified section.

Syntax
SolvGetSectionSourceName( section, index )

Parameters
section name or identifier of the section
index identifier of the source property

Remarks
If a standard pre-defined section has been selected the section will include properties which define the source data of
that section. This function can be used in conjunction with the SolvGetSectionSourceCount & SolvGetSectionSource
functions to retrieve all of the properties which are defined for a particular section.

Return Value
The name of the source property associated with the specified section.

Page 271 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetSpanCount
Gets the total span count for a member in the current solver model.

Syntax
SolvGetSpanCount( member )

Parameters
member name or identifier of the member

Return Value
The total span count for the given member in the current solver model.

Page 272 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetSpanElements
Gets a list of element identifiers for the specified span.

Syntax
SolvGetSpanElements( member, span )

Parameters
member the name or index of the member
span the index of the span

Return Value
A list of identifiers for the elements in the specified span.

Page 273 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetSpanLength
Returns the length of the specified span.

Syntax
SolvGetSpanLength( member, span )

Parameters
member the name or index of the member
span the index of the span

Return Value
Length of span (m, ft).

Page 274 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvIdFromIndex
Gets the unique static Id of an item in one of the solver's database tables from the item's index.

Syntax
SolvIdFromIndex( table, index )

Parameters
table name of the solver database table the index refers to i.e. the name of the collection of items (Nodes,
Elements, etc.)
index numeric identifier which denotes the position of the item in the table

Remarks
The possible table values are:

 "Nodes"
 "Elements"
 "Members"
 "Sections"
 "Materials"
 "LoadCases"
 "LoadCombinations"
Each of the solver database tables contains a series of related items e.g. Nodes, Elements, Sections, etc. Each item in a
table has an index, an Id and for some item types a Name.

Index:

 The numeric identifier of an item which denotes the position of that item in the table, where 1 is the index of the
first item, 2 is the index of the second item, etc.

 An items index is subject to change as a result of other items being added or removed in the table

 The index of an item should only be used for a time period when you can guarantee that the content of the table
hasn’t changed e.g. you’re iterating through the table reading the contents of the table, once you’ve finished
iterating the table the index may change as a result of other changes to the model.

Id:

 A numeric identifier associated with a specific item which is guaranteed not to change during the lifetime of the
model

 Id’s are unique to all the items within a single table i.e. Two Nodes will never have the same Id but a Node and an
Element may have the same Id

Name:
Page 275 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

 A name is a string identifier associated with some item types e.g. Design Members but not Nodes or Elements

 A name must be unique to the items within a single table i.e. Two design members cannot have the same name
but a load case and a combination could have the same name

 An items name is subject to change because they are defined by the user therefore a name should only be used as
an identifier for a time period when you can guarantee that the name cannot change.

Return Value
The unique static id of the item in the table; or zero if an item with the specified Index does not exist.

Page 276 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvIdFromName
Gets the unique static Id of an item in one of the solver's database tables from the item's name.

Syntax
SolvIdFromName( table, name )

Parameters
table name of the solver database table the index refers to i.e. the name of the collection of items (Nodes,
Elements, etc.)
name name of the item in the table

Remarks
The possible table values are:

 "Nodes"
 "Elements"
 "Members"
 "Sections"
 "Materials"
 "LoadCases"
 "LoadCombinations"
Each of the solver database tables contains a series of related items e.g. Nodes, Elements, Sections, etc. Each item in a
table has an index, an Id and for some item types a Name.

Index:

 The numeric identifier of an item which denotes the position of that item in the table, where 1 is the index of the
first item, 2 is the index of the second item, etc.

 An items index is subject to change as a result of other items being added or removed in the table

 The index of an item should only be used for a time period when you can guarantee that the content of the table
hasn’t changed e.g. you’re iterating through the table reading the contents of the table, once you’ve finished
iterating the table the index may change as a result of other changes to the model.

Id:

 A numeric identifier associated with a specific item which is guaranteed not to change during the lifetime of the
model

 Id’s are unique to all the items within a single table i.e. Two Nodes will never have the same Id but a Node and an
Element may have the same Id

Name:
Page 277 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

 A name is a string identifier associated with some item types e.g. Design Members but not Nodes or Elements

 A name must be unique to the items within a single table i.e. Two design members cannot have the same name
but a load case and a combination could have the same name

 An items name is subject to change because they are defined by the user therefore a name should only be used as
an identifier for a time period when you can guarantee that the name cannot change.

Return Value
The unique static id of the item in the table; or zero if an item with the specified name does not exist.

Page 278 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvIndexFromId
Gets the index of an item in one of the solver's database tables from the item's unique Id.

Syntax
SolvIndexFromId( table, id )

Parameters
table name of the solver database table the id refers to i.e. the name of the collection of items (Nodes, Elements,
etc.)
id unique static identifier of the item in the table

Remarks
The possible table values are:

 "Nodes"
 "Elements"
 "Members"
 "Sections"
 "Materials"
 "LoadCases"
 "LoadCombinations"
Each of the solver database tables contains a series of related items e.g. Nodes, Elements, Sections, etc. Each item in a
table has an index, an Id and for some item types a Name.

Index:

 The numeric identifier of an item which denotes the position of that item in the table, where 1 is the index of the
first item, 2 is the index of the second item, etc.

 An items index is subject to change as a result of other items being added or removed in the table

 The index of an item should only be used for a time period when you can guarantee that the content of the table
hasn’t changed e.g. you’re iterating through the table reading the contents of the table, once you’ve finished
iterating the table the index may change as a result of other changes to the model.

Id:

 A numeric identifier associated with a specific item which is guaranteed not to change during the lifetime of the
model

 Id’s are unique to all the items within a single table i.e. Two Nodes will never have the same Id but a Node and an
Element may have the same Id

Name:
Page 279 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

 A name is a string identifier associated with some item types e.g. Design Members but not Nodes or Elements

 A name must be unique to the items within a single table i.e. Two design members cannot have the same name
but a load case and a combination could have the same name

 An items name is subject to change because they are defined by the user therefore a name should only be used as
an identifier for a time period when you can guarantee that the name cannot change.

Return Value
The index of the item in the table; or zero if an item with the specified Id does not exist.

Page 280 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvIndexFromName
Gets the index of an item in one of the solver's database tables from the item's unique name.

Syntax
SolvIndexFromName( table, name )

Parameters
table name of the solver database table the name parameter refers to i.e. the name of the collection of items
(Nodes, Elements, etc.)
name unique name of the item in the table

Remarks
The possible table values are:

 "Members"
 "Sections"
 "Materials"
 "LoadCases"
 "LoadCombinations"
Each of the solver database tables contains a series of related items e.g. Nodes, Elements, Sections, etc. Each item in a
table has an index, an Id and for some item types a Name.

Index:

 The numeric identifier of an item which denotes the position of that item in the table, where 1 is the index of the
first item, 2 is the index of the second item, etc.

 An items index is subject to change as a result of other items being added or removed in the table

 The index of an item should only be used for a time period when you can guarantee that the content of the table
hasn’t changed e.g. you’re iterating through the table reading the contents of the table, once you’ve finished
iterating the table the index may change as a result of other changes to the model.

Id:

 A numeric identifier associated with a specific item which is guaranteed not to change during the lifetime of the
model

 Id’s are unique to all the items within a single table i.e. Two Nodes will never have the same Id but a Node and an
Element may have the same Id

Name:

 A name is a string identifier associated with some item types e.g. Design Members but not Nodes or Elements

Page 281 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

 A name must be unique to the items within a single table i.e. Two design members cannot have the same name
but a load case and a combination could have the same name

 An items name is subject to change because they are defined by the user therefore a name should only be used as
an identifier for a time period when you can guarantee that the name cannot change.

Return Value
The index of the item in the table; or zero if an item with the specified name does not exist.

Page 282 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSelectTable
Selects the specified table as the active table.

Syntax
SolvSelectTable( tableName, sortColumn )

Parameters
tableName Name of the table to set as the active table
sortColumn Optional name of the column to sort by in ascending order

Remarks
The solver model and the calculated results are stored in a series of Database tables which can be queried directly by
selecting a table, iterating the rows in the table using SolvSelectNextRow or SolvSelectRow and then querying values in
specific columns of the table using SolvGetValue.

Table name Column name Description

"Nodes" Node data

"Id" Unique identifier of the node

"X" X location of the node (m, in)

"Z" Z location of the node (m, in)

"FreedomX" Fixity of the node in the x direction ("Fixed" or "Free")

"FreedomZ" Fixity of the node in the z direction ("Fixed" or "Free")

"FreedomRotational" Fixity of the node rotationally ("Fixed" or "Free")

"Label" Label of the node

"CoordinateSystem" Name of the coordinate system of the node

"CoordinateSystemAngl Angle of rotation of the coordinate system of the node


e"

"SpringX" Stiffness of the spring attached to the node in the x


direction (kN/m, kip/ft)

"SpringZ" Stiffness of the spring attached to the node in the z


direction (kN/m, kip/ft)

Page 283 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

"SpringRotational" Stiffness of the rotational spring attached to the node


(kNm/, kip_ft/

"Materials" Material data

"Id" Unique identifier of the material

"Name" Unique name of the material

"Density" Density of the material (kg/m3, lbm/ft3)

"YoungsModulus" Young’s modulus of the material (kN/mm2, ksi)

"ShearModulus" Shear modulus of the material (kN/mm2, ksi)

"ThermalCoefficent" Thermal coefficient of the material (C-1)

"Sections" Section data

"Id" Unique identifier of the section

"Name" Unique name of the section

"Area" Area of the section (mm2, in2)

"InertiaMajor" Second moments of area of the section (about Major axis)


(cm4, in4)

"InertiaMinor" Second moments of area of the section (about Minor axis)


(cm4, in4)

"ShearAreaY" Effective shear area when loading parallel to the Minor axis
(mm2, in2)

"ShearAreaZ" Effective shear area when loading parallel to the Major axis
(mm2, in2)

"Elements" Element data

"Id" Unique identifier of the element

"StartNode" Identifier of the start node of the element

"EndNode" Identifier of the end node of the element

"Material" Name of the element material

"Section" Name of the element section

"StartMomentRelease" Moment release of the element at the start node ("Fixed" or


"Free")

"EndMomentRelease" Moment release of the element at the end node ("Fixed" or


"Free")

Page 284 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

"AxialRelease" Axial release of the element ("Fixed", "Start" or "End")

"Rotated" True(1) if the section used is rotated

"Spans" Span data

"Id" Identifier of the span (Unique within a member)

"Member" Name of the member which contains the span

"Elements" Identifiers of the elements that make up the span

"Members" Member data

"Id" Unique identifier of the member

"Name" Unique name of the member

"SupportedStart" True(1) if the member was marked as being supported at


the start

"SupportedEnd" True(1) if the member was marked as being supported at


the end

"StartElement" Idenitifier of the start element of the member

"EndElement" Idenitifier of the end element of the member

"LoadCases" Load case data

"Id" Unique identifier of the load case

"Name" Unique name of the load case

"SelfWeight" Self weight factor of the load case

"Active" True(1) if the load case is active

"LoadCombinations" Load combination data

"Id" Unique identifier of the combination

"Name" Unique name of the combination

"DisplayName" Display name of the combination

"Type" Combination type ("Service", "Strength", Quasi" or "" is not


defined)

"Active" True(1) if the combination is active

"LoadCombinationCase Load combination/load case factor data


s"

Page 285 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

"LoadCombination" Name of the combination

"LoadCase" Name of the load case

"Factor" Factor that applies to the load case in the specified


combination

"NodeLoads" Node load data

"Node" Identifier of the node the load applies to

"LoadCase" Name of the load case that contains the load

"X" Force applied to the node in the local X direction (kN, kips)

"Z" Force applied to the node in the local Z direction (kN, kips)

"Moment" Moment applied to the node (kNm, kip_ft)

"SettlementLoads" Settlement load data

"Node" Identifier of the node the load applies to

"LoadCase" Name of the load case that contains the load

"X" Displacement applied to node in local X direction (m, ft)

"Z" Displacement applied to node in local Z direction (m, ft)

"Rotation" Rotation applied to node ()

"ElementLoads" Element load data

"Element" Identifier of the element the load applies to

"LoadCase" Name of the load case that contains the load

"Type" Type of load


("PointLoad","PointMoment","Udl","Vdl","UniformTempera
ture" or "Trapezoidal")

"PosType" Type of position used for "PosStart" and "PosEnd"


("Absolute" or "Ratio")

"PosStart" Start position of the load (m, ft) if "PosType" is "Absolute" or


dimensionless if "Ratio”

"PosEnd" End position of the load (m, ft) if "PosType" is "Absolute" or


dimensionless if "Ratio”

"LoadStart" Start load


(kN, kips) for"PointLoad" type
(kNm, kip_ft) for "PointMoment" type

Page 286 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

(kN/m, kips/ft) for "Udl", "Vdl" or "Trapezoidal" types


(C) for "UniformTemperature" type

"LoadEnd" End load (kN/m, kips/ft) for "Vdl" type

"Orientation" Orientation of load (except "PointMoment" or


"UniformTemperature")
"ProjectedX", "ProjectedZ", "GlobalX", "GlobalZ", "LocalX"
or "LocalZ"

"SpanLoads" Span load data

"Member" Name of the member the load applies to

"Span" Identifier of the span the load applies to

"LoadCase" Name of the load case that contains the load

"Type" Type of load


("PointLoad","PointMoment","Udl","Vdl","UniformTempera
ture" or "Trapezoidal")

"PosType" Type of position used for "PosStart" and "PosEnd"


("Absolute" or "Ratio")

"PosStart" Start position of the load (m, ft) if "PosType" is "Absolute" or


dimensionless if "Ratio”

"PosEnd" End position of the load (m, ft) if "PosType" is "Absolute" or


dimensionless if "Ratio”

"LoadStart" Start load


(kN, kips) for"PointLoad" type
(kNm, kip_ft) for "PointMoment" type
(kN/m, kips/ft) for "Udl", "Vdl" or "Trapezoidal" types
(C) for "UniformTemperature" type

"LoadEnd" End load (kN/m, kips/ft) for "Vdl" type

"Orientation" Orientation of load (except "PointMoment" or


"UniformTemperature")
"ProjectedX", "ProjectedZ", "GlobalX", "GlobalZ", "LocalX"
or "LocalZ"

"MemberLoads" Member load data

"Member" Name of the member the load applies to

"LoadCase" Name of the load case that contains the load

"Type" Type of load


("PointLoad","PointMoment","Udl","Vdl","UniformTempera
ture" or "Trapezoidal")

Page 287 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

"PosType" Type of position used for "PosStart" and "PosEnd"


("Absolute" or "Ratio")

"PosStart" Start position of the load (m, ft) if "PosType" is "Absolute" or


dimensionless if "Ratio”

"PosEnd" End position of the load (m, ft) if "PosType" is "Absolute" or


dimensionless if "Ratio”

"LoadStart" Start load


(kN, kips) for"PointLoad" type
(kNm, kip_ft) for "PointMoment" type
(kN/m, kips/ft) for "Udl", "Vdl" or "Trapezoidal" types
(C) for "UniformTemperature" type

"LoadEnd" End load (kN/m, kips/ft) for "Vdl" type

"Orientation" Orientation of load (except "PointMoment" or


"UniformTemperature")
"ProjectedX", "ProjectedZ", "GlobalX", "GlobalZ", "LocalX"
or "LocalZ"

"Errors" Error data

"Fatal" True(1) if the error is a fatal error (analysis could not


continue)

"Description" Error description

"Code" Error code

"Severity" Error severity ("Information", "Warning", "Error" or


"Critical")

"ItemIndex" Identifier of item that caused the error

"LoadCaseCombination Identifier of the load case/combination that caused the


" error

Return Value
The number of rows in the selected table; zero if the table is empty.

Page 288 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetTableRowValue
Returns the column value for the specified table and row.

Syntax
SolvGetTableRowValue( tableName, rowIndex, columnName )

Parameters
tableName Name of database table
rowIndex Row index
columnName Name of the column to return the value for

Remarks
SolvGetTableRowValue can be used to directly query a value in a table without having to first select the table and row to
query, also the currently selected table and row are not changed when using this function.

Refer to SolvSelectTable for the permitted tables names and SolvGetValue for the column names.

Return Value
Cell value from the specified table and row.

Page 289 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetValue
Returns the column value for the currently selected table and row.

Syntax
SolvGetValue( columnName )

Parameters
columnName Name of the column to return the value for

Remarks
The following table shows the possible values that can be requested for each table

Table name Column name Description

"Nodes" Node data

"Id" Unique identifier of the node

"X" X location of the node (m, in)

"Z" Z location of the node (m, in)

"FreedomX" Fixity of the node in the x direction ("Fixed" or "Free")

"FreedomZ" Fixity of the node in the z direction ("Fixed" or "Free")

"FreedomRotational" Fixity of the node rotationally ("Fixed" or "Free")

"Label" Label of the node

"CoordinateSystem" Name of the coordinate system of the node

"CoordinateSystemAngl Angle of rotation of the coordinate system of the node


e"

"SpringX" Stiffness of the spring attached to the node in the x


direction (kN/m, kip/ft)

"SpringZ" Stiffness of the spring attached to the node in the z


direction (kN/m, kip/ft)

"SpringRotational" Stiffness of the rotational spring attached to the node


(kNm/, kip_ft/

Page 290 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

"Materials" Material data

"Id" Unique identifier of the material

"Name" Unique name of the material

"Density" Density of the material (kg/m3, lbm/ft3)

"YoungsModulus" Young’s modulus of the material (kN/mm2, ksi)

"ShearModulus" Shear modulus of the material (kN/mm2, ksi)

"ThermalCoefficent" Thermal coefficient of the material (C-1)

"Sections" Section data

"Id" Unique identifier of the section

"Name" Unique name of the section

"Area" Area of the section (mm2, in2)

"InertiaMajor" Second moments of area of the section (about Major axis)


(cm4, in4)

"InertiaMinor" Second moments of area of the section (about Minor axis)


(cm4, in4)

"ShearAreaY" Effective shear area when loading parallel to the Minor axis
(mm2, in2)

"ShearAreaZ" Effective shear area when loading parallel to the Major axis
(mm2, in2)

"Elements" Element data

"Id" Unique identifier of the element

"StartNode" Identifier of the start node of the element

"EndNode" Identifier of the end node of the element

"Material" Name of the element material

"Section" Name of the element section

"StartMomentRelease" Moment release of the element at the start node ("Fixed" or


"Free")

"EndMomentRelease" Moment release of the element at the end node ("Fixed" or


"Free")

"AxialRelease" Axial release of the element ("Fixed", "Start" or "End")

Page 291 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

"Rotated" True(1) if the section used is rotated

"Length" Length of the element

"Spans" Span data

"Id" Identifier of the span (Unique within a member)

"Member" Name of the member which contains the span

"Elements" Identifiers of the elements that make up the span

"Length" Length of the span

"Members" Member data

"Id" Unique identifier of the member

"Name" Unique name of the member

"SupportedStart" True(1) if the member was marked as being supported at


the start

"SupportedEnd" True(1) if the member was marked as being supported at


the end

"StartElement" Idenitifier of the start element of the member

"EndElement" Idenitifier of the end element of the member

"Length" Length of the member

"LoadCases" Load case data

"Id" Unique identifier of the load case

"Name" Unique name of the load case

"SelfWeight" Self weight factor of the load case

"Active" True(1) if the load case is active

"LoadCombinations" Load combination data

"Id" Unique identifier of the combination

"Name" Unique name of the combination (may have _ULS or _SLS


suffix)

"DisplayName" Display name of the combination

"Type" Combination type ("Service", "Strength", Quasi" or "" is not


defined)

Page 292 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

"Active" True(1) if the combination is active

"LoadCombinationCase Load combination/load case factor data


s"

"LoadCombination" Name of the combination

"LoadCase" Name of the load case

"Factor" Factor that applies to the load case in the specified


combination

"NodeLoads" Node load data

"Node" Identifier of the node the load applies to

"LoadCase" Name of the load case that contains the load

"X" Force applied to the node in the local X direction (kN, kips)

"Z" Force applied to the node in the local Z direction (kN, kips)

"Moment" Moment applied to the node (kNm, kip_ft)

"SettlementLoads" Settlement load data

"Node" Identifier of the node the load applies to

"LoadCase" Name of the load case that contains the load

"X" Displacement applied to node in local X direction (m, ft)

"Z" Displacement applied to node in local Z direction (m, ft)

"Rotation" Rotation applied to node ()

"ElementLoads" Element load data

"Element" Identifier of the element the load applies to

"LoadCase" Name of the load case that contains the load

"Type" Type of load


("PointLoad","PointMoment","Udl","Vdl","UniformTempera
ture" or "Trapezoidal")

"PosType" Type of position used for "PosStart" and "PosEnd"


("Absolute" or "Ratio")

"PosStart" Start position of the load (m, ft) if "PosType" is "Absolute" or


dimensionless if "Ratio”

"PosEnd" End position of the load (m, ft) if "PosType" is "Absolute" or


dimensionless if "Ratio”

Page 293 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

"LoadStart" Start load


(kN, kips) for"PointLoad" type
(kNm, kip_ft) for "PointMoment" type
(kN/m, kips/ft) for "Udl", "Vdl" or "Trapezoidal" types
(C) for "UniformTemperature" type

"LoadEnd" End load (kN/m, kips/ft) for "Vdl" type

"Orientation" Orientation of load (except "PointMoment" or


"UniformTemperature")
"ProjectedX", "ProjectedZ", "GlobalX", "GlobalZ", "LocalX"
or "LocalZ"

"SpanLoads" Span load data

"Member" Name of the member the load applies to

"Span" Identifier of the span the load applies to

"LoadCase" Name of the load case that contains the load

"Type" Type of load


("PointLoad","PointMoment","Udl","Vdl","UniformTempera
ture" or "Trapezoidal")

"PosType" Type of position used for "PosStart" and "PosEnd"


("Absolute" or "Ratio")

"PosStart" Start position of the load (m, ft) if "PosType" is "Absolute" or


dimensionless if "Ratio”

"PosEnd" End position of the load (m, ft) if "PosType" is "Absolute" or


dimensionless if "Ratio”

"LoadStart" Start load


(kN, kips) for"PointLoad" type
(kNm, kip_ft) for "PointMoment" type
(kN/m, kips/ft) for "Udl", "Vdl" or "Trapezoidal" types
(C) for "UniformTemperature" type

"LoadEnd" End load (kN/m, kips/ft) for "Vdl" type

"Orientation" Orientation of load (except "PointMoment" or


"UniformTemperature")
"ProjectedX", "ProjectedZ", "GlobalX", "GlobalZ", "LocalX"
or "LocalZ"

"MemberLoads" Member load data

"Member" Name of the member the load applies to

"LoadCase" Name of the load case that contains the load

Page 294 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

"Type" Type of load


("PointLoad","PointMoment","Udl","Vdl","UniformTempera
ture" or "Trapezoidal")

"PosType" Type of position used for "PosStart" and "PosEnd"


("Absolute" or "Ratio")

"PosStart" Start position of the load (m, ft) if "PosType" is "Absolute" or


dimensionless if "Ratio”

"PosEnd" End position of the load (m, ft) if "PosType" is "Absolute" or


dimensionless if "Ratio”

"LoadStart" Start load


(kN, kips) for"PointLoad" type
(kNm, kip_ft) for "PointMoment" type
(kN/m, kips/ft) for "Udl", "Vdl" or "Trapezoidal" types
(C) for "UniformTemperature" type

"LoadEnd" End load (kN/m, kips/ft) for "Vdl" type

"Orientation" Orientation of load (except "PointMoment" or


"UniformTemperature")
"ProjectedX", "ProjectedZ", "GlobalX", "GlobalZ", "LocalX"
or "LocalZ"

"Errors" Error data

"Fatal" True(1) if the error is a fatal error (analysis could not


continue)

"Description" Error description

"Code" Error code

"Severity" Error severity ("Information", "Warning", "Error" or


"Critical")

"ItemIndex" Identifier of item that caused the error

"LoadCaseCombination Identifier of the load case/combination that caused the


" error

Return Value
Cell value as specified in the above table.

Page 295 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSelectRow
Selects the specified row of the currently selected solver database table.

Syntax
SolvSelectRow( rowIndex )

Parameters
rowIndex 1 based index of the row to select

Return Value
True (1) if successful; otherwise False (0).

Page 296 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSelectRowParent
Selects the parent table for the specified column of the currently selected row of the current solver database table.

Syntax
SolvSelectRowParent( parentIdentifier, sortColumn )

SolvSelectRowParent( parentTableName, parentIdentifier, sortColumn )

SolvSelectRowParent( parentTableName1, parentIdentifier1, parentTableName2, parentIdentifier2, sortColumn )

SolvSelectRowParent( parentTableName1, parentIdentifier1, parentTableName2, parentIdentifier2, parentTableName3,


parentIdentifier3, sortColumn )

Parameters
parentTableName[n] Name of the parent table
parentIdentifier[n] Identifier of the parent
sortColumn Optional name of the column to sort by in ascending order

Return Value
Returns the number of child rows within the selection.

Page 297 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSelectNextRow
Selects the next row of the currently selected solver database table.

Syntax
SolvSelectNextRow()

Return Value
True (1) if successful; otherwise False (0).

Page 298 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvGetXml
Returns the active solver model as a string in XML format.

Syntax
SolvGetXml()

Remarks
SolvGetXml saves the active solver model to a string in the Extensible Markup Language (XML) format which can be
subsequently loaded using SolvSetXml. When a model is saved the geometry, loading and output options are included
but analysis results are not included.

Return Value
Solver model as a string in XML format

Page 299 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SolvSetXml
Loads an existing solver model that was saved in XML format using SolvGetXml into the active solver model.

Syntax
SolvSetXml( xml )

Parameters
xml analysis model in the Extensible Markup Language (XML) format

Remarks
SolvSetXml loads an existing solver model that was saved in XML format using SolvGetXml into the active solver model.
When a model is loaded the geometry, loading and output options are restored.

Return Value
True (1) if solver model was loaded successfully; otherwise False (0).

Page 300 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Calc library functions

Page 301 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

CalcItemExists
Determines if an Calc Item exists in a Calc Library.

Syntax
CalcItemExists( fileName, itemName )

Parameters
fileName is the full path to the Calc Library file.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

Return Value
Returns True(1) if item exists; otherwise returns False(0).

Example
CalcItemExists( "$(SysLbrDir)TeddsBas.lbr", "CalcItemExists" ) =
1.000
CalcItemExists( "$(SysLbrDir)TeddsBas.lbr", "Invalid item name" ) =
0.000

Page 302 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

CalcLibraryExists
Determines if a Calc Library exists.

Syntax
CalcLibraryExists( fileName )

Parameters
fileName is the full path to the Calc Library file.

Return Value
Returns True(1) if library exists; otherwise returns False(0).

Example
CalcLibraryExists( "$(SysLbrDir)TeddsBas.lbr" ) = 1.000
CalcLibraryExists( "$(SysLbrDir)InvalidFileName.lbr" ) = 0.000

Page 303 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DeleteCalcItem
Deletes a Calc Item from a Calc Library.

Syntax
DeleteCalcItem( fileName, itemName )

Parameters
fileName is the full path to the Calc Library file.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item to delete.

Return Value
Returns True(1) if calc item was deleted; otherwise returns False(0).

Example
SetCalcItemText( "$(SysLbrDir)Test.lbr", "Test DeletCalcItem",
"Test" ) = ?
CalcItemExists("$(SysLbrDir)Test.lbr", "Test DeletCalcItem" ) = ?
DeleteCalcItem("$(SysLbrDir)Test.lbr", "Test DeletCalcItem" ) = ?
CalcItemExists("$(SysLbrDir)Test.lbr", "Test DeletCalcItem" ) = ?

Page 304 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetActiveCalcItemInfo
Returns a summary of the Calc Item that is currently being calculated.

Syntax
GetActiveCalcItemInfo( formatString )

Parameters
formatString is the optional format string which determines what information will be included in the summary
information that is returned by the function. When omitted the summary information will include the information as
determined by the users Tedds settings in Tedds Options->Calculating->Calc Items.

Return Value
Returns a string summarising the Calc Item currently being calculated.

Remarks
This function is typically used in a Show field which is included at the end of a Calc Item in hidden text. When calculated
as part of a calculation this ensures that every item output to the document will include a reference to the Calc Item that
generated that part of the output. By default the Tedds options are set to not output any information.

If there is no Calc Item currently being calculated an empty string will be returned.

Page 305 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetCalcItemAuthor
Returns the author property for a Calc Item in a Calc Library.

Syntax
GetCalcItemAuthor( fileName, itemName )

Parameters
fileName is the full path to the Calc Library file.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

Return Value
Returns the Calc Item author property as a string.

Remarks
If the Calc Item or the Calc Library does not exist this function will not throw an error it will return an empty string.

Example
GetCalcItemAuthor( "$(SysLbrDir)TeddsBas.lbr", "GetCalcItemAuthor" )
= "CSC (UK) Ltd"

Page 306 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetCalcItemDescription
Returns the description property for a Calc Item in a Calc Library.

Syntax
GetCalcItemDescription( fileName, itemName )

Parameters
fileName is the full path to the Calc Library file.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

Return Value
Returns the Calc Item description property as a string.

Remarks
If the Calc Item or the Calc Library does not exist this function will not throw an error it will return an empty string.

Example
GetCalcItemDescription( "$(SysLbrDir)TeddsBas.lbr",
"GetCalcItemDescription" ) = "Returns the description property for a Calc
Item in a Calc Library"

Page 307 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetCalcItemLongName
Returns the long name property for a Calc Item in a Calc Library.

Syntax
GetCalcItemLongName( fileName, itemName )

Parameters
fileName is the full path to the Calc Library file.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

Return Value
Returns the Calc Item long name property as a string.

Remarks
If the Calc Item or the Calc Library does not exist this function will not throw an error it will return an empty string.

Example
GetCalcItemLongName( "$(SysLbrDir)TeddsBas.lbr",
"GetCalcItemLongName" ) = "GetCalcItemLongName( fileName, itemName )"

Page 308 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetCalcItemProperties
Retrieves the properties of a Calc Item in a Calc Library.

Syntax
GetCalcItemProperties( fileName, itemName, longName, description, version, status, author )

Parameters
fileName is the full path to the Calc Library file.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

longName is the optional name of the variable to copy the long name property to.

description is the optional name of the variable to copy the description property to.

version is the optional name of the variable to copy the version property to.

status is the optional name of the variable to copy the status property to.

author is the optional name of the variable to copy the author property to.

Example
GetCalcItemProperties( "$(SysLbrDir)TeddsBas.lbr",
"GetCalcItemProperties", "longName", "description", "version",
"status", "author" ) = 1.000
longName = "GetCalcItemProperties( fileName, itemName, ... )"
description = "Retrieves the properties of a Calc Item in a Calc Library"
version = "11.0"
status = "General release"
author = "CSC (UK) Ltd"

Page 309 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetCalcItemsStrList
Returns a string listing all the Calc Items in a Calc Library where the items name starts with the specified prefix.

Syntax
GetCalcItemsStrList( fileName, itemPrefixName, formatString )

Parameters
fileName is the full path to the Calc Library file.

itemPrefixName is the optional Calc Item prefix name to search for. If no prefix is specified all items are returned.

formatString is the optional format for each element returned in the list, defaults to [Name]. The placeholders
[Name], [LongName], [Description], [Status], [Version], and [Author] can be used.

Return Value
Returns a string that contains a comma separated list of each Calc Item in the Calc Library that starts with the specified
prefix. Each element in the list is formatted according to the formatString argument.

Example
GetCalcItemsStrList( "$(SysLbrDir)TEDDSBas.lbr", "GetCalcItem" ) = ?
GetCalcItemsStrList( "$(SysLbrDir)TEDDSBas.lbr", "GetCalcItem", "[LongName] v[Version] by
[Author]" ) = ?

Page 310 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetCalcItemStatus
Returns the status property for a Calc Item in a Calc Library.

Syntax
GetCalcItemStatus( fileName, itemName )

Parameters
fileName is the full path to the Calc Library file.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

Return Value
Returns the Calc Item status property as a string.

Remarks
If the Calc Item or the Calc Library does not exist this function will not throw an error it will return an empty string.

Example
GetCalcItemStatus( "$(SysLbrDir)TeddsBas.lbr", "GetCalcItemStatus" )
= "General release"

Page 311 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetCalcItemText
Returns the content of a Calc Item in a Calc Library as a text string.

Syntax
GetCalcItemText( fileName, itemName )

Parameters
fileName is the full path to the Calc Library file.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

Return Value
Returns the content of a Calc Item as a string.

Remarks
If the Calc Item or the Calc Library does not exist this function will not throw an error it will return an empty string. If the
content of a Calc Item is not stored in text format then this function will also return an empty string.

Example
GetCalcItemText( "$(SysLbrDir)TeddsBas.lbr", "GetCalcItemText" ) =
""

Page 312 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetCalcItemVersion
Returns the version property for a Calc Item in a Calc Library.

Syntax
GetCalcItemVersion( fileName, itemName )

Parameters
fileName is the full path to the Calc Library file.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

Return Value
Returns the Calc Item version property as a string.

Remarks
If the Calc Item or the Calc Library does not exist this function will not throw an error it will return an empty string.

Example
GetCalcItemVersion( "$(SysLbrDir)TeddsBas.lbr", "GetCalcItemVersion"
) = "11.0"

Page 313 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SaveSectionVarsCalcItem
Save variables in the active Calc Section to a Calc Item in a Calc Library.

Syntax
SaveSectionVarsCalcItem( fileName, itemName, options, variable1, variable[n], …)

Paramaters
fileName is the full path to the Calc Library.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

options is the optional option flags, combine flags using addition.

1 = Do not include units (default = off)

2 = Include temporary variables (default = off)

4 = Include hidden variables (default = off)

variable1 is the optional name of the first variable to save, if omitted all variables are saved

variable[n] is the optional name of the nth variable to save

Remarks
An item saved with this function can be calculated by Tedds using the EvalCalcItem function.

Example
a = 1m
b = 10 kN/mm2
_tmp.Name = "Test"
SaveSectionVarsCalcItem("$(UserLbrDir)Test.lbr",
"SaveSectionVarsCalcItem1") = 1.000
SaveSectionVarsCalcItem("$(UserLbrDir)Test.lbr",
"SaveSectionVarsCalcItem2", 0, "a") = 1.000
SaveSectionVarsCalcItem("$(UserLbrDir)Test.lbr",
"SaveSectionVarsCalcItem3", 1+2+4) = 1.000

Page 314 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SaveVerifySectionVarsCalcItem
Save Verify expressions for variables in the active Calc Section to a Calc Item in a Calc Library.

Syntax
SaveVerifySectionVarsCalcItem( fileName, itemName, options, variable1, variable[n], …)

Paramaters
fileName is the full path to the Calc Library.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

options is the optional option flags, combine flags using addition.

2 = Include temporary variables (default = off)

4 = Include hidden variables (default = off)

variable1 is the optional name of the first variable to save, if omitted all variables are saved

variable[n] is the optional name of the nth variable to save

Remarks
This function creates a Calc Item that includes expressions to verify the values of variables are the same as they were
when the item was created. A verification item is useful for testing, start by running a calculation then create the
verification item, make changes to the calculation then calculate the verification item to verify that the results of the
calculation have not changed. An item saved with this function can be calculated by Tedds using the EvalCalcItem
function.

Example
a = 1m
b = 10 kN/mm2
_tmp.Name = "Test"
SaveVerifySectionVarsCalcItem("$(UserLbrDir)Test.lbr",
"SaveVerifySectionVarsCalcItem1") = 1.000
a = 2m
EvalCalcItem("$(UserLbrDir)Test.lbr",
"SaveVerifySectionVarsCalcItem1") = 1.000
Look at results in Progress Log to view verification failure

Page 315 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SelectCalcItem
Shows a standard user interface for selecting a Calc Item from a Calc Library.

Syntax
SelectCalcItem( fileName, itemName, open, title )

Parameters
fileName is the full path to the selected Calc Library file, can be an empty string if no file is selected.

itemName is the name of the selected Calc Item, can be an empty string if no item is selected.

open is the parameter that specifies whether an item is being selected for opening (True(1)) or saving
(False(0)).

title is the optional title for the user interface.

Return Value
Returns the name of the selected Calc Item, if the user Cancels the user interface the original itemName value is
returned.

Example
SelectCalcItem( "$(SysLbrDir)TeddsBas.lbr", "", True, "Select Calc
Item to open" ) = "SelectCalcLibrary"

Page 316 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SelectCalcLibrary
Shows a standard user interface for selecting a Calc Library file.

Syntax
SelectCalcLibrary ( fileName, open, title )

Parameters
fileName is the full path to the selected Calc Library file, can be an empty string if no file is selected.

open is the parameter that specifies whether a file is being selected for opening (True(1)) or saving (False(0)).

title is the optional title for the user interface.

Return Value
Returns the full path of the selected Calc Library, if the user Cancels the user interface the original fileName value is
returned.

Example
SelectCalcLibrary( "", True, "Select Calc Library to open" ) =
"$(SysLbrDir)Teddsbas.lbr"

Page 317 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetCalcItemAuthor
Sets the author property for a Calc Item in a Calc Library.

Syntax
SetCalcItemAuthor( fileName, itemName, value )

Parameters
fileName is the full path to the Calc Library file.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

value is the new value for the property

Return Value
Returns True(1) if property was set; otherwise returns False(0).

Remarks
The Calc Item must exist in the Calc Library for this function to succeed.

Example
SetCalcItemAuthor( "$(UserLbrDir)Test.lbr", "SetCalcItemAuthor",
"Me" ) = 1.000

Page 318 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetCalcItemDescription
Sets the description property for a Calc Item in a Calc Library.

Syntax
SetCalcItemDescription( fileName, itemName, value )

Parameters
fileName is the full path to the Calc Library file.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

value is the new value for the property

Return Value
Returns True(1) if property was set; otherwise returns False(0).

Remarks
The Calc Item must exist in the Calc Library for this function to succeed.

Example
SetCalcItemDescription( "$(UserLbrDir)Test.lbr",
"SetCalcItemDescription", "Description property" ) = 1.000

Page 319 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetCalcItemLongName
Sets the long name property for a Calc Item in a Calc Library.

Syntax
SetCalcItemLongName( fileName, itemName, value )

Parameters
fileName is the full path to the Calc Library file.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

value is the new value for the property

Return Value
Returns True(1) if property was set; otherwise returns False(0).

Remarks
The Calc Item must exist in the Calc Library for this function to succeed.

Example
SetCalcItemLongName( "$(UserLbrDir)Test.lbr", "SetCalcItemLongName",
"Long name property" ) = 1.000

Page 320 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetCalcItemStatus
Sets the status property for a Calc Item in a Calc Library.

Syntax
SetCalcItemStatus( fileName, itemName, value )

Parameters
fileName is the full path to the Calc Library file.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

value is the new value for the property

Return Value
Returns True(1) if property was set; otherwise returns False(0).

Remarks
The Calc Item must exist in the Calc Library for this function to succeed.

Example
SetCalcItemStatus( "$(UserLbrDir)Test.lbr", "SetCalcItemStatus",
"General release" ) = 1.000

Page 321 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetCalcItemText
Sets the content of a Calc Item in a Calc Library as a text string.

Syntax
SetCalcItemText( fileName, itemName, value )

Parameters
fileName is the full path to the Calc Library file.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

value is the new value for the property

Return Value
Returns True(1) if property was set; otherwise returns False(0).

Example
SetCalcItemText( "$(UserLbrDir)Test.lbr", "SetCalcItemText", "x =
1\; y = 2" ) = ?

Page 322 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetCalcItemVersion
Sets the version property for a Calc Item in a Calc Library.

Syntax
SetCalcItemVersion( fileName, itemName, value )

Parameters
fileName is the full path to the Calc Library file.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

value is the new value for the property

Return Value
Returns True(1) if property was set; otherwise returns False(0).

Remarks
The Calc Item must exist in the Calc Library for this function to succeed.

Example
SetCalcItemVersion( "$(UserLbrDir)Test.lbr", "SetCalcItemVersion",
"11.0" ) = 1.000

Page 323 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Calc section functions

Page 324 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

AddSection
Adds a new Calc Section to the variable database for the current document.

Syntax
AddSection()

Return Value
The unique identifier of the new Calc Section.

Remarks
Variables for each Calc Section are stored in a unique list so that variables in one Calc Section are separated from the
variables in all other Calc Sections. When variables are assigned or retrieved they automatically use the active Calc
Section or the Document Calc Section if no Calc Section is active. To set a section as the active section use SetSection.

Page 325 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DeleteSection
Deletes an existing Calc Section from the variable database for the current document.

Syntax
DeleteSection( sectionId )

Parameters
sectionId is the unique identifier of the section to delete.

Return Value
Returns True(1) if the section was deleted; otherwise returns False(0).

Page 326 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DeleteVarsInAllSections
Delete each occurrence of the named variables in the document section and in all Calc Sections.

Syntax
DeleteVarsInAllSections( varName1, … varName[n] )

Parameters
varName[n] is the name of a variable to delete. Named placeholders can be used within the variable name, see
remarks.

Remarks
If no parameters are specified then all the variables in the document and Calc Sections will be deleted.

Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Example
a1 = 1;a2 = 2;b1 = 3;b2 = 4
listvarsinsection()=
a1 = 1.000000;
a2 = 2.000000;
b1 = 3.000000;
b2 = 4.000000;
DeleteVarsInAllSections(“a1”, “b1”) = 1.000
listvarsinsection()=
a2 = 2.000000;
b2 = 4.000000;
DeleteVarsInAllSections(“a2”, “b2”) = 1.000
listvarsinsection()=
Using placeholders

a1 = 1;a2 = 2;b1 = 3;b2 = 4


Count = 1
listvarsinsection()=
Page 327 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Count = 1.000000;
a1 = 1.000000;
a2 = 2.000000;
b1 = 3.000000;
b2 = 4.000000;
DeleteVarsInAllSections(“a[Count]”, “b[Count]”) = 1.000
listvarsinsection()=
Count = 1.000000;
a2 = 2.000000;
b2 = 4.000000;
Count = 2
DeleteVarsInAllSections(“a[Count]”, “b[Count]”) = 1.000
listvarsinsection()=
Count = 2.000000;

Page 328 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DeleteVarsInSectionExcept
Deletes all variables in the current calc section except those named in the parameter list.

Syntax
DeleteVarsInSectionExcept( varName1,…varName[n] )

Parameters
varName[n]
Name of each variable that should not be deleted. Named placeholders can be used within the variable name, see
remarks.

Remarks
Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Example
a1 = 1;a2 = 2;b1 = 3;b2 = 4
listvarsinsection()=
a1 = 1.000000;
a2 = 2.000000;
b1 = 3.000000;
b2 = 4.000000;
deletevarsinsectionexcept (“a2”)=1.000
listvarsinsection()=
a2 = 2.000000;
Using placeholders

a1 = 1;a2 = 2;b1 = 3;b2 = 4


Count = 2
listvarsinsection()=
Count = 2.000000;
a1 = 1.000000;
a2 = 2.000000;

Page 329 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

b1 = 3.000000;
b2 = 4.000000;
deletevarsinsectionexcept (“Count”, “a[Count]”)=1.000
listvarsinsection()=
Count = 2.000000;
a2 = 2.000000;

Page 330 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DeleteVarsInSection
Deletes named variables from the current Calc Section, or the document section if the expression is not in a calc section.

Syntax
DeleteVarsInSection( varName1, … varName[n] )

Parameters
varName[n] is the name of a variable to delete. Named placeholders can be used within the variable name, see
remarks.

Remarks
If no parameters are specified then all variables in the current Calc Section will be deleted.

Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Examples
a1 = 2; b1 = 6; a2 = 4; b2 = 8
listvarsinsection()=
a1 = 2.000000;
a2 = 4.000000;
b1 = 6.000000;
b2 = 8.000000;
deletevarsinsection(“a1”, “b1”) = 1.000
listvarsinsection()=
a2 = 4.000000;
b2 = 8.000000;
deletevarsinsection(“a2”, “b2”) = 1.000
listvarsinsection()=
Using placeholders

Count = 1; a1 = 2; b1 = 6; a2 = 4; b2 = 8
listvarsinsection()=
Count = 1.000000;
Page 331 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

a1 = 2.000000;
a2 = 4.000000;
b1 = 6.000000;
b2 = 8.000000;
deletevarsinsection(“a[Count]”, “b[Count]”) = 1.000
listvarsinsection()=
Count = 1.000000;
a2 = 4.000000;
b2 = 8.000000;
Count = 2
deletevarsinsection(“a[Count]”, “b[Count]”) = 1.000
listvarsinsection()=
Count = 2.000000;

Page 332 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetSectionID
Returns the unique numeric identifier for the current Calc Section.

Syntax
GetSectionID()

Page 333 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetSectionName
Returns the name of the current Calc Section as a string value.

Syntax
GetSectionName()

Page 334 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetSectionVar
Returns the value of a Calc Section variable, if the variable does not exist then the specified default value is returned.

Syntax
GetSectionVar( sectionId, varName, [defaultValue] )

Paramaters
sectionId is the numeric section Id that uniquely identifies the section to get the value from. Use 0 to get the value
of a variable in the document section.

varName is the name of the variable. Named placeholders can be used within the variable name, see remarks.

defaultValue is the optional default value to return if the variable does not exist.

Remarks
The defaultValue parameter is optional but if it is not specified GetSectionVar will error if the variable does not exist.

Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Return Value
Value of variable or default value if variable does not exist.

Example
a1 = 1; a2 = 2; a3 = 3
getsectionvar( 0, “a1”, “undefined” ) = 1.000
getsectionvar( 0, “a2”, “undefined” ) = 2.000
getsectionvar( 0, “a3”, “undefined” ) = 3.000
getsectionvar( 0, “a4”, “undefined” ) = "undefined"
Using placeholders

Count = 1
getsectionvar( 0, “a[Count]”, “undefined” ) = 1.000
Page 335 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Count = 2
getsectionvar( 0, “a[Count]”, “undefined” ) = 2.000
Count = 3
getsectionvar( 0, “a[Count]”, “undefined” ) = 3.000
Count = 4
getsectionvar( 0, “a[Count]”, “undefined” ) = "undefined"

Page 336 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

ListAllSections
Returns a list of all the Calc Sections in the current document.

Syntax
ListAllSections()

Return Value
A string listing all the Calc Sections.

Page 337 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

ListVarsInSection
Returns a list of all the variables in the active Calc Section.

Syntax
ListVarsInSection ()

Return Value
A string listing all the variables.

Page 338 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetSection
Sets the active Calc Section.

Syntax
SetSection( sectionID, sectionName )

Parameters
sectionId is the numeric Calc Section identifier that uniquely identifies the section.

sectionName is the name of the Calc Section.

Return Value
True(1) if section was successfully activated; otherwise False(0).

Remarks
The active Calc Section is normally set automatically by Tedds as a document is calculated. The active Calc Section
determines where variables are stored and retrieved from.

Example
SetSection( 1, “Section 1” ) = 100.000

Page 339 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetSectionVar
Assigns a value to a Calc Section variable.

Syntax
SetSectionVar( sectionID, varName, value )

Parameters
sectionId is the numeric section Id that uniquely identifies the section to get the value from. Use 0 to get the value
of a variable in the document section.

varName is the variable name. Named placeholders can be used within the variable name, see remarks.

value is the value to assign to the variable.

Remarks
Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Return Value
True(1) if value was successfully assigned; otherwise False(0).

Example
SetSectionVar( 0, “a1”, 100 ) = 100.000
SetSectionVar( 0, “a2”, 150 ) = 150.000
SetSectionVar( 0, “a3”, 200 ) = 200.000
a1 = 100.000
a2 = 150.000
a3 = 200.000
Using placeholders

Count = 1
SetSectionVar( 0, “a[Count]”, 100 ) = 100.000

Page 340 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Count = 2
SetSectionVar( 0, “a[Count]”, 150 ) = 150.000
Count = 3
SetSectionVar( 0, “a[Count]”, 200 ) = 200.000
a1 = 100.000
a2 = 150.000
a3 = 200.000

Page 341 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Calculating

Page 342 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

CancelIf
Cancels the current calculation process if the specified condition is True(1)

Syntax
CancelIf( condition, message, cancelAction, log, output)

Parameters
condition expression which if True(1) will stop the calculation process

message optional message text used for prompt, log and output as appropriate

cancelAction optional action to take if condition is True "prompt" (default), "abort", "interrupt"

log If True (default) message is added to progress log

output If True (default) message is included in output

Return Value
Returns True(1) if cancel condition is True; otherwise returns False(0).

Remarks
Cancels the current calculation process in the same manner as if the user clicked about/interrupt. This can be useful for
stopping a calculation when you know subsequent calculations are likely to cause errors due to invalid input. For
example, a dive by zero error, square root of a negative number, etc. It is also useful for debugging purposes to stop a
calculation at a certain point. The calculation will be stopped in the context of what started the calculation, for example if
the calculation is occurring because the user clicked a button in a user interface then control will return to the user
interface, if however the calculation is in the process of producing the final output (i.e. the context is that the user
clicked calculate from Tedds or Tedds for Word then control will return to Tedds or Tedds for Word with interrupted
output (interrupt) or no output at all (abort).

Example
CancelIf( y == 0, "y cannot be zero", "interrupt" ) = ?
10 / y = ?

Page 343 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Eval/EvalString
Calculates a string as an expression and returns the result of the expression.

Syntax
Eval ( expression )

EvalString( expression )

Eval( format )

EvalString( format )

Eval( format, value1, value2, … )

EvalString( format, value1, value2, … )

Parameters
expression is the expression to calculate.

format is the string format. Place holders indicate where to insert values in the string and in what
format.

[variable name , format and precision , units] - for named placeholders or

[parameterIndex , format and precision , units] - for numeric placeholders

parameterIndex is the index of the parameter to insert

format is the format flag (F=Fixed, E=Engineering, G=General, S=Scientific).

precision is the precision of the result (0-15)

units is the units to display

value1 is the first value that can be inserted into the string

value[n] is the nth value that can be inserted into the string

Return Value
Returns the result of the expression.

Page 344 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Remarks
The eval function is used to calculate a string as an expression. It can be used to format a string that is then calculated or
it is sometimes used to prevent an expression from being calculated that would otherwise cause Tedds to error, for
example a divide by zero error. For more information about using the format string with placeholders please refer to the
documentation for StrFormat.

Eval( “1+2” ) = 3.000


This can be applied to any valid expression, such as displaying the value of a variable.

a = 1
Eval( “a” ) = 1.000
This function can be useful in ‘if’ statements, where one of the variables may not exist.

a = 1
b = 2
Eval( if( a<b, ”a”, ”c” ) ) = 1.000
If this was a simple if statement, the variable ‘c’ would be prompted for because although it is not ultimately selected (in
this case), both potential options are calculated then discarded. Using the Eval function, means that at the point of “a”
and “c” being calculated and then one selected by the ‘if’ statement, they are both strings and hence calculate without
error. Then they are converted into an expression by the Eval function.

Another example is to prevent a divide by zero error.

a = 1
b = 0
Eval( if( b==0, ”0", "a/b" ) ) = 0.000
This function is often used in the Tedds Calc Designer where in a ‘set variable’ object, the variable name can be created in
this way and hence the name built up from a string which may include a changing value (such as a subscript).

Eval(“a[1]”, value)
or with a named placeholder.

Eval(“a[value]”)
where value is a number that changes on each iteration of a loop, a1, a2, a3, etc.

The Eval function is also useful to allow a button in an interface to call a dialog, data lists, data tables etc.

The following example sets up a variable called Stress_string which contains either a call to a sub dialog, or a call to a
data list.

Stress_string = if(Stresses=="User
defined","InputWizardDialog(\"Timber stresses\")","DataList(
timber_grade_dlist,\"Grade
stresses\",\"C24\",\"Use\",\"\",\"Current_stress\",\"\",\"Show\"
,\"No\")")
This is then used in the button call as follows;

Eval(Stress_string)
The parameters which have quotes around them in this instance work OK because quotes can be represented within a
string by the \” symbol.

Page 345 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

EvalCalcItem
Calculates a Calc Library Item.

Syntax
EvalCalcItem( fileName, itemName, output)

Paramaters
filename is the full path to the Calc Library.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

output determines whether to output (Append) or discard (Discard) the calculated item.

Return Value
Returns True (1) if the item was calculated

Remarks
If the itemName is an empty string ("") then nothing will be calculated and no errors will be reported.

Example
EvalCalcItem( "$(SysLbrDir)LibraryName.lbr", "ItemName", Discard ) =
?

Page 346 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

EvalCalcItemIf
Calculates a Calc Library Item if the condition expression is True.

Syntax
EvalCalcItemIf( condition, fileName, itemName, output)

Paramaters
condition is the expression that must evaluate to either True (1) or False(0)

filename is the full path to the Calc Library.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

output determines whether to output (Append) or discard (Discard) the calculated item.

Return value
Returns True (1) if the item was calculated; otherwise False (0)

Example
x = 100
EvalCalcItemIf( x > 0, "$(SysLbrDir)LibraryName.lbr", "ItemName",
Discard ) = ?
x = -100
EvalCalcItemIf( x < 0, "$(SysLbrDir)LibraryName.lbr", "ItemName",
Discard ) = ?

Page 347 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

EvalCalcItemIfExists
Calculates a Calc Library Item if the item actually exists. If the item does not exist nothing will be calculated and no errors
will be reported.

Syntax
EvalCalcItemIfExists(fileName, itemName, output)

Paramaters
filename is the full path to the Calc Library.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

output determines whether to output (Append) or discard (Discard) the calculated item.

Return value
Returns True (1) if the item was calculated; otherwise False (0)

Example
EvalCalcItemIfExists( "$(SysLbrDir)LibraryName.lbr", "ItemName",
Discard ) = ?

Page 348 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

EvalDo
Calculates a series of strings.

Syntax
EvalDo(expression1,…expression[n] )

Parameters
expression1 is the first expression to calculate

expression[n] is the nth expression to calculate

Return Value
Returns True(1) if all expressions were calculated successfully; otherwise returns False(0).

Remarks
Note that the expressions must be defined as strings, i.e. enclosed in quotes.

Named placeholders can be used within the expressions.

Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the expression before the expression
is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables x 1, x2, x3
you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder allows you
to use the counter variable within the expression.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Example
$swapXY = EvalDo(
"SetVar(\"tmp\", x, \"th\")",
"SetVar(\"x\", y)",
"SetVar(\"y\", tmp)" )
x = 10
y = 20
swapXY = 1
x = 20
y = 10

Page 349 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

$swapX = EvalDo(
"SetVar(\"tmp\", x[i1], \"th\")",
"SetVar(\"x[i1]\", x[i2])",
"SetVar(\"x[i2]\", tmp)" )
x1 = 10
x2 = 20
x3 = 30
i1 = 1
i2 = 3
swapX = 1
x1 = 30
x2 = 20
x3 = 10

Page 350 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

EvalDoWhile
Iteratively calculates a sequence of strings whilst a condition is True(1).

Syntax
EvalDoWhile( expression1,…expression[n], condition )

Parameters
expression1 is the first expression to calculate for each iteration

expression[n] is the nth expression to calculate for each iteration

condition is the final expression calculated for each loop iteration, the iteration continues until the result of this
expression is False(0) .

Return Value
Returns True(1) if the iteration completed successfully; otherwise returns False(0).

Remarks
Note that the condition and the expressions must be defined as strings, i.e. enclosed in quotes, this ensures that the
expression is re-calculated upon each iteration of the loop.

Named placeholders can be used within the condition and the expressions.

Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the expression before the expression
is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables x 1, x2, x3
you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder allows you
to use the counter variable within the expression.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing(720,200) = 1.000
DrawLine( -360, 0, 360, 0 ) = 1.000
DrawLine( 0, -100, 0, 100 ) = 1.000
DrawLineColor("green")=1.000
x = -360
$y = 100 * sin(x)

Page 351 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawMove( x, y ) = 1.000
EvalDoWhile( "DrawLine(x,y)",
"increment(\"x\") <= 360" ) = 1.000

Page 352 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

EvalFile
Calculates a text file.

Syntax
EvalFile( fileName, output)

Paramaters
filename is the full path to the text file.

output determines whether to output (Append) or discard (Discard) the calculated text.

Example
{ =CSC|CALL EvalFile( "C:\InputVariables.txt", Append ) }

Page 353 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

EvalFor
Iteratively calculates a sequence of strings using a counter variable whilst a condition is True(1).

Syntax
EvalFor( counterName, initialValue, continueCondition, incrementValue, expression1,…expression[n] )

Parameters
counterName is the name of the variable to be used as the counter

initialValue is the initialValue of the counter variable

continueondition is the expression that is calculated at the start of each iteration, the loop will continue as long as
the result of this expression is True (1)

incrementValue is the value that the counter is incremented by at the end of each loop iteration, a negative
value can be used to create a loop that counts backwards

expression1 is the first expression to calculate for each iteration

expression[n] is the nth expression to calculate for each iteration

Return Value
Returns True(1) if the iteration completed successfully; otherwise returns False(0).

Remarks
Note that the condition and the expressions must be defined as strings, i.e. enclosed in quotes, this ensures that the
expression is re-calculated upon each iteration of the loop.

Named placeholders can be used within the condition and the expressions.

Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the expression before the expression
is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables x 1, x2, x3
you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder allows you
to use the counter variable within the expression.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing(720,200) = 1.000
Page 354 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawLine( -360, 0, 360, 0 ) = 1.000


DrawLine( 0, -100, 0, 100 ) = 1.000
DrawLineColor("green")=1.000
DrawMove( -360, 100 * sin(-360) ) = 1.000
EvalFor( "x", -360, "x <= 360", +1,
"DrawLine(x, 100 * sin(x))" ) = 1.000

Page 355 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

EvalIf
Calculates a string as an expression if the condition expression is True and returns the result of the expression.

Syntax
EvalIf( condition, expression )

EvalIf(condition, format )

EvalIf(condition, format, value1, value2, … )

Parameters
condition is the expression that must evaluate to either True (1) or False (0)

expression is the expression to calculate.

format is the string format. Place holders indicate where to insert values in the string and in what
format.

[variable name , format and precision , units] - for named placeholders or

[parameterIndex , format and precision , units] - for numeric placeholders

parameterIndex is the index of the parameter to insert

format is the format flag (F=Fixed, E=Engineering, G=General, S=Scientific).

precision is the precision of the result (0-15)

units is the units to display

value1 is the first value that can be inserted into the string

value[n] is the nth value that can be inserted into the string

Return Value
Returns the result of the expression.

Remarks
The eval function is used to calculate a string as an expression. It can be used to format a string that is then calculated or
it is sometimes used to prevent an expression from being calculated that would otherwise cause Tedds to error, for
example a divide by zero error. For more information about using the format string with placeholders please refer to the
documentation for StrFormat.

Page 356 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
Prevent a divide by zero error.

a = 1
b = 0
EvalIf( b<>0, "a/b" ) = 0.000
b = 2
EvalIf( b<>0, "a/b" ) = 0.500

Page 357 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

EvalWhile
Iteratively calculates a sequence of strings whilst a condition is True(1).

Syntax
EvalWhile( condition, expression1,…expression[n] )

Parameters
condition is the expression calculated for each loop iteration, the iteration continues until the result of this
expression is False(0) .

expression1 is the first expression to calculate for each iteration

expression[n] is the nth expression to calculate for each iteration

Return Value
Returns True(1) if the iteration completed successfully otherwise returns False(0).

Remarks
Note that the condition and the expressions must be defined as strings, i.e. enclosed in quotes, this ensures that the
expression is re-calculated upon each iteration of the loop.

Named placeholders can be used within the condition and the expressions.

Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the expression before the expression
is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables x 1, x2, x3
you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder allows you
to use the counter variable within the expression.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing(720,200) = 1.000
DrawLine( -360, 0, 360, 0 ) = 1.000
DrawLine( 0, -100, 0, 100 ) = 1.000
DrawLineColor("red")=1.000
x = -360

Page 358 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

EvalWhile(
"x <= 360",
"DrawLine(x,100*sin(x),x+1,100*sin(x+1))",
"increment(\"x\")" ) = 1.000

Page 359 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

ReturnArg
Returns the last argument.

Syntax
ReturnArg( arg1,…arg[n])

Parameters
arg1 First argument

arg[n] N'th argument

Return Value
Returns the last argument passed to the function.

Remarks
In itself the ReturnArg function doesn't actually do anything it simply returns the last argument the caller passes.
However it can be used to execute a sequence of expressions in order by passing each expression as a subsequent
argument to the ReturnArg function, the result of the final expression will then be returned to the caller. If this
expression is then assigned to a variable so that it is stored as an expression value then the variable can be used to return
a single value from a sequence of expressions.

Example
L1 = 1 m; L2 = 2 m; L3 = 3m
$LTotal = ReturnArg(
SetVar("_LTotalResult", 0 m ),
EvalFor( "i", 1, "VarExists(\"L[i]\")", +1,
"Increment(\"_LTotalResult\", L[i])" ),
_LTotalResult
)
LTotal = 6.000 m
L4 = 4m
LTotal = 10.000 m

Page 360 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Cubic solver function

Page 361 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

RootOfCubic
Returns the root of a cubic equation.

Syntax
Rootofcubic( a, b, c, d, startValue, tolerance, maxIterations )

Parameters
a

startValue is the point at which the function will start looking for a root value.

tolerance is the increment that is applied for each iteration to the number that is checked to see if it is a root.

maxIterations is the maximum number of iterations that the function will perform in order to find a root, if no root is
found within this number of iterations then an error is returned.

Remarks
A cubic could have three roots and the value found will not necessarily be the smallest so you should set the start value
accordingly to find the root you want. A quick sketch of your curve in a spreadsheet should give enough information to
allow either dynamic allocation of the start value e.g. startValue = min(a*b,c*d) or the correct start point for the root you
want to find.

The function returns a dimensionless number regardless of the parameter values. You must be careful to add the units to
the function as it is calculated. For example if a root is expected which has dimensions of kNm then the following should
be used;

x = Rootofcubic( a, b, c, d, startValue, tolerance, maxIterations )


kNm = ? kNm

Example
a = 34
b = 23
c = 33
d = 211
startValue = -1000000
Page 362 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Tolerance = .001
maxIterations = 1000
x = Rootofcubic( a, b, c, d, startValue, tolerance, maxIterations )
= -1.894
a*x + b*x2 + c*x + d = 0.000
3

Page 363 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Database functions

Page 364 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBOpen
Open a new database connection with the current provider.

Syntax
DBOpen( source, createNew, failIfMissing, readonly, password, compress, version )

Parameters
source optional data source path to database. Default is a new in memory database.
createNew optional, True to create a new database if one does not already exist. Default is True
failIfMissing optional, True to fail if database specified by source does not exist. Default is False
readonly optional, True to open database as read only. Default is False
password optional password to open database
compress optional, True to create database with compression. Default is False
version optional version of the database engine to use

Return Value
Unique numeric identifier for the new database connection.

Page 365 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBClose
Close the database connection.

Syntax
DBClose( id )

Parameters
id optional database connection identifier returned by DBOpen, if not specified then the active database
connection is closed

Return Value
1 (True) if successful; otherwise 0 (False).

Page 366 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBConnectionString
Creates a connection string with the specified keyword values.

Syntax
DBConnectionString( keyword1, value1, …keyword[n], value[n] )

Parameters
keyword name of the keyword
value value of the keyword

Return Value
The connection string with the specified keyword values.

Page 367 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBGetConnectionCount
Return the number of open database connections.

Syntax
DBGetConnectionCount()

Return Value
Number of open database connections.

Page 368 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBGetActiveConnection
Return the unique numeric identifier of the active database connection.

Syntax
DBGetActiveConnection()

Return Value
Active connection Id.

Page 369 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBSetActiveConnection
Set the active database connection.

Syntax
DBSetActiveConnection( id )

Parameters
id unique numeric identifier of the database connection

Return Value
1 (True) if successful; otherwise 0 (False).

Page 370 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBExecute
Execute the specified database command with the active connection.

Syntax
DBExecute( command )

Parameters
command command to execute

Return Value
Number of rows affected by the command.

Page 371 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBExecuteQueryGetValue
Execute the specified database query with the active connection and return the value.

Syntax
DBExecuteQueryGetValue( query )

Parameters
query query to execute

Return Value
Value returned by the query.

Page 372 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBExecuteQuery
Execute the specified database query with the active connection. DBGetValue can then be used to obtain values from
the first result row and DBNextRow can then be used to obtain values from subsequent rows.

Syntax
DBExecuteQuery( query )

Parameters
query query to execute

Return Value
Number of rows returned by the query command

Page 373 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBGetValue
Return values from the current row of the most recent database query command. Use DBExecuteQuery to execute the
query and DBNextRow to advance to the next row within the results

Syntax
DBGetValue( column )

Parameters
column index or name of column.

Return Value
Result of the most recent database query command at the specified column in the current row.

Page 374 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBNextRow
Move to the next row in the current query results.

Syntax
DBNextRow()

Return Value
1 (True) if successful; otherwise 0 (False).

Page 375 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBCreateTable
Creates a new table using the active database connection. The table will have the columns previously specified by calls to
DBCreateTableColumn.

Syntax
DBCreateTable( name, rowIds, errorIfExists, temporary )

DBCreateTable( name, command, errorIfExists, temporary )

Parameters
name name of the table
rowIds optional, True to include row id column, default is True
errorIfExists optional, True to error if table already exists, default is True
temporary optional, True to create a temporary table, default is False
command optional additional command text

Return Value
1 (True) if successful; otherwise 0 (False)

Page 376 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBCreateTableColumn
Specify a column to be created by DBCreateTable.

Syntax
DBCreateTableColumn( name, type, nullable, primaryKey )

Parameters
name name of column
type optional type of column
nullable optional, True to create nullable column, default is True
primaryKey optional, True to create primary key column, default is False

Return Value
Index that column will have when table is created.

Page 377 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBCreateTableReference
Specify a reference to be created by DBCreateTable.

Syntax
DBCreateTableReference( column1, …column[n], referenceTable, referenceColumn1, …referenceColumn[n] )

Parameters
column columns to reference into the reference table
referenceTable table referenced by columns
referenceColumn column in reference table that corresponding column references to

Return Value
Index of reference when table is created.

Page 378 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBCreateTableConstraint
Specify a unique constraint to be created by DBCreateTable.

Syntax
DBCreateTableConstraint( name, column1 ,…column[n] )

Parameters
name name of constraint
column set of columns that must be unique in constraint

Return Value
Index of constraint when table is created.

Page 379 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBInsert
Insert a new row into the specified table using the active database connection.

Syntax
DBInsert( table, column1, value1, …column[n], value[n] )

Parameters
table table into which to insert the row
column name of column
value value to insert into column

Return Value
1 (True) if successful; otherwise 0 (False).

Page 380 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBAddParameter
Adds a named parameter to be used when the next database command is executed.

Syntax
DBAddParameter( name, value )

Parameters
name name of the parameter
value value of the parameter

Return Value
The formatted parameter name as it should be used in the command.

Page 381 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBSetParameter
Sets a named parameter to be used when the next database command is executed.

Syntax
DBSetParameter( name, value )

Parameters
name name of the parameter
value value of the parameter

Return Value
The formatted parameter name as it should be used in the command.

Page 382 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBListProviders
Returns a list of the supported database providers.

Syntax
DBListProviders()

Return Value
List of supported database providers.

Page 383 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBRegisterProvider
Register a new database provider.

Syntax
DBRegisterProvider( providerName, providerDescription, providerInvariantName, providerAssembly )

Parameters
providerName human readable name of database provider
providerDescription human readable description of the database provider
providerInvariantName name that can be used programmatically to refer to the data provider
providerAssembly Fully qualified name of provider factory class

Return Value
1 (True) if successful; otherwise 0 (False).

Page 384 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBGetProvider
Return the name of the active database provider.

Syntax
DBGetProvider()

Return Value
Database provider name.

Page 385 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBSetProvider
Set the default database provider.

Syntax
DBSetProvider( providerInvariantName )

Parameters
providerInvariantName name that can be used programmatically to refer to the data provider

Return Value
1 (True) if successful; otherwise 0 (False).

Page 386 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBSetProviderBoolKeywords
Set Boolean keywords for current database provider.

Syntax
DBSetProviderBoolKeywords( trueString, falseString )

Parameters
trueString ‘True’ string used by the current database provider
falseString ‘False’ string used by the current database provider

Return Value
1 (True) if successful; otherwise 0 (False).

Page 387 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBSetProviderConnectionKeywords
Set connection keywords for current database provider.

Syntax
DBSetProviderConnectionKeywords( source, createNew, failIfMissing, readonly, password, compress, inMemory, version
)

Parameters
source string used by current database provider for data source
createNew string used by current database provider to create a new database
failIfMissing string used by current database provider to fail if database specified does not exist
readonly string used by current database provider for read only database
password string used by current database provider for password
compress string used by current database provider for compression
inMemory string used by current database provider for in memory database
version string used by current database provider for engine version

Return Value
1 (True) if successful; otherwise 0 (False).

Page 388 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBSetProviderCreateTableKeywords
Set create table keywords for current database provider.

Syntax
DBSetProviderCreateTableKeywords( format, formatColumn, ifNotExists, notNullable, primaryKey, temporary,
withoutRowId )

Parameters
format format of create table command using placeholders (See example)
formatColumn format of columns using placeholders (See example)
ifNotExists string used by current database provider for table existance
notNullable string used by current database provider for non null columns
primaryKey string used by current database provider for primary keys
temporary string used by current database provider for temporary tables
withoutRowId string used by current database provider for no row ids

Example
For SQLite these values are:

format CREATE [TEMPORARY] TABLE [ERROR] [NAME] ( [COLUMNS] [REFERENCES] [CONSTRAINTS] ) [COMMAND]
formatColumn [TABLE] [TYPE] [NULLABLE]
ifNotExists IF NOT EXISTS
notNullable NOT NULL
primaryKey PRIMARY KEY
temporary TEMPORARY
withoutRowId WITHOUT ROWID

Notes
The table name will be used for the [NAME] placeholder. Each column will be formatted using formatColumn and
combined. This combined string will be used for the [COLUMNS] placeholder in format.

Return Value
1 (True) if successful; otherwise 0 (False).

Page 389 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBSetProviderInsertKeywords
Set insert keywords for current database provider.

Syntax
DBSetProviderInsertKeywords( format )

Parameters
format format of insert command using placeholders (See example)

Example
For SQLite these values are:

format INSERT INTO [NAME] [COLUMNS] VALUES [VALUES]

Notes
The table name will be used for the [NAME] placeholder.

Return Value
1 (True) if successful; otherwise 0 (False).

Page 390 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DBSetProviderParameterKeywords
Set parameter keywords for current database provider.

Syntax
DBSetProviderParameterKeywords( format )

Parameters
format format of paramaters using placeholders (See example)

Example
For SQLite these values are:

format @[NAME]

Notes
The parameter name will be used for the [NAME] placeholder.

Return Value
1 (True) if successful; otherwise 0 (False).

Page 391 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DataList functions

Page 392 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListDeleteVars
Deletes all the variables for the current selection from the Tedds document.

Syntax
DListDeleteVars()

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0

Example
DListSetFile(“Euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListWriteVars() = 1.000
ListVarsInSection() =
A = 0.001652;
Ax = 0.001040;
Ay = 0.000508;
Area_per_m = 0.536952;
Area_per_t = 0.041406;
B = 0.076000;
Cnotch = 0.004000;
D = 0.127000;
H = 0.000000;
Ixx = 0.000005;
Iyy = 0.000001;
J = 0.000000;
K1xx = 0.000084;
K1yy = 0.000023;
K2xx = 0.000171;
K2yy = 0.000005;
K3xx = 0.000009;
K3yy = 0.000041;
K4xx = 10.504448;
K4yy = 0.465069;
Mass = 12.968052;
Nnotch = 0.048000;
Name = "UKB 127x76x13";
Sxx = 0.000084;

Page 393 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Syy = 0.000023;
Source = "Corus Advance";
T = 0.007600;
Westok_No = 80.000000;
Zxx = 0.000075;
Zyy = 0.000015;
b_upon_T = 5.000000;
d = 0.096600;
d_upon_t = 24.150000;
fab_type = "R";
nnotch = 0.016000;
nxx = 0.268399;
nyy = 0.307510;
r = 0.007600;
rxx = 0.053534;
ryy = 0.018369;
t = 0.004000;
type = "I";
u = 0.895246;
x = 16.267060;
DListDeleteVars() = 1.000
ListVarsInSection() =

Page 394 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListFileExists
Determines if the specified DataList file exists.

Syntax
DListFileExists( fileName )

Parameters
fileName name of the DataList file

Return Value
1 if file exists, otherwise 0.

Example
DListFileExists(“Euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListFileExists(“MissingFile.dls”) = 0.000

Page 395 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListGetColumnStrList
Returns the list of column values for the specified level in the item hierarchy for the currently selected DataList page.

Syntax
DListGetColumnStrList( parent1, parent[n]… )

Parameters
parent1, parent[n] optional name or index of the parents in the hierarchy.

Return Value
Returns a comma separated string list of the column values for the specified level in the hierarchy of the currently
selected page. If no parameters are specified the list of values for the first column are returned.

Example
DListSetFile(“Euroecsi.dls”) = 1.000
DListSetPage(“Universal Beams”) = 1.000

Get list of values for the first column (D)


DListGetColumnStrList() =
"127,152,178,203,254,305,356,406,457,533,610,686,762,838,914,1016"

Get list of values for B, where the parent is the 5th row
DListGetColumnStrList(5) = "102,146"
Get list of values for B, where the parent is "254"
DListGetColumnStrList("254") = "102,146"

Page 396 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Get list of values for Wt., where the parent is the 2nd row of the
5th row
DListGetColumnStrList(5, 2) = "31,37,43"
Get list of values for Wt., where the parent is "146" of "254"
DListGetColumnStrList("254", "146") = "31,37,43"

Page 397 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListGetFile
Returns the file name of the currently selected DataList file.

Syntax
DListGetFile()

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Example
DListSetFile(“Euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListGetFile() = "Euro.dls"

Page 398 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListGetFootNote
Returns the text for the specified footnote on the currently selected page.

Syntax
DListGetFootNote( footNoteId )

Parameters
footNoteId FootNote Id (1 to n, where n is the total number of foot notes)

Return Value
Returns the footnote text as a string. If the footnote does not exists an empty string will be returned.

Example
DListSetFile(“Euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListSetPage(“Rolled Steel Joists”) = 1.000
DListGetFootNote(1) = "# Check availability"

Page 399 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListGetFootNoteSymbol
Returns the symbol for the specified footnote on the currently selected page.

Syntax
DListGetFootNoteSymbol( footNoteId )

Parameters
footNoteId FootNote Id (1 to n, where n is the total number of foot notes)

Return Value
Returns the footnote symbol as a string. If the footnote does not exists an empty string will be returned.

Example
DListSetFile(“Euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListSetPage(“Rolled Steel Joists”) = 1.000
DListGetFootNoteSymbol(1) = "#"

Page 400 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListGetItemColumnValue
Returns the column value for the specified column for the currently selected DataList item.

Syntax
DListGetItemColumnValue( columnIndex )

Parameters
columnIndex optional index of the column.

Return Value
Returns the value of the specified column for the currently selected item.

Example
DListSetFile("Euroecsi.dls") = 1.000
DListSetPage("Universal Beams") = 1.000
Select 17th item on the page which is 305x127x42
DListSetItem(17) = 1.000

DListGetItemColumnValue(1) = "305"
DListGetItemColumnValue(2) = "127"
DListGetItemColumnValue(3) = "42"

Page 401 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListGetItemDescription
Returns the description of the currently selected DataList item

Syntax
DListGetItemDescription( includeFootNotes )

Parameters
includeFootNotes optional value, if True footnote symbols are included in the item description; otherwise the
footnote symbols is omitted. By default foot notes are not included.

Return Value
Returns the description of the currently selected item on the currently selected page.

Example
DListSetFile(“Euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListSetItem(“127(76(13))”) = 1.000
DListGetItemDescription() = "UKB 127x76x13"

Page 402 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListGetItemFootNotes
Returns all the footnote symbols for the currently selected item.

Syntax
DListGetItemFootNotes()

Return Value
Returns all the footnote symbols for the currently selected item as a string

Example
DListSetFile(“Euro.dls”, 1) = 1.000
DListSetPage(“Circular Hollow Sections”) = 1.000
DListSetItem (“139.7(3.6)”) = 1.000
DListGetItemFootNotes() = "#"

Page 403 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListGetItemName
Returns the name of the currently selected item.

Syntax
DListGetItemName()

Return Value
Returns the name of the currently selected item as a string. The name is used to uniquely identify a DataList item on a
specific page in a specific DataList.

Example
DListSetFile(“Euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListSetItem(“127(76(13))”) = 1.000
DListGetItemName() = "127(76(13))"

Page 404 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListGetItemStrList
Returns the list of items on the currently selected DataList page that match the current item filter.

Syntax
DListGetItemStrList( formatString )

Parameters
formatString optional value that specifies the string format for each item returned in the list. The default
format uses the placeholder [ItemName]. You can also use the placeholder [ItemDescription].

Return Value
Returns a comma separated string list of the items on the currently selected DataList page that match the current item
filter. By default the list will be the name of each item however the formatString parameter can be used to format each
element in the list for example “[ItemDescription]=\”[ItemName]\””. If no item filter has been defined using
DListSetItemFilter then all the items on the currently selected page will be returned.

Example
DListSetFile(“Euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListSetPage(“Universal Beams”) = 1.000
DListSetItemFilter(“[D]<200mm”) = 3.000
DListGetItemStrList(“[ItemName]”) = "127(76(13)),152(89(16)),178(102(19))"
DListGetItemStrList(“[ItemDescription]”) = "UB 127x76x13,UB
152x89x16,UB 178x102x19"

Page 405 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListGetPageColumnName
Returns the name of the specified column for the currently selected DataList page.

Syntax
DListGetPageColumnName(columnIndex)

Parameters
columnIndex Index of the column

Return Value
Returns the name of the specified column for the currently selected page.

Example
DListSetFile("Euroecsi.dls") = 1.000
DListSetPage("Universal Beams") = 1.000
DListGetPageColumnName(1) = "D"
DListGetPageColumnName(2) = "B"
DListGetPageColumnName(3) = "Wt."

Page 406 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListGetPageName
Returns the name of the currently selected page for the currently selected DataList.

Syntax
DListGetPageName()

Return Value
Returns the name of the currently selected page for the currently selected DataList as a string. The name of the page is
unique to that DataList and is used in other DataList functions such as DListSetPage to identify a page.

Example
DListSetFile(“Euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListSetPage(“Advance UKB”) = 1.000
DListGetPageName() = "Advance UKB"

Page 407 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListGetPageNumColumns
Returns the number of columns for the currently selected DataList page.

Syntax
DListGetPageNumColumns()

Return Value
Returns the number of columns for the currently selected page.

Example
DListSetFile("Euroecsi.dls") = 1.000
DListSetPage("Universal Beams") = 1.000
DListGetPageNumColumns() = 3.000

Page 408 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListGetPageShortName
Returns the short (abbreviated) name of the currently selected page for the currently selected DataList.

Syntax
DListGetPageShortName()

Return Value
Returns the short (abbreviated) name of the currently selected page for the currently selected DataList as a string.

Example
DListSetFile(“Euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListSetPage(“Advance UKB”) = 1.000
DListGetPageName() = "Advance UKB"
DListGetPageShortName() = "UKB"

Page 409 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListGetPageStrList
Returns the list of pages in the currently selected DataList that match the current page filter.

Syntax
DListGetPageStrList( formatString )

Parameters
formatString optional value that specifies the string format for each item returned in the list. The default
format uses the placeholder [PageName]. You can also use the placeholder [PageShortName].

Return Value
Returns a comma separated string list of the pages in the currently selected DataList that match the current page filter.
By default the list will be the name of each page however the formatString parameter can be used to format each
element in the list for example “[PageShortName]=\”[PageName]\””. If no page filter has been defined using
DListSetPageFilter then all the pages in the currently selected page will be returned.

Example
DListSetFile(“Euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListGetPageStrList() = "Advance UKB,Advance UKC,Advance
UKPFC,Universal Beams,Universal Columns,Rolled Steel
Joists,Asymmetric Beams,Slimflor Fabricated Beams,Rolled Steel
Channels,Rolled Steel Channels (Parallel),Rectangular Hollow
Sections,Square Hollow Sections,Circular Hollow
Sections,Structural Tee from UB,Structural Tee from UC,Equal
Angles,Unequal Angles,2 Equal Angles (back to back),2 Unequal
Angles (long leg back to back),2 Unequal Angles (short leg back
to back),Flat Bars,Parallel Faced Flange Beams,Wide/Very Wide
Flanged Beams,Wide Flanged Columns,European Standard
Beams,European Parallel Flange Channels,European Standard
Channels,European Rectangular Hollow Sections,European Square
Hollow Sections,European Circular Hollow Sections,European Equal
Angles,European Unequal Angles,European 2 Equal Angles (back to
back),European 2 Unequal Angles (long leg back to back),European
2 Unequal Angles (short leg back to back)"

Page 410 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListGetVar
Returns the value of a DataList variable for the currently selected DtaList item.

Syntax
DListGetVar( varId, defaultValue )

DListGetVar( varName, defaultValue )

Parameters
varId numeric identifier of the variable (1 to n, where n is the number of variables)

varName name of the variable

defaultValue value returned if the variable name or Id does not exist for the currently selected item

Return Value
Returns the value of a DataList variable for the currently selected DtaList item. If the variables does not exist the optional
default value is returned.

Example
DListSetFile(“Euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListGetItemName() = "127(76(13))"
DListGetVar(“D”, 150mm) = 127 mm
DListGetVar(5, 150mm) = 127 mm

Page 411 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListGetVarMax
Returns the maximum numeric value of a DataList variable for all the items on the currently selected DataList page.

Syntax
DListGetVarMax( varName )

Parameters
varName name of the variable

Return Value
Returns the maximum numeric value of a DataList variable for all the items on the currently selected DtaList page.

Remarks
If an item filter has been defined using DListSetItemFilter then the value returned is the maximum for the items on the
currently selected page that match the item filter criteria.

Example
DListSetFile(“EuroEcSi.dls”) = 1.000
DListGetPageName() = "Universal Beams"
DListGetVarMax(“d”) = 868.200 mm
DListGetVarMin(“d”) = 96.600 mm

Page 412 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListGetVarMin
Returns the minimum numeric value of a DataList variable for all the items on the currently selected DataList page.

Syntax
DListGetVarMin( varName )

Parameters
varName name of the variable

Return Value
Returns the minimum numeric value of a DataList variable for all the items on the currently selected DtaList page.

Remarks
If an item filter has been defined using DListSetItemFilter then the value returned is the minimum for the items on the
currently selected page that match the item filter criteria.

Example
DListSetFile(“EuroEcSi.dls”) = 1.000
DListGetPageName() = "Universal Beams"
DListGetVarMax(“d”) = 868.200 mm
DListGetVarMin(“d”) = 96.600 mm

Page 413 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListGetVarName
Returns the name of the nth variable of the currently selected DataList item.

Syntax
DListGetVarName( varId )

Parameters
varId numeric identifier of the variable (1 to n, where n is the number of variables)

Return Value
Returns the name of the nth variable of the currently selected DataList item as a string.

Example
DListSetFile(“Euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListSetPage(“Advance UKB”) = 1.000
DListGetVarName(1) = "type"
DListGetVarName(2) = "fab_type"
DListGetVarName(3) = "Source"

Page 414 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListGetVarUnits
Returns the units of the nth variable of the currently selected DataList item.

Syntax
DListGetVarUnits( varId )

Parameters
varId numeric identifier of the variable (1 to n, where n is the number of variables)

Return Value
Returns the units of the nth variable of the currently selected DataList item as a string.

Example
DListSetFile(“Euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListSetPage(“Advance UKB”) = 1.000
DListGetVarName(5) = "D"
DListGetVarUnits(5) = "mm"

Page 415 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListItemExists
Determines if the specified DataList item exists on the currently selected page in the currently selected DataList.

Syntax
DListItemExists( itemName )

DListItemExists( itemID )

Parameters
itemName name of the DataList item

itemId numeric identifier of the item to be selected (1 to n, where n is the number of items)

Return Value
1 if file exists, otherwise 0.

Example
DListSetFile(“Euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListSetPage("Universal Beams") = 1.000
DListItemExists("127(76(13))") = 1.000
DListItemExists("Missing item") = 0.000
DListItemExists(DListNumItems()) = 1.000
DListItemExists(DListNumItems() + 1) = 0.000

Page 416 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListNumFootNotes
Returns the number of footnotes specified for the currently selected DataList page.

Syntax
DListNumFootNotes()

Return Value
Number of footnotes.

Example
DListSetFile(“Euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListSetPage(“Rolled Steel Joists”) = 1.000
DListNumFootNotes() = 1.000

Page 417 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListNumItems
Returns the number of items on the currently selected DataList page.

Syntax
DListNumItems()

Return Value
Number of items on the currently selected DataList page.

Remarks
If an item filter has been defined using DListSetItemFilter then the value returned is the number of items on the
currently selected page that match the item filter criteria.

Example
DListSetFile(“Euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListSetPage(“Advance UKB”) = 1.000
DListNumItems() = 96.000
DListSetItemFilter("[D]<300mm")=12.000
DListNumItems() = 12.000

Page 418 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListNumPages
Returns the number of pages in the selected DataList.

Syntax
DListNumPages()

Return Value
Number of pages in the selected DataList.

Remarks
If a page filter has been defined using DListSetPageFilter then the value returned is the number of pages in the currently
selected DataList that match the page filter criteria.

Example
DListSetFile(“euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListNumPages() = 35.000
DListSetPageFilter("[type]==\"I\"") = 9.000
DListNumPages() = 9.000

Page 419 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListNumVars
Returns the number of variables for the currently selected DatList item.

Syntax
DListNumVars()

Return Value
Number of variables for the currently selected DataList Item.

Example
DListSetFile(“Euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListSetPage(“Advance UKB”) = 1.000
DListSetItem (“127(76(13))”) = 1.000
DListNumVars() = 43.000

Page 420 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListPageExists
Determines if the specified DataList page exists in the currently selected DataList.

Syntax
DListPageExists( pageName )

DListPageExists( pageId )

Parameters
pageName name of the DataList page

pageId numeric identifier of the page to be selected (1 to n, where n is the number of pages)

Return Value
1 if file exists, otherwise 0.

Example
DListSetFile(“Euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListPageExists("Universal Beams") = 1.000
DListPageExists("Missing page") = 0.000
DListPageExists(DListNumPages()) = 1.000
DListPageExists(DListNumPages() + 1) = 0.000

Page 421 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListSelect
Selects the specified data list item and writes all of the associated variables to the Tedds document.

Syntax
DListSelect( filename, selectedPageVar, selectedItemVar, suffix )

Parameters
filename name of the DataList file to select

selectedPageVar name of the variable to use for the current page selection

selectedItemVar name of the variable to use for the current item selection

suffix optional variable suffix which is added to the name of each variable written to the document

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0

Remarks
DListSelect provides a function to select a page, item and write the variables to the Tedds document in a single operation
rather than using the separate functions DListSetFile, DListSetPage, DListSetItem and DListWriteVars. You do not need to
use any other DataList functions to use this function.

Example
Page = "Universal Columns"
Item = "254(254(167))"
DListSelect(“Euro.dls”, “Page”, “Item”) = 1.000
D = 289.100 mm
B = 265.200 mm
T = 31.700 mm
t = 19.200 mm
d = 200.300 mm

Page 422 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListSelectUI
Shows the standard DataList user interface, the selected page and item variables are updated and the items variables are
written to the Tedds document.

Syntax
DListSelectUI( selectedFileName, selectedPageVar, selectedItemVar, suffix, pageFilter )

Parameters
selectedFileName name of the DataList file to select from or the name of the variable to use for the DataList file

selectedPageVar name of the variable to use for the current page selection

selectedItemVar name of the variable to use for the current item selection

suffix optional variable suffix which is added to the name of each variable written to the document

pageFilter optional page filter

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0

Remarks
DListSelectUI provides a single function to show the user the standard DataList user interface and write the selected
variables to the Tedds document. You do not need to use any other DataList functions to use this function.

Example 1
DListSelectUI("EuroEcsi.dls", "Page", "Item", "_{1}",
"[type]==\"I\"") = 0.000

Example 2
File = "EuroEcsi.dls"
DListSelectUI("File", "Page", "Item") = 1.000
File = "EuroEcsi-FI.dls"
Page = "European Square Hollow Sections"
Item = "90(90(3.0))"
Page 423 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListSetFile
Sets the currently selected DataList file.

Syntax
DListSetFile( filename, reset )

Parameters
filename name of the DataList file to be selected

reset optional argument which defaults to TRUE, if TRUE datalist is reset which clears both the page and item
filters and sets the current selection to the first item on the first page. If FALSE current filters and selection are
maintained. By default the DataList is reset.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Remarks
The DataList function library is a collection of Tedds functions for retrieving the data defined in the Tedds DataLists.

To retrieve data from a DataList you must first select the DataList using DListSetFile, you can then use the other DataList
functions to retrieve the pages, items and variables defined within the DataList. You can also use the DListShowUI or
DListSelectUI functions to allow a Tedds user to interact with the DataList by using the standard DataList user interface.

Example
DListSetFile(“Euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListShowUI() = 1.000
DListWriteVars() = 1.000

Page 424 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListSetItem
Sets the currently selected DataList item for the currently selected DataList.

Syntax
DListSetItem( ItemName )

DListSetItem( ItemID )

Parameters
ItemName name of the DataList item to be selected

ItemID numeric identifier of the DataList item to be selected (1 to n, where n is the total number of
items on the currently selected page)

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Remarks
The selected item must exist on the currently selected page.

Example
DListSetFile(“Euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListSetItem(“127(76(13))”) = 1.000
DListGetItemName() = "127(76(13))"
DListSetItem (2) = 1.000
DListGetItemName() = "152(89(16))"

Page 425 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListSetItemFilter
Sets the current item filter for the currently selected page.

Syntax
DListSetItemFilter( filterExpression )

Parameters
filterExpression expression used to filter the available items

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Remarks
When a DataList page is selected using DListSetPage all the items on that page are available. You can restrict the items
that are available by applying a filter, only those items that match the filter criteria will then be available when using the
other DataList functions such as DListGetNumItems.

The list of available items is filtered according to the filterExpression parameter which is calculated for each item on the
page. You can use placeholders within the expression to refer to any of the variables associated with that item. A
placeholder is denoted by enclosing a variable name in square brackets, so for example if you only want to include items
where the value of "D" is < 200mm you would use the expression "[D] < 200mm".

Note: The standard DataList user interface does not currently support filtered items.

Example
DListSetFile(“Euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListSetItemFilter(“[D]<200mm”) = 3.000
DListGetItemStrList(“[ItemName]”) =
"127(76(13)),152(89(16)),178(102(19))"

Page 426 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListSetPage
Sets the currently selected DataList page for the currently selected DataList.

Syntax
DListSetPage( pageName )

DListSetPage( pageID )

Parameters
pageName name of the DataList page to be selected

PageID numeric identifier of the page to be selected (1 to n, where n is the number of pages)

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Remarks
The selected page must exist in the DataList. IF a page filter has been defined using DListSetPageFilter the selected page
must match the page filter criteria.

Example
DListSetFile(“Euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListSetPage(“Advance UKB”) = 1.000
DListGetPageName() = "Advance UKB"
DListSetPage(2) = 1.000
DListGetPageName() = "Advance UKC"

Page 427 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListSetPageFilter
Sets the current page filter for the currently selected DataList.

Syntax
DListSetPageFilter( filterExpression )

Parameters
filterExpression expression used to filter the available pages. Named variable placeholders can be used for the
first item on the page [VarName], in addition the page name [PageName] and page short name [PageShortName] can be
used in the expression

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Remarks
When a DataList is selected using DListSetFile all the pages in that DataList are available. You can restrict the pages that
are available by applying a filter, only those pages that match the filter criteria will then be available when using the
other DataList functions such as DListGetNumPages.

The list of available pages is filtered according to the filterExpression parameter which is calculated for each page in the
DataList. You can use placeholders within the expression to refer to the page name and short name or any of the
variables associated with the first item on the page. A placeholder is denoted by enclosing a variable name in square
brackets, so for example if you only want to include pages which contain T sections in a steel section DataList where the
variable "type" denotes the section type you would use the expression "[type]==\"T\"".

Example
DListSetFile(“Euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListSetPageFilter(“[PageName]==\”Advance UKB\””) = 1.000
DListShowUI() = 1.000
DListSetPageFilter(“[type]==\”I\””) = 9.000
DListShowUI() = 1.000

Page 428 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListShowUI
Shows the standard DataList user interface using the current settings as defined by the DataList functions DListSetFile,
DListSetPage, DListSetItem, and DListSetPageFilter.

Syntax
DListShowUI()

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0

Remarks
If the users confirms their selection in the user interface by clicking "OK" only the currently selected page and item will
be updated no variables will be written to the Tedds document. To write variables use the DListWriteVars function.

Example
DListSetFile(“Euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListShowUI() = 1.000
DListGetPageName() = "Advance UKB"
DListGetItemName() = "305(102(28))"

Page 429 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DListWriteVars
Writes the variables for the selected data list item to the Tedds document

Syntax
DListWriteVars( suffix, varName1, varName[n], … )

Parameters
suffix optional variable suffix which is added to the name of each variable written to the document.

varName1, varName[n] optional names of variables to include, when omitted all variables are included.

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0

Example
DListSetFile(“Euro.dls”) = 1.000
DListWriteVars() = 1.000
DListWriteVars( "_{1}", "d", "D", "T" ) = 1.000

Page 430 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Data tools

Page 431 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DataGraph
Shows a Tedds DataGraph for selecting variables.

Syntax
DataGraph( fileName, prefix, suffix, var1, var2, show )

Parameters
fileName is the name of the DataGraph file to open.

prefix is ignored, must be "".

suffix is the optional text appended to all variables names for the selection.

var1 is the name of the first variable to use for selection.

var2 is the name of the second variable to use for selection.

show is the optional condition that determines if the DataGraph should be shown. If True(1) the DataGraph is
always shown; otherwise the DataGraph is only shown if the current selection cannot be determined.

Example
DataGraph( "5950-21a.dgt", "Example Datagraph: ", "_{1}", "", "",
Show ) = 1.000
a_over_d1 = 0.900
d_over_t1 = 130.000
qcr1 = 113.000 N/mm2;

Page 432 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DataList
Shows the Tedds DataList user interface for selecting variables.

Syntax
DataList( fileName, defaultPage, defaultItem, prefix, suffix, itemVar, pageVar, show, output, prompt )

Parameters
fileName is the name of the DataList file to open.

defaultPage is the optional name of the default page to select.

defaultItem is the optional formatted name of the default item to select.

prefix ignored, use "".

suffix is the optional text appended to the name of all variables written to the Tedds document.

itemVar is the optional name of the variable used for storing the selected item.

pageVar is the optional name of the variable used for storing the selected page.

show is the optional expression that determines if the DataList user interface should be shown. If True(1) the
DataList is always shown; otherwise the DataList is only shown if the current selection cannot be determined. You can
use the pre-defined Tedds system variables "Show" and "Hide" for this parameter.

output ignored, use 0.

prompt is the message prompt to display at the top of the DataList window.

Example
DataList("Euro.dls", "Universal Beams", "457(152(52))", "", "1",
"selectedItem", "selectedPage", Show, 0, "Select an I section")
= 1.000
selectedPage1 = "Universal Beams"
selectedItem1 = "457(152(52))"

Page 433 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DataTable
Shows a Tedds DataTable for selecting variables.

Syntax
DataTable( filename(s), prefix, suffix, show )

Parameters
filename(s) is the name of the DataTable file to open. To open more than one file simultaneously separate each file
name with a comma.

prefix ignored, use "".

suffix is the optional text appended to the name of all variables written to the Tedds document.

show is the optional expression that determines if the DataTable user interface should be shown. If True(1) the
DataTable is always shown; otherwise the DataTable is only shown if the current selection cannot be determined. You
can use the pre-defined Tedds system variables "Show" and "Hide" for this parameter.

Remarks
DataTables allow you to access a wide range of standard engineering data including design tables, section tables and
proprietary manufacturers data. A DataTable allows you to select an item graphically, Tedds will then write the collection
of variables associated with that item to your Tedds document. DataTables may also include diagrams and notes and
allow you to search the data within the table as well as interpolate the data when aplpicable.

Example
DataTable("5950-21a.tbl", "", "1", Show ) = 1.000
a_over_d1 = 0.900
d_over_t1 = 130.000
qcr1 = 113.000 N/mm2;

Page 434 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Date and time

Page 435 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Date
Returns the current date as a formatted string.

Syntax
Date( format )

Parameters
format is the format to output the data in (see below)

Remarks
The format of the date can be specified using a text string of symbols.

For example, the string "dddd, MMMM d, yyyy" in the argument =CSC|CALL DATE("dddd, MMMM d, yyyy") displays
"Friday, November 24, 2000." Combine the following date and time instructions — day (d), month (M), and year (y);
hours (h) minutes (m) and seconds (s) — to build a date-time format string. You can also include text, punctuation, and
spaces.

Date instructions

Month (M)
The letter "M" must be uppercase to distinguish months from minutes.

Symbols
M

Displays the month as a number without a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit months. For example, July is "7".

MM

Displays the month as a number with a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit months. For example, July is "07".

MMM

Displays the month as a three-letter abbreviation. For example, July is "Jul".

MMMM

Displays the month as its full name.


Page 436 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Day (d)
Displays the day of the month or the day of the week. The letter "d" can be either uppercase or lowercase.

Symbols
d

Displays the day of the week or month as a number without a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit days. For example, the sixth
day of the month is displayed as "6".

dd

Displays the day of the week or month as a number with a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit days. For example, the sixth
day of the month is displayed as "06".

ddd

Displays the day of the week or month as a three-letter abbreviation. For example, Tuesday is displayed as "Tue".

dddd

Displays the day of the week as its full name.

Year (y)
Displays the year as two or four digits. The letter "y" can be either uppercase or lowercase.

Symbols
yy

Displays the year as two digits with a leading 0 (zero) for years 01 through 09. For example, 1995 is displayed as "95", and
2006 is displayed as "06".

yyyy

Displays the year as four digits.

'text'

Any specified text in a date or time. Enclose the text in single quotation marks. For example, Time("HH:mm 'Greenwich
mean time' ") displays "12:45 Greenwich mean time".

character

Includes the specified character in a date or time, such as a : (colon), - (hyphen), * (asterisk), or space.

Page 437 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Example
Date("M-d, yy") = 3-28, 08
Date("MM-dd, yy") = 03-28, 08
Date("ddd-dd MMM, yy") = Fri-28 Mar, 08
Date("dddd dd, MMMM yyyy") = Friday 28, March 2008

Page 438 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DateTime
Returns the date and time as a formatted string.

Syntax
DateTime( format )

Parameters
format is the format to output the data and time in (see below)

Remarks
The format of the date or time can be specified using a text string of symbols.

For example, the string "dddd, MMMM d, yyyy" in the argument DateTime("dddd, MMMM d, yyyy") displays "Friday,
November 24, 2000." Combine the following date and time instructions — day (d), month (M), and year (y); hours (h)
minutes (m) and seconds (s) — to build a date-time format string. You can also include text, punctuation, and spaces.

Date instructions

Month (M)
The letter "M" must be uppercase to distinguish months from minutes.

Symbols
M

Displays the month as a number without a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit months. For example, July is "7".

MM

Displays the month as a number with a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit months. For example, July is "07".

MMM

Displays the month as a three-letter abbreviation. For example, July is "Jul".

MMMM

Displays the month as its full name.

Page 439 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Day (d)
Displays the day of the month or the day of the week. The letter "d" can be either uppercase or lowercase.

Symbols
d

Displays the day of the week or month as a number without a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit days. For example, the sixth
day of the month is displayed as "6".

dd

Displays the day of the week or month as a number with a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit days. For example, the sixth
day of the month is displayed as "06".

ddd

Displays the day of the week or month as a three-letter abbreviation. For example, Tuesday is displayed as "Tue".

dddd

Displays the day of the week as its full name.

Year (y)
Displays the year as two or four digits. The letter "y" can be either uppercase or lowercase.

Symbols
yy

Displays the year as two digits with a leading 0 (zero) for years 01 through 09. For example, 1995 is displayed as "95", and
2006 is displayed as "06".

yyyy

Displays the year as four digits.

Time instructions

Hours (h)
A lowercase "h" bases time on the 12-hour clock. An uppercase "H" bases time on the 24-hour, or military, clock; for
example, 5 P.M. is displayed as "17".

Page 440 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Symbols
h or H

Displays the hour without a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit hours. For example, the hour of 9 A.M. is displayed as "9".

hh or HH

Displays the hour with a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit hours. For example, the hour of 9 A.M. is displayed as "09".

Minutes (m)
The letter "m" must be lowercase to distinguish minutes from months.

Displays minutes without a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit minutes. For example =CSC|CALL TIME("m") displays "2".

mm

Displays minutes with a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit minutes. For example, =CSC|CALL TIME("mm")displays "02".

other text and punctuation

'text'

Any specified text in a date or time. Enclose the text in single quotation marks. For example, DateTime("HH:mm
'Greenwich mean time' ") displays "12:45 Greenwich mean time".

character

Includes the specified character in a date or time, such as a : (colon), - (hyphen), * (asterisk), or space.

Example
DateTime("HH:mm MMM-d, yy") = 16:06 Mar-28, 08
DateTime("'Now:' HH:mm:ss, dddd MMMM dd, yyyy") = Now: 16:07:40, Friday
March 28, 2008

Page 441 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Time
Shows the current time.

Syntax
Time( format )

Parameters
format is the format to output the time and time in (see below)

Remarks
The format of the time can be specified using a text string of symbols.

For example, the string "dddd, MMMM d, yyyy" in the argument =CSC|CALL DATE("dddd, MMMM d, yyyy") displays
"Friday, November 24, 2000." Combine the following date and time instructions — day (d), month (M), and year (y);
hours (h) minutes (m) and seconds (s) — to build a date-time format string. You can also include text, punctuation, and
spaces.

Time instructions

Hours (h)
A lowercase "h" bases time on the 12-hour clock. An uppercase "H" bases time on the 24-hour, or military, clock; for
example, 5 P.M. is displayed as "17".

Symbols
h or H

Displays the hour without a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit hours. For example, the hour of 9 A.M. is displayed as "9".

hh or HH

Displays the hour with a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit hours. For example, the hour of 9 A.M. is displayed as "09".

Page 442 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Minutes (m)
The letter "m" must be lowercase to distinguish minutes from months.

Displays minutes without a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit minutes. For example =CSC|CALL TIME("m") displays "2".

mm

Displays minutes with a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit minutes. For example, =CSC|CALL TIME("mm")displays "02".

other text and punctuation

'text'

Any specified text in a date or time. Enclose the text in single quotation marks. For example, ("HH:mm 'Greenwich mean
time' ") displays "12:45 Greenwich mean time".

character

Includes the specified character in a date or time, such as a : (colon), - (hyphen), * (asterisk), or space.

Example
Time("HH:mm:ss") = 15:58:58
Time("h:m:s") = 3:58:59
Time("'The current time is' HH:mm:ss") = The current time is 15:59:0

Page 443 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Drawing functions

Page 444 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawArc
Draws part of the outline of an ellipse. The arc will be drawn using the current line colour, style and width.

Syntax
DrawArc( x1, y1, width, height, startAngle, sweepAngle )

Parameters
x1

x co-ordinate

y1
y co-ordinate

width
width of the ellipse that contains the arc

height
height of the ellipse that contains the arc

startAngle
angle between the x-axis and the starting point of the arc

sweepAngle
angle between the starting and end point of the arc

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The location that the arc is drawn relative to the co-ordinate is dependent on the Arc alignment property which can be
set using the DrawArcAlignment function. By default the co-ordinate is the bottom left co-ordinate of the ellipses
bounding rectangle.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 50mm ) = ?
DrawArc( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 50mm, 0, 90 ) = ?

Page 445 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawArc( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 50mm, 0, -90 ) = ?

DrawArc( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 50mm, 135, 225 ) = ?

Page 446 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawArcAlignment
Sets the alignment used by the DrawArc function. The alignment determines how the bounding rectangle of the
complete ellipse is positioned relative to the output co-ordinate.

Syntax
DrawArcAlignment( horizontalAlignmentName, verticalAlignmentName )

DrawArcAlignment( horizontalAlignmentId, verticalAlignmentId )

Parameters
horizontalAlignmentName

name of alignment type to use for aligning arc horizontally

horizontalAlignmentId
numeric id of alignment type to use for aligning arc horizontally

verticalAlignmentName

name of alignment type to use for aligning arc vertically

verticalAlignmentId
numeric id of alignment type to use for aligning arc vertically

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The alignment is the relationship between the bounding rectangle of the complete ellipse that the arc is part of and the
output co-ordinate.

The following table lists the alignment types. The default alignment is near, near which is the bottom left corner of the
bounding rectangle.

Id Name Description
-1 “Default” Use default ellipse alignment (near)
0 “Near” Arc is aligned so that the bottom left corner of the ellipses bounding rectangle is
nearest to the co-ordinate.
1 “Centre” Arc is aligned so that the centre of the ellipse is at the co-ordinate.
“Center”

Page 447 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

2 “Far” Arc is aligned so that the bottom left corner of the ellipses bounding rectangle is the
height of the bounding rectangle away from the co-ordinate.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 50, 50 ) = ?
DrawArcAlignment("near","near")=?
DrawArc( 0, 0, 50, 50, 0, 90 ) = ?
DrawLineColor( “red” ) = ?
DrawLine( -5, 0, 5, 0 ) = ?
DrawLine( 0, -5, 0, 5 ) = ?

DrawArcAlignment("Centre","Centre")=?

DrawArcAlignment("far","far")=?

Page 448 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawArcIf
Draws part of the outline of an ellipse. The arc will be drawn using the current line colour, style and width. The arc is only
drawn if the condition expression evaluates to true.

Syntax
DrawArc( condition, x1, y1, width, height, startAngle, sweepAngle )

Parameters
condition
Expression that must evaluate to either True (1) or False (0)

x1

x co-ordinate

y1
y co-ordinate

width
width of the ellipse that contains the arc

height
height of the ellipse that contains the arc

startAngle
angle between the x-axis and the starting point of the arc

sweepAngle
angle between the starting and end point of the arc

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The location that the arc is drawn relative to the co-ordinate is dependent on the Arc alignment property which can be
set using the DrawArcAlignment function. By default the co-ordinate is the bottom left co-ordinate of the ellipses
bounding rectangle.

Page 449 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Example
sweepAngle = 180
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 50mm ) = ?
DrawRectangle( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 50mm ) = ?
DrawArcIf(sweepAngle>=90, 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 50mm, 0, sweepAngle ) = ?

sweepAngle = 45

Page 450 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawClipClear
Removes the current clipping region as defined by DrawClipRectanlge or DrawClipPath.

Syntax
DrawClipClear()

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm ) = 1.000
DrawCreatePath() = 1.000
Create a triangluar clipping region to clip a circle and only show a
segment of the circle
DrawLine( 0mm, 0mm, 50mm, 50mm, 100mm, 0mm ) = 1.000
DrawClipPath() = 1.000
DrawDestroyPath()=1.000
DrawFillEllipse( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 100mm ) = 1.000
DrawClipClear() = 1.000
DrawEllipse( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 100mm ) = 1.000

Page 451 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawClipPath
Sets the clipping region to the current drawing path created using DrawCreatePath which then restricts other drawing
commands to this region.

Syntax
DrawClipPath()

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
When a clipping region is defined the parts of the drawing that lie outside the clipping region will not
be visible. All subsequent drawing operations will be clipped until a new clipping region is defined or
until the clipping region is cleared using DrawClipClear.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm ) = 1.000
DrawCreatePath() = 1.000
Create a triangluar clipping region to clip a circle and only show a
segment of the circle
DrawLine( 0mm, 0mm, 50mm, 50mm, 100mm, 0mm ) = 1.000
DrawClipPath() = 1.000
DrawDestroyPath()=1.000
DrawFillEllipse( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 100mm ) = 1.000
DrawClipClear() = 1.000

Page 452 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawClipRectangle
Sets the clipping rectangle which restricts other drawing commands to a region.

Syntax
DrawClipRectangle( x1, y1, width, height )

Parameters
x1

x co-ordinate of bottom left corner of clipping rectangle

y1
y co-ordinate of bottom left corner of clipping rectangle

width
width of clipping rectangle

height
height of clipping rectangle

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
When a clipping region is defined the parts of the drawing that lie outside the clipping region will not
be visible. All subsequent drawing operations will be clipped until a new clipping region is defined or
until the clipping region is cleared using DrawClipClear.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm ) = 1.000
DrawClipRectangle( 5mm, 5mm, 90mm, 90mm ) = 1.000
DrawFillEllipse( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 100mm ) = 1.000
DrawClipClear() = ?

Page 453 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawCreateColor / DrawCreateColour
Creates a numeric color value which can be used with all other color functions.

Syntax
DrawCreateColor( colourName, transparency )

DrawCreateColour( colourName, transparency )

DrawCreateColor( red, green, blue, transparency )

DrawCreateColour( red, green, blue, transparency )

Parameters
colourName name of a predefined color, see remarks.

red amount of red component for a custom color. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

green amount of green component for a custom color. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

blue amount of blue component for a custom color. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

transparency optional amount of transparency. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive where 0 is completely
transparent and 255 is opaque. Default is 255 (opaque)

Return Value
Color value

Remarks
A custom color value can be defined by specifying the amount of red, green and blue components, each color
component must lie in the range 0 to 255, this allows for a total of more than 16 million colour combinations. The
transparency value allows you to specify the amount of transparency applied to the color which effects how the color is
combined other colors in a drawing.

System Colours
The following table lists the predefined system color values, when using each named system color the name must be
wrapped in qoutes, e.g. "aliceblue".

Page 454 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

System palettes
Several system color palettes are also provided for data visualization. These include a status palette, a good (pass,
success, OK) status palette, a bad (fail, error) palette and a spectrum palette

Page 455 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm ) = ?
color = DrawCreateColor( "red" ) = ?

Page 456 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFillColour( color ) = ?
DrawFillRectangle( 0mm, 0mm, 50mm, 50mm ) = ?
color = DrawCreateColor( 0, 255, 0 ) = ?
DrawFillColour( color ) = ?
DrawFillRectangle( 0mm, 50mm, 50mm, 50mm ) = ?
color = DrawCreateColor( 0, 0, 255 ) = ?
DrawFillColour( color ) = ?
DrawFillRectangle( 50mm, 0mm, 50mm, 50mm ) = ?
color = DrawCreateColor( 128, 128, 128 ) = ?
DrawFillColour( color ) = ?
DrawFillRectangle( 50mm, 50mm, 50mm, 50mm ) = ?
color = DrawCreateColor( 128, 128, 128, 128 ) = ?
DrawFillColour( color ) = ?
DrawFillRectangle(25mm, 25mm, 50mm, 50mm ) = ?

Page 457 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawCreateDrawing
Creates a new drawing. A drawing must be created before any other drawing functions can be used.

Syntax
DrawCreateDrawing( width, height )

Parameters
width

Width of drawing

height
Height of drawing

Return Value
Numeric identifier that uniquely identifies the newly created drawing.

Remarks
The specified width and height of the drawing determine the scaling factors used when the drawing is output to the
document. The drawing will be scaled to 100% of the document page width unless the height of the drawing would be
too great to fit within the page height in which case the drawing is scaled to 100% of the document page height. The
width and height parameters do not restrict drawing operations to within the boundary specified, any drawing elements
drawn outside the width and height will cause the drawing to increase in size to contain those elements.

To output a drawing to the document use the Tedds field ShowDrawing which will display the currently active drawing in
the document. Once a drawing has been output no further drawing commands can be used on that drawing because the
drawing is automatically destroyed.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm )=?
DrawRectangle( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 100mm ) = ?

Page 458 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawCreatePath
Creates a new drawing path. A drawing path stores a sequence of lines, arcs and shapes. The entire sequence can be
drawn as a single shape using DrawPath or DrawFillPath. The sequence of lines, arcs and shapes can be partitioned into
separate figures. Paths are useful for creating complex filled shapes and for drawing the same shape more than once.

Syntax
DrawCreatePath( name )

Parameters
name is the optional name of the new path

Return Value
Numeric identifier that uniquely identifies the newly created path

Remarks
A path consists of one or more figures. As you draw lines and curves they will be added to the current path, those lines
and curves become part of a figure. You can start a new figure by calling the DrawPathStartFigure function. When you
draw a path, the lines and curves within an individual figure are connected by straight lines; the ending point of one line
or curve is connected to the starting point of the next line or curve. No connecting line is drawn between the end of one
figure and the start of the next figure.

Some shapes (for example, rectangles and ellipses) are intrinsically closed. When you add an intrinsically closed shape to
a path, that shape is in a figure by itself.

All draw functions for lines, arcs, ellipses, rectangles and polygons that are called after a path has been created will be
added to the current path instead of being drawn to the drawing canvas. Only when the path itself is drawn using
DrawPath or DrawFillPath will the drawing elements actually be drawn to the drawing canvas using the current draw
settings.

If you create multiple paths which you want to use repeatedly in your drawing you can set the active path by using
DrawSetActivePath.

If there is a current transformation sequence defined the transformation will not effect the lines, arcs and shapes added
to the path, the transformation sequence will only be applied when the path is actually drawn.

When you have finished using the current path you must call DrawDestroyPath so that all subsequent drawing functions
work as normal and are not added to the current path.

Page 459 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Example 1

DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm )=1.000


DrawLineColour(“lightblue”)=1.000
DrawGrid(-150mm,-150mm,300mm,300mm,10mm,10mm)=1.000
DrawLineColour(“default”)=1.000
DrawCreatePath()=1.000
DrawRectangle(0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 100mm )=1.000
DrawRectangle(25mm, 25mm, 50mm, 50mm )=1.000
DrawFillPath()=1.000
DrawLineColour(“green”)=1.000
DrawPath()=1.000
DrawCreateTransform()=1.000
DrawTransformTranslate(-100mm,-100mm)=1.000
DrawFillPath()=1.000
DrawLineColour(“blue”)=1.000
DrawPath()=1.000
DrawDestroyTransform()=1.000
DrawDestroyPath() = 1.000
DrawLineColour(“red”)=1.000
DrawLine(-10mm,0mm,10mm,0mm)=1.000
DrawLine(0mm,-10mm,0mm,10mm)=1.000

Example 2
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm )=2.000
DrawLineColour(“lightblue”)=1.000

Page 460 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawGrid(-150mm,-150mm,300mm,300mm,10mm,10mm)=1.000
DrawLineColour(“default”)=1.000
DrawCreatePath( "I section" )=1.000
DrawLine( 0mm, 0mm, 0mm, 10mm, 45mm, 10mm, 45mm, 90mm, 0mm, 90mm,
0mm, 100mm, 100mm, 100mm, 100mm, 90mm, 55mm, 90mm, 55mm, 10mm,
100mm, 10mm, 100mm, 0mm ) = 1.000
DrawCreatePath( "C section" )=2.000
DrawLine( 0mm, 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 100mm, 100mm, 100mm, 90mm, 10mm,
90mm, 10mm, 10mm, 100mm, 10mm, 100mm, 0mm ) = 1.000
DrawSetActivePath( 0 ) = 1.000

DrawSetActivePath( "I section" ) = 1.000


DrawFillColor( "red" ) = 1.000
DrawFillPath( -100mm, -100mm ) = 1.000
DrawFillColor( "green" ) = 1.000
DrawFillPath( 0mm, -100mm ) = 1.000
DrawSetActivePath( "C section" ) = 1.000
DrawFillColor( "blue" ) = 1.000
DrawFillPath( -100mm, 0mm ) = 1.000
DrawFillColor( "yellow" ) = 1.000
DrawFillPath( 0mm, 0mm ) = 1.000

DrawSetActivePath( "I section" ) = 1.000


DrawDestroyPath() = 1.000
DrawSetActivePath( "C section" ) = 1.000
DrawDestroyPath() = 1.000

Page 461 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawCreateTransform
Creates a new drawing transformation. A drawing transformation must be created before any other drawing
transformation functions can be used.

Syntax
DrawCreateTransform( order )

Parameters
order Optional parameter that specifies how subsequent transformations are added to the active transformation, see
remarks

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
Order Description
"Append" Transformation commands are added to the end of the overall transformation matrix
"Prepend" Transformation commands are added to the begining of the overall transformation matrix

A drawing transformation is applied to all subsequent drawing commands so that the co-ordinates used are
automatically modified by the drawing transformation. A drawing transformation consists of a sequence of
transformation commands that are combined to apply the overall transformation. Transformations are available for
rotation, scaling and translation. When you no longer want a transformation to be used ensure that you use the
DrawDestroyTransform function to destroy the current transformation sequence.

If previous drawing transformations already exist then the new transformation will inherit all previous transformations.
When the new drawing transformation is destroyed the previous drawing transformation will be restored.

To apply a rotation use the DrawTransformRotate function, to apply a scaling transformation use the
DrawTransformScale function and finally to apply a translation use the DrawTransformTranslate function. The sequence
of transformations is applied in the order that the transformation functions are called and there is no limit to the number
of transformations that are applied.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 300mm, 300mm )=?
DrawLineColour(“lightblue”)=?
DrawGrid(-150mm,-150mm,300mm,300mm,10mm,10mm)=?
Page 462 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawLineColour(“default”)=?
DrawRectangle(0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 100mm )=?
DrawCreateTransform()=?
DrawTransformRotate(45)=?
DrawLineColour(“salmon”)=?
DrawRectangle(0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 100mm )=?
DrawTransformTranslate(100mm,0mm)=?
DrawLineColour(“green”)=?
DrawRectangle(0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 100mm )=?
DrawTransformScale(0.5,0.5)=?
DrawLineColour(“blue”)=?
DrawRectangle(0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 100mm )=?
DrawDestroyTransform()=?
DrawLineColour(“red”)=?
DrawLine(-10mm,0mm,10mm,0mm)=?
DrawLine(0mm,-10mm,0mm,10mm)=?

Page 463 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawCurve
Draws a curve using a cardinal spline using the specified co-ordinates with the current line colour, style and width.

Syntax
DrawCurve(tension, x1, y1, … x[n], y[n] )

Parameters
tension

determines the amount of bend on the spline, typically in the range 0.0 to 1.0 where zero draws a straight line

x1

x co-ordinate that the cardinal spline passes through

y1
y co-ordinate that the cardinal spline passes through

Remarks
A cardinal spline is a curve which passes smoothly through the specified co-ordinates. Then tension value changes the
way the cardinal spline bends between each co-ordinate. When the tension value is zero the co-ordinates are connected
by straight lines.

If only a single co-ordinate is specified then a curve will be drawn from the last known co-ordinate to the specified co-
ordinate. The last known co-ordinate is the last co-ordinate used in a previous call to DrawCurve, DrawLine or the co-
ordinate specified to DrawMove.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Example
DrawCreateDrawing() = 1.000
DrawCurve(0.6, 0mm, 0mm, 25mm, 7mm, 75mm, -7mm, 100mm, 0mm ) = 1.000

Page 464 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawCreateDrawing() = 2.000

x1 = 20mm; y1 = 50mm;
x2 = 100mm; y2 = 10mm;
x3 = 200mm; y3 = 100mm;
x4 = 300mm; y4 = 50mm;
x5 = 400mm; y5 = 80mm
DrawCurve(0.0, x1, y1, x2, y2, x3, y3, x4, y4, x5, y5) = 1.000
DrawLineColor("Blue") = 1.000
DrawCurve(0.6, x1, y1, x2, y2, x3, y3, x4, y4, x5, y5) = 1.000
DrawLineColor("Red") = 1.000
DrawCurve(1.0, x1, y1, x2, y2, x3, y3, x4, y4, x5, y5) = 1.000
DrawEllipseAlignment("Center", "Center") = 1.000
DrawFillColor("Green") = 1.000
EvalFor( "i", 1, "i <= 5", +1,
"DrawFillEllipse( x[i], y[i], 5mm, 5mm )" ) = 1.000

Page 465 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawDestroyDrawing
Destroys a drawing previously created using DrawCreateDrawing.

Syntax
DrawDestroyDrawing( id )

Parameters
id

Optional drawing identifier returned by DrawCreateDrawing, if not specified then the active drawing is destroyed.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
Destroys a drawing created by DrawCreateDrawing and frees all the system. resources associated with the drawing. This
function is only required if you have created a drawing that you do not want to output, when a drawing is output it is
automatically destroyed by TEDDS.

Page 466 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawDestroyPath
Destroys a drawing path previously created using DrawCreatePath.

Syntax
DrawDestroyPath( id )

DrawDestroyPath( name )

Parameters
name is the optional name of the path as specified to DrawCreatePath
id is the optional unique numeric identifier of the path as returned from DrawCreatePath. Use 0 to set no
active path.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
Destroys a drawing path created by DrawCreatePath. Once the current path is destroyed all drawing commands will
operate as normal and will not be added to a drawing path.

If a name or id parameter is not specified the current drawing path will be destroyed.

Page 467 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawDestroyTransform
Destroys the current transformation previously created using DrawCreateTransform.

Syntax
DrawDestroyTransform()

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
Destroys the current transformation created by DrawCreateTransform. Once the current transformation is destroyed the
previously defined transformation will apply, if there is no previous transformation then all drawing commands will be
drawn with no transformations applied.

Example

width = 20
height = 50
DrawCreateDrawing( 100, 100 ) = ?

DrawLineColor( "red" ) = ?
DrawRectangle( 0, 0, width, height ) = ?

DrawCreateTransform() = ?
DrawTransformTranslate( width, 0 ) = ?
DrawLineColor( "green" ) = ?
DrawRectangle( 0, 0, width, height ) = ?

DrawCreateTransform() = ?
DrawTransformTranslate( width, 0 ) = ?
DrawLineColor( "blue" ) = ?
DrawRectangle( 0, 0, width, height ) = ?
DrawDestroyTransform() = ?

DrawFillColor( "red" ) = ?
DrawFillRectangle( 0, 0, width, height / 2 ) = ?
DrawDestroyTransform() = ?

DrawFillColor( "green" ) = ?

Page 468 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFillRectangle( 0, 0, width, height / 2 ) = ?

Page 469 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawDimensionAlignment
Sets the dimension alignment used by the DrawDimensionLine function. The alignment determines how the bounding
box of the dimension is positioned vertically relative to the co-ordinates of the line.

Syntax
DrawDimensionAlignment( alignmentName, margin )

DrawDimensionAlignment( alignmentId, margin )

Parameters
alignmentName
name of alignment type to use for aligning dimension vertically

alignmentId
numeric id of alignment type to use for aligning dimension vertically

margin
optional margin that offsets the entire dimension relative to the co-ordinates of the line. The margin is only
applicable when using either the “near” or “far” alignment options.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The alignment is relationship between the bounding rectangle of the dimension and co-ordinates.

The following table lists the alignment types. The default alignment is centre.

Id Name Description
-1 “Default” Use default dimension alignment (centre).
0 “Near” Dimension is aligned so that the bottom left corner of the dimensions bounding rectangle is
nearest to the top of the line between the dimensions start and end co-ordinate.
1 “Centre” Dimension is aligned so that the dimensions bounding rectangle is centered about the line
“Center” between the dimensions start and end co-ordinate.
2 “Far” Dimension is aligned so that the bottom left corner of the dimensions bounding rectangle is the
height of the bounding box away from the line between the dimensions start and end co-
ordinate.

Page 470 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 1000mm, 50mm ) = ?
DrawDimensionAlignment( “centre” ) = ?
DrawDimensionLine( 0mm, 0mm, 1000mm, 0mm ) = ?
DrawLineColour( “red” ) = ?
DrawLine( -5mm, 0mm, 5mm, 0mm ) = ?
DrawLine( 0mm, -5mm, 0mm, 5mm ) = ?
DrawLine( 1000mm-5mm, 0mm, 1000mm+5mm, 0mm ) = ?
DrawLine( 1000mm, -5mm, 1000mm, 5mm ) = ?

DrawDimensionAlignment( “near” ) = ?

DrawDimensionAlignment( “far” ) = ?

DrawDimensionAlignment( “near”, 25mm ) = ?

Page 471 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawDimensionLine
Draws a dimension line between two or more co-ordinate using the current line colour, style and width and the current
font and font colour. Each end of the line is drawn using the current dimension line cap style.

Syntax
DrawDimensionLine( x0, y0, x1, y1, string1, xn, yn, stringn, … )

DrawDimensionLine( x0, y0, x1, y1, xn, yn, … )

Parameters
x0
x co-ordinate for start of first dimension line.

y0
y co-ordinate for start of first dimension line.

x1
x co-ordinate for end of first dimension line.

y1
y co-ordinate for end of first dimension line.

string1
optional string that is drawn at the centre of the dimension line. If the string is not specified the string will be
automatically created based on the distance between the start and end co-ordinates and will be formatted according to
the DrawDimensionStringFormat settings. If the string is the name of a variable the text will be formatted according to
the DrawDimensionStringFormatVar settings

xn
optional x co-ordinate for end of the nth dimension line when drawing a continuous dimension.

yn
optional y co-ordinate for end of the nth dimension line when drawing a continuous dimension.

stringn
optional string that is drawn at the centre of the n th dimension line when drawing a continuous dimension.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Page 472 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Remarks
The DrawDimensionLine function can be used to easily indicate the dimensions of other elements on a drawing. If only
two pairs of co-ordinates are specified then a single dimension is drawn, if more than two pairs of co-ordinates are
specified then a continuous dimension is drawn.

The line is drawn relative to the co-ordinates based on the Dimension Alignment property which can be set using the
DrawDimensionAlignment function.

The location that the string is drawn relative to the dimension line depends on the Draw Dimension String Alignment
property which can be set using the DrawDimensionStringAlignment function.

The orientation of the string depends on the Draw Dimension String Orientation property which can be set using the
DrawDimensionStringOrientation function.

If the string is too large to draw within the space of the dimension then the Draw Dimension String Fit property is used to
determine how to draw the string, this property can be set using the DrawDimensionStringFit function.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 1000mm, 50mm ) = 1.000
DrawDimensionLine( 0mm, 0mm, 1000mm, 0mm ) = 1.000

x1 = 1000mm
DrawDimensionLine( 0mm, 0mm, 1000mm, 0mm, “x1” ) = 1.000

x = 250mm; y = 500mm; z = 200mm


DrawDimensionLine( 0mm, 0mm, x, 0mm, x+y, 0mm, x+y+z, 0mm ) = 1.000

Page 473 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawDimensionLineCap
Sets the style of line cap drawn at the start and end of a dimension line drawn using the DrawDimensionLine function.

Syntax
DrawDimensionLineCap( styleName )

Parameters
styleName

name of a predefined dimension line cap style, see remarks.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The following table lists the predefined line cap style names.

Style Name Description


“Default” Use default dimension line cap (Bar).
“None” No line cap
“Bar” Bar
“Triangle” Triangle
“InternalArrow” Arrow head directed away from the centre of the line
“BarInternalArrow” Vertical bar and an arrow head directed away from the centre of the line
“ExternalArrow” Arrow head directed towards the centre of the line
“BarExternalArrow” Vertical bar and an arrow head directed towards the centre of the line
“Arrow” Arrow head directed away from the centre of the line
“BarArrow” Vertical bar and arrow head directed away from the centre of the line
“AutoArrow” Arrow head that is drawn internally if there is enough room otherwise it is drawn
externally
“BarAutoArrow” Vertical bar and arrow head that is drawn internally if there is enough room
otherwise it is drawn externally
“SlashedBar” Vertical bar and 45 degree line
“Square” Square
“Circle” Circle

Page 474 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 200mm, 50mm ) = ?
DrawLineColor( “lightgrey” ) = ?
DrawLine( 0mm, -5mm, 0mm, 15mm ) = ?
DrawLine( 50mm, -5mm, 50mm, 15mm ) = ?
DrawLineColor( “Black” ) = ?
DrawDimensionLineCap( "AutoArrow" ) = ?
DrawDimensionLine( 0mm, 0mm, 50mm, 0mm ) = ?
DrawDimensionLine( 0mm, 10mm, 20mm, 10mm ) = ?

Page 475 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawDimensionLineCapSize
Sets the size of the line cap drawn at the start and the end of a dimension drawn using DrawDimensionLine.

Syntax
DrawDimensionLineCapSize( size )

Parameters
size
size of line cap or zero to use auto sizing (default)

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
If the size specified is zero then the size of line caps will be calculated automatically based on the current font size.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 200mm, 50mm ) = 1.000
DrawLineColor( "lightgrey" ) = 1.000
DrawLine( 0mm, 0mm, 0mm, 40mm ) = 1.000
DrawLine( 50mm, 0mm, 50mm, 40mm ) = 1.000
DrawLineColor( "black" ) = 1.000
DrawLineWidth( .5mm ) = 1.000
DrawFont( "Arial", 5mm ) = 1.000
DrawDimensionLineCap( "Arrow" ) = 1.000
DrawDimensionLineCapSize( 2mm ) = 1.000
DrawDimensionLine( 0mm, 30mm, 50mm, 30mm ) = 1.000
DrawDimensionLineCapSize( 4mm ) = 1.000
DrawDimensionLine( 0mm, 20mm, 50mm, 20mm ) = 1.000
DrawDimensionLineCapSize( 8mm ) = 1.000
DrawDimensionLine( 0mm, 10mm, 50mm, 10mm ) = 1.000
DrawDimensionLineCapSize( 0mm ) = 1.000
DrawDimensionLine( 0mm, 0mm, 50mm, 0mm ) = 1.000

Page 476 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Page 477 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawDimensionLineIf
Draws a dimension line between two or more co-ordinate using the current line colour, style and width and the current
font and font colour. Each end of the line is drawn using the current dimension line cap style. The line is only drawn if the
condition expression evaluates to true.

Syntax
DrawDimensionLineIf( condition, x0, y0, x1, y1, string1, xn, yn, stringn, … )

DrawDimensionLineIf( condition, x0, y0, x1, y1, xn, yn, … )

Parameters
condition
Expression that must evaluate to either True (1) or False (0)

x0
x co-ordinate for start of first dimension line.

y0
y co-ordinate for start of first dimension line.

x1
x co-ordinate for end of first dimension line.

y1
y co-ordinate for end of first dimension line.

string1
optional string that is drawn at the centre of the dimension line. If the string is not specified the string will be
automatically created based on the distance between the start and end co-ordinates and using the appropriate Tedds
base system units. Expression text format is not currently supported.

xn
optional x co-ordinate for end of the nth dimension line when drawing a continuous dimension.

yn
optional y co-ordinate for end of the nth dimension line when drawing a continuous dimension.

stringn
optional string that is drawn at the centre of the n th dimension line when drawing a continuous dimension.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Page 478 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Remarks
The DrawDimensionLine function can be used to easily indicate the dimensions of other elements on a drawing. If only
two pairs of co-ordinates are specified then a single dimension is drawn, if more than two pairs of co-ordinates are
specified then a continuous dimension is drawn.

The line is drawn relative to the co-ordinates based on the Dimension Alignment property which can be set using the
DrawDimensionAlignment function.

The location that the string is drawn relative to the dimension line depends on the Draw Dimension String Alignment
property which can be set using the DrawDimensionStringAlignment function.

The orientation of the string depends on the Draw Dimension String Orientation property which can be set using the
DrawDimensionStringOrientation function.

If the string is too large to draw within the space of the dimension then the Draw Dimension String Fit property is used to
determine how to draw the srting, this property can bset using the DrawDimensionStringFit function.

Example
length = 250mm; height = 250mm
DrawCreateDrawing( length, height ) = ?
DrawFont( “Arial”, 20mm, “regular” ) = ?
DrawFillRectangle( 0mm, 0mm, length, height ) = ?
DrawDimensionAlignment( “far” ) = ?
DrawDimensionLineIf( length > 10mm, 0mm, 0mm, length, 0mm ) = ?
DrawDimensionLineIf( height > 10mm, length, 0mm, length, height ) =
?

height = 9mm

Page 479 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawDimensionStringAlignment
Sets the text alignment used by the DrawDimensionLine function. The alignment determines how the text is positioned
vertically relative to the dimension line.

Syntax
DrawStringAlignment( lineAlignmentName )

DrawStringAlignment( lineAlignmentId )

Parameters
lineAlignmentName

name of alignment type to use for aligning text vertically

lineAlignmentId
numeric id of alignment type to use for aligning text vertically

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The alignment is relationship between the bounding rectangle of the string to output and the dimension line itself.

The following table lists the alignment types.

Id Name Description
-1 “Default” Use default string alignment (centre)
0 “Near” String is aligned so that the bottom left corner of the strings bounding rectangle is nearest to
the top of the line between the dimensions start and end co-ordinate.
1 “Centre” String is aligned so that the strings bounding rectangle is centered about the line between the
“Center dimensions start and end co-ordinate.
2 “Far” String is aligned so that the bottom left corner of the strings bounding rectangle is the height of
the bounding rectangle away from the line between the dimensions start and end co-ordinate.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 1000mm, 50mm ) = ?
DrawDimensionStringAlignment( “near” ) = ?
DrawDimensionLine( 0mm, 0mm, 1000mm, 0mm ) = ?
Page 480 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawDimensionStringAlignment( “centre” ) = ?

DrawDimensionStringAlignment( “far” ) = ?

Page 481 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawDimensionStringFit
Sets the option that determines when drawing dimension lines that have dimension strings that are too large to draw
within the space of the dimension how to draw the string.

Syntax
DrawDimensionStringFit( fitId )

DrawDimensionStringFit( fitName )

Parameters
fitId

numeric id of string fit style.

fitName

name of string fit style.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
If automatic string fitting is enabled the direction and alignment of the dimension and the orientation and alignment of
the dimension string effect where the string will be drawn if it will not fit within the dimension.

The following table lists the string fit styles. The default fit is auto.

Id Name Description
-1 “Default” Use default fit (Auto)
0 “Hide” Do not draw string.
1 “Auto” Adjust orientation and alignment of string for a
best fit.

Example
x = 75mm; y = 150mm; z = 20mm
DrawCreateDrawing( x+y+z, 10mm ) = ?
DrawDimensionLineCap(“barautoarrow”,”barautoarrow”) = ?

Page 482 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFont(“Arial”,10mm,”regular”) = ?
DrawDimensionStringFit( “Auto” ) = ?
DrawDimensionLine( 0mm, 0mm, x, 0mm, x+y, 0mm, x+y+z, 0mm ) = ?

DrawDimensionLineCap(“barautoarrow”,”barautoarrow”) = ?
DrawDimensionStringFit( “Hide” ) = ?

z = 10mm
DrawDimensionLineCap(“barautoarrow”,”barautoarrow”) = ?
DrawDimensionStringFit( “Auto” ) = ?
DrawDimensionStringAlignment( “near” )=?

DrawDimensionStringFit( “Auto” ) = ?
DrawDimensionLine(0mm, 0mm, 0mm, z ) = ?
DrawDimensionLine(x, z, x, 0mm ) = ?

Page 483 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawDimensionStringFormat
Sets the string format used when drawing dimensions with DrawDimensionLine for string values that are not specified.

Syntax
DrawDimensionStringFormat( format, precision, units, showUnits )

Parameters
format

TEDDS number format (Fixed, Scientific, Engineering, General) used to format value to.

precision

number of decimal places to format value to.

units

length units to format value to

showUnits

if True show units appended to dimension value; otherwise just show length value

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
When using the function DrawDimensionLine the string value to draw within the dimension is optional, if the string
value is not specified the string will be automatically created using the length of the dimension formatted according to
the DrawDimensionStringFormat settings.

The following table lists the format options.

Format Description
“f” Fixed
“s” Scientific
“e” Engineering
“g” General

The following table lists the unit options. the default is either mm or ft in according to the Tedds base system units.

Page 484 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Units Description
“mm” millimetres
“cm” centimetres
“m” metres
“in” inches
“ft” feet
“ft in” feet and inches (1ft 1in)
“’\” inches (1”)
“’ \”” feet an inches (1‘ 1“)

Example
x = 500mm; y = 150mm; z = 250mm
DrawCreateDrawing( x+y+z, 50mm ) = ?
DrawFont(“Arial”,50mm,”regular”) = ?
DrawDimensionLine( 0mm, 0mm, x, 0mm, x+y, 0mm, x+y+z, 0mm ) = ?

DrawCreateDrawing( x+y+z, 50mm ) = ?


DrawFont(“Arial”,50mm,”regular”) = ?
DrawDimensionStringFormat( “f”, 2, “in”, True ) = ?
DrawDimensionLine( 0mm, 0mm, x, 0mm, x+y, 0mm, x+y+z, 0mm ) = ?

DrawCreateDrawing( x+y+z, 50mm ) = ?


DrawFont(“Arial”,50mm,”regular”) = ?
DrawDimensionStringFormat( “g”, 2, “’ \””, True ) = ?
DrawDimensionLine( 0mm, 0mm, x, 0mm, x+y, 0mm, x+y+z, 0mm ) = ?

Page 485 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawDimensionStringFormatVar
Sets the string format used when drawing dimensions with DrawDimensionLine and the dimension text used is the name
of a variable.

Syntax
DrawDimensionStringFormatVar( format )

Parameters
format is the string format. Place holders indicate where to insert values in the string and in what format.

[@ ,format and precision, units]

@ is replaced with the name of the variable specified for the dimension

format is the format flag (F=Fixed, E=Engineering, G=General, S=Scientific).

precision is the precision of the result (0-15)

units is the units to display, if the units are enclosed in () then the unit name will not be included

Example
L = 1000mm
DrawCreateDrawing( 1000mm, 50mm ) = 1.000
DrawDimensionStringFormatVar ( “@” ) = 1.000
DrawDimensionLine( 0mm, 0mm, L, 0mm, “L” ) = 1.000

DrawCreateDrawing( 1000mm, 50mm ) = 2.000


DrawDimensionStringFormatVar ( “[@,G2, (mm)]” ) = 1.000
DrawDimensionLine( 0mm, 0mm, L, 0mm, “L” ) = 1.000

DrawCreateDrawing( 1000mm, 50mm ) = 3.000


DrawDimensionStringFormatVar ( “@ = [@,G2,mm]” ) = 1.000
DrawDimensionLine( 0mm, 0mm, L, 0mm, “L” ) = 1.000

Page 486 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Page 487 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawDimensionStringOrientation
Sets the option that determines when drawing dimension lines using the DrawDimensionLine function at what angle the
string is drawn.

Syntax
DrawDimensionStringOrientation( orientationId )

DrawDimensionStringOrientation( orientationName )

Parameters
orientationId

numeric id of string orientation style.

orientationName

name of string orientation style.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The following table lists the string orientation styles. The default orientation is parallel.

Id Name Description
-1 “Default” Use default orientation (Parallel)
0 “Horizontal” String is always drawn horizontally.
1 “Parallel” String is drawn parallel to dimension.
2 “Perpendicular” String is drawn perpendicular to dimension.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 1000mm, 1000mm ) = ?
DrawFont(“Arial”,75mm,”regular”) = ?
DrawDimensionStringOrientation( “horizontal” ) = ?
DrawDimensionLine( 0mm, 0mm, 0mm, 1000mm ) = ?
DrawDimensionLine( 0mm, 0mm, 750mm, 750mm ) = ?

Page 488 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawDimensionLine( 0mm, 0mm, 1000mm, 0mm ) = ?


DrawDimensionLine( 0mm, 0mm, 750mm, -750mm ) = ?
DrawDimensionLine( 0mm, 0mm, 0mm, -1000mm ) = ?
DrawDimensionLine( 0mm, 0mm, -750mm, -750mm ) = ?
DrawDimensionLine( 0mm, 0mm, -1000mm, 0mm ) = ?
DrawDimensionLine( 0mm, 0mm, -750mm, 750mm ) = ?

DrawDimensionStringOrientation( “parallel” ) = ?

DrawDimensionStringOrientation( “perpendicular” ) = ?

Page 489 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawDimensionStringRotate
This function is deprecated please see DrawDimensionStringOrientation.

Page 490 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawEllipse
Draws the outline of an ellipse using the specified width and height. The ellipse will be drawn using the current line
colour, style and width.

Syntax
DrawEllipse( x1, y1, width, height )

Parameters
x1

x co-ordinate

y1
y co-ordinate

width
width of ellipse

height
height of ellipse

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The location that the ellipse is drawn relative to the co-ordinate is dependent on the Ellipse alignment property which
can be set using the DrawEllipseAlignment function. By default the co-ordinate is the bottom left co-ordinate of the
ellipses bounding rectangle.

To draw a circle ensure that both the width and height parameters use the same value.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 50mm ) = ?
DrawEllipse( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 50mm ) = ?

Page 491 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawEllipseAlignment
Sets the ellipse alignment used by the DrawEllipse function. The alignment determines how the ellipse is positioned
relative to the output co-ordinate.

Syntax
DrawEllipseAlignment( horizontalAlignmentName, verticalAlignmentName )

DrawEllipseAlignment( horizontalAlignmentId, verticalAlignmentId )

Parameters
horizontalAlignmentName

name of alignment type to use for aligning ellipse horizontally

horizontalAlignmentId
numeric id of alignment type to use for aligning ellipse horizontally

verticalAlignmentName

name of alignment type to use for aligning ellipse vertically

verticalAlignmentId
numeric id of alignment type to use for aligning ellipse vertically

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The alignment is the relationship between the bounding rectangle of the ellipse and the output co-ordinate.

The following table lists the alignment types. The default alignment is near, near which is the bottom left corner of the
bounding rectangle.

Id Name Description
-1 “Default” Use default ellipse alignment (near)
0 “Near” Ellipse is aligned so that the bottom left corner of the ellipses bounding rectangle is at
the output co-ordinate.
1 “Centre” Ellipse is aligned so that the centre of the ellipse is at the co-ordinate.
“Center”
2 “Far” Ellipse is aligned so that the top right corner of the ellipses bounding rectangle is at
the output co-ordinate.

Page 492 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 50, 50 ) = ?
DrawEllipseAlignment("near","near")=?
DrawEllipse( 0, 0, 50, 50 ) = ?
DrawLineColor( “red” ) = ?
DrawLine( -5, 0, 5, 0 ) = ?
DrawLine( 0, -5, 0, 5 ) = ?

DrawEllipseAlignment("Centre","Centre")=?

DrawEllipseAlignment("far","far")=?

Page 493 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Page 494 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawEllipseIf
Draws the outline of an ellipse using the width and height. The ellipse will be drawn using the current line colour, style
and width. The ellipse is only drawn if the condition expression evaluates to true.

Syntax
DrawEllipseIf( condition, x1, y1, width, height )

Parameters
condition
Expression that must evaluate to either True (1) or False (0)

x1

x co-ordinate

y1
y co-ordinate

width
width of ellipse

height
height of ellipse

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The location that the ellipse is drawn relative to the co-ordinate is dependent on the Ellipse alignment property which
can be set using the DrawEllipseAlignment function. By default the co-ordinate is the bottom left co-ordinate of the
ellipses bounding rectangle.

To draw a circle ensure that both the width and height parameters use the same value.

Example
width = 100mm
height = 50mm
DrawCreateDrawing( width, height ) = ?

Page 495 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawEllipseIf( width > height, 0mm, 0mm, width, height ) = ?


DrawRectangle( 0mm, 0mm, width, height ) = ?

width = 50mm

Page 496 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFillColor / DrawFillColour
Sets the color used to fill rectangles, polygons, ellipses and paths.

Syntax
DrawFillColor( colourName, transparency )

DrawFillColour( colourName, transparency )

DrawFillColor( red, green, blue, transparency )

DrawFillColour( red, green, blue, transparency )

DrawFillColor( colour )

DrawFillColour( colour )

Parameters
colourName name of a predefined color, see remarks.

red amount of red component for a custom color. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

green amount of green component for a custom color. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

blue amount of blue component for a custom color. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

transparency optional amount of transparency. Value can be between 0 and 255 inclusive where 0 is completely
transparent and 255 is completely opaque. Default is opaque i.e. no transparency.

colour Color value created using DrawCreateColor.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
For details of the pre-defined system colors refer to the DrawCreateColor documentation.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm ) = 4.000
DrawFillColour( "red" ) = 1.000
Page 497 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFillRectangle( 0mm, 0mm, 50mm, 50mm ) = 1.000


DrawFillColour( "statusgood5" ) = 1.000
DrawFillRectangle( 0mm, 50mm, 50mm, 50mm ) = 1.000
DrawFillColour( "spectrumblue" ) = 1.000
DrawFillRectangle( 50mm, 0mm, 50mm, 50mm ) = 1.000
DrawFillColour( 192, 128, 0 ) = 1.000
DrawFillRectangle( 50mm, 50mm, 50mm, 50mm ) = 1.000
DrawFillColour( 255, 0, 0, 128 ) = 1.000
DrawFillRectangle( 75mm, 75mm, 50mm, 50mm ) = 1.000

Page 498 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFillColourBackground / DrawFillColorBackground
Sets the background colour used to fill rectangles, polygons, ellipses and paths when a fill style other than solid is used.

Syntax
DrawFillColorBackground( colorName )

DrawFillColourBackground( colorName )

DrawFillColorBackground( red, green, blue, transparency )

DrawFillColourBackground( red, green, blue, transparency )

DrawFillColorBackground( color )

DrawFillColourBackground( color )

Parameters
colorName name of a predefined color, see remarks.

red amount of red component for a custom color. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

green amount of green component for a custom color. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

blue amount of blue component for a custom color. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

transparency optional amount of transparency. Value can be between 0 and 255 inclusive
where 0 is completely transparent and 255 is completely opaque. Default is opaque i.e.
no transparency.
colour Colour value created using DrawCreateColor.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
For details of the pre-defined system colours refer to the DrawCreateColor documentation.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm ) = 1.000

Page 499 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFillStyle( “ForwardDiagonal” ) = 1.000


DrawFillColor( “Black” ) = 1.000
DrawFillColorBackground( "lightgray" ) = 1.000
DrawFillRectangle( 0mm, 0mm, 50mm, 50mm ) = 1.000

Page 500 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFillColor / DrawFillColour
Sets the color used to fill rectangles, polygons, ellipses and paths.

Syntax
DrawFillColor( colourName, transparency )

DrawFillColour( colourName, transparency )

DrawFillColor( red, green, blue, transparency )

DrawFillColour( red, green, blue, transparency )

DrawFillColor( colour )

DrawFillColour( colour )

Parameters
colourName name of a predefined color, see remarks.

red amount of red component for a custom color. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

green amount of green component for a custom color. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

blue amount of blue component for a custom color. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

transparency optional amount of transparency. Value can be between 0 and 255 inclusive where 0 is completely
transparent and 255 is completely opaque. Default is opaque i.e. no transparency.

colour Color value created using DrawCreateColor.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
For details of the pre-defined system colors refer to the DrawCreateColor documentation.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm ) = 4.000
DrawFillColour( "red" ) = 1.000
Page 501 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFillRectangle( 0mm, 0mm, 50mm, 50mm ) = 1.000


DrawFillColour( "statusgood5" ) = 1.000
DrawFillRectangle( 0mm, 50mm, 50mm, 50mm ) = 1.000
DrawFillColour( "spectrumblue" ) = 1.000
DrawFillRectangle( 50mm, 0mm, 50mm, 50mm ) = 1.000
DrawFillColour( 192, 128, 0 ) = 1.000
DrawFillRectangle( 50mm, 50mm, 50mm, 50mm ) = 1.000
DrawFillColour( 255, 0, 0, 128 ) = 1.000
DrawFillRectangle( 75mm, 75mm, 50mm, 50mm ) = 1.000

Page 502 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFillColourBackground / DrawFillColorBackground
Sets the background colour used to fill rectangles, polygons, ellipses and paths when a fill style other than solid is used.

Syntax
DrawFillColorBackground( colorName )

DrawFillColourBackground( colorName )

DrawFillColorBackground( red, green, blue, transparency )

DrawFillColourBackground( red, green, blue, transparency )

DrawFillColorBackground( color )

DrawFillColourBackground( color )

Parameters
colorName name of a predefined color, see remarks.

red amount of red component for a custom color. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

green amount of green component for a custom color. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

blue amount of blue component for a custom color. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

transparency optional amount of transparency. Value can be between 0 and 255 inclusive
where 0 is completely transparent and 255 is completely opaque. Default is opaque i.e.
no transparency.
colour Colour value created using DrawCreateColor.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
For details of the pre-defined system colours refer to the DrawCreateColor documentation.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm ) = 1.000

Page 503 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFillStyle( “ForwardDiagonal” ) = 1.000


DrawFillColor( “Black” ) = 1.000
DrawFillColorBackground( "lightgray" ) = 1.000
DrawFillRectangle( 0mm, 0mm, 50mm, 50mm ) = 1.000

Page 504 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFillEllipse
Fills an ellipse at the specified co-ordinate using the specified width and height. The ellipse will be drawn using the
current fill colour and style.

Syntax
DrawFillEllipse( x1, y1, width, height )

Parameters
x1

x co-ordinate

y1
y co-ordinate

width
width of ellipse

height
height of ellipse

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The location that the ellipse is drawn relative to the co-ordinate is dependent on the Ellipse alignment property which
can be set using the DrawEllipseAlignment function. By default the co-ordinate is the bottom left co-ordinate of the
ellipses bounding rectangle.

To draw a circle ensure that both the width and height parameters use the same value.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 50mm ) = ?
DrawFillEllipse( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 50mm ) = ?

Page 505 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFillEllipseIf
Fills an ellipse using the specified width and height. The ellipse will be drawn using the current fill colour and style. The
ellipse is only drawn if the condition expression evaluates to true.

Syntax
DrawFillEllipseIf( condition, x1, y1, width, height )

Parameters
condition
Expression that must evaluate to either True (1) or False (0)

x1

x co-ordinate

y1
y co-ordinate

width
width of ellipse

height
height of ellipse

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The location that the ellipse is drawn relative to the co-ordinate is dependent on the Ellipse alignment property which
can be set using the DrawEllipseAlignment function. By default the co-ordinate is the bottom left co-ordinate of the
ellipses bounding rectangle.

To draw a circle ensure that both the width and height parameters use the same value.

Example
width = 100mm
height = 50mm
DrawCreateDrawing( width, height ) = ?

Page 506 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFillEllipseIf( width > height, 0mm, 0mm, width, height ) = ?


DrawRectangle(0mm, 0mm, width, height ) = ?

width = 50mm

Page 507 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFillMode
Sets the option that determines how the interior of polygons and paths are filled.

Syntax
DrawFillMode( fillModeId )

DrawFillMode( fillModeName )

Parameters
fillModeId numeric id of a predefined fill mode, see remarks.

fillModeName name of a predefined fill mode, see remarks

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The interior of a path or polygon as drawn by DrawFillPolygon or DrawFillPath is filled using one of two modes: alternate
or winding. The mode determines how to fill the interior of a closed figure.

The default mode is Alternate. To determine the interiors of closed figures in the alternate mode, draw a line from any
arbitrary start point in the path to some point obviously outside the path. If the line crosses an odd number of path
segments, the starting point is inside the closed region and is therefore part of the fill. An even number of crossings
means that the point is not in an area to be filled. An open figure is filled by using a line to connect the last point to the
first point of the figure.

The Winding mode considers the direction of the path segments at each intersection. It adds one for every clockwise
intersection, and subtracts one for every counter clockwise intersection. If the result is nonzero, the point is considered
inside the fill area. A zero count means that the point lies outside the fill area.

A figure is considered clockwise or counter clockwise based on the order in which the segments of the figure are drawn.

The following table lists the predefined fill modes.

Id Fill Mode Name Description


-1 “Default” Default (Alternate)
0 “Alternate” Alternate
1 “Winding” Winding

Page 508 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 200, 100 ) = ?
DrawEllipseAlignment( "center", "center" ) = ?
DrawCreatePath() = ?
DrawEllipse( 50, 50, 100, 50 ) = ?
DrawEllipse( 50, 50, 50, 100 ) = ?
DrawFillMode("alternate")=?
DrawFillPath( 0, 0 ) = ?
DrawFillMode("winding")=?
DrawFillPath( 100, 0 ) = ?
DrawDestroyPath() = ?
DrawStringAlignment( "center", "center" ) = ?
DrawString( 50, 50, "Alternate" ) = ?
DrawString( 150, 50, "Winding" ) = ?

Page 509 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFillOutline
Sets the option that determines when filling rectangles, polygons, ellipses and paths whether the outline of the shape is
also drawn.

Syntax
DrawFillOutline( drawOutline )

Parameters
drawOutline
if True (1) then draw an outline otherwise if False(0) do not draw an outline.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm ) = 1.000
DrawFillPolygon( 0mm, 0mm, 0mm, 50mm, 50mm, 100mm, 100mm, 50mm,
100mm, 0mm ) = 1.000

DrawFillOutline( True ) = ?

Page 510 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Page 511 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFillPath
Fills the interior of the current drawing path using the current fill colour and style. If a figure in the path is not closed, this
function treats the non closed figure as if it were closed by a straight line that connects the figure’s starting and ending
co-ordinates.

Syntax
DrawFillPath()

DrawFillPath( offsetX, offsetY, scaleX, scaleY, angle )

Parameters
offsetX
optional horizontal translation
offsetY
optional vertical translation
scaleX
optional horizontal scale factor, use 1.0 for original scale, use -1.0 to mirror about the axis
scaleY
optional vertical scale factor, use 1.0 for original scale, use -1.0 to mirror about the axis
angle
optional angle of rotation in degrees, anti-clockwise from the x-axis

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
A path is created using DrawCreatePath, as you draw lines and curves they will be added to the current path which may
consist of one or more figures. When you fill a path, the lines and curves within each figure are connected by straight
lines; the ending point of one line or curve is connected to the starting point of the next line or curve. No connecting line
is drawn between the end of one figure and the start of the next figure.

Internal regions of the path are filled alternately, you can determine whether a test point is inside or outside a closed
path as follows: Draw a line from the test point to a point that is distant from the path. If that line crosses the path an
odd number of times, the test point is inside the path; otherwise, the test point is outside the path.

When you have created all the elements within the path DrawFillPath must then be called to actually draw the filled
path. The path can be drawn any number of times by using repeated calls to DrawFillPath, the optional transformation
arguments allow you to translate, scale and rotate the path each time it is drawn.

Page 512 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm )=?
DrawLineColour(“lightblue”)=?
DrawGrid(0mm,0mm,100mm,100mm,10mm,10mm)=?
DrawCreatePath()=?
DrawLine(0mm,0mm,0mm,90mm)=?
DrawArcAlignment(“near”,”far”)=?
DrawArc(0mm,100mm,20mm,20mm,180,-90)=?
DrawLine(10mm,100mm,20mm,100mm,20mm,0mm,0mm,0mm)=?
DrawRectangle( 5mm, 5mm, 10mm, 80mm )=?
DrawFillPath()=?
DrawDestroyPath() = ?

DrawFillColour(“red”)=?
DrawFillPath()=?
DrawFillColour(“green”)=?
DrawFillPath( 40mm, 0mm, -1.0, 1.0 )=?
DrawFillColour(“blue”)=?
DrawFillPath( 60mm, 20mm, 0.5, 0.5 )=?
DrawFillColour(“purple”)=?
DrawFillPath( 0mm, 0mm, 1.0, 1.0, 135 )=?
DrawFillColour(“pink”)=?
DrawFillPath( 70mm, 0mm, 1.0, 1.0, 135 )=?

Page 513 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFillPathIf
Fills the interior of the current drawing path using the current fill colour and style. If a figure in the path is not closed, this
function treats the non closed figure as if it were closed by a straight line that connects the figure’s starting and ending
co-ordinates. The path is only drawn if the condition expression evaluates to true.

Syntax
DrawFillPathIf( condition )

DrawFillPathIf( offsetX, offsetY, scaleX, scaleY, angle )

Parameters
condition
Expression that must evaluate to either True (1) or False(0)

offsetX
optional horizontal translation
offsetY
optional vertical translation
scaleX
optional horizontal scale factor, use 1.0 for original scale, use -1.0 to mirror about the axis
scaleY
optional vertical scale factor, use 1.0 for original scale, use -1.0 to mirror about the axis
angle
optional angle of rotation in degrees, anti-clockwise from the x-axis

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
A path is created using DrawCreatePath, as you draw lines and curves they will be added to the current path which may
consist of one or more figures. When you fill a path, the lines and curves within each figure are connected by straight
lines; the ending point of one line or curve is connected to the starting point of the next line or curve. No connecting line
is drawn between the end of one figure and the start of the next figure.

Internal regions of the path are filled alternately, you can determine whether a test point is inside or outside a closed
path as follows: Draw a line from the test point to a point that is distant from the path. If that line crosses the path an
odd number of times, the test point is inside the path; otherwise, the test point is outside the path.

Page 514 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
When you have created all the elements within the path DrawFillPathIf must then be called to actually draw the filled
path. The path can be drawn any number of times by using repeated calls to DrawFillPathIf, the optional transformation
arguments allow you to translate, scale and rotate the path each time it is drawn.

Example
width = 20mm
height = 100mm
DrawCreateDrawing( width, height )=?
DrawLineColour(“lightblue”)=?
DrawGrid(0mm,0mm,100mm,100mm,10mm,10mm)=?
DrawCreatePath()=?
DrawLine(0mm,0mm,0mm,height-10mm)=?
DrawArcAlignment(“near”,”far”)=?
DrawArc(0mm,height,20mm,20mm,180,-90)=?
DrawLine(10mm,height,width,height,width,0mm,0mm,0mm)=?
DrawRectangle( 5mm, 5mm, width-10mm, height-20mm )=?
DrawFillPathIf(width >= 20mm)=?
DrawDestroyPath() = ?

width = 10mm
DrawFillPathIf(width >= 20mm)=?

Page 515 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFillPattern
Sets a user defined style used to fill rectangles, polygons, ellipses and paths. Patterns repeat to fill shape.

Syntax
DrawFillPattern( width , height , pattern )

Parameters
width
sets the pixel width of the pattern

height
sets the pixel height of the pattern

pattern

string that defines a pattern. “1” – foreground colour, “0” - backgroundcolour

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 50mm, 50mm ) = 1.000
DrawFillPattern( 12,1,”100010001000” ) = 1.000
DrawFillRectangle( 0mm, 0mm, 25mm, 25mm ) = 1.000
DrawFillPattern( 12,5, “
110001100011
101110011101
100011110001
101110011101
110001100011”) = 1.000
DrawFillRectangle( 0mm, 25mm, 25mm, 25mm ) = 1.000

Page 516 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFillPattern( 20,20, “
10000000000000000001
01000000000000000010
00100000000000000100
00010000000000001000
00001000000000010000
00000100000000100000
00000010000001000000
00000001000010000000
00000000100100000000
10000000011000000001
10000000011000000001
00000000100100000000
00000001000010000000
00000010000001000000
00000100000000100000
00001000000000010000
00010000000000001000
00100000000000000100
01000000000000000010
10000000000000000001”) = 1.000
DrawFillRectangle( 25mm, 0mm, 25mm, 25mm ) = 1.000
DrawFillPattern( 12,1,”111111110000” ) = 1.000
DrawFillRectangle( 25mm, 25mm, 25mm, 25mm ) = 1.000

Page 517 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFillPatternOrigin
Sets the origin of the fill pattern created by DrawFillPattern when drawing filled shapes.

Syntax
DrawFillPatternOrigin( x, y )

Parameters
x
x co-ordinate of origin.

y
y co-ordinate of origin.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
When a shape is drawn with a fill pattern created by DrawFillPattern the origin of that pattern is by default located at 0,
0. The pattern is drawn at this origin and then repeats in the x and y axis in both positive and negative directions. When a
shape such as a rectangle is filled using the pattern the part of the pattern that will be drawn is relative to the fill pattern
origin. Using DrawFillPatternOrigin you can modify this drawing origin. Normally you would modify the origin to the
same co-ordinate as the bottom left co-ordinate of the shape you are filling with the pattern which ensures that the fill
starts with the same part of the pattern relative to the shape regardless of the co-ordinates of the shape itself.

Example
DrawFillRectangle( 0, 0, 100mm, 100mm ) = 1.000
DrawFillRectangle( 100mm, 15mm, 100mm, 100mm ) = 1.000

DrawFillRectangle( 0, 0, 100mm, 100mm ) = 1.000


DrawFillPatternOrigin( 100mm, 15mm ) = 1.000
DrawFillRectangle( 100mm, 15mm, 100mm, 100mm ) = 1.000

Page 518 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Page 519 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFillPolygon
Fills a polygon using the specified co-ordinates, the polygon will be closed automatically between the last and first co-
ordinates. The polygon will be drawn using the current fill colour and style.

Syntax
DrawFillPolygon( x1, y1, … x[n], y[n] )

Parameters
x1

x co-ordinate

y1
y co-ordinate

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm ) = ?
DrawFillPolygon( 0mm, 0mm, 0mm, 50mm, 50mm, 100mm, 100mm, 50mm,
100mm, 0mm ) = ?

Page 520 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFillPolygonIf
Fills a polygon using the specified co-ordinates, the polygon will be closed automatically between the last and first co-
ordinates. The polygon will be drawn using the current fill colour and style. The polygon is only drawn if the condition
expression evaluates to true.

Syntax
DrawFillPolygonIf( condition, x1, y1, … x[n], y[n] )

Parameters
condition
Expression that must evaluate to either 1 or 0

x1

x co-ordinate

y1
y co-ordinate

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Example
length = 50mm

DrawCreateDrawing( 2length, 2length ) = ?


DrawFillPolygonIf( length > 5mm, 0mm, 0mm, 0mm, length, length,
2length, 2length, length, 2length, 0mm ) = ?

Page 521 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFillPolygonIf
Fills a polygon using the specified co-ordinates, the polygon will be closed automatically between the last and first co-
ordinates. The polygon will be drawn using the current fill colour and style. The polygon is only drawn if the condition
expression evaluates to true.

Syntax
DrawFillPolygonIf( condition, x1, y1, … x[n], y[n] )

Parameters
condition
Expression that must evaluate to either True (1) or False (0)

x1

x co-ordinate

y1
y co-ordinate

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Example
length = 50mm
DrawCreateDrawing( 2length, 2length ) = ?
DrawPolygonIf( length > 5mm, 0mm, 0mm, 0mm, length, length,
2length, 2length, length, 2length, 0mm ) = ?

Page 522 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFillRectangle
Fill a rectangle using the specified width and height. The rectangle will be drawn using the current fill colour and style.

Syntax
DrawFillRectangle( x1, y1, width, height )

Parameters
x1

x co-ordinate of bottom left corner

y1
y co-ordinate of bottom left corner

width
width of rectangle

height
height of rectangle

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 50mm ) = ?
DrawFillRectangle( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 50mm ) = ?

Page 523 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFillRectangleIf
Fill a rectangle using the specified width and height. The rectangle will be drawn using the current fill colour and style.
The rectangle is only drawn if the condition expression evaluates to true.

Syntax
DrawFillRectangleIf( condition, x1, y1, width, height )

Parameters
condition
Expression that must evaluate to either True (1) or False (0)

x1

x co-ordinate of bottom left corner

y1
y co-ordinate of bottom left corner

width
width of rectangle

height
height of rectangle

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Example
width = 100mm
height = 50mm
DrawCreateDrawing( width, height ) = ?
DrawFillRectangleIf( width > height, 0mm, 0mm, width, height ) = ?

Page 524 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFillStyle
Sets the style used to fill rectangles, polygons, ellipses and paths.

Syntax
DrawFillStyle( styleId )

DrawFillStyle( styleName )

Parameters
styleId
numeric identifier of a predefined style, see remarks.

styleName

name of a predefined style, see remarks.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The following table lists the Id's and names of the predefined styles.

Id Name Alternative name


-1 "Solid" "Default"
1 "Horizontal"
2 "Vertical"
3 "ForwardDiagonal"
4 "BackwardDiagonal"
5 "Cross"
6 "DiagonalCross"
7 "5Percent" "5%"
8 "10Percent" "10%"
9 "20Percent" "20%"
10 "25Percent" "25%"
11 "30Percent" "30%"
12 "40Percent" "40%"
13 "50Percent" "50%"
14 "60Percent" "60%"
15 "70Percent" "70%"
16 "75Percent" "75%"

Page 525 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

17 "80Percent" "80%"
18 "90Percent" "90%"
19 "LightDownwardDiagonal"
20 "LightUpwardDiagonal"
21 "DarkDownwardDiagonal"
22 "DarkUpwardDiagonal"
23 "WideDownwardDiagonal"
24 "WideUpwardDiagonal"
25 "LightVertical"
26 "LightHorizontal"
27 "NarrowVertical"
28 "NarrowHorizontal"
29 "DarkVertical"
30 "DarkHorizontal"
31 "DashedDownwardDiagonal"
32 "DashedUpwardDiagonal"
33 "DashedHorizontal"
34 "DashedVertical"
35 "SmallConfetti"
36 "LargeConfetti"
37 "ZigZag"
38 "Wave"
39 "DiagonalBrick"
40 "HorizontalBrick"
41 "Weave"
42 "Plaid"
43 "Divot"
44 "DottedGrid"
45 "DottedDiamond"
46 "Shingle"
47 "Trellis"
48 "Sphere"
49 "SmallGrid"
50 "SmallCheckerBoard"
51 "LargeCheckerBoard"
52 "OutlinedDiamond"
53 "SolidDiamond"
101 “WoodEndGrain”
102 “Concrete”
103 “Brick”
104 “Sand”
105 “Clay”
106 “Rubble”
107 "Silt"
108 "SiltySand"
109 "Gravel"
110 "Peat"

Page 526 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm ) = ?
DrawFillStyle( "70%" ) = ?
DrawFillRectangle( 0mm, 0mm, 50mm, 50mm ) = ?
DrawFillStyle( "weave" ) = ?
DrawFillRectangle( 0mm, 50mm, 50mm, 50mm ) = ?
DrawFillStyle( "DashedVertical" ) = ?
DrawFillRectangle( 50mm, 0mm, 50mm, 50mm ) = ?
DrawFillStyle( “ForwardDiagonal” ) = ?
DrawFillRectangle( 50mm, 50mm, 50mm, 50mm ) = ?

Page 527 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFont
Sets the font used when drawing strings.

Syntax
DrawFont( name, size, styleId )

DrawFont( name, size, styleName )

Parameters
name
name of font. Can be the name of any installed Windows TrueType font.

size

size of font, if dimensions of value are not L1 then size is assumed to be in points. A negative value would specify
an output font size.

styleId
numeric identifier font style, see remarks

styleName
name of font style, see remarks

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The following table lists the available font styles.

Id Style Name
0 “Regular”
0 “Normal”
1 “Bold”
2 “Italic”
4 “Underline”
8 “Strikeout”
6 “Italic+Underline”
3 “Bold+Italic”
7 “Bold+Italic+Underline”
5 “Bold+Underline”

Page 528 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 50mm, 50mm )=1.000
DrawFont( "Arial", 1mm, 0 ) = 1.000
DrawString(0mm, 0mm, "Arial regular" ) = 1.000
DrawFont( "Arial", 1mm, 1 ) = 1.000
DrawString(0mm, 2mm, "Arial bold" ) = 1.000
DrawFont( "Arial", 1mm, 2 ) = 1.000
DrawString(0mm, 4mm, "Arial italic" ) = 1.000
DrawFont( "Arial", 1mm, 3 ) = 1.000
DrawString(0mm, 6mm, "Arial bold italic" ) = 1.000
DrawFont( "Arial", 1mm, 4 ) = 1.000
DrawString(0mm, 8mm, "Arial underline" ) = 1.000
DrawFont( "Arial", 1mm, 8 ) = 1.000
DrawString(0mm, 10mm, "Arial strikeout" ) = 1.000
DrawFont( "Arial", -12, 0 ) = 1.000
DrawString(0mm, 12mm, "Arial 12 point" ) = 1.000
DrawFont( "Arial", -12mm, 0 ) = 1.000
DrawString(0mm, 14mm, "Arial 12mm" ) = 1.000

Page 529 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFontColor / DrawFontColour
Sets the color used for drawing strings.

Syntax
DrawFontColor( colourName )

DrawFontColour( colourName )

DrawFontColor( red, green, blue )

DrawFontColour( red, green, blue )

DrawFontColor( colour )

DrawFontColour( colour )

Parameters
colourName name of a predefined colour, see remarks.

red amount of red component for a custom colour. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

green amount of green component for a custom colour. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

blue amount of blue component for a custom colour. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

transparency optional amount of transparency. Value can be between 0 and 255 inclusive
where 0 is completely transparent and 255 is completely opaque. Default is opaque i.e.
no transparency.

colour Color value created using DrawCreateColor.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
For details of the pre-defined system colors refer to the DrawCreateColor documentation.

Page 530 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm ) = ?
DrawFontColour( "red" ) = ?
DrawString( 0mm, 0mm, “Red” ) = ?
DrawFontColour( "green" ) = ?
DrawString( 0mm, 5mm, “Green” ) = ?
DrawFontColour( "blue" ) = ?
DrawString( 0mm, 10mm, “Blue” ) = ?
DrawFontColour( 192,128,0 ) = ?
DrawString( 0mm, 15mm, “Red = 192, Green = 128, Blue = 0” ) = ?

Page 531 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawFontColor / DrawFontColour
Sets the color used for drawing strings.

Syntax
DrawFontColor( colourName )

DrawFontColour( colourName )

DrawFontColor( red, green, blue )

DrawFontColour( red, green, blue )

DrawFontColor( colour )

DrawFontColour( colour )

Parameters
colourName name of a predefined colour, see remarks.

red amount of red component for a custom colour. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

green amount of green component for a custom colour. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

blue amount of blue component for a custom colour. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

transparency optional amount of transparency. Value can be between 0 and 255 inclusive
where 0 is completely transparent and 255 is completely opaque. Default is opaque i.e.
no transparency.

colour Color value created using DrawCreateColor.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
For details of the pre-defined system colors refer to the DrawCreateColor documentation.

Page 532 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm ) = ?
DrawFontColour( "red" ) = ?
DrawString( 0mm, 0mm, “Red” ) = ?
DrawFontColour( "green" ) = ?
DrawString( 0mm, 5mm, “Green” ) = ?
DrawFontColour( "blue" ) = ?
DrawString( 0mm, 10mm, “Blue” ) = ?
DrawFontColour( 192,128,0 ) = ?
DrawString( 0mm, 15mm, “Red = 192, Green = 128, Blue = 0” ) = ?

Page 533 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawGetActiveDrawing
Returns the currently active drawing identifier.

Syntax
DrawGetActiveDrawing()

Return Value
Numeric identifier that uniquely identifies a drawing previously created using DrawCreateDrawing.

Remarks
Most drawing functions accept a drawing identifier, if the drawing identifier is not specified then the active drawing is
used.

DrawGrid
Draws gridlines using the width and height at the specified co-ordinate. The grid lines will be drawn using the current line
colour, style and width.

Syntax
DrawGrid( x1, y1, width, height, gridSpacingX, gridSpacingY )

Parameters
x1

x co-ordinate of bottom left corner

y1
y co-ordinate of bottom left corner

width
width of rectangle

height
height of rectangle

gridSpacingX
spacing of each grid line along the x axis

Page 534 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
gridSpacingY
spacing of each grid line along the y axis

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 50mm ) = ?
DrawLineColour(“lightblue”)=?
DrawGrid( -100mm, -50mm, 200mm, 100mm, 10mm, 10mm ) = ?
DrawLineColour(“red”)=?
DrawLine(-10mm,0mm,10mm,0mm)=?
DrawLine(0mm,-10mm,0mm,10mm)=?
DrawLineColour(“default”)=?
DrawEllipse(0mm,0mm,100mm,50mm)=?

Page 535 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawGridIf
Draws gridlines using the width and height at the specified co-ordinate. The grid lines will be drawn using the current line
colour, style and width. The grid is only drawn if the condition expression evaluates to true.

Syntax
DrawGridIf( condition, x1, y1, width, height, gridSpacingX, gridSpacingY )

Parameters
condition
Expression that must evaluate to either 1 or 0

x1

x co-ordinate of bottom left corner

y1
y co-ordinate of bottom left corner

width
width of rectangle

height
height of rectangle

gridSpacingX
spacing of each grid line along the x axis

gridSpacingY
spacing of each grid line along the y axis

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Example
size = 50mm
DrawCreateDrawing( size, size ) = ?
DrawLineColour(“lightblue”)=?
DrawGridIf( size <= 50mm, -size, -size, 2size, 2size, 10mm, 10mm )
= ?
DrawRectangle(-size, -size, 2size, 2size)=?

Page 536 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawLineColour(“red”)=?
DrawLine(-10mm,0mm,10mm,0mm)=?
DrawLine(0mm,-10mm,0mm,10mm)=?
DrawLineColour(“default”)=?
DrawEllipse(0mm,0mm,size,size)=?

size = 75mm

Page 537 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawLabel
Draws a label with a pointer between two co-ordinates using the current line colour, style and width and the current font
and font colour. Each end of the line is drawn using the current label line cap style.

Syntax
DrawLabel( x1, y1, x2, y2, string )

Parameters
x1
x co-ordinate for start line.

y1
y co-ordinate for start line.

x2
x co-ordinate for end of line.

y3
y co-ordinate for end of line.

string
string that is drawn at the start of the line.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The DrawLabel function can be used to easily indicate other elements on a drawing.

The location that the string is drawn relative to the line depends on the direction and rotation of the line.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing(60mm,60mm)=?
DrawLabel(0mm,20mm,0mm,10mm,”top”) =?
DrawLabel(20mm,0mm,10mm,0mm,”right”) =?
DrawLabel(0mm,-20mm,0mm,-10mm,”bottom”)=?
DrawLabel(-20mm,0mm,-10mm,0mm,”left”)=?

Page 538 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawLabel(20mm,20mm,10mm,10mm,”topright”) =?
DrawLabel(20mm,-20mm,10mm,-10mm,”bottomright”) =?
DrawLabel(-20mm,-20mm,-10mm,-10mm,”bottomleft”)=?
DrawLabel(-20mm,20mm,-10mm,10mm,”topleft”)=?
DrawLineColor(“lightblue”)=?
DrawRectangle(-10mm,-10mm,20mm,20mm)=?
DrawRectangle(-20mm,-20mm,40mm,40mm)=?

Page 539 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawLabelIf
Draws a label with a pointer between two co-ordinates using the current line colour, style and width and the current font
and font colour. Each end of the line is drawn using the current label line cap style. The label is only drawn if the
condition expression evaluates to true.

Syntax
DrawLabelIf( condition, x1, y1, x2, y2, string )

Parameters
condition
Expression that must evaluate to either True (1) or False (0)

x1
x co-ordinate for start line.

y1
y co-ordinate for start line.

x2
x co-ordinate for end of line.

y3
y co-ordinate for end of line.

string
string that is drawn at the start of the line.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The DrawLabel function can be used to easily indicate other elements on a drawing.

The location that the string is drawn relative to the line depends on the direction and rotation of the line.

Example
draw = True
DrawCreateDrawing(60mm,60mm)=?

Page 540 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawLabelIf(draw,0mm,20mm,0mm,10mm,”top”) =?
DrawLabelIf(draw,20mm,0mm,10mm,0mm,”right”) =?
DrawLabelIf(draw,0mm,-20mm,0mm,-10mm,”bottom”)=?
DrawLabelIf(draw,-20mm,0mm,-10mm,0mm,”left”)=?
draw = False
DrawLabelIf(draw,20mm,20mm,10mm,10mm,”topright”) =?
DrawLabelIf(draw,20mm,-20mm,10mm,-10mm,”bottomright”) =?
DrawLabelIf(draw,-20mm,-20mm,-10mm,-10mm,”bottomleft”)=?
DrawLabelIf(draw,-20mm,20mm,-10mm,10mm,”topleft”)=?
DrawLineColor(“lightblue”)=?
DrawRectangle(-10mm,-10mm,20mm,20mm)=?
DrawRectangle(-20mm,-20mm,40mm,40mm)=?

Page 541 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawLabelLineCap
Sets the style of line cap drawn at the start and end of a label line drawn using the DrawLabel function.

Syntax
DrawLabelLineCap( styleName )

Parameters
styleName

name of a predefined label line cap style, see remarks.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The following table lists the predefined line cap style names.

Style Name Description


“Default” Use default dimension line cap (Bar).
“None” No line cap
“Bar” Bar
“Triangle” Triangle
“Arrow” Arrow head directed away from the centre of the line
“BarArrow” Vertical bar and arrow head directed away from the centre of the line
“Square” Square
“Circle” Circle

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 200mm, 50mm ) = 1.00
DrawLineWidth( 0.01mm ) = 1.00
DrawLabelLineCap( “none”, "arrow" ) = 1.00
DrawLabel( 0mm, 0mm, 20mm, 0mm, “none to arrow” ) = 1.00

DrawLabelLineCap( “bar”, "arrow" ) = 1.00

Page 542 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawLabelLineCap( “square”, "arrow" ) = 1.00

DrawLabelLineCap( “circle”, "arrow" ) = 1.00

Page 543 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawLabelStringOrientation
Sets the option that determines when drawing a label using the DrawLabel function at what angle the labels string is
drawn.

Syntax
DrawLabelStringOrientation( orientationId )

DrawLabelStringOrientation( orientationName )

Parameters
orientationId

numeric id of string orientation style.

orientationName

name of string orientation style.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The following table lists the string orientation styles. The default orientation is horizontal.

Id Name Description
-1 “Default” Use default orientation (Horizontal)
0 “Horizontal” String is always drawn horizontally.
1 “Parallel” String is drawn parallel to line.
2 “Perpendicular” String is drawn perpendicular to line.
4 "Vertical" String is always drawn vertically.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing(60mm,60mm)=?
DrawLabelStringOrientation( "horizontal" ) = ?
DrawLabel(0mm,20mm,0mm,10mm,”top”) =?
DrawLabel(20mm,0mm,10mm,0mm,”right”) =?

Page 544 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawLabel(0mm,-20mm,0mm,-10mm,”bottom”)=?
DrawLabel(-20mm,0mm,-10mm,0mm,”left”)=?
DrawLabel(20mm,20mm,10mm,10mm,”topright”) =?
DrawLabel(20mm,-20mm,10mm,-10mm,”bottomright”) =?
DrawLabel(-20mm,-20mm,-10mm,-10mm,”bottomleft”)=?
DrawLabel(-20mm,20mm,-10mm,10mm,”topleft”)=?
DrawLineColor(“lightblue”)=?
DrawRectangle(-10mm,-10mm,20mm,20mm)=?
DrawRectangle(-20mm,-20mm,40mm,40mm)=?

DrawLabelStringOrientation( "vertical" ) = ?

DrawLabelStringOrientation( "parallel" ) = ?

Page 545 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawLabelStringOrientation( "perpendicular" ) = ?

Page 546 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawLine
Draws a line using the specified co-ordinates with the current line colour, style and width.

Syntax
DrawLine(x1, y1, … x[n], y[n] )

Parameters
x1

x co-ordinate

y1
y co-ordinate

Remarks
If only a single co-ordinate is specified then a line will be drawn from the last known co-ordinate to the specified co-
ordinate. The last known co-ordinate is the last co-ordinate used in a previous call to DrawLine or the co-ordinate
specified to DrawMove.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Example
DrawCreateDrawing() = 1.000
DrawLine(0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 0mm ) = 1.000

DrawCreateDrawing() = 2.000
DrawLine(0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 0mm, 100mm, 50mm, 90mm, 50mm, 90mm, 10mm,
0mm, 10mm ) = 1.000

Page 547 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

$x = 1.5  cos(t) – cos(30  t)


$y = 1.5  sin(t) – sin(30  t)
t = 0
scale = 100
DrawCreateDrawing() = 3.000
DrawMove(scale  x, scale  y) = 1.000
EvalDoWhile(
"DrawLine(scale  x, scale  y)",
"increment(\"t\") <= 360" ) = 1.000

Page 548 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawLineCap
Sets the line cap drawn at the start and the end of a line drawn using DrawLine or DrawArc.

Syntax
DrawLineCap( startName, endName )

Parameters
startName

name of a predefined line cap style for the start of the line, see remarks.

endName

optional name of a predefined line cap style for the end of the line, see remarks. If endName is not specified then
the same line cap is used at the start and end of the line.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The following table lists the predefined styles.

Style Name Description


“Default” Use default line cap (None)
“None” No line cap
“Bar” Bar
“Triangle” Triangle
“InternalArrow” Arrow positioned internally within the line pointing outwards
“BarInternalArrow” Vertical bar and an arrow positioned internally within the line pointing outwards
“ExternalArrow” Arrow positioned outside the line pointing inwards
“BarExternalArrow” Vertical bar and an arrow positioned outside the line pointing inwards
“Arrow” Arrow head
“BarArrow” Vertical bar and arrow head
“SlashedBar” Vertical bar and 45 degree line
“Square” Square
“Circle” Circle

Page 549 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 200mm, 50mm ) = 1.00
DrawLineCapSize( 4mm ) = 1.00
DrawLineCap( "none" ) = 1.00
DrawLine( 0mm, 0mm, 50mm, 0mm ) = 1.00
DrawLineCap( "bar" ) = 1.00
DrawLine( 0mm, 5mm, 50mm, 5mm ) = 1.00
DrawLineCap( "arrow" ) = 1.00
DrawLine( 0mm, 10mm, 50mm, 10mm ) = 1.00
DrawLineCap( "barinternalarrow" ) = 1.00
DrawLine( 0mm, 15mm, 50mm, 15mm ) = 1.00
DrawLineCap( "externalarrow" ) = 1.00
DrawLine( 0mm, 20mm, 50mm, 20mm ) = 1.00
DrawLineCap( "barexternalarrow" ) = 1.00
DrawLine( 0mm, 25mm, 50mm, 25mm ) = 1.00
DrawLineCap( "square" ) = 1.00
DrawLine( 0mm, 30mm, 50mm, 30mm ) = 1.00
DrawLineCap( "circle" ) = 1.00
DrawLine( 0mm, 35mm, 50mm, 35mm ) = 1.00

Page 550 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawLineCapAlignment
Sets the alignment of the line cap drawn at the start and end of a line drawn using the DrawLine function.

Syntax
DrawLineCapAlignment( styleName )

DrawLineCapAlignment( styleId )

Parameters
styleId
numeric id of alignment style

styleName

name of alignment style.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The following table lists the alignment styles.

Style Id Style Name Description


-1 “Default” Use default (Near)
0 “Near” Near
1 “Centre” Centered
1 “Center” Centered
2 “Far” Far

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 200mm, 50mm ) = ?
DrawLineColor( "lightgrey" ) = ?
DrawLine( 0mm, 0mm, 0mm, 40mm ) = ?
DrawLine( 50mm, 0mm, 50mm, 40mm ) = ?
DrawLineWidth( .5mm ) = ?
DrawLineColor( "black" ) = ?
DrawLineWidth( .5mm ) = ?
Page 551 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawLineCapSize( 4mm ) = ?
DrawLineCap( "square" ) = ?
DrawLineCapAlignment( “near” ) = ?
DrawLine( 0mm, 30mm, 50mm, 30mm ) = ?
DrawLineCapAlignment( 1 ) = ?
DrawLine( 0mm, 20mm, 50mm, 20mm ) = ?
DrawLineCapAlignment( “far” ) = ?
DrawLine( 0mm, 10mm, 50mm, 10mm ) = ?

Page 552 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawLineCapSize
Sets the size of the line cap drawn at the start and the end of a line drawn using DrawLine.

Syntax
DrawLineCapSize( size )

Parameters
size
size of line cap

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 200mm, 50mm ) = ?
DrawLineColor( "lightgrey" ) = ?
DrawLine( 0mm, 0mm, 0mm, 40mm ) = ?
DrawLine( 50mm, 0mm, 50mm, 40mm ) = ?
DrawLineWidth( .5mm ) = ?
DrawLineColor( "black" ) = ?
DrawLineWidth( .5mm ) = ?
DrawLineCap( "square" ) = ?
DrawLineCapSize( 2mm ) = ?
DrawLine( 0mm, 30mm, 50mm, 30mm ) = ?
DrawLineCapSize( 4mm ) = ?
DrawLine( 0mm, 20mm, 50mm, 20mm ) = ?
DrawLineCapSize( 8mm ) = ?
DrawLine( 0mm, 10mm, 50mm, 10mm ) = ?

Page 553 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawLabelLineCapSize
Sets the size of the line cap drawn at the start and end of a label line drawn using the DrawLabel function.

Syntax
DrawLabelLineCapSize( size )

Parameters
size

size of line cap or zero to use auto sizing (default)

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
If the size specified is zero then the size of line caps will be calculated automatically based on the current font size.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 200mm, 50mm ) = 1.000
DrawLineWidth( 0.01mm ) = 1.000
DrawLabelLineCap( "circle", "arrow" ) = 1.000
DrawLabelLineCapSize( 1mm ) = 1.000
DrawLabel( 0mm, 0mm, 20mm, 0mm, "1 mm" ) = 1.000
DrawLabelLineCapSize( 2mm ) = 1.000
DrawLabel( 0mm, 10mm, 20mm, 10mm, "2 mm" ) = 1.000
DrawLabelLineCapSize( 0mm ) = 1.000
DrawLabel( 0mm, 20mm, 20mm, 20mm, "auto size" ) = 1.000
DrawFont( "Calibri", 9 ) = 1.000
DrawLabel( 0mm, 30mm, 20mm, 30mm, "auto size, 9pt font" ) = 1.000

Page 554 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Page 555 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawLineColor / DrawLineColour
Sets the color used for drawing lines and outlines of rectangles, polygons, ellipses and paths.

Syntax
DrawLineColor( colourName )

DrawLineColour( colourName )

DrawLineColor( red, green, blue )

DrawLineColour( red, green, blue )

DrawLineColor( colour )

DrawLineColour( colour )

Parameters
colourName name of a predefined colour, see remarks.

red amount of red component for a custom colour. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

green amount of green component for a custom colour. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

blue amount of blue component for a custom colour. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

transparency optional amount of transparency. Value can be between 0 and 255 inclusive
where 0 is completely transparent and 255 is completely opaque. Default is opaque i.e.
no transparency.
colour Color value created using DrawCreateColor.
Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0
Remarks
For details of the pre-defined system colors refer to the DrawCreateColor documentation.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm ) = ?
DrawLineColour( "red" ) = ?
DrawLine( 0mm, 0mm, 50mm, 0mm ) = ?
DrawLineColour( "green" ) = ?
DrawLine( 0mm, 5mm, 50mm, 5mm ) = ?
DrawLineColour( "blue" ) = ?

Page 556 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawLine( 0mm, 10mm, 50mm, 10mm ) = ?


DrawLineColour( 192,128,0 ) = ?
DrawLine( 0mm, 15mm, 50mm, 15mm ) = ?

Page 557 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawLineColor / DrawLineColour
Sets the color used for drawing lines and outlines of rectangles, polygons, ellipses and paths.

Syntax
DrawLineColor( colourName )

DrawLineColour( colourName )

DrawLineColor( red, green, blue )

DrawLineColour( red, green, blue )

DrawLineColor( colour )

DrawLineColour( colour )

Parameters
colourName name of a predefined colour, see remarks.

red amount of red component for a custom colour. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

green amount of green component for a custom colour. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

blue amount of blue component for a custom colour. Value can between 0 and 255 inclusive.

transparency optional amount of transparency. Value can be between 0 and 255 inclusive
where 0 is completely transparent and 255 is completely opaque. Default is opaque i.e.
no transparency.
colour Color value created using DrawCreateColor.
Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0
Remarks
For details of the pre-defined system colors refer to the DrawCreateColor documentation.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm ) = ?
DrawLineColour( "red" ) = ?
DrawLine( 0mm, 0mm, 50mm, 0mm ) = ?
DrawLineColour( "green" ) = ?
DrawLine( 0mm, 5mm, 50mm, 5mm ) = ?
DrawLineColour( "blue" ) = ?

Page 558 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawLine( 0mm, 10mm, 50mm, 10mm ) = ?


DrawLineColour( 192,128,0 ) = ?
DrawLine( 0mm, 15mm, 50mm, 15mm ) = ?

Page 559 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawLineIf
Draws a line between two co-ordinates using the current line colour, style and width. The line is only drawn if the
condition expression evaluates to true.

Syntax
DrawLineIf( condition, x1, y1, x2, y2 )

Parameters
condition
Expression that must evaluate to either True (1) or False(0)

x1

x co-ordinate for start of line

y1
y co-ordinate for start of line

x2

x co-ordinate for end of line

y2
y co-ordinate for end of line

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Example
length = 100mm
DrawCreateDrawing( length, length ) = ?
DrawLineIf( length > 10mm, 0mm, 0mm, length, 0mm ) = ?

Page 560 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawLineStyle
Sets the style used when drawing lines and outlines for rectangles, polygons and ellipses.

Syntax
DrawLineStyle( styleId )

DrawLineStyle( styleName )

DrawLineStyle( dash, dot, … )

Parameters
styleId
numeric identifier of a predefined style, see remarks.

styleName

name of a predefined style, see remarks.

dash, dot
repeating pattern for length of dash and length of dot

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The following table lists the predefined styles.

Id Style Name Description


-1 “Default” Default (Solid)
0 “DashStyleSolid” Solid
1 “DashStyleDash” Dash
2 “DashStyleDot” Dot
3 “DashStyleDashDot” Dash Dot
4 “DashStyleDashDot Dot” Dash Dot Dot

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 200mm, 50mm ) = ?
DrawLineStyle( “DashStyleSolid” ) = ?

Page 561 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawLine( 0mm, 25mm, 200mm, 25mm ) = ?


DrawLineStyle(“DashStyleDash” ) = ?
DrawLine( 0mm, 20mm, 200mm, 20mm ) = ?
DrawLineStyle(“DashStyleDot” ) = ?
DrawLine( 0mm, 15mm, 200mm, 15mm ) = ?
DrawLineStyle(“DashStyleDashDot” ) = ?
DrawLine( 0mm, 10mm, 200mm, 10mm ) = ?
DrawLineStyle(“DashStyleDashDotDot” ) = ?
DrawLine( 0mm, 5mm, 200mm, 5mm ) = ?
DrawLineStyle( 5mm, 1mm, 10mm, 5mm ) = ?
DrawLine( 0mm, 0mm, 200mm, 0mm ) = ?

Page 562 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawLineWidth
Sets the width used when drawing lines and outlines for rectangles, polygons and ellipses.

Syntax
DrawLineWidth( width )

Parameters
width

width of line. Specify a negative number for fixed pixel width and positive number for a measured width.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 250mm, 40mm ) = 1.000
DrawLineWidth( 0.1mm ) = 1.000
DrawLine( 0mm, 0mm, 250mm, 0mm ) = 1.000
DrawLineWidth( 1mm ) = 1.000
DrawLine( 0mm, 10mm, 250mm, 10mm ) = 1.000
DrawLineWidth( 5mm ) = 1.000
DrawLine( 0mm, 20mm, 250mm, 20mm ) = 1.000
DrawLineWidth( 10mm ) = 1.000
DrawLine( 0mm, 30mm, 250mm, 30mm ) = 1.000
DrawLineWidth( -1 ) = 1.000
DrawLine( 0mm, 40mm, 250mm, 40mm ) = 1.000
DrawLineWidth( -2 ) = 1.000
DrawLine( 0mm, 50mm, 250mm, 50mm ) = 1.000
DrawLineWidth( -3 ) = 1.000
DrawLine( 0mm, 60mm, 250mm, 60mm ) = 1.000
DrawLineWidth( -4 ) = 1.000
DrawLine( 0mm, 70mm, 250mm, 70mm ) = 1.000

Page 563 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Page 564 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawMeasureStringHeight
Measures the height of a string drawn using the current font.

Syntax
DrawMeasureStirngHeight( string )

Parameters
string

text to measure

Return Value
height of string

Remarks
Measuring strings can be useful when attempting to layout drawing elements so that strings do not overlap one another.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm ) = ?
expression = “A1=100mm2”
DrawStringAlignment( “center”, “center” ) = ?
DrawString( 0mm, 0mm, expression) = ?
width = DrawMeasureStringWidth(expression)=?
height = DrawMeasureStringHeight(expression)=?
DrawRectangle(-width/2,-height/2,width,height)=?

Page 565 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawMeasureStringWidth
Measures the width of a string drawn using the current font.

Syntax
DrawMeasureStirngWidth( string )

Parameters
string

text to measure

Return Value
width of string

Remarks
Measuring strings can be useful when attempting to layout drawing elements so that strings do not overlap one another.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm ) = ?
expression = “A1=100mm2”
DrawStringAlignment( “center”, “center” ) = ?
DrawString( 0mm, 0mm, expression) = ?
width = DrawMeasureStringWidth(expression)=?
height = DrawMeasureStringHeight(expression)=?
DrawRectangle(-width/2,-height/2,width,height)=?

Page 566 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawMove
Sets the last known drawing co-ordinate.

Syntax
DrawMove(x, y)

Parameters
x x co-ordinate

y y co-ordinate

Remarks
When a subsequent call to DrawLine only specifies a single co-ordinate a line is drawn from the last known co-ordinate
to the specified co-ordinate. This is useful if you want to use the DrawLine function to plot a line graph by using an
iterative loop.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Example
DrawCreateDrawing() = 1.000
DrawMove(0mm, 0mm) = 1.000
DrawLine(50mm, 0mm) = 1.000
DrawMove(100mm, 0mm) = 1.000
DrawLine(150mm, 0mm) = 1.000

$x = 1.5  cos(t) – cos(30  t)


$y = 1.5  sin(t) – sin(30  t)
t = 0
scale = 100
DrawCreateDrawing() = 2.000
Page 567 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawMove(scale  x, scale  y) = 1.000


EvalDoWhile(
"DrawLine(scale  x, scale  y)",
"increment(\"t\") <= 360" ) = 1.000

Page 568 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawPath
Draws the outline of the current drawing path using the current line colour, style and width.

Syntax
DrawPath()

DrawPath( offsetX, offsetY, scaleX, scaleY, angle )

Parameters
offsetX
optional horizontal translation
offsetY
optional vertical translation
scaleX
optional horizontal scale factor, use 1.0 for original scale, use -1.0 to mirror about the axis
scaleY
optional vertical scale factor, use 1.0 for original scale, use -1.0 to mirror about the axis
angle
optional angle of rotation in degrees, anti-clockwise from the x-axis

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
A path is created using DrawCreatePath, as you draw lines and curves they will be added to the current path which may
consist of one or more figures. When you draw a path, the lines and curves within each figure are connected by straight
lines; the ending point of one line or curve is connected to the starting point of the next line or curve. No connecting line
is drawn between the end of one figure and the start of the next figure.

Some shapes (for example, rectangles and ellipses) are intrinsically closed. When you add an intrinsically closed shape to
a path, that shape is in a figure by itself.

When you have created all the elements within the path DrawPath must then be called to actually draw the path. The
path can be drawn any number of times by using repeated calls to DrawPath, the optional transformation arguments
allow you to translate, scale and rotate the path each time it is drawn.

Page 569 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm )=?
DrawLineColour(“lightblue”)=?
DrawGrid(0mm,0mm,100mm,100mm,10mm,10mm)=?
DrawCreatePath()=?
DrawLine(0mm,0mm,0mm,90mm)=?
DrawArcAlignment(“near”,”far”)=?
DrawArc(0mm,100mm,20mm,20mm,180,-90)=?
DrawLine(10mm,100mm,20mm,100mm,20mm,0mm,0mm,0mm)=?
DrawLineColour(“red”)=?
DrawPath()=?
DrawDestroyPath() = ?

DrawLineColour(“red”)=?
DrawPath()=?
DrawLineColour(“green”)=?
DrawPath( 40mm, 0mm, -1.0, 1.0 )=?
DrawLineColour(“blue”)=?
DrawPath( 60mm, 20mm, 0.5, 0.5 )=?
DrawLineColour(“purple”)=?
DrawPath( 0mm, 0mm, 1.0, 1.0, 135 )=?
DrawLineColour(“pink”)=?
DrawPath( 70mm, 0mm, 1.0, 1.0, 135 )=?

Page 570 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawPathIf
Draws the outline of the current drawing path using the current line colour, style and width. The path is only drawn if
the condition expression evaluates to true.

Syntax
DrawPathIf( condition )

DrawPathIf( condition, offsetX, offsetY, scaleX, scaleY, angle )

Parameters
condition
Expression that must evaluate to either True (1) or False(0)

offsetX
optional horizontal translation
offsetY
optional vertical translation
scaleX
optional horizontal scale factor, use 1.0 for original scale, use -1.0 to mirror about the axis
scaleY
optional vertical scale factor, use 1.0 for original scale, use -1.0 to mirror about the axis
angle
optional angle of rotation in degrees, anti-clockwise from the x-axis

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
A path is created using DrawCreatePath, as you draw lines and curves they will be added to the current path which may
consist of one or more figures. When you draw a path, the lines and curves within each figure are connected by straight
lines; the ending point of one line or curve is connected to the starting point of the next line or curve. No connecting line
is drawn between the end of one figure and the start of the next figure.

Some shapes (for example, rectangles and ellipses) are intrinsically closed. When you add an intrinsically closed shape to
a path, that shape is in a figure by itself.

When you have created all the elements within the path DrawPath must then be called to actually draw the path. The
path can be drawn any number of times by using repeated calls to DrawPath, the optional transformation arguments
allow you to translate, scale and rotate the path each time it is drawn.

Page 571 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Example
width = 20mm
height = 100mm
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm )=?
DrawLineColour(“lightblue”)=?
DrawGrid(0mm,0mm,100mm,100mm,10mm,10mm)=?
DrawCreatePath()=?
DrawLine(0mm,0mm,0mm,height-10mm)=?
DrawArcAlignment(“near”,”far”)=?
DrawArc(0mm,height,20mm,20mm,180,-90)=?
DrawLine(10mm,height,width,height,width,0mm,0mm,0mm)=?
DrawLineColour(“red”)=?
DrawPathIf(width >= 20mm)=?
DrawDestroyPath() = ?

width = 10mm
DrawPathIf(width >= 20mm)=?

Page 572 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawPathStartFigure
Starts a new figure within the current drawing path. A drawing path must be created using DrawCreatePath before this
function can be used.

Syntax
DrawPathStartFigure()

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
A path consists of one or more figures. As you draw lines and curves they will be added to the current path, those lines
and curves become part of a figure. When you draw a path, the lines and curves within an individual figure are connected
by straight lines; the ending point of one line or curve is connected to the starting point of the next line or curve. No
connecting line is drawn between the end of one figure and the start of the next figure.

Some shapes (for example, rectangles and ellipses) are intrinsically closed. When you add an intrinsically closed shape to
a path, that shape is in a figure by itself.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm )=?
DrawLineColour(“lightblue”)=?
DrawGrid(0mm,0mm,150mm,150mm,10mm,10mm)=?
DrawLineColour(“default”)=?
DrawCreatePath()=?
DrawLine(0mm,100mm,0mm,0mm)=?
DrawLine(10mm,100mm,10mm,00mm)=?
DrawLineColour(“green”)=?
DrawPath()=?
DrawDestroyPath() = ?
DrawCreatePath()=?
DrawLine(20mm,100mm,20mm,0mm)=?
DrawPathStartFigure()=?
DrawLine(30mm,100mm,30mm,0mm)=?
DrawLineColour(“blue”)=?
DrawPath()=?
DrawDestroyPath() = ?

Page 573 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawPolygon
Draws the outline of a polygon using the specified co-ordinates, a closing line will be drawn automatically between the
last and first co-ordinates. The polygon will be drawn using the current line colour, style and width.

Syntax
DrawPolygon( x1, y1, … x[n], y[n] )

Parameters
x1

x co-ordinate

y1
y co-ordinate

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm ) = ?
DrawPolygon( 0mm, 0mm, 0mm, 50mm, 50mm, 100mm, 100mm, 50mm, 100mm,
0mm ) = ?

Page 574 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawRectangle
Draws the outline of a rectangle using the width and height at the specified co-ordinate. The rectangle will be drawn
using the current line colour, style and width.

Syntax
DrawRectangle( x1, y1, width, height )

Parameters
x1

x co-ordinate of bottom left corner

y1
y co-ordinate of bottom left corner

width
width of rectangle

height
height of rectangle

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 50mm ) = ?
DrawRectangle( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 50mm ) = ?

Page 575 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Page 576 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawRectangleIf
Draws the outline of a rectangle using the width and height at the specified co-ordinate. The rectangle will be drawn
using the current line colour, style and width. The rectangle is only drawn if the condition expression evaluates to true.

Syntax
DrawRectangleIf( condition, x1, y1, width, height )

Parameters
condition
Expression that must evaluate to either 1 or 0

x1

x co-ordinate of bottom left corner

y1
y co-ordinate of bottom left corner

width
width of rectangle

height
height of rectangle

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Example
width = 100mm
height = 50mm
DrawCreateDrawing( width, height ) = ?
DrawRectangleIf( width > height, 0mm, 0mm, width, height ) = ?

Page 577 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawSaveCalcItem
Saves a drawing to a Calc Library Item.

Syntax
DrawSaveCalcItem( FileName, ItemName, id )

Parameters
FileName
Name of the Calc Library to save the drawing to.

ItemName
Name of the Calc Item to save the drawing to.

id

Optional drawing identifier returned by DrawCreateDrawing, if not specified then the active drawing is used.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
When this function is finished the drawing is automatically destroyed and the drawing is no longer valid.

Page 578 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawSaveEMF
Saves a drawing to a file in the Windows Enhanced Metafile format.

Syntax
DrawSaveEMF( FileName, id )

Parameters
FileName
Full path to the location where the file should be saved to.

id

Optional drawing identifier returned by DrawCreateDrawing, if not specified then the active drawing is used.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
When this function is finished the drawing is automatically destroyed and the drawing is no longer valid.

Page 579 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawSetActiveDrawing
Set the currently active drawing.

Syntax
DrawSetActiveDrawing( id )

Parameters
id

Drawing identifier returned by DrawCreateDrawing.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
Most drawing functions accept a drawing identifier, if the drawing identifier is not specified then the active drawing is
used.

Page 580 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawSetActivePath
Sets the currently active drawing path to a path created by DrawCreatePath.

Syntax
DrawSetActivePath( name )

DrawSetActivePath( id )

Parameters
name is the name of the path as specified to DrawCreatePath

id is the unique numeric identifier of the path as returned from DrawCreatePath. Use 0 to set no active
path.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
By using DrawSetActivePath you can create a number of different paths which can then be activated as and when
required for drawing multiple instances of the same path.

Example

DrawCreateDrawing( 200mm, 200mm )=1.000

Create first path


path1 = DrawCreatePath()=1.000
DrawRectangle(0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 100mm )=1.000
DrawRectangle(25mm, 25mm, 50mm, 50mm )=1.000

Create second path


path2 = DrawCreatePath()=2.000
DrawEllipse(0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 100mm )=1.000
DrawEllipse(25mm, 25mm, 50mm, 50mm )=1.000

Page 581 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Draw first path


DrawSetActivePath( path1 ) = 1.000
DrawFillColour(“green”)=1.000
DrawFillPath( 0mm, 0mm )=1.000

Draw second path


DrawSetActivePath( path2 ) = 1.000
DrawFillColour(“blue”)=1.000
DrawFillPath( 100mm, 100mm )=1.000

Draw first path again


DrawSetActivePath( path1 ) = 1.000
DrawFillPath( 0mm, 100mm )=1.000

DrawDestroyPath( path1 ) = 1.000


DrawDestroyPath( path2 ) = 1.000

Page 582 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawString
Draws text at the specified co-ordinate using the current font, font colour and string alignment properties.

Syntax
DrawString( x1, y1, string, angle )

Parameters
x1

x co-ordinate

y1
y co-ordinate

string

text to draw

angle
optional angle of rotation in degrees, anti-clockwise from the x-axis

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The location that the string is drawn relative to the co-ordinate is dependent on the String Alignment property which can
be set using the DrawStringAlignment function. By default the co-ordinate is the bottom left co-ordinate of the strings
bounding rectangle.

The rotation of the string is dependent on the String Orientation property which can be set using the
DrawStringOrientation function. By default the specified angle will be used however the angle may be modified
according to the orientation property.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm ) = ?
DrawString( 0mm, 0mm, “A1   = 100 mm2” ) = ?

Page 583 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawString( 0mm, 0mm, “A1   = 100 mm2”, 90 ) = ?

Page 584 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawStringAlignment
Sets the text alignment used by the DrawString function. The alignment determines how the text is positioned relative to
the output co-ordinate.

Syntax
DrawStirngAlignment( textAlignmentName, lineAlignmentName )

DrawStirngAlignment( textAlignmentId, lineAlignmentId )

Parameters
textAlignmentName

name of alignment type to use for aligning text horizontally

textAlignmentId
numeric id of alignment type to use for aligning text horizontally

lineAlignmentName

name of alignment type to use for aligning text vertically

lineAlignmentId
numeric id of alignment type to use for aligning text vertically

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The alignment is relationship between the bounding rectangle of the string and the drawing co-ordinate.

The following table lists the alignment types.

Id Name Description
-1 “Default” Use default string alignment (Near)
0 “Near” string is aligned so that the bottom left corner of the strings bounding rectangle is nearest to
the drawing co-ordinate.
1 “Centre” String is aligned so that the strings bounding rectangle is centred about the drawing co-
“Center” ordinate.
2 “Far” String is aligned so that the bottom left corner of the strings bounding rectangle is the height of
the bounding rectangle away from drawing co-ordinate.

Page 585 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Example 1
DrawCreateDrawing( 50, 50 ) = ?
DrawLineColour(“red”)=?
DrawLine( -1, 0, 1, 0 ) = ?
DrawLine( 0, -1, 0, 1 ) = ?
DrawStringAlignment("near","near")=?
DrawString(0, 0, "near, near" ) = ?;

Example 2
DrawStringAlignment("centre","centre")=?

Example 3
DrawStringAlignment("far","far")=?

Page 586 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawStringIf
Draws text at the specified co-ordinate using the current font, font colour and string alignment properties. The line is
only drawn if the condition expression evaluates to true.

Syntax
DrawStirngIf( condition, x1, y1, string )

Parameters
condition
Expression that must evaluate to either True (1) or False (0)

x1

x co-ordinate

y1
y co-ordinate

string

text to draw

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The location that the string is drawn relative to the co-ordinate is dependent on the String Alignment property which can
be set using the DrawStringAlignment function. By default the co-ordinate is the bottom left co-ordinate of the strings
bounding rectangle.

Example
x = 1mm
y = 0mm
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm ) = ?
DrawStringIf( x > y, x, y, “A1   = 100 mm2” ) = ?

Page 587 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawStringOrientation
Sets the option that determines when drawing strings using the DrawString function at what angle the string is drawn.

Syntax
DrawStringOrientation( orientationId )

DrawStringOrientation( orientationName )

Parameters
orientationId

numeric id of string orientation style.

orientationName

name of string orientation style.

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The following table lists the string orientation styles. The default orientation is parallel. When the Horizontal and Vertical
options are used any angle specified to the DrawString function will be ignored.

Id Name Description
-1 "Default" Use default orientation (parallel)
0 "Horizontal" String is always drawn horizontally.
1 "Parallel" String is drawn parallel to angle.
4 "Vertical" String is always drawn vertically

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 1000mm, 1000mm ) = 1.000
DrawFont("Arial",75mm,"regular") = 1.000
DrawStringOrientation( "default" ) = 1.000
DrawString( 0mm, 0mm, "Default", 45 ) = 1.000
DrawStringOrientation( "horizontal" ) = 1.000

Page 588 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawString( 0mm, 0mm, "Horizontal", 45 ) = 1.000


DrawStringOrientation( "vertical" ) = 1.000
DrawString( 0mm, 0mm, "Vertical", 45 ) = 1.000

Example which ensures when a rotation transformation is used to replicate a shape the text
remains horizontal
DrawCreateDrawing( 1000mm, 1000mm ) = 2.000
DrawFont("Arial",25mm,"regular") = 1.000
DrawStringAlignment( "center", "center" ) = 1.000
$_drawShape = ReturnArg(
DrawCreateTransform(),
DrawTransformRotate( shapeRotation ),
DrawPolygon( 0mm, 0mm, 0mm, 200mm, 100mm, 200mm, 200mm, 100mm,
200mm, 0mm ),
DrawString( 100mm, 100mm, shapeName ),
DrawDestroyTransform() )

Change the parameter used to see the effect


DrawStringOrientation( "default" ) = 1.000

Right
shapeRotation = 0
shapeName = "Right"
_drawShape = 1.000

Left
shapeRotation = 90
shapeName = "Left"
_drawShape = 1.000

Page 589 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawTransformRotate
Adds a rotation to the current drawing transformation with the option to rotate about a specified co-ordinate. A drawing
transformation must be created using DrawTransformCreate before this function can be used.

Syntax
DrawTransformRotate( angle, x, y )

Parameters
angle
angle of rotation in degrees from the x-axis

optional x co-ordinate for the point about which the rotation takes place

y
optional y co-ordinate for the point about which the rotation takes place

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
If a co-ordinate is not specified then the rotation is about the drawing origin (0,0).

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm )=?
DrawLineColour(“lightblue”)=?
DrawGrid(-150mm,-150mm,300mm,300mm,10mm,10mm)=?
DrawLineColour(“default”)=?
DrawRectangle(0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 100mm )=?
DrawCreateTransform()=?
DrawTransformRotate(45)=?
DrawLineColour(“salmon”)=?
DrawRectangle(0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 100mm )=?
DrawDestroyTransform()=?
DrawCreateTransform()=?

Page 590 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawTransformRotate(45, 50mm, 50mm)=?


DrawLineColour(“green”)=?
DrawRectangle(0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 100mm )=?
DrawDestroyTransform()=?
DrawLineColour(“red”)=?
DrawLine(-10mm,0mm,10mm,0mm)=?
DrawLine(0mm,-10mm,0mm,10mm)=?

Page 591 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawTransformScale
Adds a scaling transformation to the current drawing transformation. A drawing transformation must be created using
DrawTransformCreate before this function can be used.

Syntax
DrawTransformScale( scaleX, scaleY )

Parameters
scaleX

horizontal scale factor

scaleY
vertical scale factor

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm )=?
DrawLineColour(“lightblue”)=?
DrawGrid(-150mm,-150mm,300mm,300mm,10mm,10mm)=?
DrawLineColour(“default”)=?
DrawRectangle(0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 100mm )=?
DrawCreateTransform()=?
DrawTransformScale(0.5,0.5)=?
DrawLineColour(“salmon”)=?
DrawRectangle(0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 100mm )=?
DrawDestroyTransform()=?
DrawLineColour(“red”)=?
DrawLine(-10mm,0mm,10mm,0mm)=?
DrawLine(0mm,-10mm,0mm,10mm)=?

Page 592 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DrawTransformTranslate
Adds a translation to the current drawing transformation. A drawing transformation must be created using
DrawTransformCreate before this function can be used.

Syntax
DrawTransformTranslate( offsetX, offsetY )

Parameters
offsetX

horizontal translation

offsetY
vertical translation

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm )=?
DrawLineColour(“lightblue”)=?
DrawGrid(-150mm,-150mm,300mm,300mm,10mm,10mm)=?
DrawLineColour(“default”)=?
DrawRectangle(0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 100mm )=?
DrawCreateTransform()=?
DrawTransformTranslate(-50mm,-50mm)=?
DrawLineColour(“salmon”)=?
DrawRectangle(0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 100mm )=?
DrawDestroyTransform()=?
DrawLineColour(“red”)=?
DrawLine(-10mm,0mm,10mm,0mm)=?
DrawLine(0mm,-10mm,0mm,10mm)=?

Page 593 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Page 594 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Engineering functions

Page 595 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Classify_I_5950:2000
Returns the section classification for an I section in accordance with BS5950:2000.

Syntax
Classify_5950:2000( Shape_Code, fab_type, py , b, T, d, t, A, F, Mx )

Classify_I_5950:2000( fab_type, py , b, T, d, t, A, F, Mx )

Parameters
Shape_Code is the section shape (must be set to “I” for an I section)

fab_type is the type of fabrication (“R” or “Rolled” indicates a rolled section “W” or “Welded” indicates a welded
section)

py is the yield strength of the section

b is the outstand of flange (Section width / 2)

T is the flange thickness

d is the depth between fillets

t is the thickness of the web

A is the area of the I section

F is the applied axial load (positive compression, negative tension)

Mx is the applied major axis bending moment

Page 596 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Classify_C_5950:2000
Returns the section classification for a channel section in accordance with BS5950:2000.

Syntax
Classify_5950:2000( Shape_Code, fab_type, py , B, T, d, t, A, F, Mx )

Classify_C_5950:2000( fab_type, py , B, T, d, t, A, F, Mx )

Parameters
Shape_Code is the section shape (must be set to “C” for a channel section)

fab_type is the type of fabrication (“R” or “Rolled” indicates a rolled section “W” or “Welded” indicates a welded
section)

py is the yield strength of section

B is the outstand of flange

T is the thickness of flange

d is the depth between fillets

t is the thickness of web

A is the area of section

F is the applied axial load (positive compression, negative tension)

Mx is the applied major axis bending moment

Page 597 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Classify_HR_5950:2000
Returns the section classification for a rectangular hollow section in accordance with BS5950:2000.

Syntax
Classify_5950:2000(Shape_Code, fab_type, py , Beff , t, Deff , t, A, F, Mx)

Classify_HR_5950:2000(fab_type, py , Beff , t, Deff , t, A, F, Mx)

Parameters
Shape_Code is the section shape (must be set to “HR” for a square or rectangular hollow section)

fab_type is the type of fabrication (“R” or “Rolled” indicates a rolled section “W” or “Welded” indicates a welded
section, “CR” or “Cold Rolled” indicates a cold formed section)

py is the yield strength of section

Beff is the effective width of section (full width - 3 * wall thickness for hot finished sections or full width - 5 *
wall thickness for cold formed sections)

t is the flange thickness of section

Deff is the effective depth of section (full width - 3 * wall thickness for hot finished sections or full width - 5 *
wall thickness for cold formed sections)

t is the thickness of web

A is the area of section

F is the applied axial load (positive compression, negative tension)

Mx is the applied major axis bending moment

Page 598 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Classify_A_5950:2000
Returns the section classification for an angle section in accordance with BS5950:2000.

Syntax
Classify_5950:2000( Shape_Code, py , B, t, D F, Mx )

Classify_A_5950:2000( py , B, t, D F, Mx )

Parameters
Shape_Code is the section shape (must be set to “A” for an angle section)

py is the yield strength of section

B is the width of angle

T is the thickness of angle

D is the depth of angle

F is the applied axial load (positive compression, negative tension)

M is the applied bending moment

Page 599 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Classify_T_5950:2000
Returns the section classification for a tee section in accordance with BS5950:2000.

Syntax
Classify_5950:2000( Shape_Code, fab_type, py , b, T, D, t )

Classify_T_5950:2000( fab_type, py , b, T, D, t )

Parameters
Shape_Code is the section shape (must be set to “T” for a tee section)

fab_type is the type of fabrication (“R” or “Rolled” indicates a rolled section “W” or “Welded” indicates a welded
section)

py is the yield strength of section

b is the outstand of flange = width of section / 2

T is the thickness of flange

D is the depth of tee

t is the thickness of web

Page 600 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Classify_HC_5950:2000
Returns the section classification for a circular hollow section in accordance with BS5950:2000.

Syntax
Classify_5950:2000( Shape_Code, py , D, t, F, Mx )

Classify_HC_5950:2000( py , D, t, F, Mx )

Parameters
Shape_Code is the section shape (must be set to “HC” for circular hollow sections)

py is the yield strength of section

D is the diameter of section

t is the thickness of section

F is the applied axial load (positive compression, negative tension)

M is the applied bending moment

Page 601 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Py_5950:2000
Returns the yield strength in accordance with BS5950:2000.

Syntax
Py_5950:2000( Grade, T )

Parameters
Grade is the steel grade (“Grade 40”, “40”, “FE 360”, “S 275”, “Grade 43”, “43”, “FE 430” “S 355”, “Grade 50”,
“50”, “FE 510” “S 460”, “Grade 55”, “55”)

T is the appropriate thickness of the section, usually that of the thickest part (T must be greater than 0 mm
and less than 100 mm for Grade 40 and S 460 grades and must be greater than 0 mm and less than 150 mm for the other
grades)

Page 602 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

US_5950:2000
Returns the ultimate tensile stress from Table 5 of BS EN 10025 : 1990 + Amendment 1 : 1993.

Syntax
Us_5950:2000( Grade )

Parameters
Grade is the section grade (“S 275”, 43, “Grade 43”, “Fe430” for steel grade S 275, “S 355”, 50, “Grade 50”, “Fe
510” for steel grade S 355, “S 460”, 55, “Grade 55” for steel grade S 460)

Page 603 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Pbs_5950:2000
Returns the bearing strength of parts connected by ordinary bolts in clearance holes in accordance with Table 31 of BS
5950-1: 2000.

Syntax
Pbs_5950:2000( Grade )

Parameters
Grade is the section grade (“S 275”, 43, “Grade 43”, “Fe430” for steel grade S 275, “S 355”, 50, “Grade 50”, “Fe
510” for steel grade S 355, “S 460”, 55, “Grade 55” for steel grade S 460)

Page 604 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Pbg_5950:2000
Returns the bearing strength of parts connected by parallel shank friction grip fasteners in accordance with of BS 5950-1:
2000. Note pbg = 1.5 x pbs

Syntax
Pbg_5950:2000( Grade )

Parameters
Grade is the section grade ( “S 275”, 43, “Grade 43”, “Fe430” for steel grade S 275, “S 355”, 50, “Grade 50”, “Fe
510” for steel grade S 355, “S 460”, 55, “Grade 55” for steel grade S 460)

Page 605 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Pw_5950:2000
Returns the weld design strength for various grades of steel and electrode types in accordance with Table 37 of BS 5950-
1: 2000.

Syntax
Pw_5950:2000( Grade, electrode_classification )

Parameters
Grade is the section grade ( “S 275”, 43, “Grade 43”, “Fe430” for steel grade S 275, “S 355”, 50, “Grade
50”, “Fe 510” for steel grade S 355, “S 460”, 55, “Grade 55” for steel grade S 460)

electrode_classification is the electrode classification (“35”, “42” or “50”)

Superseded functions to BS5950:1990


Classify_5950('I', fab_type, py, B/2, T, d, t, A, P, Mx)

Page 606 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Classify_5950
Returns the section classification for an I section in accordance with BS5950:1990.

Syntax
Classify_5950("I", fab_type, py, B/2, T, d, t, A, P, Mx)

Parameters
"I" is the parameter for an I section

fab_type is the type of fabrication (“R” or “Rolled” indicates a rolled section “W” or “Welded” indicates a welded
section)

py is the yield strength of section

B/2 is the outstand of flange = Section width / 2

T is the thickness of flange

d is the depth between fillets

t is the thickness of web

A is the area of I section

P is the applied axial load (+ve compression, -ve tension)

Mx is the applied major axis bending moment

Classify_5950( 'C', fab_type, py, B, T, d, t, A, P, Mx )

Page 607 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Classify_5950
Returns the section classification for a channel section in accordance with BS5950:1990.

Syntax
Classify_5950( "C", fab_type, py, B, T, d, t, A, P, Mx )

Parameters
"C" is the parameter for a channel section

fab_type is the type of fabrication (“R” or “Rolled” indicates a rolled section “W” or “Welded” indicates a welded
section)

py is the yield strength of section

B is the outstand of flange

T is the thickness of flange

d is the depth between fillets

t is the thickness of web

A is the area of section

P is the applied axial load (+ve compression, -ve tension)

Mx is the applied major axis bending moment

Classify_5950( 'HR', fab_type, py, B-3*t, t, D-3*t, t, A, P,...)

Page 608 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Classify_5950
Returns the section classification for a rectangular hollow section in accordance with BS5950:1990.

Syntax
Classify_5950( "HR", fab_type, py, B-3*t, t, D-3*t, t, A, P, Mx )

Parameters
"HR" is the parameter for a rectangular hollow section

fab_type is the type of fabrication (“R” or “Rolled” indicates a rolled section, “W” or “Welded” indicates a welded
section)

py is the yield strength of section

B-3*t is the effective width of section = full width - 3 * wall thickness

t is the flange thickness of section

D-3*t is the effective depth of section = full depth 3 * wall thickness

t is the thickness of web

A is the area of section

P is the applied axial load (+ve compression, -ve tension)

Mx is the applied major axis bending moment

Classify_5950( 'A', py, B, t, D )

Page 609 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Classify_5950
Returns the section classification for an angle section in accordance with BS5950:1990.

Syntax
Classify_5950( "A", py, B, t, D )

Parameters
"A" is the parameter for an angle section

py is the yield strength of section

B is the width of angle

t is the thickness of angle

D is the depth of angle

Classify_5950( 'T', fab_type, py, B/2, T, D, t )

Page 610 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Classify_5950
Returns the section classification for a Tee section in accordance with BS5950:1990.

Syntax
Classify_5950( "T", fab_type, py, B/2, T, D, t )

Parameters
"T" is the parameter for a tee section

fab_type is the type of fabrication (“R” or “Rolled” indicates a rolled section, “W” or “Welded” indicates a welded
section)

py is the yield strength of section

B/2 is the outstand of flange (width of section / 2)

T is the thickness of flange

D is the depth of tee

t is the thickness of web

Classify_5950( 'HC', py, D, t )

Page 611 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Classify_5950
Returns the section classification for a circular Hollow section in accordance with BS5950:1990.

Syntax
Classify_5950( "HC", py, D, t )

Parameters
"HC" is the parameter for a circular hollow section

py is the yield strength of section

D is the diameter of section

t is the thickness of section

Py_5950( Grade, T )

Page 612 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Py_5950
Returns the yield strength in accordance with BS5950:1990.

Syntax
Py_5950( Grade, T )

Parameters
Grade is the steel grade (“Grade 40”, “40”, “FE 360”, “Grade 43”, “43”, “FE 430”, “Grade 50”, “50”, “FE 510”,
“Grade 55”, “55”)

T is the appropriate thickness of the section, usually that of the thickest part (T must be greater than 0 mm
and less than 100 mm)

Us_5950( Grade )

Page 613 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Us_5950
Returns the ultimate tensile strength from Table 6 of BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990.

Syntax
Us_5950( Grade )

Parameters
Grade is the section grade (43, “Grade 43”, “Fe430” for steel grade 43, 50, “Grade 50”, “Fe 510” for steel grade
50, 55, “Grade 55” for steel grade 55)

Pbs_5950( Grade )

Page 614 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Pbs_5950
Returns the bearing strength of parts connected by ordinary bolts in clearance holes in accordance with Table 33 of BS
5950 : Part 1 : 1990.

Syntax
Pbs_5950( Grade )

Parameters
Grade is the section grade (43, “Grade 43”, “Fe430” for steel grade 43, 50, “Grade 50”, “Fe 510” for steel grade
50, 55, “Grade 55” for steel grade 55)

Pbg_5950(Grade)

Page 615 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Pbg_5950
Returns the bearing strength of parts connected by parallel shank friction grip fasteners in accordance with Table 34 of
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990.

Syntax
Pbg_5950(Grade)

Parameters
Grade is the section grade (43, “Grade 43”, “Fe430” for steel grade 43, 50, “Grade 50”, “Fe 510” for steel grade
50, 55, “Grade 55” for steel grade 55)

Pw_5950( Grade, electrode_strength )

Page 616 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Pw_5950
Returns the weld design strength for various grades of steel and electrode types in accordance with Table 36 of BS 5950 :
Part 1 : 1990.

Syntax
Pw_5950( Grade, electrode_strength )

Parameters
Grade is the section grade (43, “Grade 43”, “Fe430” for steel grade 43, 50, “Grade 50”, “Fe 510” for
steel grade 50, 55, “Grade 55” for steel grade 55)

electrode_strength is the electrode strength (“E43”, “E51” or “E51* strength)

Page 617 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Classify_EC3
Returns the section classification for an I section in accordance with EC3.

Syntax
Classify_EC3("I", fab_type, fy, b/2, tf, d, tw, h, Wel.y, A, NSd, My.Sd)

Parameters
"I" is the parameter for an I section

fab_type is the type of fabrication (“R” or “Rolled” indicates a rolled section, “W” or “Welded” indicates a welded
section)

fy is the yield strength of section

b/2 is the outstand of flange = width of section / 2

tf is the thickness of flange

d is the depth between fillets

tw is the thickness of web

h is the height of section

Wel.y is the major axis modulus of elasticity of section

A is the area of I section

NSd is the applied axial load (+ve compression, -ve tension)

My.Sd is the applied major axis bending moment

Page 618 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Classify_EC3
Returns the section classification for a Rectangular Hollow section in accordance with EC3.

Syntax
Classify_EC3("HR", fab_type, fy, b-3*t, t, h-3*t, t, h, Wel.y, A, NSd, My.Sd)

Parameters
"HR" is the parameter for a rectangular hollow section

fab_type is the type of fabrication (“R” or “Rolled” indicates a rolled section, “W” or “Welded” indicates a welded
section)

fy is the yield strength of section

b-3*t is the effective width of section = full width - 3 * flange thickness

t is the flange thickness of section

h-3*t is the effective height of section = full height - 3 * web thickness

t is the thickness of web

h is the height of section

Wel.y is the major axis modulus of elasticity of section

A is the area of section

NSd is the applied axial load (+ve compression, -ve tension)

My.Sd is the applied major axis bending moment

Page 619 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Classify_EC3
Returns the section classification for a Circular section in accordance with EC3.

Syntax
Classify_EC3( "HC", fy, d, t )

Parameters

"HC" is the parameter for a circular hollow section

fy is the yield strength of the section

d is the diameter of the section

t is the thickness of the section

Page 620 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Fy_EC3
Returns the yield strength in accordance with EC3

Syntax
Fy_EC3( Grade, t )

Parameters
Grade is the steel grade (“Fe 360”, “S 235”, “Fe 430”, “S 275”, “Fe 510”, “S 355”)

t is the the appropriate thickness of the section, usually that of the thickest part (t must be greater than 0
mm and less than 100 mm)

Page 621 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Ec_5400
Returns the short term loading - modulus of elasticity for concrete in accordance with Table 3 of BS5400:Part 4-1990.

Syntax
Ec_5400( fcu )

Parameters
fcu is the characteristic strength (or cube strength of concrete at the age considered)

Return Value
Modulus of elasticity for concrete.

Example
ec_5400( 35 N/mm2 ) = 29500 N/mm2

Page 622 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Vtmin_5400
Returns the minimum ultimate torsion shear stress for which reinforcement is required in accordance with Table 10 of
BS5400:Part 4-1990.

Syntax
Vtmin_5400( fcu )

Parameters
fcu is the characteristic strength (or cube strength of concrete at the age considered)

Return Value
Minimum ultimate torsion shear stress.

Example
vtmin_5400( 35 N/mm2 ) = 0.395 N/mm2

Page 623 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Sigmay_5400:2006
Returns the plate nominal yield stress in accordance with BS5400 Part 3-2000 and BD13/06.

Syntax
Sigmay_5400:2006( grade, thickness )

Parameters
grade is the section steel grade (235, 275, 355, 450) or ("S235", "S275", "S355", "S450")

thickness is the plate thickness (< 100mm)

Return Value
Plate nominal yield stress.

Example
sigmay_5400:2006( "S235", 20mm ) = 225 N/mm2
sigmay_5400:2006( 355, 100mm ) = 315 N/mm2

Page 624 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Taulimit_5400:2006
Returns the limiting shear strength in accordance with Appendix G.8 of BS 5400 : Part 3.

Syntax
Taulimit_5400:2006( , mfw, )

Parameters
 is the panel aspect ratio

mfw is

 is

Return Value
Limiting shear strength.

Example
taulimit_5400:2006( 1.2, 0.012, 35.2 ) = 1.000

Page 625 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

I_finplate
Returns the inertia of a fin plate with up to 10 holes.

Syntax
I_finplate( thickness, length, bolts, diameter, pitch )

Parameters
thickness is the thickness of the fin plate.

length is the length of the fin plate.

bolts is the number of bolt holes in the fin plate.

diameter is the diameter of the holes in the fin plate.

pitch is the bolt pitch.

Return Value
Inertia of fin plate.

Example
I_finplate( 15mm, 400mm, 3, 22mm, 100mm ) = 73360070.000mm4

Page 626 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

F_NDS_Cfb
Returns the size factor for bending, CFB.

Syntax
F_NDS_CFb(Type, Species, Grade, bnom, dnom)

Parameters
Type is the type of timber, e.g. "Standard Dressed Sawn Lumber"

Species is the species of timber, e.g. "Southern Pine"

Grade is the grade of timber, e.g. "Select Structural"

bnom = is the nominal width of timber

dnom = is the nominal thickness of timber

Page 627 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

F_NDS_CFc
Returns the size factor for compression, CFC.

Syntax
F_NDS_CFc(Type, Species, Grade, bnom, dnom)

Parameters
Type is the type of timber, e.g. "Standard Dressed Sawn Lumber"

Species is the species of timber, e.g. "Southern Pine"

Grade = is the grade of timber, e.g. "Select Structural"

bnom = is the nominal width of timber

dnom = is the nominal thickness of timber

Page 628 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

F_NDS_Cft
Returns the size factor for tension, CFT.

Syntax
F_NDS_CFt(Type, Species, Grade, bnom, dnom)

Parameters
Type is the type of timber, e.g. "Standard Dressed Sawn Lumber"

Species is the species of timber, e.g. "Southern Pine"

Grade = is the grade of timber, e.g. "Select Structural"

bnom = is the nominal width of timber

dnom = is the nominal thickness of timber

Page 629 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

F_NDS_CFu
Returns the flat use factor, CFU.

Syntax
F_NDS_CFu( Type, bnom, dnom )

Parameters
Type is the type of timber, e.g. "Standard Dressed Sawn Lumber"

bnom is the nominal width of timber

dnom is the nominal thickness of timber

Page 630 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

F_NDS_CL
Returns the beam stability factor, CL.

Syntax
F_NDS_CL( bnom, dnom, RB, FbE, Fb )

Parameters
bnom is the nominal width of timber

dnom is the nominal thickness of timber

RB is the slenderness ratio for bending members (see below)

FbE Kbe E’/RB2 (This value must be calculated in the document and passed into the function)

Fb is the tabulated design value multiplied by all factors except Cfu, CV and CL (This value must be calculated
in the document and passed into the function)

Page 631 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

F_NDS_CP
Returns the column stability factor, CP.

Syntax
F_NDS_CP(Type, bnom, dnom, lex, ley, Fc*, FcEmajor, FcEminor)

Parameters
Type is the type of timber, e.g. "Standard Dressed Sawn Lumber"

bnom is the nominal width of timber

dnom is the nominal thickness of timber

lex is the effective length major axis

ley is the effective length minor axis

Fc* is the tabulated design value multiplied by all factors except CP (This value must be calculated in the
document and passed into the function)

FcEmajor is the KcE E’/(lemajoraxis/dnom)2 (This value must be calculated in the document and passed into the
function)

FcEminor is the KcE E’/(leminoraxis/dnom)2 (This value must be calculated in the document and passed into the
function)

Page 632 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

F_NDS_CV
Returns the volume factor, CV.

Syntax
F_NDS_CV( Type, Lv, b, d )

Parameters
Type is the type of timber, e.g. "Standard Dressed Sawn Lumber"

LV is the length of bending member between points of zero moment

b is the width of timber

d is the thickness of timber

Remarks
For this function the value of KL is assumed to be 1.0 (the value for uniform loads, continuous spans and cantilevers).

The function will yield a non-conservative result if there is only a single concentrated load in the middle of a simple span.
This is unusual since there is usually significant uniform load due to the weight of the beam.

Page 633 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

F_NDS_RB
Returns the slenderness ratio, RB.

Syntax
F_NDS_RB( le, b, d )

Parameters
le is the effective length of the member

b is the width of timber

d is the thickness of timber

Page 634 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Import/Export

Page 635 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SaveSectionVarsCalcItem
Save variables in the active Calc Section to a Calc Item in a Calc Library.

Syntax
SaveSectionVarsCalcItem( fileName, itemName, options, variable1, variable[n], …)

Paramaters
fileName is the full path to the Calc Library.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

options is the optional option flags, combine flags using addition.

1 = Do not include units (default = off)

2 = Include temporary variables (default = off)

4 = Include hidden variables (default = off)

variable1 is the optional name of the first variable to save, if omitted all variables are saved

variable[n] is the optional name of the nth variable to save

Remarks
An item saved with this function can be calculated by Tedds using the EvalCalcItem function.

Example
a = 1m
b = 10 kN/mm2
_tmp.Name = "Test"
SaveSectionVarsCalcItem("$(UserLbrDir)Test.lbr",
"SaveSectionVarsCalcItem1") = 1.000
SaveSectionVarsCalcItem("$(UserLbrDir)Test.lbr",
"SaveSectionVarsCalcItem2", 0, "a") = 1.000
SaveSectionVarsCalcItem("$(UserLbrDir)Test.lbr",
"SaveSectionVarsCalcItem3", 1+2+4) = 1.000

Page 636 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SaveSectionVarsTextFile
Save variables in the active Calc Section to a text file.

Syntax
SaveSectionVarsTextFile( fileName, options, variable1, variable[n], …)

Paramaters
filename is the full path to the text file.

options is the optional option flags, combine flags using addition.

1 = Do not include units (default = off)

2 = Include temporary variables (default = off)

4 = Include hidden variables (default = off)

variable1 is the optional name of the first variable to save, if omitted all variables are saved

variable[n] is the optional name of the nth variable to save

Remarks
A file saved with this function can be calculated by Tedds using the EvalFile function.

Example
a = 1m
b = 10 kN/mm2
_tmp.Name = "Test"
SaveSectionVarsTextFile( "c:\TeddsOutputVariables1.txt" ) = 1.000
SaveSectionVarsTextFile( "c:\TeddsOutputVariables2.txt", 0, "a" ) =
1.000
SaveSectionVarsTextFile( "c:\TeddsOutputVariables3.txt", 1+2+4 ) =
1.000

Page 637 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SaveVerifySectionVarsCalcItem
Save Verify expressions for variables in the active Calc Section to a Calc Item in a Calc Library.

Syntax
SaveVerifySectionVarsCalcItem( fileName, itemName, options, variable1, variable[n], …)

Paramaters
fileName is the full path to the Calc Library.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

options is the optional option flags, combine flags using addition.

2 = Include temporary variables (default = off)

4 = Include hidden variables (default = off)

variable1 is the optional name of the first variable to save, if omitted all variables are saved

variable[n] is the optional name of the nth variable to save

Remarks
This function creates a Calc Item that includes expressions to verify the values of variables are the same as they were
when the item was created. A verification item is useful for testing, start by running a calculation then create the
verification item, make changes to the calculation then calculate the verification item to verify that the results of the
calculation have not changed. An item saved with this function can be calculated by Tedds using the EvalCalcItem
function.

Example
a = 1m
b = 10 kN/mm2
_tmp.Name = "Test"
SaveVerifySectionVarsCalcItem("$(UserLbrDir)Test.lbr",
"SaveVerifySectionVarsCalcItem1") = 1.000
a = 2m
EvalCalcItem("$(UserLbrDir)Test.lbr",
"SaveVerifySectionVarsCalcItem1") = 1.000
Look at results in Progress Log to view verification failure

Page 638 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SelectFile
Shows a standard user interface for selecting a file.

Syntax
SelectFile( fileName, open, filter )

Parameters
fileName is the full path to the selected Calc Library file, can be an empty string if no file is selected.

open is the parameter that specifies whether an item is being selected for opening (True(1)) or saving
(False(0)).

filter is the optional file filter which determines the type of files that can be selected.

Return Value
Returns the full path of the selected file, if the user Cancels the user interface the original fileName value is returned.

Remarks
If the filter parameter is omitted the default file filter will be used which allows any file to be selected. To limit selection
to specific file types the filter string must be formatted as a pair of values that are the description of the file format and
the filter for that format separated by a '|' character; for example "Text files|*.txt". To allow the user to select multiple
file formats concatenate all the filters into a single string; for example "Text files|*.txt|Comma separated files|*.csv"

Example
SelectFile( "", True, "Text Files|*.txt" ) = "c:\temp\file.txt"

Page 639 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Locale functions

Page 640 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetLocale
Returns the current locale identifier as a string.

Syntax
GetLocale()

Example
getlocale() = "GB"

Page 641 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Log

Page 642 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

LogText
Adds text to the progress log.

Syntax
LogText( text )

Parameters
text is the text message to add to the Progress Log.

Example
L = 4 m
LogText( "The value of L is "+string(L,”f0”,”m”)+” m" ) = 1.000
LogText(if(L<0m,”Error – a negative length has been entered”,
”Length – OK”)) = 1.000

Page 643 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Logic functions

Page 644 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

And
Returns the result of a logical AND operation. The expression evaluates to True if all conditions are True.

Syntax
And( condition1, condition[n], … )

Parameters
condition1 is the first condition.

condition[n] is the nth condition.

Example
a = 4; b = 3
c = 6; d = 5
and(a>b, c>d) = ? ; returns True(1), because both conditions are
True
and(a>b, c>10) = ? ; returns False(0), because one condition is
False

Page 645 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Equal/_Eq
Compares two values for equality using a specified tolerance.

Syntax
Equal( value1, value2, tolerance )

_Eq( value1, value2, tolerance )

Parameters
value1 is the first numeric value to compare.

value2 is the second numeric value to compare.

tolerance is the optional tolerance value to use for the comparison.

Return Value
Returns True(1) if values are equal to within the specified tolerance, otherwise returns False(0).

Example
_Eq( 1m, 1000mm ) = 1.000
_Eq( 1m, 992mm ) = 0.000
_Eq( 1m, 992mm, 10mm ) = 1.000

Page 646 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

EqualsOneOf
Compares a value to a list of other values returning True(1) if any of those values are equal to the value.

Syntax
EqualsOneOf( value, value1,…value[n])

Parameters
value is the value to compare.

value1-[n] is the list of n values to compare to value.

Return Value
Returns True(1) if at least one of the values is equal, otherwise returns False(0).

Example
EqualsOneOf( 1, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 ) = 1.000
EqualsOneOf( 25, 5, 26, 13, 67, 12 ) = 0.000
EqualsOneOf("c", "a", "b", "c", "d", "e" ) = 1.000
EqualsOneOf("z", "a", "b", "c", "d", "e" ) = 0.000

Page 647 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GreaterOrEqual/_Ge
Compares two values to determine if one value is greater than or equal to another.

Syntax
GreaterOrEqual( value1, value2, tolerance )

_Ge( value1, value2, tolerance )

Parameters
value1 is the first numeric value to compare.

value2 is the second numeric value to compare.

tolerance is the optional tolerance value to use for the comparison.

Return Value
Returns True(1) if value1 is greater than or equal to value2 to within the specified tolerance, otherwise returns False(0).

Example
_Ge( 1m, 1000mm ) = 1.000
GreaterOrEqual( 992mm, 1m ) = 0.000
_Ge( 992mm, 1m, 10mm ) = 1.000

Page 648 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GreaterThan/_Gt
Compares two values to determine if one value is greater than another.

Syntax
GreaterThan( value1, value2, tolerance )

_Gt( value1, value2, tolerance )

Parameters
value1 is the first numeric value to compare.

value2 is the second numeric value to compare.

tolerance is the optional tolerance value to use for the comparison.

Return Value
Returns True(1) if value1 is greater than value2 to within the specified tolerance, otherwise returns False(0).

Example
_Gt( 1001mm, 1000mm ) = 1.000
GreaterThan( 1m, 992mm ) = 1.000
_Gt( 1m, 992mm, 10mm ) = 0.000

Page 649 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

If
Returns one value if a condition you specify evaluates to True (1) and another value if it evaluates to False (0).

Syntax
If( logicalTest, valueIfTrue, valueIfFalse )

Parameters
logicalTest is any value or expression that can be evaluated to True (1) or False (0).

valueIfTrue is the value returned if logicalTest is True (1). valueIfTrue can be another expression.

valueIfFalse is the value returned if logicalTest is False (0). valueIfFalse can be another expression.

Examples
x = -5
if( x < 0, “value is negative”, “value is positive” ) = "value is
negative"
if( x < 0, -1, 1 ) = -1.000

Page 650 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

IfElseIf
Calculates two or more expressions and conditionally returns one result.

Syntax
IfElseIf( condition1, trueExpression1, condition[n], trueExpression[n], falseExpression, … )

Parameters
condition1 is the first conditional expression that should equal True(1) or False(0), all other values are
treated as False.

trueExpression1 is the first expression result returned if condition[n] is true.

condition[n] is the nth conditional expression that should equal True(1) or False(0), all other values are
treated as False.

trueExpression[n] is the nth expression result returned if condition[n] is true.

falseExpression is the expression result returned if the condition is false.

Remarks
Multiple conditions can be used, each with a matching expression result if the condition is met. The statement must have
an odd number of arguments, the last on being the false expression result.

Example
L = 34ft + 2m + 8in
IfElseIf(L>15m, ”More than 15 m”, L>10m, “More than 10 m”, L>5m,
"More than 5 m", "5 m or less") = "More than 10 m"

Page 651 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

LessOrEqual/_Ge
Compares two values to determine if one value is less than or equal to another.

Syntax
LessOrEqual( value1, value2, tolerance )

_Le( value1, value2, tolerance )

Parameters
value1 is the first numeric value to compare.

value2 is the second numeric value to compare.

tolerance is the optional tolerance value to use for the comparison.

Return Value
Returns True(1) if value1 is less than or equal to value2 to within the specified tolerance, otherwise returns False(0).

Example
_Le( 1m, 1000mm ) = 1.000
LessOrEqual( 1m, 992mm ) = 0.000
_Le( 1m, 992mm, 10mm ) = 1.000

Page 652 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

LessThan/_Lt
Compares two values to determine if one value is less than another.

Syntax
LessThan( value1, value2, tolerance )

_Lt( value1, value2, tolerance )

Parameters
value1 is the first numeric value to compare.

value2 is the second numeric value to compare.

tolerance is the optional tolerance value to use for the comparison.

Return Value
Returns True(1) if value1 is less than value2 to within the specified tolerance, otherwise returns False(0).

Example
_Lt( 1001mm, 1000mm ) = 0.000
LessThan( 992mm, 1m ) = 1.000
_Lt( 992mm, 1m, 10mm ) = 0.000

Page 653 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Not
Returns the opposite of a True(1) or False(0) value.

Syntax
Not( value )

Parameters
value is the value to return the logical opposite of.

Return Value
Returns True(1) if the value parameter is False(0); otherwise returns False(0).

Remarks
Values that are non-zero will be treated as True(1).

Example
Not(1) = 0.000
Not(0) = 1.000
A = 0;B = 100
Not(A>B) = 1.000
Not(A<B) = 0.000

Page 654 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Or
Returns the result of a logical OR operation. The expression evaluates to True if one of the conditions is True.

Syntax
Or( condition1, condition[n], … )

Parameters
condition1 is the first condition.

condition[n] is the nth condition.

Example
a = 4; b = 3
c = 6; d = 5
or(a>b, c>10) = ? ; returns True(1), because one condition is True
or(a>5, c>10) = ? ; returns False(0), because both conditions are
False

Page 655 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Select
Returns a value by comparing a value with a sequence of known values and selecting the associated result.

Syntax
Select( value, case1, result1, case[n], result[n], …, defaultResult )

Parameters
value is the value to compare for equality.

case1 is the first value to compare.

result1 is the value to return if case1 is equal to value

case[n] is the nth value to compare.

result[n] is the value to return if case[n] is equal to value

defaultResult is the value to return if no match was found.

Example
Colour = “blue”
Select(
Colour,”red”,0,”yellow”,1,”green”,2,”blue”,3,”pink”,4,”black”,5,
-1 ) = 3.000

Page 656 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Message

Page 657 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Message
Shows a message box

Syntax
Message( message, title, show ).

Parameters
message is the text message to show

title is the title of the message box

show is the optional flag that determines if the message is displayed, Hide(0) or Show(1).

Example
L = 4 m
Message("The value of L is "+string(L,”f0”,”m”)+” m”, "Length") =
1.000
Message(if(L<0m,”Error – a negative length has been entered”,”Length
– OK”), "Length", if(L<0m,Show,Hide)) = 0.000

Page 658 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

WaitMessage
Shows a message window that can be used to keep the user informed about the progress of a lengthy calculation.

Syntax
WaitMessage( message ).

Parameters
message is the optional text message to show. If omitted the wait window is closed

Remarks
When the WaitMessage function is called the wait window will be shown and the function will immediately return so
that subsequent calculations can continue. The wait window will remain visible until the window is explicitly closed or
the current document finishes calculating . To close the wait window call the function with no parameters, you should
always do this as soon as your lengthy calculation has completed to ensure that the wait window does not remain visible
indefinitely.

Example
WaitMessage("Calculating item 1 of 2") = ?
Pause(1000) = ?
WaitMessage("Calculating item 2 of 2") = ?
Pause(1000) = ?
WaitMessage() = ?

Page 659 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Miscellaneous

Page 660 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

ClearCalcItemUsage
Clears the record of the Calc Items which have been calculated during the active calculation session.

Syntax
ClearCalcItemUsage()

Remarks
Each time a Calc Item is calculated a record is kept of the total number of times that item has been calculated and the
total elapsed time calculating that item during the active calculation session. Calling this function will clear all of that
data. The data is automatically cleared when the active calculation session has finished calculating.

Example
<< Insert a call to a library calculation here >>
LogCalcItemUsage() = ?
ClearCalcItemUsage() = ?
<< Insert a call to a library calculation here >>
LogCalcItemUsage() = ?

Page 661 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetCountry
Returns the users current default country setting as a two character string. This setting is defined in the Tedds Regional
Calc Options dialog.

Syntax
GetCountry()

Return Value
Returns the current default country identifier as a two character string code as defined by ISO 3166-1

Some common codes are given below


United Kingdom - GB

Ireland - IE

United States - US

Canada - CA

Australia - AU

Singapore - SG

Malaysia - MY

Hong kong - HK

China - CN

Japan - JP

France - FR

Germany - DE

Finland - FI

Denmark - DK

Spain - ES

Example
GetCountry() = "GB"

Page 662 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetLanguage
Returns the current user interface language setting as a string identifier.

Syntax
GetLanguage()

Return Value
Returns the user interface language identifier as a two character string code ("EN" = English, "FR" = French, "DE" =
German, "ES" = Spanish).

Example
GetLanguage() = "EN"

Page 663 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetTeddsAppName
Returns the name of the Tedds application calculating the current document.

Syntax
GetTeddsAppName()

Return Value
Application name as a string ("TEDDS", "TEDDS for Word", "TEDDS Lite").

Page 664 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetTimer
Returns the numeric value of the timer.

Syntax
GetTimer()

Return Value
Timer value in seconds.

Remarks
The timer is reset to zero when Tedds starts calculating or when the ResetTimer function is called. By resetting the timer
and querying the result of the GetTimer function before and after a sequence of calculations are performed it is possible
to calculate how long the calculations took. This method of measurement can be useful for analysing the performance of
long or iterative calculations in order to improve performance.

Example
start = GetTimer()
1 + 1 = 2.000
Pause(1000) = 1.000; Simulate a lengthy calculation using the Pause
function
end = GetTimer()
Time to calculate; end-start = 1.014 s

Page 665 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

LogCalcItemUsage
Outputs to the Progress Log a summary of the Calc Items which have been calculated during the active calculation
session.

Syntax
LogCalcItemUsage()

Remarks
Each time a Calc Item is calculated a record is kept of the total number of times that item has been calculated and the
total elapsed time calculating that item during the active calculation session. When LogCalcItemUsage is called it will
output to the progress log a summary of the recorded information included the average elapsed time for calculating each
Calc Item. This information can be used to assess the performance of a calculation in order to optimise specific Calc
Items.

Example
<< Insert a call to a library calculation here >>
LogCalcItemUsage() = ?

Page 666 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Pause
Pause the Tedds calculation process for a specified period of time.

Syntax
Pause( time )

Parameters
time is the time to pause in milliseconds.

Example
Pause( 5000 ) = 1.000; Pause for 5 seconds

Page 667 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

ProgressText
Sets the status text displayed in the Tedds progress window.

Syntax
ProgressText( text )

Parameters
text is the text to display in the progress window.

Example
ProgressText( "This is the progress text" ) = 1.000
Pause( 3000 ) = 1.000; Pause so you can read the text in the
progress window

Page 668 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

ResetTimer
Resets to zero the timer.

Syntax
ResetTimer()

Remarks
The timer is reset to zero when Tedds starts calculating.

Page 669 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SubCall
Calculates a Tedds field Call Statement as if it were a function. Because the field is calculated as a function no output will
be added to the Tedds document.

Syntax
Subcall( fieldName, paramater1, paramater2, … )

Parameters
fieldName is the name of the field to call as a function.

paramater1, parameter2 is the list of parameters normally passed to the Tedds field.

Remarks
The subcall function can be used to call a Tedds field, usually from a user interface. The format is to use the field name
that is being called as the first parameter, followed by the normal parameters for that field e.g.

subcall(“original function name”,”parameter 1 of the original function”,”parameter 2”)

This would typically be used to call a data list or data table from a button in a user interface.

Example
An example of calling a data list;

subcall("DataList",steel_section_dlist,"Universal
Columns","254(254(89))","Column
section","","Current_Section","Current_Page","Show","No") = ?

Page 670 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

ToHex
Returns a value as a hexadecimal formatted string.

Syntax
ToHex( value )

Parameters
value Value to convert to hexadecimal. If the value is a string the value returned for each character is the ASCII
character code in hexadecimal format.

Example
ToHex( 1 ) = "0x1"
ToHex( "a" ) = "0x61"

Page 671 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Section property functions

Page 672 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionAddAngle
Adds an angle section to the current section model.

Syntax
SectionAddAngle( x1, y1, depth, upstandThickness, width, outstandThickness )

SectionAddAngle( x1, y1, depth, upstandThickness, width, outstandThickness,  )

SectionAddAngle( x1, y1, depth, upstandThickness, width, outstandThickness, , density )

SectionAddAngle( x1, y1, depth, upstandThickness, width, outstandThickness, , density, rmr )

Parameters
x1
x co-ordinate

y1
y co-ordinate

depth
depth of angle (D)

upstandThickness
thickness of the upstand flange (t)

width
width of angle (Bb)

outstandThickness
thickness of the outstand flange (Tb)


angle of rotation of the angle about alignment co-ordinate (Default is no rotation)

density
density of angle (Default is 1000 kg/m3)

Page 673 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
rmr
relative modular ratio of angle (Default is 1.0)

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The location that the angle is drawn relative to the co-ordinate is dependent on the shape alignment property which can
be set using the SectionSetShapeAlignment function. By default the co-ordinate is the centre of mass.

Example
SectionCreate() = 1.000
SectionAddAngle( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 10mm, 100mm, 10mm ) = 1.000

SectionGetArea() = 19.000 cm2


SectionDestroy() = 1.000

Page 674 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionAddBoxSection
Adds a box section to the current section model.

Syntax
SectionAddBoxSection( x1, y1, depth, width, thickness )

SectionAddBoxSection( x1, y1, depth, width, thickness,  )

SectionAddBoxSection( x1, y1, depth, width, thickness, , density )

SectionAddBoxSection( x1, y1, depth, width, thickness, , density, rmr )

Parameters
x1
x co-ordinate

y1
y co-ordinate

depth
depth of section (D)

width
width of the section (B)

thickness
thickness of the section (t)


angle of rotation of section about alignment co-ordinate (Default is no rotation)

density
density of section (Default is 1000 kg/m3)

rmr
relative modular ratio of section (Default is 1.0)

Page 675 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The location that the section is drawn relative to the co-ordinate is dependent on the shape alignment property which
can be set using the SectionSetShapeAlignment function. By default the co-ordinate is the centre of mass.

Example
SectionCreate() = 1.000
SectionAddBoxSection( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 100mm, 20mm ) = 1.000

SectionGetArea() = 64.000 cm2


SectionDestroy() = 1.000

Page 676 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionAddChannelSection
Adds a channel section to the current section model.

Syntax
SectionAddISection( x1, y1, depth, webThickness, widthTop, thicknessTop, widthBottom, thicknessBottom )

SectionAddISection( x1, y1, depth, webThickness, widthTop, thicknessTop, widthBottom, thicknessBottom,  )

SectionAddISection( x1, y1, depth, webThickness, widthTop, thicknessTop, widthBottom, thicknessBottom, , density )

SectionAddISection( x1, y1, depth, webThickness, widthTop, thicknessTop, widthBottom, thicknessBottom, , density,
rmr )

Parameters
x1
x co-ordinate

y1
y co-ordinate

depth
depth of channel section (D)

webThickness
thickness of the web (t)

widthTop
width of the top flange (Bt)

thicknessTop
thickness of the top flange (Tt)

widthBottom
width of the bottom flange (Bb)

Page 677 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
thicknessBottom
thickness of the bottom flange (Tb)


angle of rotation of channel section about alignment co-ordinate (Default is no rotation)

density
density of channel section (Default is 1000 kg/m3)

rmr
relative modular ratio of channel section (Default is 1.0)

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The location that the channel section is drawn relative to the co-ordinate is dependent on the shape alignment property
which can be set using the SectionSetShapeAlignment function. By default the co-ordinate is the centre of mass.

Example
SectionCreate() = 1.000
SectionAddChannelSection( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 10mm, 70mm, 10mm, 70mm,
10mm ) = 1.000

SectionGetArea() = 22.000 cm2


SectionDestroy() = 1.000

Page 678 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionAddCircle
Adds a circle to the current section model.

Syntax
SectionAddCircle( x1, y1, diameter )

SectionAddCircle( x1, y1, diameter, density )

SectionAddCircle( x1, y1, diameter, density, rmr )

Parameters
x1
x co-ordinate

y1
y co-ordinate

diameter
diameter of circle

density
density of circle (Default is 1000 kg/m3)

rmr
relative modular ratio of circle (Default is 1.0)

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The location that the circle is drawn relative to the co-ordinate is dependent on the shape alignment property which can
be set using the SectionSetShapeAlignment function. By default the co-ordinate is the centre of mass of the circle.

Example
SectionCreate() = 1.000
SectionAddCircle( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm ) = 1.000

SectionGetArea() = 78.539 cm2


Page 679 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionDestroy() = 1.000

Page 680 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionAddCircularSection
Adds a circular section to the current section model.

Syntax
SectionAddCircularSection( x1, y1, diameter, thickness )

SectionAddCircularSection( x1, y1, diameter, thickness, density )

SectionAddCircularSection( x1, y1, diameter, thickness, density, rmr )

Parameters
x1
x co-ordinate

y1
y co-ordinate

diameter
diameter of section (D)

thickness
thickness of the section (t)

density
density of section (Default is 1000 kg/m3)

rmr
relative modular ratio of section (Default is 1.0)

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Page 681 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Remarks
The location that the section is drawn relative to the co-ordinate is dependent on the shape alignment property which
can be set using the SectionSetShapeAlignment function. By default the co-ordinate is the centre of mass.

Example
SectionCreate() = 1.000
SectionAddCircularSection( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 20mm ) = 1.000

SectionGetArea() = 50.265 cm2


SectionDestroy() = 1.000

Page 682 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionAddHoleCircle
Adds a circular hole to the current section model.

Syntax
SectionAddHoleCircle( x1, y1, diameter )

SectionAddHoleCircle( x1, y1, diameter, density )

SectionAddHoleCircle( x1, y1, diameter, density, rmr )

Parameters
x1
x co-ordinate

y1
y co-ordinate

diameter
diameter of circle

density
density of circle (Default is -1000 kg/m3)

rmr
relative modular ratio of circle (Default is -1.0)

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The model will not validate that the hole has been placed on top of an existing shape. It is also necessary to ensure that
the density and relative modular ratio provided when the hole is added are the negative of the density and relative
modular ratio of the parent shape.

The location that the circle is drawn relative to the co-ordinate is dependent on the shape alignment property which can
be set using the SectionSetShapeAlignment function. By default the co-ordinate is the centre of mass of the circle.

Example – 10 mm thick circular section


SectionCreate() = 1.000
Page 683 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionAddCircle( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm ) = 1.000


SectionAddHoleCircle( 0mm, 0mm, 80mm ) = 1.000

SectionGetArea() = 28.274 cm2


SectionDestroy() = 1.000

Page 684 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionAddHoleRectangle
Adds a rectangular hole to the current section model.

Syntax
SectionAddHoleRectangle( x1, y1, length, width )

SectionAddHoleRectangle( x1, y1, length, width,  )

SectionAddHoleRectangle( x1, y1, length, width, , density )

SectionAddHoleRectangle( x1, y1, length, width, , density, rmr )

Parameters
x1
x co-ordinate

y1
y co-ordinate

length
length of hole

width
width of hole


angle of rotation of hole about alignment co-ordinate (Default is no rotation)

density
density of hole (Default is -1000 kg/m3)

rmr
relative modular ratio of rectangle (Default is -1.0)

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The model will not validate that the hole has been placed on top of an existing shape. It is also necessary to ensure that
the density and relative modular ratio provided when the hole is added are the negative of the density and relative
modular ratio of the parent shape.

Page 685 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
The location that the hole is drawn relative to the co-ordinate is dependent on the shape alignment property which can
be set using the SectionSetShapeAlignment function. By default the co-ordinate is the centre of mass of the rectangle.

To draw a square ensure that both the length and width parameters use the same value.

Example – 10 mm thick box section


SectionCreate() = 1.000
SectionAddRectangle( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 50mm ) = 1.000
SectionAddHoleRectangle( 0mm, 0mm, 80mm, 30mm ) = 1.000

SectionGetArea() = 26.000 cm2


SectionDestroy() = 1.000

Page 686 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionAddDoubleAngle
Adds a double angle section to the current section model.

Syntax
SectionAddAngle( x1, y1, depth, thickness, width, gap )

SectionAddAngle( x1, y1, depth, thickness, width, gap,  )

SectionAddAngle( x1, y1, depth, thickness, width, gap, , density )

SectionAddAngle( x1, y1, depth, thickness, width, gap, , density, rmr )

Parameters
x1
x co-ordinate

y1
y co-ordinate

depth
depth of angles (D)

thickness
thickness of the angles (t)

width
width of angles (B)

gap
gap between the angles (g)


angle of rotation of the angles about alignment co-ordinate (Default is no rotation)

density
density of angle (Default is 1000 kg/m3)

rmr
relative modular ratio of angle (Default is 1.0)

Page 687 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The location that the angle is drawn relative to the co-ordinate is dependent on the shape alignment property which can
be set using the SectionSetShapeAlignment function. By default the co-ordinate is the centre of mass.

Example
SectionCreate() = 1.000
SectionAddDoubleAngle( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 10mm, 100mm, 10mm ) = 1.000

SectionGetArea() = 38.000 cm2


SectionDestroy() = 1.000

Page 688 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionAddISection
Adds a I section to the current section model.

Syntax
SectionAddISection( x1, y1, depth, webThickness, widthTop, thicknessTop, offsetTop, widthBottom, thicknessBottom,
offsetBottom )

SectionAddISection( x1, y1, depth, webThickness, widthTop, thicknessTop, offsetTop, widthBottom, thicknessBottom,
offsetBottom,  )

SectionAddISection( x1, y1, depth, webThickness, widthTop, thicknessTop, offsetTop, widthBottom, thicknessBottom,
offsetBottom, , density )

SectionAddISection( x1, y1, depth, webThickness, widthTop, thicknessTop, offsetTop, widthBottom, thicknessBottom,
offsetBottom, , density, rmr )

Parameters
x1
x co-ordinate

y1
y co-ordinate

depth
depth of I section (D)

webThickness
thickness of the web (t)

widthTop
width of the top flange (Bt)

thicknessTop
thickness of the top flange (Tt)

Page 689 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
offestTop
offset of the top flange (bt)

widthBottom
width of the bottom flange (Bb)

thicknessBottom
thickness of the bottom flange (Tb)

offestBottom
offset of the bottom flange (b b)


angle of rotation of I section about alignment co-ordinate (Default is no rotation)

density
density of I section (Default is 1000 kg/m3)

rmr
relative modular ratio of I section (Default is 1.0)

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The location that the I section is drawn relative to the co-ordinate is dependent on the shape alignment property which
can be set using the SectionSetShapeAlignment function. By default the co-ordinate is the centre of mass.

Example – Symmetric I Section


SectionCreate() = 1.000
SectionAddISection( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 10mm, 70mm, 10mm, 35mm, 70mm,
10mm, 35mm ) = 1.000

SectionGetArea() = 22.000 cm2


SectionDestroy() = 1.000

Page 690 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionAddRectangle
Adds a rectangle to the current section model.

Syntax
SectionAddRectangle( x1, y1, length, width )

SectionAddRectangle( x1, y1, length, width,  )

SectionAddRectangle( x1, y1, length, width, , density )

SectionAddRectangle( x1, y1, length, width, , density, rmr )

Parameters
x1
x co-ordinate

y1
y co-ordinate

length
length of rectangle

width
width of rectangle


angle of rotation of rectangle about alignment co-ordinate (Default is no rotation)

density
density of rectangle (Default is 1000 kg/m3)

rmr
relative modular ratio of rectangle (Default is 1.0)

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The location that the rectangle is drawn relative to the co-ordinate is dependent on the shape alignment property which
can be set using the SectionSetShapeAlignment function. By default the co-ordinate is the centre of mass of the
rectangle.

Page 691 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
To draw a square ensure that both the length and width parameters use the same value.

Example
SectionCreate() = 1.000
SectionAddRectangle( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 50mm ) = 1.000

SectionGetArea() = 50.000 cm2


SectionDestroy() = 1.000

Page 692 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionAddTee
Adds a tee section to the current section model.

Syntax
SectionAddTee( x1, y1, depth, webThickness, widthFlange, thicknessFlange, offsetFlange )

SectionAddTee( x1, y1, depth, webThickness, widthFlange, thicknessFlange, offsetFlange,  )

SectionAddTee( x1, y1, depth, webThickness, widthFlange, thicknessFlange, offsetFlange, , density )

SectionAddTee( x1, y1, depth, webThickness, widthFlange, thicknessFlange, offsetFlange, , density, rmr )

Parameters
x1
x co-ordinate

y1
y co-ordinate

depth
depth of tee (D)

webThickness
thickness of the web (t)

widthFlange
width of the top flange (Bt)

thicknessFlange
thickness of the top flange (Tt)

offsetFlange
offset of the top flange (bt)


angle of rotation of tee about alignment co-ordinate (Default is no rotation)

Page 693 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
density
density of tee (Default is 1000 kg/m3)

rmr
relative modular ratio of tee (Default is 1.0)

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The location that the tee is drawn relative to the co-ordinate is dependent on the shape alignment property which can be
set using the SectionSetShapeAlignment function. By default the co-ordinate is the centre of mass.

Example
SectionCreate() = 1.000
SectionAddTee( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 10mm, 70mm, 10mm, 35mm ) = 1.000

SectionGetArea() = 16.000 cm2


SectionDestroy() = 1.000

Page 694 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionAddTriangle
Adds a triangle to the current section model.

Syntax
SectionAddTriangle( x1, y1, length, width )

SectionAddTriangle( x1, y1, length, width,  )

SectionAddTriangle( x1, y1, length, width, , density )

SectionAddTriangle( x1, y1, length, width, , density, rmr )

Parameters
x1
x co-ordinate

y1
y co-ordinate

length
length of triangle

width
width of triangle


angle of rotation of triangle about alignment co-ordinate (Default is no rotation)

density
density of triangle (Default is 1000 kg/m3)

rmr
relative modular ratio of triangle (Default is 1.0)

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The location that the triangle is drawn relative to the co-ordinate is dependent on the shape alignment property which
can be set using the SectionSetShapeAlignment function. By default the co-ordinate is the centre of mass of the triangle.

Page 695 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Example
SectionCreate() = 1.000
SectionAddTriangle( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 50mm ) = 1.000

SectionGetArea() = 25.000 cm2


SectionDestroy() = 1.000

Page 696 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionCreate
Creates a new section properties model. A section properties model must be created before any other section property
functions can be used.

Syntax
SectionCreate()

Return Value
1 if successful; otherwise 0

Remarks
The section properties function library is a collection of Tedds functions for analysing the properties of an engineering
section. The functions provide an alternative to the Tedds Section Properties Tool which is accessible from the Section
Properties Calculation in the Tedds Engineering Library Index.

Once a section properties model has been created use the SectionAdd… functions to create the desired section. Once a
section has been created the required properties can be requested using the SectionGet… functions.

Page 697 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionDestroy
Destroys the current section model and all it’s associated properties.

Syntax
SectionDestroy()

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Remarks
Destroys the current section properties model created by SectionCreate and frees all the system resources associated
with the model.

Page 698 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionGetAngleOfRotation
Returns the combined angle of rotation to the principle axis of the current section properties model. A section properties
model must be created using SectionCreate before any other section property functions can be used.

Syntax
SectionGetAngleOfRotation()

Return Value
Returns the combined angle of rotation to the principle axis of the current model.

Remarks
The section properties function library is a collection of Tedds functions for analysing the properties of an engineering
section. The functions provide an alternative to the Tedds Section Properties Tool which is accessible from the Section
Properties Calculation in the Tedds Engineering Library Index.

Once a section properties model has been created use the SectionAdd… functions to create the desired section. Once a
section has been created the required properties can be requested using the SectionGet… functions.

Page 699 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionGetArea
Calculates and returns the area of the current section properties model. A section properties model must be created
using SectionCreate before any other section property functions can be used.

Syntax
SectionGetArea()

Return Value
Returns the area of the current model.

Remarks
The section properties function library is a collection of Tedds functions for analysing the properties of an engineering
section. The functions provide an alternative to the Tedds Section Properties Tool which is accessible from the Section
Properties Calculation in the Tedds Engineering Library Index.

Once a section properties model has been created use the SectionAdd… functions to create the desired section. Once a
section has been created the required properties can be requested using the SectionGet… functions.

Page 700 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionGetCombinedCentroidX
Returns the x coordinate of the combined centroid of the current section properties model. A section properties model
must be created using SectionCreate before any other section property functions can be used.

Syntax
SectionGetCombinedCentroidX()

Return Value
Returns the x coordinate of the combined centroid of the current model.

Remarks
The section properties function library is a collection of Tedds functions for analysing the properties of an engineering
section. The functions provide an alternative to the Tedds Section Properties Tool which is accessible from the Section
Properties Calculation in the Tedds Engineering Library Index.

Once a section properties model has been created use the SectionAdd… functions to create the desired section. Once a
section has been created the required properties can be requested using the SectionGet… functions.

Page 701 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionGetCombinedCentroidY
Returns the y coordinate of the combined centroid of the current section properties model. A section properties model
must be created using SectionCreate before any other section property functions can be used.

Syntax
SectionGetCombinedCentroidY()

Return Value
Returns the y coordinate of the combined centroid of the current model.

Remarks
The section properties function library is a collection of Tedds functions for analysing the properties of an engineering
section. The functions provide an alternative to the Tedds Section Properties Tool which is accessible from the Section
Properties Calculation in the Tedds Engineering Library Index.

Once a section properties model has been created use the SectionAdd… functions to create the desired section. Once a
section has been created the required properties can be requested using the SectionGet… functions.

Page 702 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionGetElasticModulusXX
Returns the elastic modulus about centroid XX of the current section properties model. A section properties model must
be created using SectionCreate before any other section property functions can be used.

Syntax
SectionGetElasticModulusXX()

Return Value
Returns the elastic modulus about centroid XX of the current model.

Remarks
The section properties function library is a collection of Tedds functions for analysing the properties of an engineering
section. The functions provide an alternative to the Tedds Section Properties Tool which is accessible from the Section
Properties Calculation in the Tedds Engineering Library Index.

Once a section properties model has been created use the SectionAdd… functions to create the desired section. Once a
section has been created the required properties can be requested using the SectionGet… functions.

Page 703 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionGetElasticModulusYY
Returns the elastic modulus about centroid YY of the current section properties model. A section properties model must
be created using SectionCreate before any other section property functions can be used.

Syntax
SectionGetElasticModulusYY()

Return Value
Returns the elastic modulus about centroid YY of the current model.

Remarks
The section properties function library is a collection of Tedds functions for analysing the properties of an engineering
section. The functions provide an alternative to the Tedds Section Properties Tool which is accessible from the Section
Properties Calculation in the Tedds Engineering Library Index.

Once a section properties model has been created use the SectionAdd… functions to create the desired section. Once a
section has been created the required properties can be requested using the SectionGet… functions.

Page 704 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionGetEqualAreaAxisX
Returns the x coordinate of the equal area axis of the current section properties model. A section properties model must
be created using SectionCreate before any other section property functions can be used.

Syntax
SectionGetEqualAreaAxisX()

Return Value
Returns the x coordinate of the equal area axis of the current model.

Remarks
This function only returns a value if the section model is made up purely of rectangles at 90

The section properties function library is a collection of Tedds functions for analysing the properties of an engineering
section. The functions provide an alternative to the Tedds Section Properties Tool which is accessible from the Section
Properties Calculation in the Tedds Engineering Library Index.

Once a section properties model has been created use the SectionAdd… functions to create the desired section. Once a
section has been created the required properties can be requested using the SectionGet… functions.

Page 705 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionGetEqualAreaAxisY
Returns the y coordinate of the equal area axis of the current section properties model. A section properties model must
be created using SectionCreate before any other section property functions can be used.

Syntax
SectionGetEqualAreaAxisY()

Return Value
Returns the y coordinate of the equal area axis of the current model.

Remarks
This function only returns a value if the section model is made up purely of rectangles at 90

The section properties function library is a collection of Tedds functions for analysing the properties of an engineering
section. The functions provide an alternative to the Tedds Section Properties Tool which is accessible from the Section
Properties Calculation in the Tedds Engineering Library Index.

Once a section properties model has been created use the SectionAdd… functions to create the desired section. Once a
section has been created the required properties can be requested using the SectionGet… functions.

Page 706 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionGetMajorRadiusOfGyration
Returns the major axis radius of gyration about the centroid of the current section properties model. A section properties
model must be created using SectionCreate before any other section property functions can be used.

Syntax
SectionGetMajorRadiusOfGyration()

Return Value
Returns the major axis radius of gyration about the centroid of the current model.

Remarks
The section properties function library is a collection of Tedds functions for analysing the properties of an engineering
section. The functions provide an alternative to the Tedds Section Properties Tool which is accessible from the Section
Properties Calculation in the Tedds Engineering Library Index.

Once a section properties model has been created use the SectionAdd… functions to create the desired section. Once a
section has been created the required properties can be requested using the SectionGet… functions.

Page 707 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionGetMajorSecondMoment
Returns the major axis principle second moment of area of the current section properties model. A section properties
model must be created using SectionCreate before any other section property functions can be used.

Syntax
SectionGetMajorSecondMoment()

Return Value
Returns the major axis principle second moment of area of the current model.

Remarks
The section properties function library is a collection of Tedds functions for analysing the properties of an engineering
section. The functions provide an alternative to the Tedds Section Properties Tool which is accessible from the Section
Properties Calculation in the Tedds Engineering Library Index.

Once a section properties model has been created use the SectionAdd… functions to create the desired section. Once a
section has been created the required properties can be requested using the SectionGet… functions.

Page 708 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionGetMinorRadiusOfGyration
Returns the minor axis radius of gyration about the centroid of the current section properties model. A section
properties model must be created using SectionCreate before any other section property functions can be used.

Syntax
SectionGetMinorRadiusOfGyration()

Return Value
Returns the minor axis radius of gyration about the centroid of the current model.

Remarks
The section properties function library is a collection of Tedds functions for analysing the properties of an engineering
section. The functions provide an alternative to the Tedds Section Properties Tool which is accessible from the Section
Properties Calculation in the Tedds Engineering Library Index.

Once a section properties model has been created use the SectionAdd… functions to create the desired section. Once a
section has been created the required properties can be requested using the SectionGet… functions.

Page 709 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionGetMinorSecondMoment
Returns the minor axis principle second moment of area of the current section properties model. A section properties
model must be created using SectionCreate before any other section property functions can be used.

Syntax
SectionGetMinorSecondMoment()

Return Value
Returns the minor axis principle second moment of area of the current model.

Remarks
The section properties function library is a collection of Tedds functions for analysing the properties of an engineering
section. The functions provide an alternative to the Tedds Section Properties Tool which is accessible from the Section
Properties Calculation in the Tedds Engineering Library Index.

Once a section properties model has been created use the SectionAdd… functions to create the desired section. Once a
section has been created the required properties can be requested using the SectionGet… functions.

Page 710 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionGetPlasticModulusXX
Returns the plastic modulus at the equal area axis XX of the current section properties model. A section properties model
must be created using SectionCreate before any other section property functions can be used.

Syntax
SectionGetPlasticModulusXX()

Return Value
Returns the plastic modulus at the equal area axis XX of the current model.

Remarks
This function only returns a value if the section model is made up purely of rectangles at 90

The section properties function library is a collection of Tedds functions for analysing the properties of an engineering
section. The functions provide an alternative to the Tedds Section Properties Tool which is accessible from the Section
Properties Calculation in the Tedds Engineering Library Index.

Once a section properties model has been created use the SectionAdd… functions to create the desired section. Once a
section has been created the required properties can be requested using the SectionGet… functions.

Page 711 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionGetPlasticModulusYY
Returns the plastic modulus at the equal area axis YY of the current section properties model. A section properties model
must be created using SectionCreate before any other section property functions can be used.

Syntax
SectionGetPlasticModulusYY()

Return Value
Returns the plastic modulus at the equal area axis YY of the current model.

Remarks
This function only returns a value if the section model is made up purely of rectangles at 90

The section properties function library is a collection of Tedds functions for analysing the properties of an engineering
section. The functions provide an alternative to the Tedds Section Properties Tool which is accessible from the Section
Properties Calculation in the Tedds Engineering Library Index.

Once a section properties model has been created use the SectionAdd… functions to create the desired section. Once a
section has been created the required properties can be requested using the SectionGet… functions.

Page 712 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionGetRadiusOfGyrationXX
Returns the radius of gyration about centroid XX of the current section properties model. A section properties model
must be created using SectionCreate before any other section property functions can be used.

Syntax
SectionGetRadiusOfGyrationXX()

Return Value
Returns the radius of gyration about centroid XX of the current model.

Remarks
The section properties function library is a collection of Tedds functions for analysing the properties of an engineering
section. The functions provide an alternative to the Tedds Section Properties Tool which is accessible from the Section
Properties Calculation in the Tedds Engineering Library Index.

Once a section properties model has been created use the SectionAdd… functions to create the desired section. Once a
section has been created the required properties can be requested using the SectionGet… functions.

Page 713 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionGetRadiusOfGyrationYY
Returns the radius of gyration about centroid YY of the current section properties model. A section properties model
must be created using SectionCreate before any other section property functions can be used.

Syntax
SectionGetRadiusOfGyrationYY()

Return Value
Returns the radius of gyration about centroid YY of the current model.

Remarks
The section properties function library is a collection of Tedds functions for analysing the properties of an engineering
section. The functions provide an alternative to the Tedds Section Properties Tool which is accessible from the Section
Properties Calculation in the Tedds Engineering Library Index.

Once a section properties model has been created use the SectionAdd… functions to create the desired section. Once a
section has been created the required properties can be requested using the SectionGet… functions.

Page 714 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionGetSecondMomentXX
Returns the second moment of area XX of the current section properties model. A section properties model must be
created using SectionCreate before any other section property functions can be used.

Syntax
SectionGetSecondMomentXX()

Return Value
Returns the second moment of area XX of the current model.

Remarks
The section properties function library is a collection of Tedds functions for analysing the properties of an engineering
section. The functions provide an alternative to the Tedds Section Properties Tool which is accessible from the Section
Properties Calculation in the Tedds Engineering Library Index.

Once a section properties model has been created use the SectionAdd… functions to create the desired section. Once a
section has been created the required properties can be requested using the SectionGet… functions.

Page 715 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionGetSecondMomentYY
Returns the second moment of area YY of the current section properties model. A section properties model must be
created using SectionCreate before any other section property functions can be used.

Syntax
SectionGetSecondMomentYY()

Return Value
Returns the second moment of area YY of the current model.

Remarks
The section properties function library is a collection of Tedds functions for analysing the properties of an engineering
section. The functions provide an alternative to the Tedds Section Properties Tool which is accessible from the Section
Properties Calculation in the Tedds Engineering Library Index.

Once a section properties model has been created use the SectionAdd… functions to create the desired section. Once a
section has been created the required properties can be requested using the SectionGet… functions.

Page 716 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionGetTotalMass
Returns the total mass per unit length of the current section properties model. A section properties model must be
created using SectionCreate before any other section property functions can be used.

Syntax
SectionGetTotalMass()

Return Value
Returns the total mass per unit length of the current model.

Remarks
The section properties function library is a collection of Tedds functions for analysing the properties of an engineering
section. The functions provide an alternative to the Tedds Section Properties Tool which is accessible from the Section
Properties Calculation in the Tedds Engineering Library Index.

Once a section properties model has been created use the SectionAdd… functions to create the desired section. Once a
section has been created the required properties can be requested using the SectionGet… functions.

Page 717 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionSetShapeAlignment
Sets the shape alignment used by the SectionAdd… functions. The alignment determines how the shape is positioned
relative to the output co-ordinate.

Syntax
SectionSetShapeAlignment() – Sets the shape alignment to default setting (Centre of Mass)

SectionSetShapeAlignment( verticalAlignmentName, horizontalAlignmentName )

SectionSetShapeAlignment( verticalAlignmentId, horizontalAlignmentId )

Parameters
verticalAlignmentName
name of alignment type to use for aligning shape vertically

verticalAlignmentId
numeric id of alignment type to use for aligning shape vertically

horizontalAlignmentName

name of alignment type to use for aligning shape horizontally

horizontalAlignmentId
numeric id of alignment type to use for aligning shape horizontally

Return Value
1 if successful, otherwise 0.

Remarks
The alignment is the relationship between the bounding rectangle of the shape and the output co-ordinate.

The following table lists the alignment types. The default alignment is the centre of mass of the shape.

Id Name Description
-1 “Default” Use default alignment (Centre Of Mass)
“CentreOfMass”
“CenterOfMass”
0 “Near” Shape is aligned so that the bottom left corner of the bounding rectangle is at the
output co-ordinate.
1 “Centre” Shape is aligned so that the centre is at the output co-ordinate.
“Center”

Page 718 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

2 “Far” Shape is aligned so that the top right corner of the bounding rectangle is at the
output co-ordinate.

Example
SectionCreate() = 1.000
SectionSetShapeAlignment() = 1.000
SectionAddCircle( 0mm, 0mm, 200mm ) = 1.000

SectionSetShapeAlignment( “far”, “near” ) = 1.000


SectionAddRectangle( 0mm, 0mm, 200mm ) = 1.000

SectionSetShapeAlignment( “centre”, “far” ) = 1.000


SectionAddRectangle( 0mm, 0mm, 200mm ) = 1.000

Page 719 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SectionDestroy() = 1.000

Page 720 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Settings

Page 721 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetBendingMomentFace
Returns the current value of the setting which determines on which face of an analysis element the bending moment is
drawn in analysis calculations.

Syntax
GetBendingMomentFace()

Return Value
Analysis calculations will draw bending moment diagrams showing positive bending relative to the local y-axis of the
analysis element (1) or inverted relative to the local y-axis of the analysis element(-1).

Remarks
The return value of this function can often be used directly in a drawing transformation to ensure that any drawing
elements which should be relative to the moment drawing are drawn on the correct face of the analysis element. The
value can be used to scale a drawing in the y axis by a factor of 1, i.e. no effect or -1 to flip the drawing in the y-axis.

…draw moment diagram

transform y-axis according to bending moment face setting

DrawCreateTransform() = ?
DrawTransformScale(1, GetBendingMomentFace()) = ?
... do drawing stuff relative to moment diagram

DrawDestroyTransform() = ?

Page 722 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetDebug
Returns the state of the debug mode option.

Syntax
GetDebug()

Remarks
Debug mode changes how some functions and calculations behave in order to assist the diagnosis of errors (bugs) when
writing custom calculations. Some calculations may alter their behaviour when debug mode is enabled, therefore debug
mode should always be disabled when producing final output calculations.

When debug mode is enabled the following behaviour will occur:

 Additional warnings are shown in the progress log for common programming issues that may be errors.

 If an expression error is reported whilst a calculations user interface is visible the error dialog will include the option
to Continue calculating.

When debug mode is disabled the following behaviour will occur:

 The VariablesWindow function will do nothing.

 The CalcWindow function will do nothing.

 If an expression error is reported whilst a calculations user interface is visible the error dialog will not include the
option to Continue calculating.

Return Value
Debug mode (0 = disabled, 1 = enabled).

Page 723 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetSketchAlignment
Returns the current sketch alignment setting.

Syntax
GetSketchAlignment()

Return Value
Sketch alignment (0=Left,1=Centre,2=Right).

Remarks
The sketch alignment applies to Active Sketches and Calc Items stored in the Enhanced Metafile format. Sketch are
output to the document and aligned relative to the page width.

Page 724 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetSketchScaleHeight
Returns the current sketch scale height setting.

Syntax
GetSketchScaleHeight()

Return Value
Sketch scale height as a percentage.

Remarks
The sketch scale height applies to Active Sketches and Calc Items stored in the Enhanced Metafile format. Sketches are
output to the document and scaled to a percentage of the document page height.

Page 725 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetSketchScaleWidth
Returns the current sketch scale width setting.

Syntax
GetSketchScaleWidth()

Return Value
Sketch scale width as a percentage.

Remarks
The sketch scale width applies to Active Sketches and Calc Items stored in the Enhanced Metafile format. Sketches are
output to the document and scaled to a percentage of the document page width.

Page 726 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetTolerance
Returns the current tolerance used when comparing values for equality.

Syntax
GetTolerance()

Return Value
The current tolerance used for comparing values for equality.

Example
GetTolerance() = 1.010-15

Page 727 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

ListAddIns
Returns a list of all the loaded Tedds Add Ins.

Syntax
ListAddIns()

Return Value
A string listing all the Tedds Add Ins.

Page 728 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

ListFields
Returns a list of all the available Tedds fields.

Syntax
ListFields()

Return Value
A string listing all the Tedds fields.

Page 729 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

ListFunctions
Returns a list of all the available Tedds functions.

Syntax
ListFunctions()

Return Value
A string listing all the Tedds functions.

Page 730 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

MinTolerance
Returns the minimum tolerance allowed when comparing values for equality.

Syntax
MinTolerance()

Return Value
The minimum tolerance allowed for comparing values for equality.

Example
MinTolerance() = 2.2204460492503110-16

Page 731 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetDebug
Enables or disables debugging mode.

Syntax
SetDebug( enable )

Parameters
enable enable or disable debug mode (0 = disable, 1 = enable)

Remarks
Debug mode changes how some functions and calculations behave in order to assist the diagnosis of errors (bugs) when
writing custom calculations. Some calculations may alter their behaviour when debug mode is enabled, therefore debug
mode should always be disabled when producing final output calculations.

When debug mode is enabled the following behaviour will occur:

 Additional warnings are shown in the progress log for common programming issues that may be errors.

 If an expression error is reported whilst a calculations user interface is visible the error dialog will include the option
to Continue calculating.

When debug mode is disabled the following behaviour will occur:

 The VariablesWindow function will do nothing.

 The CalcWindow function will do nothing.

 If an expression error is reported whilst a calculations user interface is visible the error dialog will not include the
option to Continue calculating.

Return Value
The previous value of this option before it is modified.

Page 732 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetDebugTrace
Enables or disables debug tracing.

Syntax
SetDebugTrace( enable )

Parameters
enable if True (1) debug tracing is enabled for all subsequent expressions, if False (0) debug tracing is disabled for
all subsequent expressions.

Return Value
Returns the current value of this setting before the new value is applied, True (1) if enabled; otherwise False (0).

Remarks
When calculating is in progress, tracing will log messages that help you to monitor the execution sequence of your
calculations, to detect malfunctions. The messages that tracing produces appear in the Progress Log window therefore
the Progress Log must be enabled to read the messages.

When tracing is enabled during complex calculations a significant number of messages may be shown which will effect
both calculation performance and the ease with which you can find the relevant messages to the problem you are trying
to resolve. It is therefore recommended that tracing is only enabled for small sections of your calculations at a time.

The SetDebugTrace function returns the current value of the setting before the value is applied so that you can save the
current setting and subsequently restore the setting to its former state. This approach ensures that if your expressions
are called from other calculations which are also using the SetDebugTrace function the current setting will always be
maintained.

Example
LogText( "Example 1: Trace all expressions..." ) = ?
_savedDebugTrace = SetDebugTrace(True) = ?
y1 = 12
y2 = 22
y3 = 32
EvalFor( "x", 4, "x <= 10", +1, "SetVar(\"y[x]\", x2)" ) = ?
y11 = 112
y12 = 122

Page 733 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

y13 = 132
SetDebugTrace(_savedDebugTrace) = ?

LogText( "Example 2: Only trace EvalFor..." ) = ?


y1 = 12
y2 = 22
y3 = 32
_savedDebugTrace = SetDebugTrace(True) = ?
EvalFor( "x", 4, "x <= 10", +1, "SetVar(\"y[x]\", x2)" ) = ?
SetDebugTrace(_savedDebugTrace) = ?
y11 = 112
y12 = 122
y13 = 132

Page 734 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetDecimalSymbol
Sets the character used in expressions to represent the decimal separator in a numeric value.

Syntax
SetDecimalSymbol( decimalSymbol )

Parameters
decimalSymbol decimal symbol character

Return Value
The current list decimal symbol character.

Remarks
The decimal symbol cannot be assigned the same character as either the List Separator or the Expression Delimiter, refer
to the functions SetListSeparator and SetExpressionDelimiter for more details.

When a document is calculated the default decimal symbol is determined by the Tedds setting "Calculating\Regional
Settings\Number and expression format\Decimal symbol".

Example
a = 1.2 + 1.3 = 2.500
SetDecimalSymbol( "," ) = ""
a = 2,500
a = 1,2 + 1,3 = 2,500

Page 735 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetDimAnal
Sets the option which determines whether unit dimension checks are performed.

Syntax
SetDimAnal( dimAnalysis )

Parameters
dimAnalysis if True (1) then unit dimension checks will be performed, if False (0) unit dimension checks will not be
performed

Return Value
True (1) if successful; otherwise False (0).

Remarks
When expressions are calculated and this option is enabled the mathematical operations and results will be checked to
ensure that they are dimensionally correct according to the units used. SetDimAnal can be used to disable this checking.

Disabling dimensional checking is not recommended, calculations in the Tedds Engineering Library may not work
correctly if this option is disabled. Dimensional checking is an integral and fundamental part of the functionality of Tedds,
only disable this option if you understand the implications. If you need to disable this option for a specific expression in a
calculation it is recommended that you re-enable the option immediately after the expression in question.

When a document is calculated this option will default to the Tedds setting "Calculating\General\Perform dimensional
checks".

Example
SetDimAnal( True ) = 1.000

1m * 2 = ? m2<Error: specified result units do not match dimensions of expression2*1 m^(1) <> 1*1 m^(2)>

SetDimAnal( False ) = 1.000

1m * 2 = 2.000 m2

Page 736 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetErrorMode
Sets the option which determines how calculation errors are reported.

Syntax
SetErrorMode( errorMode )

Parameters
errorMode if 0 then errors are only reported in the document output, if 1 errors are reported in the document
output and the user will be prompted to acknowledge the error.

Return Value
True (1) if successful; otherwise False (0).

Remarks
When a document is calculated this option will default to the Tedds setting "Calculating\General\Prompt on calculation
error"

Example
x = 1
y = 0
errorMode = SetErrorMode( 0 )
z = x / y = ?<Error: divide by zero>
SetErrorMode( errorMode ) = 0.000
SetVarIf( GetExpressionError() == 111, “z”, -1 ) = -1.000
z = -1.000

Page 737 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetErrorOnUndefinedVar
Sets the option which determines whether an error will be reported if an undefined variable is used.

Syntax
SetErrorOnUndefinedVar( errorOnUndefinedVar )

Parameters
errorOnUndefinedVar if True (1) then in the event of an undefined variable an error will be reported, if False (0) the
user will be prompted to enter a value for the undefined variable.

Return Value
True (1) if successful; otherwise False (0).

Remarks
When a document is calculated this option will default to the Tedds setting "Calculating\General\Error on undefined
variable".

Example
SetErrorOnUndefinedVar( False ) = 1.000
abc = ?
SetErrorOnUndefinedVar( True ) = 1.000
xyz = ?

Page 738 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetFormats
Sets the default numerical format and precision used for showing intermediate and final results.

Syntax
SetFormats( intFormat, intPrecision, finalFormat, finalPrecision )

Parameters
intFormat is the numerical format (F=Fixed, E=Engineering, G=General, S=Scientific) to use for intermediate results

intPrecision is the numerical precision (0-15) to use for intermediate results

finalFormat is the numerical format (F=Fixed, E=Engineering, G=General, S=Scientific) to use for final results

finalPrecision is the numerical precision (0-15) to use for final results

Return Value
True (1) if successful; otherwise False (0).

Remarks
The default numerical format and precision is only used for output result fields which have not explicitly specified the
format and precision to use.

When a document is calculated these options will default to the Tedds settings "Calculating\Results".

SetFormats( "F", 10, "F", 10 ) = 1.000

pi = 3.1415926536

SetFormats( "F", 1, "F", 1 ) = 1.0000000000

pi = 3.1

SetFormats( "S", 10, "S", 2 ) = 1.0

100000 * pi = 100000  3.1415926536 = 3.14105

Page 739 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetListSeparator
Sets the character used in expressions to separate a list of items, typically used for the parameters of a function call.

Syntax
SetListSeparator( listSeparator )

Parameters
listSeparator list separator character, note the chosen character must be used exclusively as the list separator it cannot
be used in any other context within an expression.

Return Value
The current list separator character.

Remarks
When a document is calculated the default list separator is determined by the Tedds setting "Calculating\Regional
Settings\Number and expression format\List separator".

Example
Sum( 1,2,3 ) = 6.000
SetListSeparator( "|" ) = ""
Sum( 1|2|3 ) = 6.000

Page 740 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetShowDataGraphs
Sets the option which determines whether the Data Graph functions will show the Data Graph user interface.

Syntax
SetShowDataGraphs( showDataGraphs )

Parameters
showDataGraphs if True (1) then the Data Graphs user interface will be shown, if False (0) the Data Graphs will be
processed silently without any user interaction required.

Return Value
True (1) if successful; otherwise False (0).

Remarks
When using a calculation which requires making a selection from a Data Graphs, there may be circumstances when you
want to run that calculation without requiring any user interaction. Using SetShowDataGraphs you can force all Data
Graphs to be processed silently without showing the normal Data Graphs user interface.

When a document is calculated this option will default to the Tedds setting "Calculating\General\Show Data Graphs".

Page 741 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetShowDataLists
Sets the option which determines whether the Data List functions will show the Data List user interface.

Syntax
SetShowDataLists( showDataLists )

Parameters
showDataList if True (1) then the Data List user interface will be shown, if False (0) the Data List will be processed
silently without any user interaction required.

Return Value
True (1) if successful; otherwise False (0).

Remarks
When using a calculation which requires making a selection from a Data List, there may be circumstances when you want
to run that calculation without requiring any user interaction. Using SetShowDataLists you can force all Data Lists to be
processed silently without showing the normal Data List user interface.

When a document is calculated this option will default to the Tedds setting "Calculating\General\Show Data Lists".

Page 742 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetShowDataTables
Sets the option which determines whether the Data Table functions will show the Data Table user interface.

Syntax
SetShowDataTables( showDataTables )

Parameters
showDataTables if True (1) then the Data Table user interface will be shown, if False (0) the Data Table will be
processed silently without any user interaction required.

Return Value
True (1) if successful; otherwise False (0).

Remarks
When using a calculation which requires making a selection from a Data Table, there may be circumstances when you
want to run that calculation without requiring any user interaction. Using SetShowDataTables you can force all Data
Tables to be processed silently without showing the Data Table user interface.

When a document is calculated this option will default to the Tedds setting "Calculating\General\Show Data Tables".

Page 743 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetSketchAlignment
Sets the alignment used when sketches are output to the document.

Syntax
SetSketchAlignment( alignment )

alignment sketch alignment relative to the document page (0=Left, 1=Centre/Center, 2=Right)

Return Value
True (1) if successful; otherwise False (0).

Remarks
The sketch alignment applies to Active Sketches, Calc Items stored in the Enhanced Metafile format and any field or
function that outputs a sketch.

Page 744 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetSketchScale
Sets the maximum width and height that sketches will be output to the document, as a percentage of the page size.

Syntax
SetSketchScale( maxWidth, maxHeight )

maxWidth the maximum width sketches are allowed to be as a percentage of the document page width

maxHeight the maximum height sketches are allowed to be as a percentage of the document page height

Return Value
True (1) if successful; otherwise False (0).

Remarks
The sketch scale applies to Active Sketches, Calc Items stored in the Enhanced Metafile format and any field or function
that outputs a sketch. Sketches are output to the document and scaled to a percentage of the document page width and
height.

Page 745 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetTolerance
Sets the tolerance used when comparing numerical values for equality.

Syntax
SetTolerance( tolerance )

Parameters
tolerance sets the tolerance used when comparing numerical values for equality

Return Value
True (1) if successful; otherwise False (0).

Remarks
When a document is calculated the default tolerance is 0.000000000000001.

Warning! - This function can seriously impact the results of your calculations, we strongly recommend that you do not
change the tolerance setting unless you fully understand the consequences because this settings will affect the results of
every subsequent numerical comparison. If you want to make numerical comparisons using a specific tolerance use one
of the functions Equal, LessOrEqual, LessThan, GreaterOrEqual or GreaterThan which allow you to specify the tolerance
for an individual comparison.

Example
SetTolerance( MinTolerance() ) = 0.000
1.0000000001 == 1.0 = 0.000
SetTolerance( 0.000001 ) = 0.000
1.0000000001 == 1.0 = 1.000

Page 746 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

String functions

Page 747 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Str
Returns a number as a string.

Syntax
Str( value )

Parameters
value is the value to convert to a string

Return Value
Returns the value parameter as a string using the format f0.

Example
CurrentSpan = 2
Str( CurrentSpan ) = "2"
Str should only be used when the number being converted to a string is known to be an integer, otherwise accuracy will
be lost as the number will be rounded.

Page 748 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrCompare
Compares two strings for equality. The function can perform case sensitive and case insensitive comparisons.

Syntax
StrCompare( string1, string2, caseInsensitive)

Parameters
string1 is the first string for comparison.

string2 is the second string for comparison.

caseInsensitive is optional, if True case is ignored. If omitted or False then a case sensitive comparison will be performed.

Return Value
If string1 is less than string2 (string1 would appear first in a dictionary) then -1 is returned

If string1 is equal to string2 (depending on the CaseInsensitive parameter) then 0 is returned.

If string1 is greater than string2 (String2 would appear first in a dictionary) then 1 is returned.

Examples
StrCompare(“abcd”, “efgh”, True) = -1.000
StrCompare(“abcd”, “ABCD”, True) = 0.000
StrCompare(“efgh”, “abcd”, True) = 1.000
For case sensitive comparisons only, uppercase letters are considered to be less than lowercase letters

StrCompare(“A”, “a”, False) = -1.000


This is true even if the two letters are different – so in a case sensitive comparison a Z (uppercase) is considered to be
less than an a (lowercase).

StrCompare(“Z”, “a”, True) = 1.000


StrCompare(“Z”, “a”, False) = -1.000
For both types of comparison (case sensitive and insensitive) all numerical characters are considered to be less than all
alphabetical characters

StrCompare(“1”, “a”, False) = -1.000


StrCompare(“1”, “A”, False) = -1.000

Page 749 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrDecode
Decodes a string converting specially encoded characters and non printable characters to their non encoded equivalents.

Syntax
StrDecode( string )

Parameters
string string to decode.

Return Value
Returns decoded version of the string.

Remarks
When defining a string some characters for example a tab character must be encoded via a special sequence of
characters. The StrDecode function converts an existing string and replaces specially encoded characters and non
printable characters with their non encoded equivalents.

When a string is defined Tedds automatically decodes any special characters, the StrDecode function allows you to
retrieve the decoded version of the string for use with other functions that require a decoded string.

Character Encoded

Tab \t

Newline \n

" \"

\ \\

Example
StrDecode( "Wall direction \"South\"" ) = "Wall direction "South""

Page 750 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrEncode
Encodes a string by converting special characters and non printable characters to their encoded equivalents.

Syntax
StrEncode( string )

Parameters
string string to encode.

Return Value
Returns encoded version of the string.

Remarks
When defining a string some characters for example a tab character must be encoded via a special sequence of
characters. The StrEncode function converts an existing string and replaces special characters and non printable
characters with their encoded equivalents.

When a string is defined Tedds automatically decodes any special characters, the StrEncode function allows you to
retrieve the encoded version of the string for use with other functions that require an encoded string. For example when
displaying a string in a user interface quotes must be encoded in order to ensure they are displayed correctly.

Character Encoded

Tab \t

Newline \n

" \"

\ \\

Example
s = "Wall direction \"South\"" = "Wall direction "South""
StrEncode( s ) = "Wall direction \"South\""

Page 751 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrEnd
Returns a new string based on the end of a string.

Syntax
StrEnd( string, length )

Parameters
string is the string

length is the maximum number of characters to return from the end of the string.

Return Value
Returns a string.

Example
StrEnd(“abcde”, 1) = "e"
StrEnd(“abcde”, 2) = "de"
StrEnd(“abcde”, 4) = "bcde"

Page 752 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrEndsWith
Determines whether the end of a string matches the specified string.

Syntax
StrEndsWith( string1, string2 )

Parameters
string1 is the first string to compare.

string2 is the string to compare to

Return Value
Returns True if the string2 parameter matches the end of string1; otherwise returns False.

Remarks
This function is case sensitive.

Example
StrEndsWith(“abcd”, “d”) = 1.000
StrEndsWith(“abcd”, “cd”) = 1.000
StrEndsWith(“abcd”, “abcd”) = 1.000
StrEndsWith(“abcd”, “ab”) = 0.000
StrEndsWith(“abcd”, “CD”) = 0.000
StrEndsWith(“abcd”, “cd ”) = 0.000

Page 753 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrFirstIndexOf
Returns the position of the first occurrence of a character or string in a string.

Syntax
StrFirstIndexOf( string1, string2, startPosition, length )

Parameters
string1 is the string to search.

string2 is the string to search for.

startPosition is optional and determines the first character in the string to start the search from. If startPosition is
omitted the search will start from the beginning of the string.

length is optional and determines how many characters within string1 are searched, from startPosition
to startPosition+length. If the parameter is missing the search will continue to the end of the string.

Return Value
Returns the position of the first occurrence of string2 in string 1 after startPosition. If string2 is not found within length
characters then -1 is returned.

Example
StrFirstIndexOf (“abcde”, “c”) = 3.000
StrFirstIndexOf (“abcde”, “cd”) = 3.000
StrFirstIndexOf (“abcde”, “cd”, 1) = 3.000
StrFirstIndexOf (“abcde”, “cd”, 4) = -1.000
StrFirstIndexOf (“abcde”, “cd”, 1, 2) = -1.000
StrFirstIndexOf (“abcde”, “cd”, 1, 3) = 3.000

Page 754 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrFormat
Returns a formatted string that may include any number of values.

Syntax
StrFormat( format, value1, value2, … )

StrFormat( format )

Parameters
format is the string format. Place holders indicate where to insert values in the string and in what
format.

[variable name , format and precision , units] - for named placeholders or

[parameterIndex , format and precision , units] - for numeric placeholders

parameterIndex is the index of the parameter to insert

format is the format flag (F=Fixed, E=Engineering, G=General, S=Scientific).

precision is the precision of the result (0-15)

units is the units to display (see Remarks)

value1 is the first value that can be inserted into the string

value[n] is the nth value that can be inserted into the string

Return Value
Formatted string

Remarks
The format string is used to define what the resulting string will look like. To indicate where the values are to be inserted
use placeholders as follows. (Values can be either numerical or strings)

A = 5; B = 10
Result = StrFormat(“The value of A = [1]. The value of B = [2]. The
value of A + B = [1] + [2] = [3]”, A, B, A+B)
Result = "The value of A = 5. The value of B = 10. The value of A +
B = 5 + 10 = 15"
Each value in the parameter list can be used any number of times, or not at all.

Page 755 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
To include a square bracket in the text insert a '\' character before the bracket

Result = StrFormat(“The second parameter \[[2]\] is [2] twice”,


“UNUSED”, “USED”)
Result = "The second parameter [USED] is USED twice"
Placeholders can also specify the precision and units used to format a value.

C = 5m
To display C in scientific mode to 3 decimal places in inches use [<n> , S3, in]

Result = StrFormat(“Value of C = [1,S3,in]”, C)


Result = "Value of C = 1.969102 in"
The default format/precision is F0 and if no display units are specified then base units are used.

Result = StrFormat(“Value of C = [1]”, C)


Result = "Value of C = 5"
To use the default format/precision the second part of the placeholder can be omitted.

D = 5kg
To display D in default format/precision in lbs use [ , , lbs]

Result = StrFormat(“Value of D = [1,,lbs]”, D)


Result = "Value of D = 11.023 lbs"
To display D in default format/precision in base units use [ , , ]

Result = StrFormat(“Value of D = [1,,]”, D)


Result = "Value of D = 5.000"
Each value in the parameter list can be used any number of times, or not at all.

A = 5; B = 10
Result = StrFormat(“The value of A = [1]. The value of B = [2]. The
value of A + B = [1] + [2] = [3]”, A, B, A+B)
Result = "The value of A = 5. The value of B = 10. The value of A +
B = 5 + 10 = 15"
With named placeholders

A = 5; B = 10; C = A + B
Result = StrFormat(“The value of A = [A]. The value of B = [B]. The
value of A + B = [A] + [B] = [C]”)
Result = "The value of A = 5. The value of B = 10. The value of A +
B = 5 + 10 = 15"
To include a square bracket in the text insert a '\' character before the bracket

Result = StrFormat(“The second parameter \[[2]\] is [2] twice”,


“UNUSED”, “USED”)
Result = "The second parameter [USED] is USED twice"
Placeholders can also specify the precision and units used to format a value.

C = 5m
To display C in scientific mode to 3 decimal places in inches use [<n> , S3, in]

Page 756 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Result = StrFormat(“Value of C = [1,S3,in]”, C)


Result = "Value of C = 1.969102 in"
With a named placeholder

Result = StrFormat(“Value of C = [C,S3,in]”)


Result = "Value of C = 1.969102 in"
To display C to 1 decimal place in yards feet and inches use [<n> , f1, yd ft in]

Result = StrFormat(“Value of C = [C,f1,yd ft in]”)


Result = "Value of C = 5yd 1ft 4.9in"
The default format/precision is F0 and if no display units are specified then base units are used.

Result = StrFormat(“Value of C = [1]”, C)


Result = "Value of C = 5"
To use the default format/precision the second part of the placeholder can be omitted.

D = 5kg
To display D in default format/precision in lbs use [ , , lbs]

Result = StrFormat(“Value of D = [1,,lbs]”, D)


Result = "Value of D = 11.023 lbs"
To display D in default format/precision in base units use [ , , ]

Result = StrFormat(“Value of D = [1,,]”, D)


Result = "Value of D = 5.000"

Page 757 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrFromChar
Returns a string for the specified ASCII character code.

Syntax
StrFromChar( value )

Parameters
value is the numeric ASCII character code to convert to a string

Return Value
Returns the ASCII value as a string.

Remarks
The American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) is the specification that defines how a character is
represented numerically. Computers can only understand numbers so text in Tedds is actually stored as ASCII encoded
characters. StrFromChar and the corresponding function StrToChar allow you to convert between string characters and
ASCII numeric codes.

Example
StrFromChar( 65 ) = "A"
StrFromChar( 97 ) = "a"

charNum = StrToChar( "a" )


StrFromChar( charNum ) = "a"
StrFromChar( charNum + 1 ) = "b"
StrFromChar( charNum + 2 ) = "c"
StrFromChar( charNum + 25 ) = "z"

Page 758 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrIndexOf
Returns the position of the nth occurrence of a string in a string.

Syntax
StrIndexOf( string1, string2, occurence )

Parameters
string1 is the string to search.

string2 is the string to search for.

occurence is the nth occurrence to find

Return Value
Returns the position of the nth occurrence of string2 in string 1. If the nth occurrence of string2 is not found within
string1 then -1 is returned.

Example
StrIndexOf (“abcabcabc”, “c”, 1) = 3.000
StrIndexOf (“abcabcabc”, “c”, 2) = 6.000
StrIndexOf (“abcabcabc”, “c”, 3) = 9.000
StrIndexOf (“abcabcabc”, “c”, 4) = -1.000
StrIndexOf (“abcabcabc”, “abc”, 2) = 4.000

Page 759 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

String
Returns a number as a string using the specified format and precision.

Syntax
String( value, format, units )

Parameters
value is the value to format as a string

format is the optional format (F=Fixed, E=Engineering, G=General, S=Scientific) and precision (0-15) to
use. If omitted the default Tedds format and precision are used (normally F3).

units is the optional units to use. If omitted base units will be used.

Example
a = 3.5
string(a,”f1”) = "3.5"
a = 3.5 m
string(a,”f1”) = "3.5"
a = 3.5 ft
string(a,”f1”) = "1.1"
a = 3.5 ft
string(a,”f1”, “ft”) = "3.5"

Remarks
The String function is often used when concatenating a value to a string.

L = 14 m
“The value of L is “ +string(L,”f0”,”m”)+ “ m” = "The value of L is 14
m"

Page 760 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrInsert
Returns a new string with a string inserted at the specified position.

Syntax
StrInsert( string1, string2, insertPosition)

Paramaters
string1 is the string to insert a string into.

string2 is the string to insert

insertPosition is the position to insert the string at.

Return Value
Returns the result of inserting string2 into string1.

Example
StrInsert(“abcd”, “x”, 1) = "xabcd"
StrInsert(“abcd”, “x”, 3) = "abxcd"
StrInsert(“abcd”, “x”, 5) = "abcdx"

Page 761 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrLastIndexOf
Returns the position of the last occurrence of a character or string in a string.

Syntax
StrLastIndexOf ( string1, string2, startPosition, length )

Parameters
string1 is the string to search.

string2 is the string to search for.

startPosition is optional and determines the first character in the string to start the search from. If startPosition is
omitted the search will start from the end of the string.

length is optional and determines how many characters within string1 are searched, from startPosition
to startPosition-length. If the parameter is missing the search will continue to the begining of the string.

Return Value
Returns the position of the last occurrence of string2 in string 1 after startPosition. If string2 is not found within length
characters then -1 is returned.

Example
StrLastIndexOf (“abcde”, “c”) = 3.000
StrLastIndexOf (“abcde”, “cd”) = 3.000
StrLastIndexOf (“abcde”, “cd”, 1) = -1.000
StrLastIndexOf (“abcde”, “cd”, 4) = 3.000
StrLastIndexOf (“abcde”, “cd”, 5, 2) = -1.000
StrLastIndexOf (“abcde”, “cd”, 5, 3) = 3.000

Page 762 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrLength
Returns the number of characters in a string.

Syntax
StrLength( string )

Parameters
string is the string to count the number of characters in.

Return Value
Number of characters.

Example
StrLength(“abcd”) = 4.000
StrLength(“”) = 0.000

Page 763 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrPadLeft
Returns a string padded on the left side with a character or string so that the new string is of the required length.

Syntax
StrPadLeft( string1, maxLength, string2 )

Paramaters
string1 is the string to pad.

maxLength is the maximum length of the returned string.

string2 is the string to pad, if omitted spaces are used.

Return Value
Padded string.

Example
StrPadLeft(“abcde”, 1) = "abcde"
StrPadLeft(“abcde”, 5) = "abcde"
StrPadLeft(“abcde”, 10) = " abcde"
StrPadLeft(“abcde”, 20) = " abcde"
StrPadLeft(“abcde”, 10, “@”) = "@@@@@abcde"
StrPadLeft(“abcde”, 10, “<>”) = "<><><abcde"
StrPadLeft(“abcde”, 10, “XYZ”) = "XYZXYabcde"

Page 764 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrPadRight
Returns a string padded on the right side with a character or string so that the new string is of the required length.

Syntax
StrPadRight( string1, maxLength, string2 )

Paramaters
string1 is the string to pad.

maxLength is the maximum length of the returned string.

string2 is the string to pad, if omitted spaces are used.

Return Value
Padded string.

Example
StrPadRight(“abcde”, 1) = "abcde"
StrPadRight(“abcde”, 5) = "abcde"
StrPadRight(“abcde”, 10) = "abcde "
StrPadRight(“abcde”, 20) = "abcde "
StrPadRight(“abcde”, 10, “@”) = "abcde@@@@@"
StrPadRight(“abcde”, 10, “<>”) = "abcde<><><"
StrPadRight(“abcde”, 10, “XYZ”) = "abcdeXYZXY"

Page 765 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrRemove
Returns a string with the specified number of characters removed from a specified position in a string.

Syntax
StrRemove( string, startPosition, count )

Paramaters
string is the string to remove characters from.

startPosition is the position to start removing characters.

count is the number of characters to remove.

Return Value
string

Example
StrRemove(“abcde”, 1, 1) = "bcde"
StrRemove(“abcde”, 1, 2) = "cde"
StrRemove(“abcde”, 4, 1) = "abce"
StrRemove(“abcde”, 4, 2) = "abc"

Page 766 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrReplace
Returns a string replacing all instances of the specified substrings within the string.

Syntax
StrReplace( string, stringRemove1, StringReplace1, stringRemove2, stringReplace2, … )

Paramaters
string is the original string.

stringRemove1 is the first string to remove.

stringReplace1 is the first string to replace.

stringRemove[n] is the nth string to remove.

stringReplace[n] is the nth string to replace.

Remarks
To remove a specific character or substring completely, replace it with an empty string.

Return Value
String.

Example
StrReplace("abcde", "a", "z") = "zbcde"
StrReplace("abcde", "ab", "z") = "zcde"
StrReplace("abcde", "a", "yz") = "yzbcde"
StrReplace("abcdeabcdeabcde", "a", "z") = "zbcdezbcdezbcde"
StrReplace("abcdeabcdeabcde", "a", "") = "bcdebcdebcde"
StrReplace("abcde", "a", "A", "b", "B", "c", "C", "d", "D", "e", "E"
) = "ABCDE"

Page 767 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrStart
Returns the start of a string.

Syntax
StrStart( string, length )

Paramaters
string is the string

length is the maximum number of characters to return from the start of the string.

Return Value
String

Example
StrStart(“abcde”, 1) = "a"
StrStart(“abcde”, 2) = "ab"
StrStart(“abcde”, 4) = "abcd"

Page 768 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrStartsWith
Determines if a string starts with a specified string.

Syntax
StrStartsWith( string1, string2 )

Paramaters
string1 is the string to check

string2 is the string to look for in string1

Return Value
Returns True if the parameter string 1 starts with the parameter string2; otherwise returns False.

Remarks
This function is case sensitive.

Example
StrStartsWith(“abcd”, “a”) = 1.000
StrStartsWith(“abcd”, “ab”) = 1.000
StrStartsWith(“abcd”, “abcd”) = 1.000
StrStartsWith(“abcd”, “cd”) = 0.000
StrStartsWith(“abcd”, “AB”) = 0.000
StrStartsWith(“abcd”, “ ab”) = 0.000

Page 769 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrSubstring
Returns a sub string from a string.

Syntax
StrSubstring( string, startPosition, length )

Paramaters
string is the string to return a sub string from.

startPosition is the position of the first character of the sub string.

length is the optional maximum number of characters to return, if omitted the string from startPosition to the
end of the string is returned.

Return Value
Sub string

Example
StrSubstring(“abcde”, 1, 1) = "a"
StrSubstring(“abcde”, 1, 2) = "ab"
StrSubstring(“abcde”, 4, 2) = "de"
StrSubstring(“abcde”, 2) = "bcde"

Page 770 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrToChar
Returns the first character of a string as an ASCII character code.

Syntax
StrToChar( value )

Parameters
value is the string to convert to an ASCII character code

Return Value
Returns the value parameter as an ASCII character code.

Remarks
The American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) is the specification that defines how a character is
represented numerically. Computers can only understand numbers so text in Tedds is actually stored as ASCII encoded
characters. StrToChar and the corresponding function StrFromChar allow you to convert between string characters and
ASCII numeric codes.

Example
StrToChar( "A" ) = 65.000
StrToChar( "a" ) = 97.000

charNum = StrToChar( "a" )


StrFromChar( charNum ) = "a"
StrFromChar( charNum + 1 ) = "b"
StrFromChar( charNum + 2 ) = "c"
StrFromChar( charNum + 25 ) = "z"

Page 771 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrToLower
Returns a string in lowercase.

Syntax
StrToLower( string )

Paramaters
string is the string to return in lowercase.

Example
StrToLower(“ABCDE”) = "abcde"
StrToLower(“AbCdE”) = "abcde"

Page 772 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrToUpper
Returns a string in uppercase.

Syntax
StrToUpper( string )

Paramaters
string is the string to return in uppercase.

Example
StrToUpper(“abcde”) = "ABCDE"
StrToUpper(“AbCdE”) = "ABCDE"

Page 773 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrTrim
Returns a string with characters removed from the left and right of a string.

Syntax
StrTrim( string, trimCharacters )

Paramaters
string is the string to trim.

trimCharacters is the optional string of characters that are to be trimmed from the string, if omitted spaces are trimmed.

Example
StrTrim(“ a b c d e ”) = "a b c
d e"
StrTrim(“.zxy.yz..abcde..zzxy.”, “.xyz”) = "abcde"

Page 774 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrTrimEnd
Returns a string with characters removed from the end of the string.

The parameters are

Syntax
StrTrimEnd( string, trimCharacters )

Paramaters
string is the string to trim.

trimCharacters is the optional string of characters that are to be trimmed from the string, if omitted spaces are trimmed.

Example
StrTrimEnd(“ a b c d e ”) = " a b c
d e"
StrTrimEnd(“.abcde..zzxy.”, “.xyz”) = ".abcde"

Page 775 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrTrimStart
Returns a string with characters removed from the start of the string.

Syntax
StrTrimStart( string, trimCharacters )

Paramaters
string is the string to trim.

trimCharacters is the optional string of characters that are to be trimmed from the string, if omitted spaces are trimmed.

Example
StrTrimStart(“ a b c d e ”) = "a b c d
e "
StrTrimStart(“.zxy.yz..abcde.”, “.xyz”) = "abcde."

Page 776 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

String list functions

Page 777 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StringList
Returns a string containing a list of values separated by the current list separator character.

Syntax
StringList( format, units, value1, value[n], …)

Paramaters
format is the optional format (F=Fixed, E=Engineering, G=General, S=Scientific) and precision (0-15) to
use. If omitted the default Tedds format and precision are used (normally F3).

units is the optional units to use for each value. If omitted base units will be used.

value1 is the first element to add to the list. If the value is a number the number is converted to a string using
the f0 format.

value[n] is the nth element to add to the list.

Return Value
String list where each element is separated using the current locales list separator character.

Remarks
If any of the specified parameters are an empty string value they will not be included in the list.

Example
StringList( “F0”, “”, 1.1, 2, 3.6 ) = "1,2,4"

Page 778 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StringListRange
Returns a string containing a list of values for a specified range separated by the current list separator character.

Syntax
StringListRange( format, units, count, start, step )

Paramaters
format is the optional format (F=Fixed, E=Engineering, G=General, S=Scientific) and precision (0-15) to
use. If omitted the default Tedds format and precision are used (normally F3).

units is the optional units to use for each value. If omitted base units will be used.

count is the number of elements to add to the list.

start is the optional start value, if omitted 1 is used

step is the optional stepping value to use between each element, if omitted 1 is used.

Return Value
String list where each element is separated using the current locales list separator character.

Example
StringListRange( “F1”, “”, 5 ) = "1.0,2.0,3.0,4.0,5.0"
StringListRange(“F1”, “m”, 5, 0mm, 200mm ) = "0.0,0.2,0.4,0.6,0.8"
StringListRange(“F1”, “in”, 5, 0in, 1ft ) =
"0.0,12.0,24.0,36.0,48.0"

Page 779 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrList
Returns a string containing a list of values separated by the current list separator character.

Syntax
StrList( value1, value[n],…)

Paramaters
Value1 is the first element in the list. If the value is a number the number is converted to a string using zero
decimal places.

Value[n] is the nth element in the list.

Return Value
String list where each element is separated using the current locales list separator character.

Remarks
If any of the specified parameters are an empty string value they will not be included in the list.

Example
StrList( 1, 2, 3 ) = "1,2,3"
StrList( “a”, “b”, “c” ) = "a,b,c"
StrList( “a”, “”, “c”, “”, “e” ) = "a,c,e"
A = 1.1
B = 2.0
C = 3.6
StrList( A,B,C ) = "1,2,3"

Page 780 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrListAdd
Adds item(s) to the end of an existing string list and returns the concatenated string list.

Syntax
StrListAdd( list, value1, value[n],…)

Paramaters
list is the existing string list.

value1 is the first element to be appended to the list. If the value is a number the number is converted to a string using
the fixed format to zero decimal places.

value[n] is the nth element to add to the list.

Return Value
String list where each element is separated using the current locales list separator character.

Remarks
Values are added to the list in the order specified.

Example
list = StrList( 1, 2, 3 ) = "1,2,3"
list = StrListAdd( list, 4 ) = "1,2,3,4"
list = StrListAdd( list, 5, 6, 7 ) = "1,2,3,4,5,6,7"
list = StrListAdd( list, "h", "i", "j" ) = "1,2,3,4,5,6,7,h,i,j"
A = 1.1
B = 2.0
C = 3.6
list = StrListAdd( list, A, B, C ) = "1,2,3,4,5,6,7,h,i,j,1,2,4"

Page 781 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrListCount
Returns the number of items in a string list.

Syntax
StrListCount( list )

Paramaters
list is the string list.

Return Value
The number of items in the string list, where each element is separated using the current locales list separator character.

Example
list = StrList( "a", "b", "c" ) = "a,b,c"
StrListCount( list ) = 3
list = StrListAdd( list, 4, 5, 6 ) = "a,b,c,4,5,6"
StrListCount( list ) = 6

Page 782 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrListFind
Finds the index of a string in a string list.

Syntax
StrListFind( list, find, startIndex )

Paramaters
list is the string list.

find Is the string to find in the string list

startIndex is the optional 1 based index of the first item to start searching in the list, if omitted the search starts at
the first item.

Return Value
The 1 based index of the next item found in the string list which matches the find string. If the string is not found then
zero is returned.

Example
list = StrList( "a", "b", "c", "d", "e", "f", "a" ) = "a,b,c,d,e,f,a"
StrListFind( list, "b" ) = 2.000
StrListFind( list, "e" ) = 5.000
StrListFind( list, "a" ) = 1.000
StrListFind( list, "a", 2 ) = 7.000
StrListFind( list, "z" ) = 0.000

Page 783 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrListGet
Returns one or more items from a string list.

Syntax
StrListGet( list, index, count )

Paramaters
list is the string list.

index is the 1 based index of the first item to be returned.

count is the optional number of items to return. If omitted one item will be returned, if -1 all items from index to the end
of the listwill be returned.

Return Value
A string if one item is returned or a string list if more than one item is returned.

Example
list = StrList( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 ) = "1,2,3,4,5,6"
StrListGet( list, 1 ) = "1"
StrListGet( list, 5 ) = "5"
StrListGet( list, 3, 2 ) = "3,4"

Page 784 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrListInsert
Inserts one or more items into an existing string list at the specified index and returns the concatenated string list.

Syntax
StrListInsert( list, index, value1, value[n],…)

Paramaters
list is the existing string list.

index is the 1 based index of the position where the first item will be inserted

value1 is the first element to be inserted into the list. If the value is a number the number is converted to a string using
the fixed format to zero decimal places.

value[n] is the nth value to be inserted into the list.

Return Value
String list where each element is separated using the current locales list separator character.

Remarks
Values are inserted into the list in the order specified.

Example
list = StrList( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 ) = "1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9"
list = StrListInsert( list, 1, "a" ) = "a,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9"
list = StrListInsert( list, 3, "c" ) = "a,1,c,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9"
list = StrListInsert( list, 4, "d", "e" ) = "a,1,c,d,e,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9"

Page 785 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrListRange
Returns a string containing a list of values for a specified range separated by the current list separator character.

Syntax
StrListRange( count, start, step )

Paramaters
count is the number of elements to add to the list.

start is the optional start value, if omitted 1 is used

step is the optional stepping value to use between each element, if omitted 1 is used.

Return Value
String list where each element is separated using the current locales list separator character.

Example
StrListRange( 5 ) = "1,2,3,4,5"
StrListRange( 5, 0 ) = "0,1,2,3,4"
StrListRange( 5, 0, 2 ) = "0,2,4,6,8"

Page 786 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrListRemove
Removes one or more items from an existing string list at the specified index and returns the new string list.

Syntax
StrListRemove( list, index, count )

Paramaters
list is the existing string list.

index is the 1 based index of the first item in the list to be removed

count is the optional number of items to remove from the string list, If omitted one item will be removed, if -1 all items
from index to the end of the list will be removed.

Return Value
New string list with items removed.

Example
list = StrList( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 ) = "1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9"
list = StrListRemove( list, 1 ) = "2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9"
list = StrListRemove( list, 2, 2 ) = "2,5,6,7,8,9"
list = StrListRemove( list, 4, -1 ) = "2,5,6"

Page 787 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrListRemoveEmpty
Removes all empty items from an existing string list and returns the new string list.

Syntax
StrListRemoveEmpty( list )

Paramaters
list is the existing string list.

Return Value
New string list with empty items removed.

Example
StrListRemoveEmpty( "a,,c,d" ) = "a,c,d"
StrListRemoveEmpty( ",,3,4,5" ) = "3,4,5"
StrListRemoveEmpty( "a1,b1,," ) = "a1,b1"

Page 788 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrListReplace
Replaces one or more items in a string list at the specified index and returns the new string list.

Syntax
StrListReplace( list, index, value1, value[n], … )

Paramaters
list is the existing string list.

index is the 1 based index of the first item in the list to be replaced

value1 is the first item to be replaced in the list. If the value is a number the number is
converted to a string using the fixed format to zero decimal places.
value[n] is the nth item to be replaced in the list.

Return Value
New string list with items replaced.

Example
list = StrList( 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 ) = "1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9"
list = StrListReplace( list, 1, "a" ) = "a,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9"
list = StrListReplace( list, 3, "c" ) = "a,2,c,4,5,6,7,8,9"
list = StrListReplace( list, 6, "f", "g", "h" ) = "a,2,c,4,5,f,g,h,9"

Page 789 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrListSort
Sorts the items in a string list according to the specified criteria and returns the sorted string list.

Syntax
StrListSort( list, ascending, ignoreCase, ignoreFormatting, digitsNumerically )

Paramaters
list is the string list to sort.

ascending is optional and determines whether items are sorted in ascending (True) or descending order (False). If
the parameter is omitted the items will be sorted in ascending order.

ignoreCase is optional and determines whether to ignore upper and lower case (True) or not (False) when sorting the
items. If the parameter is omitted the items will be sorted ignoring the case.

ignoreFormatting is optional and determines whether to ignore (True) the formatting (superscript, subscript,
Greek) of characters or not (False).

digitsNumerically is optional and determines whether to sort digits numerically (True) or lexically (False).
If the parameter is omitted items will be sorted in numerical order.

Remarks
When digits are not sorted numerically they are sorted lexically. The sort looks at the underlying ASCII character code
and sorts digits from lowest to highest for each character. This unusual order reflects the numerical sequence of codes
used to indicate different numbers and letters. This order has several effects:

numbers sort out of arithmetical sequence: 1, 10, 11, 120, 13, 2 instead of 1,2,10,11,13,120.

sequential numbers in strings do not sort sequentially: Chapter 1, Chapter 11, Chapter 2 not Chapter 1, Chapter 2,
Chapter 11.

When sorting items numerically values in scientific format will not be sorted in their numeric order.

Example
list = StrList( "50", "1", "100", "a", "10", "A", "1.1", "-1.1",
"Z", "z", "a_{z}", "a_{b}", "a_{A}", "\61", "\61_{a}", "0", "-
100", "\61_{\61}", "-5", "50" )
Default sort, ascending, ignore case, ignore formatting, sort digits numerically
StrListSort( list ) = "-100,-5,-1.1,0,1,1.1,10,50,50,100,a,A,,aA,a,,ab,az,Z,z"
Sort descending

Page 790 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrListSort( list, False ) = "Z,z,az,ab,aA,a,,a,A,,100,50,50,10,1.1,1,0,-1.1,-


5,-100"
Sort ascending, case sensitive
StrListSort( list, True, False ) = "-100,-5,-
1.1,0,1,1.1,10,50,50,100,a,,a,,ab,az,aA,z,A,Z"
Sort ascending, ignore case, consider formatting (superscript/subscript/Greek)
StrListSort( list, True, True, False ) = "-100,-5,-
1.1,0,1,1.1,10,50,50,100,a,A,a A,ab,az,Z,z,,a,"
Sort ascending, ignore case, ignore formatting, sort digits lexically
StrListSort( list, True, True, True, False ) =
"0,1,10,100,1.1,50,50,a,A,,aA,a,,ab,az,Z,z,-100,-1.1,-5"

Page 791 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrListToString
Converts a string list to a single string with the list separators removed.

Syntax
StrListToString( list )

Paramaters
list is the existing string list.

Return Value
New string with all the list separators removed.

Example
list = StrList( "m", "a", "t", "h", "s" ) = "m,a,t,h,s"
StrListToString( list ) = "maths"

Page 792 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrListTrimItems
Trims each item in a string list, removing the specified characters from the left and right end of each item.

Syntax
StrListTrimItems( list, trimLeft, trimRight )

Paramaters
list is the existing string list.

trimLeft is the optional string to remove from the left side of each item, the default is a single space character " "

trimRight is the optional string to remove from the right side of each item, the default is trimLeft

Return Value
New string list with items trimmed.

Example
list = StrList( "+ red +", " blue ", "- green - ", " * yellow -+*"
)
= "+ red +, blue ,- green - ,  yellow -+"
list = StrListTrimItems( list ) = "+ red +,blue,- green -, yellow -+"
list = StrListTrimItems( list, "- " ) = "+ red +,blue,green, yellow -+"
list = StrListTrimItems( list, "+ ", "*-+ " ) = "red,blue,green, yellow"

Page 793 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

StrListWrapItems
Inserts the specified strings before the left side and after the right side of each item in a string list.

Syntax
StrListWrapItems( list, left, right )

Paramaters
list is the existing string list.

left is the string to insert on the left side of each item.

right is the optional string to insert on the right side of each item, the default is the left value

Return Value
New string list with each item wrapped.

Example
list = StrList( "red", "blue", "green", "yellow" ) =
"red,blue,green,yellow"
list = StrListWrapItems( list, "-" ) = "-red-,-blue-,-green-,-yellow-"
list = StrListWrapItems( list, "++", "**" ) = "++-red-,++-blue-,++-
green-,++-yellow-"

list = StrList( 100, 50, 75, 400, 250 )


StrListWrapItems( list, "\"" ) = ""100","50","75","400","250""
StrListToString( StrListWrapItems( StrListSort(list), "@", "" ) ) =
"@50@75@100@250@400"

Page 794 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Testing functions

Page 795 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetVerifyFailedCount
Returns the number of Verify tests that have failed.

Syntax
GetVerifyFailedCount()

Return Value
The total number of verification tests that have failed.

Remarks
The verification counters are used in conjunction with the Tedds Verify field to verify the expected result of an
expression. This counter records how many verification tests have failed.

Page 796 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetVerifyPassedCount
Returns the number of Verify tests that have passed.

Syntax
GetVerifyPassedCount()

Return Value
The total number of verification tests that have passed successfully.

Remarks
The verification counters are used in conjunction with the Tedds Verify field to verify the expected result of an
expression. This counter records how many verification tests have passed.

Page 797 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetVerifyTotalCount
Returns the value of the verify counter.

Syntax
GetVerifyTotalCount()

Return Value
The total number of verification tests that have been calculated.

Remarks
The verification counters are used in conjunction with the Tedds Verify field to verify the expected result of an
expression. This counter records how many verification tests have been performed.

Page 798 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

ResetVerifyCounters
Resets to zero the verification counters.

Syntax
ResetVerifyCounters()

Remarks
The verification counters are used in conjunction with the Tedds Verify field to verify the expected result of an
expression. The counters record how many verification test has been performed, how many test passed and how many
tests failed. This function resets all the counters to zero.

Page 799 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Verify
Verifies if the result of an expression is True(1).

Syntax
Verify( expression )

Parameters

expression is the expression that must evaluate to True(1) or False(0)

Return Value
Returns True(1) if verification passed; otherwise False(0).

Remarks
The verification functions are used to test the expected result of an expression. When the Verify function is called the
verify counter is incremented as well as the counter for the returned result (VerifyPassed or VerifyFailed). The value of
the counters can be returned by using the functions GetVerifyTotalCount, GetVerifyPassedCount and
GetVerifyFailedCount.

When the Verify function returns False(0) i.e. a failed verification a Warning message will be added to the Progress Log.

Example
ResetVerifyCounters() = 1.000
Verify( Equal(1m, 1000mm) ) = 1.000
Verify( Equal(1m, 999mm) ) = 0.000
Verify( Equal(1m, 3.281ft, 1mm) ) = 1.000
3 verification tests were performed, 2 passed, 1 failed

Page 800 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

VerifyEqual
Verifies if two values are equal.

Syntax
VerifyEqual( value1, value2, tolerance )

Parameters

value1 is the first value to compare for equality

value2 is the second value to compare for equality

tolerance is the optional tolerance value to use for the comparison

Return Value
Returns True(1) if verification passed; otherwise False(0).

Remarks
The verification functions are used to test the expected result of a value. When the VerifyEqual function is called the
verify counter is incremented as well as the counter for the returned result (VerifyPassed or VerifyFailed). The value of
the counters can be returned by using the functions GetVerifyTotalCount, GetVerifyPassedCount and
GetVerifyFailedCount.

When the VerifyEqual function returns False(0) i.e. a failed verification, a Warning message will be added to the Progress
Log.

Example
ResetVerifyCounters() = 1.000
VerifyEqual( 1m, 1000mm ) = 1.000
VerifyEqual( 1m, 999mm ) = 0.000
VerifyEqual( 1m, 3.281ft, 1mm ) = 1.000
3 verification tests were performed, 2 passed, 1 failed

Page 801 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Unit functions

Page 802 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

AddUnit
Adds a new unit to the Tedds unit database.

Syntax
AddUnit( name, mass, length, time, degrees, multiplier)

Parameters
name is the name of the unit.

mass is the mass dimension, nmass in base units.

length is the length dimension , nlength in base units.

time is the time dimension, ntime in base units.

degrees is the mass dimension, ndegrees in base units.

multiplier is the value multiplier

Return Value
True if unit was added successfully; otherwise False.

Remarks
The unit database is installed as a read only file to prevent units from accidentally being overwritten, to use the AddUnit
function you must first change the file permissions of the unit database to provide write access.

Example
Addunit( “ft”,0,1,0,0, 0.3048 ) = ?
Would add the unit ft with length to the power 1 and a base units multiplier of length (m) by 0.3048.

Note that ft already exists as a unit so this would return an error if added again.

Page 803 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetBaseUnits
Returns the current base units setting.

Syntax
GetBaseUnits()

Return Value
Base units (0=SI units,1=US units).

Page 804 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetUnit
Returns the properties of a unit.

Syntax
GetUnit( name )

Parameters
name is the name of the unit.

Return Value
String value listing the name, mass, length, time, degrees and unit multiplier.

Example
Getunit(“ft”) = "ft",0,1,0,0,0.304800

Page 805 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

ListAllUnits
Returns the properties of all of the units available in the unit database.

Syntax
ListAllUnits()

Return Value
String value listing the name, mass, length, time, degrees and unit multiplier for each unit.

Example
ListAllUnits() =
"$",0,0,0,0,1.000000;

"%",0,0,0,0,0.010000;

"A",0,0,-1,0,1.000000;

"BTU",1,2,-2,0,1055.060000;

"C",0,0,0,1,1.000000;

"Cday",0,0,1,1,86400.000000;

"F",-1,-2,2,0,1.000000;

etc.

Page 806 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

RemoveUnit
Removes a unit from the unit database.

Syntax
RemoveUnit( name )

Parameters
name is the name of the unit to remove.

Return Value
True if unit was removed successfully; otherwise False.

Remarks
The unit database is installed as a read only file to prevent units from accidentally being overwritten, to use the AddUnit
function you must first change the file permissions of the unit database to provide write access.

Page 807 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

ShowDims
Returns the dimensions of a value.

Syntax
ShowDims( value )

Parameters
value is the value to return the dimensions of.

Example
a = 3 ft
Showdims(a) = L^1, M^0, T^0, D^0

Page 808 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

User Interface

Page 809 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

CalcWindow
In debug mode shows the Calculation window which allows expressions to be typed and executed during the calculation
process.

Syntax
CalcWindow()

Remarks
This function only works when Debug mode is enabled, when debug mode is disabled the function does nothing.

Return Value
True (1) if window was shown; otherwise returns False (0).

Page 810 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

VariablesWindow
In debug mode shows the Variable Manager window.

Syntax
VariablesWindow()

Remarks
This function only works when Debug mode is enabled, when debug mode is disabled the function does nothing.

Return Value
True (1) if window was shown; otherwise returns False (0).

Page 811 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Variable functions

Page 812 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

ClearVarModified
Removes the modified attribute from a list of named variables.

Syntax
ClearVarModified(name1, name[n], …)

Paramaters
name1 is the name of the first variable to clear the modified attribute. Named placeholders can be used within
the variable name, see remarks.

name[n] is the name of the nth variable to clear the modified attribute

Remarks
When you start calculating a document the modified attribute for every variable in that document will be disabled. As
each variable is modified either directly through a calculations user interface or as the result of an assignment in a
calculation the modified attribute on that variable will be enabled. The ClearVarModified function can be used to
remove the modified attribute from a specific variable.

Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Example
a = 100
VarModified("a") = 1.000
ClearVarModified( "a" ) = 1.000
VarModified("a") = 1.000
a = 50
VarModified("a") = 1.000

Page 813 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

CopyVar
Copies the value and attributes from one variable to another variable.

Syntax
CopyVar( fromName1, toName1, fromName[n], toName[n], … )

Parameters
fromName[n] is the name of the variable to copy the value and attributes from. Named placeholders
can be used within the variable name, see remarks.

toName[n] is the name of the variable to copy the value and attributes to. Named placeholders can
be used within the variable name, see remarks.

Remarks
CopyVar is useful for copying large sets of variables in a single operation. It is also essential if you want to preserve the
attributes of a variable when making a copy of tha variable, if you used a simple assignment a1 = a, then the value will be
copied but the attributes of the original variable "a" would not be copied to "a1".

Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Return Value
Returns the total number of variables that were successfully copied.

Example
a = 50
CopyVar("a", "a1") = ?
a1 = ?

b = 25
c = 75
CopyVar("a", "a1", "b", "b1", "c", "c1") = ?
a1 = ?
Page 814 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

b1 = ?
c1 = ?
Using placeholders

a = 100
b = 200
index = 1
CopyVar("a", "a[index]", "b", "b[index]") = ?
index = 2
CopyVar("a", "a[index]", "b", "b[index]") = ?
a1 = ?
b1 = ?
a2 = ?
b2 = ?

Page 815 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DeleteVarsInAllSections
Delete each occurrence of the named variables in the document section and in all Calc Sections.

Syntax
DeleteVarsInAllSections( varName1, … varName[n] )

Parameters
varName[n] is the name of a variable to delete. Named placeholders can be used within the variable name, see
remarks.

Remarks
If no parameters are specified then all the variables in the document and Calc Sections will be deleted.

Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Example
a1 = 1;a2 = 2;b1 = 3;b2 = 4
listvarsinsection()=
a1 = 1.000000;
a2 = 2.000000;
b1 = 3.000000;
b2 = 4.000000;
DeleteVarsInAllSections(“a1”, “b1”) = 1.000
listvarsinsection()=
a2 = 2.000000;
b2 = 4.000000;
DeleteVarsInAllSections(“a2”, “b2”) = 1.000
listvarsinsection()=
Using placeholders

a1 = 1;a2 = 2;b1 = 3;b2 = 4


Count = 1
listvarsinsection()=
Page 816 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Count = 1.000000;
a1 = 1.000000;
a2 = 2.000000;
b1 = 3.000000;
b2 = 4.000000;
DeleteVarsInAllSections(“a[Count]”, “b[Count]”) = 1.000
listvarsinsection()=
Count = 1.000000;
a2 = 2.000000;
b2 = 4.000000;
Count = 2
DeleteVarsInAllSections(“a[Count]”, “b[Count]”) = 1.000
listvarsinsection()=
Count = 2.000000;

Page 817 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DeleteVarsInSectionExcept
Deletes all variables in the current calc section except those named in the parameter list.

Syntax
DeleteVarsInSectionExcept( varName1,…varName[n] )

Parameters
varName[n]
Name of each variable that should not be deleted. Named placeholders can be used within the variable name, see
remarks.

Remarks
Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Example
a1 = 1;a2 = 2;b1 = 3;b2 = 4
listvarsinsection()=
a1 = 1.000000;
a2 = 2.000000;
b1 = 3.000000;
b2 = 4.000000;
deletevarsinsectionexcept (“a2”)=1.000
listvarsinsection()=
a2 = 2.000000;
Using placeholders

a1 = 1;a2 = 2;b1 = 3;b2 = 4


Count = 2
listvarsinsection()=
Count = 2.000000;
a1 = 1.000000;
a2 = 2.000000;

Page 818 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

b1 = 3.000000;
b2 = 4.000000;
deletevarsinsectionexcept (“Count”, “a[Count]”)=1.000
listvarsinsection()=
Count = 2.000000;
a2 = 2.000000;

Page 819 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DeleteVarsInSection
Deletes named variables from the current Calc Section, or the document section if the expression is not in a calc section.

Syntax
DeleteVarsInSection( varName1, … varName[n] )

Parameters
varName[n] is the name of a variable to delete. Named placeholders can be used within the variable name, see
remarks.

Remarks
If no parameters are specified then all variables in the current Calc Section will be deleted.

Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Examples
a1 = 2; b1 = 6; a2 = 4; b2 = 8
listvarsinsection()=
a1 = 2.000000;
a2 = 4.000000;
b1 = 6.000000;
b2 = 8.000000;
deletevarsinsection(“a1”, “b1”) = 1.000
listvarsinsection()=
a2 = 4.000000;
b2 = 8.000000;
deletevarsinsection(“a2”, “b2”) = 1.000
listvarsinsection()=
Using placeholders

Count = 1; a1 = 2; b1 = 6; a2 = 4; b2 = 8
listvarsinsection()=
Count = 1.000000;
Page 820 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

a1 = 2.000000;
a2 = 4.000000;
b1 = 6.000000;
b2 = 8.000000;
deletevarsinsection(“a[Count]”, “b[Count]”) = 1.000
listvarsinsection()=
Count = 1.000000;
a2 = 4.000000;
b2 = 8.000000;
Count = 2
deletevarsinsection(“a[Count]”, “b[Count]”) = 1.000
listvarsinsection()=
Count = 2.000000;

Page 821 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetDocumentVar
Returns the value of a document variable or returns a default value if the variable does not exist.

Syntax
GetDocumentVar( name, default )

Parameters
name is the name of the variable. Named placeholders can be used within the variable name, see remarks.

default is the optional value to return if the variable does not exist.

Remarks
If the default value parameter is not specified the function will error if the variable does not exist.

Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Return Value
The value of the variable or the default value if the variable does not exist.

Examples
a1 = 1; a2 = 2; a3 = 3
GetDocumentVar(“a1”, 10) = 1.000
GetDocumentVar(“a2”, 10) = 2.000
GetDocumentVar(“a3”, 10) = 3.000
Using placeholders

Count = 1
GetDocumentVar(“a[Count]”, 10) = 1.000
Count = 2
GetDocumentVar(“a[Count]”, 10) = 2.000
Count = 3

Page 822 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetDocumentVar(“a[Count]”, 10) = 3.000

Page 823 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetExpr
Returns the value of a variable as an expression.

Syntax
GetExpr( varName )

Parameters
varName is the name of the variable. Named placeholders can be used within the variable name, see
remarks.

Remarks
The GetExpr function is useful if you need to display a variables expression instead of the result of the expression.
Typically this function would be used in conjunction with one of the string formatting functions (Str, StrFormat) to create
a string that includes the expression.

Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Return Value
The variables value as an expression.

Example
$area = r2
r = 3m
StrFormat( "[1] = [2,g2,m2]", GetExpr("area"), area ) = "r2 = 28.27
m2"

Page 824 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetSectionVar
Returns the value of a Calc Section variable, if the variable does not exist then the specified default value is returned.

Syntax
GetSectionVar( sectionId, varName, [defaultValue] )

Paramaters
sectionId is the numeric section Id that uniquely identifies the section to get the value from. Use 0 to get the value
of a variable in the document section.

varName is the name of the variable. Named placeholders can be used within the variable name, see remarks.

defaultValue is the optional default value to return if the variable does not exist.

Remarks
The defaultValue parameter is optional but if it is not specified GetSectionVar will error if the variable does not exist.

Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Return Value
Value of variable or default value if variable does not exist.

Example
a1 = 1; a2 = 2; a3 = 3
getsectionvar( 0, “a1”, “undefined” ) = 1.000
getsectionvar( 0, “a2”, “undefined” ) = 2.000
getsectionvar( 0, “a3”, “undefined” ) = 3.000
getsectionvar( 0, “a4”, “undefined” ) = "undefined"
Using placeholders

Count = 1
getsectionvar( 0, “a[Count]”, “undefined” ) = 1.000
Page 825 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Count = 2
getsectionvar( 0, “a[Count]”, “undefined” ) = 2.000
Count = 3
getsectionvar( 0, “a[Count]”, “undefined” ) = 3.000
Count = 4
getsectionvar( 0, “a[Count]”, “undefined” ) = "undefined"

Page 826 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetVar
Returns the value of a variable or a default value if it does not exist.

Syntax
GetVar( name, default )

Parameters
name is the name of the variable. Named placeholders can be used within the variable name, see remarks.

default is the value to return if the variable does not exist.

Remarks
Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Return Value
the value of the variable named by parameter name, of the default value if the variable does not exist.

Example
a1 = 1; a2 = 2; a3 = 3
GetVar(“a1”, “undefined” ) = 1.000
GetVar(“a2”, “undefined” ) = 2.000
GetVar(“a3”, “undefined” ) = 3.000
GetVar(“a4”, “undefined” ) = "undefined"
Using placeholders

Count = 1
GetVar(“a[Count]”, “undefined” ) = 1.000
Count = 2
GetVar(“a[Count]”, “undefined” ) = 2.000
Count = 3

Page 827 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetVar(“a[Count]”, “undefined” ) = 3.000


Count = 4
GetVar(“a[Count]”, “undefined” ) = "undefined"

Page 828 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetVarAttributes
Returns the attributes of a variable as a string.

Syntax
GetVarAttributes( varName )

Parameters
varName is the name of the variable. Named placeholders can be used within the variable name, see
remarks.

Remarks
Each variable has a set of attributes which affect the behaviour of that variable.

Attribute Character Description


Temporary t Temporary variables are deleted from the documents variable store when Tedds has
finished calculating the document.
Hidden h Hidden variables are not shown by default in the variable manager unless you choose
to view them.
Expression e Expression variables store their value as an expression rather than the numerical
results of the calculated expression.
ReadOnly r The value of a Read only variable cannot be modified.
Promoted p Promoted variables are promoted from the current Calc Section to the Document
Section, if the value in the Calc Section is modified then the value of the corresponding
variable in the Document Section will also be updated.
Modified m Indicates that the value of the variable has been modified since the current calculation
process was started.

Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Return Value
The attributes of the variable as a string where each character in the string denotes that attribute as being enabled.

Page 829 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Example
SetVar( "a", 54, "ht" ) = ?
SetVar( "b", 30, "r" ) = ?
GetVarAttributes( "a" ) = ?
GetVarAttributes( "b" ) = ?

Page 830 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Increment
Increments the value of a variable by a specified amount or 1 if no amount is specified.

Syntax
Increment( variableName, [increment])

Parameters
variableName is the name of the variable to increment. Named placeholders can be used within the variable
name, see remarks.

increment is the optional value to increment the variable by (default = 1).

Remarks
If increment is a negative value the value of the variable variableName will be decremented.

If the variable variableName has units, the value will be incremented in base units unless the increment units are
specified.

Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Examples
a = 2
increment(“a”) = 1.000
a = 3.000
increment(“a”,10) = 1.000
a = 13.000

b = 2 ft
increment(“b”) = 1.000
b = 5.281 ft
increment(“b”,10 ft) = 1.000
b = 15.281 ft

Page 831 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
Using placeholders

Count = 1
c1 = 2 ft
increment(“c[Count]”) = 1.000
c1 = 5.281 ft
increment(“c[Count]”,10 ft) = 1.000
c1 = 15.281 ft

Page 832 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

InitializeVar
Assigns a value to a variable if it doesn't already exist.

Syntax
InitVar( name, value, attributes )

InitialiseVar( name, value, attributes )

InitializeVar( name, value, attributes )

Parameters
name is the name of the variable to assign a value to. Named placeholders can be used within the
variable name, see remarks.

value is the value to assign.

attributes is optional and specifies the attributes of the new variable, see Remarks

Remarks
Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Variable attributes – Variable attributes include Temporay ‘t’, Hidden ‘h’, and promoted ‘p’. These attributes can be
assigned to the variable individually or grouped so InitializeVar(“x”, 2m, “th”) would initialize a temporary hidden
variable x with a value of 2m. Temporary variables are deleted from the variable store when Tedds has finished
calculating the current document. Hidden variables are not shown by default in the variable manager unless you choose
to view them. Promoted variables are promoted from the current variable section to the document level.

Return Value
Returns the value of the variable.

Example
InitializeVar(“a1”,2) = 2.000
a1 = 2.000

Page 833 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

InitializeVar(“a1”,3) = 2.000
a1 = 2.000
InitializeVar(“a2”,4) = 4.000
a2 = 4.000
InitializeVar(“a2”,5) = 4.000
a2 = 4.000
Using placeholders

DeleteVarsInAllSections() = 1.000
Count = 1
InitializeVar(“a[Count]”,2) = 2.000
a1 = 2.000
InitializeVar(“a[Count]”,3) = 2.000
a1 = 2.000
Count = 2
InitializeVar(“a[Count]”,4) = 4.000
a2 = 4.000
InitializeVar(“a[Count]”,5) = 4.000
a2 = 4.000

Page 834 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

InitializeVars
Assigns a value to one or more variables if they doesn't already exist.

Syntax
InitVars(value, attributes, varName1, … varName[n] )

InitialiseVars(value, attributes, varName1, … varName[n] )

InitializeVars(value, attributes, varName1, … varName[n] )

Parameters
value is the value to assign.

attributes specifies the attributes for each new variable, see Remarks

varName[n] is the name of the variable to assign a value to. Named placeholders can be used within the
variable name, see remarks.

Remarks
Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Variable attributes – Variable attributes include Temporay ‘t’, Hidden ‘h’, and promoted ‘p’. These attributes can be
assigned to the variable individually or grouped so InitializeVars( 2m, “th”, "x", "y" ) would initialize the temporary hidden
variables x and y with a value of 2m. Temporary variables are deleted from the variable store when Tedds has finished
calculating the current document. Hidden variables are not shown by default in the variable manager unless you choose
to view them. Promoted variables are promoted from the current variable section to the document level.

Return Value
Returns the value of the variable.

Example
InitializeVars(2, "", "a1", "a2") = 1.000
a1 = 2.000

Page 835 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

a2 = 2.000
InitializeVars(4, "", "a1", "a2") = 1.000
a1 = 2.000
a2 = 2.000
Using placeholders

DeleteVarsInAllSections() = 1.000
Count = 1
InitializeVars(2, "th", "a[Count]", "b[Count]" ) = 1.000
a1 = 2.000
b1 = 2.000
InitializeVars(4, "th", "a[Count]", "b[Count]" ) = 1.000
a1 = 2.000
b1 = 2.000
Count = 2
InitializeVars(4, "th", "a[Count]", "b[Count]" ) = 1.000
a2 = 4.000
b2 = 4.000

Page 836 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

IsValidVarName
Determines whether the specified string is a valid variable name.

Syntax
IsValidVarName( name )

Parameters
name is the name of the variable to test for validity.

Remarks
Variable names must confirm to the following rules:

 Can contain letters, numbers, Greek letters and the characters '_', '@' and '.'

 Can contain subscripted characters

 Cannot start with a number

 Cannot contain spaces

 Cannot contain the characters

o ,!+-<>/^*=()[]&| em-dash en-dash space tab

 However the following characters are permitted in subscripts

o space listseperator( or ,)

 Is a maximum of 32 characters in length

Return Value
True (1) if the variable name is valid otherwise False (0).

Example
IsValidVarName("a1") = 1.000
IsValidVarName("a b") = 0.000
IsValidVarName("La b") = 1.000
IsValidVarName("1a") = 0.000

Page 837 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

ListVarsInSection
Returns a list of all the variables in the active Calc Section.

Syntax
ListVarsInSection ()

Return Value
A string listing all the variables.

Page 838 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

PromoteVar
Promotes a variable from a Calc Section variable to a document variable.

Syntax
PromoteVar ( name1, name[n], … )

PromoteVariable( name1, name[n], … )

Parameters
name1 is the name of the first variable to promote. Named placeholders can be used within the variable name,
see remarks.

name[n] is the name of the nth variable to promote.

Remarks
Variables in a Calc Section are normally only accessible from that Calc Section. When a variable is promoted if the value
changes in the Calc Section then the value of the document variable will also be updated to the same value so that the
variables are synchronised. Document variables are accessible from all Calc Sections so a promoted variable can be
shared between Calc Sections.

Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Example
PromoteVariable(“a1”,”b1”,”c1”,“a2”,”b2”,”c2”) = ?
Using placeholders

Count = 1
PromoteVariable(“a[Count]”,”b[Count]”,”c[Count]”) = ?
Count = 2
PromoteVariable(“a[Count]”,”b[Count]”,”c[Count]”) = ?

Page 839 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

RenameVar
Assigns a new name to an existing variable in the current Calc Section.

Syntax
RenameVar( fromName1, toName1, fromName[n], toName[n], … )

Parameters
fromName[n] is the existing name of the existing variable to rename. Named placeholders can be
used within the variable name, see remarks.

toName[n] is the new name of the variable. Named placeholders can be used within the variable
name, see remarks.

Remarks
RenameVar is useful for moving variables in variable management algorithms. When you need to "Move" a variable
RenameVar should be used in preference to CopyVar. RenameVar will improve calculation performance because the
variable is simply assigned a new name rather than having to assign the variable name and copy its value and attributes.

If the existing from variable does not exist no errors are reported. If the to variable already exists then it will be
overwritten.

Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Return Value
Returns the total number of variables that were successfully renamed.

Example
a = 50
RenameVar("a", "a1") = 1.000
a1 = 50.000

a = 50

Page 840 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

b = 25
c = 75
RenameVar("a", "a1", "b", "b1", "c", "c1") = 3.000
ListVarsInSection() =
H1 = 10.000000;
H2 = 20.000000;
L1 = 1.000000;
L2 = 3.000000;
NumWalls = 2.000000;
a1 = 50.000000;
b1 = 25.000000;
c1 = 75.000000;
deleteIndex = 2.000000;
index = 2.000000;
next = i + 1;
Using placeholders

a = 100
b = 200
index = 1
RenameVar("a", "a[index]", "b", "b[index]") = 2.000
index = 2
RenameVar("a", "a[index]", "b", "b[index]") = 0.000
ListVarsInSection() =
H1 = 10.000000;
H2 = 20.000000;
L1 = 1.000000;
L2 = 3.000000;
NumWalls = 2.000000;
a1 = 100.000000;
b1 = 200.000000;
c1 = 75.000000;
deleteIndex = 2.000000;
index = 2.000000;
next = i + 1;
Deleting a set of variables from a list using RenameVar

H1 = 10m
L1 = 1m
H2 = 20m
L2 = 2m
H3 = 30m
L3 = 3m
NumWalls = 3

Page 841 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

deleteIndex = 2
$next = i + 1
EvalFor( "i", deleteIndex, "i <= NumWalls", +1,
"RenameVar(\"L[next]\", \"L[i]\", \"H[next]\", \"H[i]\")" ) = 1.000
NumWalls = NumWalls - 1
ListVarsInSection() =
H1 = 10.000000;
H2 = 30.000000;
L1 = 1.000000;
L2 = 3.000000;
NumWalls = 2.000000;
a1 = 100.000000;
b1 = 200.000000;
c1 = 75.000000;
deleteIndex = 2.000000;
index = 2.000000;
next = i + 1;

Page 842 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SaveSectionVarsCalcItem
Save variables in the active Calc Section to a Calc Item in a Calc Library.

Syntax
SaveSectionVarsCalcItem( fileName, itemName, options, variable1, variable[n], …)

Paramaters
fileName is the full path to the Calc Library.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

options is the optional option flags, combine flags using addition.

1 = Do not include units (default = off)

2 = Include temporary variables (default = off)

4 = Include hidden variables (default = off)

variable1 is the optional name of the first variable to save, if omitted all variables are saved

variable[n] is the optional name of the nth variable to save

Remarks
An item saved with this function can be calculated by Tedds using the EvalCalcItem function.

Example
a = 1m
b = 10 kN/mm2
_tmp.Name = "Test"
SaveSectionVarsCalcItem("$(UserLbrDir)Test.lbr",
"SaveSectionVarsCalcItem1") = 1.000
SaveSectionVarsCalcItem("$(UserLbrDir)Test.lbr",
"SaveSectionVarsCalcItem2", 0, "a") = 1.000
SaveSectionVarsCalcItem("$(UserLbrDir)Test.lbr",
"SaveSectionVarsCalcItem3", 1+2+4) = 1.000

Page 843 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SaveSectionVarsTextFile
Save variables in the active Calc Section to a text file.

Syntax
SaveSectionVarsTextFile( fileName, options, variable1, variable[n], …)

Paramaters
filename is the full path to the text file.

options is the optional option flags, combine flags using addition.

1 = Do not include units (default = off)

2 = Include temporary variables (default = off)

4 = Include hidden variables (default = off)

variable1 is the optional name of the first variable to save, if omitted all variables are saved

variable[n] is the optional name of the nth variable to save

Remarks
A file saved with this function can be calculated by Tedds using the EvalFile function.

Example
a = 1m
b = 10 kN/mm2
_tmp.Name = "Test"
SaveSectionVarsTextFile( "c:\TeddsOutputVariables1.txt" ) = 1.000
SaveSectionVarsTextFile( "c:\TeddsOutputVariables2.txt", 0, "a" ) =
1.000
SaveSectionVarsTextFile( "c:\TeddsOutputVariables3.txt", 1+2+4 ) =
1.000

Page 844 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetDocumentVar
Assigns a value to a document variable.

Syntax
SetDocumentVar( name, value )

Parameters
name is the name of the variable to assign a value to. Named placeholders can be used within the variable
name, see remarks.

value is the value to assign.

Remarks
Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Return Value
True(1) if value was successfully assigned; otherwise False(0).

Page 845 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetSectionVar
Assigns a value to a Calc Section variable.

Syntax
SetSectionVar( sectionID, varName, value )

Parameters
sectionId is the numeric section Id that uniquely identifies the section to get the value from. Use 0 to get the value
of a variable in the document section.

varName is the variable name. Named placeholders can be used within the variable name, see remarks.

value is the value to assign to the variable.

Remarks
Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Return Value
True(1) if value was successfully assigned; otherwise False(0).

Example
SetSectionVar( 0, “a1”, 100 ) = 100.000
SetSectionVar( 0, “a2”, 150 ) = 150.000
SetSectionVar( 0, “a3”, 200 ) = 200.000
a1 = 100.000
a2 = 150.000
a3 = 200.000
Using placeholders

Count = 1
SetSectionVar( 0, “a[Count]”, 100 ) = 100.000

Page 846 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Count = 2
SetSectionVar( 0, “a[Count]”, 150 ) = 150.000
Count = 3
SetSectionVar( 0, “a[Count]”, 200 ) = 200.000
a1 = 100.000
a2 = 150.000
a3 = 200.000

Page 847 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetVar
Assigns a value to a variable and set the attributes of the variables.

Syntax
SetVar( name, value, attributes )

Parameters
name is the name of the variable to assign a value to. Named placeholders can be used within the
variable name, see remarks.

value is the value to assign.

attributes is optional and specifies the attributes of the new variable, see Remarks

Remarks
Each variable has a set of attributes which affect the behaviour of that variable. When assigning attributes they can be
assigned individually e.g. "t", or grouped into a single string, e.g. "thr".

The operators '+' and '-' can also be used to indicate whether an attribute should be added or removed. If no operators
are used then all existing attributes will be replaced, for this reason it is recommended that when using this function you
always use a '+' or '-' operator so that you do not unintentionally remove any attributes. For example if an existing
temporary variable "x" exists then SetVarAttributes( "x", "h" ) will amend the attributes to hidden only, removing the
temporary attribute. To prevent this you should instead use SetVarAttributes( "x", "+h" ) which will add the hidden
attribute and retain the existing temporary attribute.

When assigning a value to a read only variable if the "-r" attribute is specified then modifying the value will be allowed
and the read only attribute will be removed. If the "+r" attribute is also applied the variable will remain read only after
the assignment.

Attribute Character Description


Temporary t Temporary variables are deleted from the documents variable store when Tedds has
finished calculating the document.
Hidden h Hidden variables are not shown by default in the variable manager unless you choose
to view them.
Expression e Expression variables store their value as an expression rather than the numerical
results of the calculated expression.
ReadOnly r The value of a Read only variable cannot be modified.
Promoted p Promoted variables are promoted from the current Calc Section to the Document
Section, if the value in the Calc Section is modified then the value of the corresponding
variable in the Document Section will also be updated.
Modified m Indicates that the value of the variable has been modified since the current calculation
process was started.

Page 848 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Return Value
The value assigned.

Example
SetVar(“a1”, 100) = 100.000
SetVar(“a2”, 150) = 150.000
SetVar(“a3”, 200) = 200.000
a1 = 100.000
a2 = 150.000
a3 = 200.000
Using placeholders

Count = 1
SetVar(“a[Count]”, 100) = 100.000
Count = 2
SetVar(“a[Count]”, 150) = 150.000
Count = 3
SetVar(“a[Count]”, 200) = 200.000
a1 = 100.000
a2 = 150.000
a3 = 200.000

Modifying a read only variable by removing and restoring the read only attribute

SetVar( "x", 1, "+r" ) = 1


SetVar( "x", 2 ) = 1
SetVar( "x", 2, "-r+r" ) = 2

Page 849 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetVarAttributes
Sets the attributes of an existing variable.

Syntax
SetVarAttributes( name, attributes )

Parameters
name is the name of the variable to assign a value to. Named placeholders can be used within the
variable name, see remarks.

attributes specifies the attributes of the new variable, see Remarks

Remarks
Each variable has a set of attributes which affect the behaviour of that variable. When assigning attributes they can be
assigned individually e.g. "t", or grouped into a single string, e.g. "thr".

The operators '+' and '-' can also be used to indicate whether an attribute should be added or removed. If no operators
are used then all existing attributes will be replaced, for this reason it is recommended that when using this function you
always use a '+' or '-' operator so that you do not unintentionally remove any attributes. For example if an existing
temporary variable "x" exists then SetVarAttributes( "x", "h" ) will amend the attributes to hidden only, removing the
temporary attribute. To prevent this you should instead use SetVarAttributes( "x", "+h" ) which will add the hidden
attribute and retain the existing temporary attribute.

When assigning a value to a read only variable if the "-r" attribute is specified then modifying the value will be allowed
and the read only attribute will be removed. If the "+r" attribute is also applied the variable will remain read only after
the assignment.

Attribute Character Description


Temporary t Temporary variables are deleted from the documents variable store when Tedds has
finished calculating the document.
Hidden h Hidden variables are not shown by default in the variable manager unless you choose
to view them.
Expression e Expression variables store their value as an expression rather than the numerical
results of the calculated expression.
ReadOnly r The value of a Read only variable cannot be modified.
Promoted p Promoted variables are promoted from the current Calc Section to the Document
Section, if the value in the Calc Section is modified then the value of the corresponding
variable in the Document Section will also be updated.
Modified m Indicates that the value of the variable has been modified since the current calculation
process was started.

Page 850 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Return Value
True(1) if attributes were successfully assigned; otherwise False(0).

Example
a1 = 100
SetVarAttributes(“a1”, "+t+h") = 100.000; Add hidden and temporary
attributes
a1 = 200
SetVarAttributes(“a1”, "-t") = 100.000; Remove temporary attribute
Using placeholders

Count = 1
SetVarAttributes(“a[Count]”, "+t") = 100.000; Add temporary attribute
to a1
Count = 2
SetVarAttributes(“a[Count]”, "+t") = 100.000; Add temporary attribute
to a2

Page 851 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

SetVarIf
Assigns a value and optional attributes to a variable if the specified expression evaluates to True.

Syntax
SetVarIf( condition, name, value, attributes )

Parameters
condition is the expression that must evaluate to either True (1) or False (0)

name is the name of the variable to assign a value to. Named placeholders can be used within the
variable name, see remarks.

value is the value to assign.

attributes is optional and specifies the attributes of the new variable, see Remarks

Remarks
Each variable has a set of attributes which affect the behaviour of that variable. When assigning attributes they can be
assigned individually e.g. "t", or grouped into a single string, e.g. "thr".

Attribute Character Description


Temporary t Temporary variables are deleted from the documents variable store when Tedds has
finished calculating the document.
Hidden h Hidden variables are not shown by default in the variable manager unless you choose
to view them.
Expression e Expression variables store their value as an expression rather than the numerical
results of the calculated expression.
ReadOnly r The value of a Read only variable cannot be modified.
Promoted p Promoted variables are promoted from the current Calc Section to the Document
Section, if the value in the Calc Section is modified then the value of the corresponding
variable in the Document Section will also be updated.
Modified m Indicates that the value of the variable has been modified since the current calculation
process was started.

Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Page 852 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Return Value
True(1) if new value was successfully assigned; otherwise False(0).

Example
SetVar(“a1”, 100) = 100.000
a1 = 100.000
SetVarIf(a1 < 0, “a1”, 0) = 0
a1 = 100.000
SetVarIf(a1 > 10, “a1”, 10) = 1
a1 = 10.000

Page 853 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

VarExists
Returns True(1) if all the named variables exist, otherwise returns False(0).

Syntax
VarExists( name1, name[n], …)

Paramaters
name1 is the name of the first variable to check for existence. Named placeholders can be used within the
variable name, see remarks.

name[n] is the name of the nth variable to check for existence

Remarks
Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Example
a1 = 100
a2 = 150
VarExists(“a1”) = 1.000
VarExists(“a2”) = 1.000
VarExists(“a3”) = 0.000
Using placeholders

Count = 1
VarExists(“a[Count]”) = 1.000
Count = 2
VarExists(“a[Count]”) = 1.000
Count = 3
VarExists(“a[Count]”) = 0.000

Page 854 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

VarModified
Returns True(1) if any one of the named variables has been modified (i.e. it's modified attribute is enabled) since the
current calculation process was started, otherwise returns False(0).

Syntax
VarModified(name1, name[n], …)

Paramaters
name1 is the name of the first variable to check if it's modified attribute is enabled. Named placeholders can be
used within the variable name, see remarks.

name[n] is the name of the nth variable to check if it's modified attribute is enabled

Remarks
When you start calculating a document the modified attribute for every variable in that document will be disabled. As
each variable is modified either directly through a calculations user interface or as the result of an assignment in a
calculation the modified attribute on that variable will be enabled. The VarModified function can be used to check
whether a specific variable has or has not been modified. The modified attribute for a specific variable can be disabled at
any time by using the ClearVarModified function. When the document has finished calculating the modified attribute for
every variable in that document will revert back to being disabled.

Placeholders – Placeholders allow you to substitute the value of another variable in the variable name before the
function is processed which is particularly useful when writing iterative calculations. If you had a set of related variables
x1, x2, x3 you might want to use a counter variable to determine which value of x you are currently using. A placeholder
allows you to use the counter variable within the variable name.
If Count = 1, then Function(“x[count]”) is equivalent to Function(“x1”). Therefore the general expression Function(“x[count]”)
can be used for all the cases (x1, x2, x3) by simply changing the value of count.

Example
a = 100
VarModified("a") = 1.000
ClearVarModified( "a" ) = 1.000
VarModified("a") = 1.000
a = 50
VarModified("a") = 1.000

Page 855 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

WatchFunction
Enables debug watching for a named function so that every time the function is used a message will be output to the
progress log window.

Syntax
WatchFunction( functionName )

Parameters
functionName is the name of the function to watch.

Remarks
WatchFunction can be used to help diagnose problems when writing calculations because it allows you to see whenever
a specific function is used and what arguments have been passed to the function.

If no arguments are specified the list of functions being watched will be cleared.

The WatchFunction function only works when Debug mode is enabled.

Return Value
True(1) if successful otherwise False(0).

Example
a = 1
WatchFunction("SetVar") = ?
SetVar( "a", "Pinned" ) = ?
SetVar( "a", 100 ) = ?
SetVar( "a", 100 mm ) = ?
SetVar( "a", 100 kips ) = ?
SetVar( "a", StrFormat("The value of Pi is [pi,G15]") ) = ?

Page 856 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Page 857 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

WatchVar
Enables debug watching for a named variable so that every time the value of the specified variable changes a message
will be output to the progress log window.

Syntax
WatchVar( varName, units, expression )

Parameters
varName is the name of the variable to watch.

units optional units which are used when the value of the variable is reported in the progress log window.

expression optional expression which will be calculated each time the value of the specified variable is changed.

Remarks
WatchVar can be used to help diagnose problems when writing calculations because it allows you to see whenever the
value of a variable is changed. In complex calculations which use iterative processes the value of a specific variable may
change many times and enabling watching of that variable will show messages in the progress log window so that you
can see exactly when the variable is being modified.

The WatchVar function only works when Debug mode is enabled.

Return Value
True(1) if successful otherwise False(0).

Example
a = 1
WatchVar("a") = ?
a = 2
a = 3
a = 2.5m
WatchVar("a", "mm") = ?
a = 2.5m
WatchVar("b") = ?
b = 3m

Page 858 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

WatchVar("a", "mm", "LogText(StrFormat(\"The value of a+b is


[1,G3,mm]\", a+b))") = ?
a = 6m

Page 859 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Version functions

Page 860 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetTeddsVersion
Returns the installed Tedds version.

Syntax
GetTeddsVersion()

Example
getteddsversion() = 11.000

Page 861 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetTeddsSPVersion
Returns the installed Tedds service pack version.

Syntax
GetTeddsSPVersion()

Remarks
If no service pack is installed, this function will return 0.

Example
getteddsspversion() = 0.000

Page 862 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

GetExcelVersion
Returns the installed Microsoft Excel version.

Syntax
GetExcelVersion()

Remarks
If no version is installed, this function will return 0.

Example
getexcelversion() = 10.000

Page 863 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

VersionCompare
Compares two version strings for equality.

Syntax
VersionCompare( version1, version2 )

Parameters

version1 first version string for comparison

version2 second version string for comparison

Return Value
-1 if version1 is less than version2
0 if version1 is equal to version2

1 if version1 is greater than version2

Remarks
A version string can consist of one or more numeric parts separated by a '.' where each part has less significance than the
previous part. Tedds calculations normally use three part version numbers where the parts represent
"Major.Minor.Revision", for example "1.2.01".

Example
VersionCompare( "2.0.00", "2.1.00" ) = -1.000
VersionCompare( "2.1.00", "2.1.00" ) = 0.000
VersionCompare( "2.2.02", "2.1.00" ) = 1.000

Page 864 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Tedds fields

Page 865 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Calculating

Page 866 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

EvalCalcItem
Calculates a Calc Library Item.

Syntax
EvalCalcItem( fileName, itemName, output)

Paramaters
filename is the full path to the Calc Library.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

output determines whether to output (Append) or discard (Discard) the calculated item.

Return Value
Returns True (1) if the item was calculated

Remarks
If the itemName is an empty string ("") then nothing will be calculated and no errors will be reported.

Example
EvalCalcItem( "$(SysLbrDir)LibraryName.lbr", "ItemName", Discard ) =
?

Page 867 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

EvalScriptCalcItem
Calculates a script Calc Library Item created by the Tedds Calc Designer.

Syntax
EvalScriptCalcItem( fileName, itemName, subModuleName )

Paramaters
filename is the full path to the Calc Library.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

subModuleName is the optional name of a submodule to be executed.

Example

Page 868 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

EvalMetaFileCalcItem
Calculates a metafile Calc Library Item, the drawing is either output to the document or discarded.

Syntax
EvalMetaFileCalcItem( fileName, itemName, output)

Paramaters
filename is the full path to the Calc Library.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

output determines whether to output (Append) or discard (Discard) the item.

Example
{ =CSC|CALL EvalMetaFileCalcItem("$(SysLbrDir)Misketch.lbr", "Sketch
– Open Plan", Append)}

Page 869 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

EvalRTFCalcItem
Calculates a Rich Text Format (RTF) Calc Library Item and either returns the output to the document or discard the
output.

Syntax
EvalRTFCalcItem( fileName, itemName, output, replace)

Parameters
filename is the full path to the Calc Library.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

output is the optional value that determines whether to output (Append) or discard (Discard)
the item.

replace is the optional formatted string of replacement text. If the Calc items contains Tedds
replacement fields {=CSC|@}, each field will be replaced with the text in the replace parameter before the item is
calculated.

"@replace1@replace[n]@..."

replace1 is the text that will be replaced in the item for the first occurrence of a Tedds @ field.

replace[n] is the text that will be replaced in the item for the nth occurrence of a Tedds @ field.

Page 870 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

EvalInterfaceCalcItem
Calculates a user interface Calc Library Item created by the Tedds Interface Designer

Syntax
EvalInterfaceLibItem( fileName, itemName )

Paramaters
filename is the full path to the Calc Library.

itemName is the name of the Calc Item.

Page 871 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Data tools

Page 872 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DataGraph
Shows a Tedds DataGraph for selecting variables.

Syntax
DataGraph( fileName, prefix, suffix, var1, var2, show, output )

Parameters
fileName is the name of the DataGraph file to open.

prefix is the optional text prefixed to the field result.

suffix is the optional text appended to all variables names for the selection.

var1 is the name of the first variable to use for selection.

var2 is the name of the second variable to use for selection.

show is the optional condition that determines if the DataGraph should be shown. If True(1) the DataGraph is
always shown; otherwise the DataGraph is only shown if the current selection cannot be determined.

output is the optional condition that determines if text is output to the field result, Discard(0),
Append(1).

Output
When the field code has been calculated the field result is updated to show the prefix text and the name of the graph
that was displayed.

Example
{ =CSC|CALL DataGraph( "5950-21a.dgt","Example Datagraph:
","_{1}","","",Show,Append )}
Example Datagraph: BS 5950:Pt 1:1990 .... Table 21 (a) - critical shear strength, qcr,
for grade S275 steel (py = 265 N/mm^2);
a_over_d1 = 0.900
d_over_t1 = 130.000
qcr1 = 113.000 N/mm2;

Page 873 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DataList
Shows a Tedds DataList for selecting variables.

Syntax
DataList( fileName, defaultPage, defaultItem, prefix, suffix, itemVar, pageVar, show, output, prompt )

Parameters
fileName is the name of the DataList file to open.

defaultPage is the optional name of the page to select by default if there is no selected page.

defaultItem is the optional formatted name of the item to select if there is no selected item.

prefix is the optional text prefixed to the field result.

suffix is the optional text appended to all variables names for the selection.

itemVar is the optional name of the variable to use for storing the selected item.

pageVar is the optional name of the variable to use for storing the selected page.

show is the optional condition that determines if the DataList should be shown. If True(1) the DataList is always
shown; otherwise the DataGraph is only shown if the current selection cannot be determined.

output is the optional condition that determines if text is output to the field result, Discard(0),
Append(1).

prompt is the message prompt to display at the top of the DataList window.

Output
When the field code has been calculated the field result is updated to show the prefix text and the name of the item that
was selected.

Example
{ =CSC|CALL DataList("Euro.dls", "Universal Beams", "457(152(52))",
"I Section: ", "1", "selectedItem", "selectedPage", "Show",
"Append", "Select an I section")}
I Section: UB 457x152x52;
selectedPage1 = "Universal Beams"
selectedItem1 = "457(152(52))"

Page 874 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DataTable
Shows a Tedds DataTable for selecting variables.

Syntax
DataTable( filename(s), prefix, suffix, show, output )

Parameters
filename(s) is the name of the DataTable file to open. To open more than one file simultaneously separate each file
name with a comma.

prefix is the optional text prefixed to the field result.

suffix is the optional text appended to all variables names for the selection.

show is the optional condition that determines if the DataGraph should be shown. If True(1) the DataTable is
always shown; otherwise the DataTable is only shown if the current selection cannot be determined. You can use the
pre-defined Tedds system variables "Show" and "Hide" for this parameter.

output is the optional condition that determines if text is output to the field result, Discard(0),
Append(1).

Output
When the field code has been calculated the field result is updated to show the prefix text and the name of the table that
was selected.

Remarks
DataTables allow you to access a wide range of standard engineering data including design tables, section tables and
proprietary manufacturers data. A DataTable allows you to select an item graphically, Tedds will then write the collection
of variables associated with that item to your Tedds document. DataTables may also include diagrams and notes and
allow you to search the data within the table as well as interpolate the data when aplpicable.

Example
{ =CSC|CALL DataTable("5950-21a.tbl", "Example DataTable: ", "1",
"Show", "Append") }
Example DataTable: BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 ..... Table 21 (a);
a_over_d1 = 0.900
d_over_t1 = 130.000

Page 875 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

qcr1 = 113.000 N/mm2;

Page 876 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Date and time

Page 877 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Time
Shows the time when the field was last calculated.

Syntax
Time( format )

Parameters
format is the format to output the time and time in (see below)

Remarks
The format of the time can be specified using a text string of symbols.

For example, the string "dddd, MMMM d, yyyy" in the argument =CSC|CALL DATE("dddd, MMMM d, yyyy") displays
"Friday, November 24, 2000." Combine the following date and time instructions — day (d), month (M), and year (y);
hours (h) minutes (m) and seconds (s) — to build a date-time format string. You can also include text, punctuation, and
spaces.

Time instructions

Hours (h)
A lowercase "h" bases time on the 12-hour clock. An uppercase "H" bases time on the 24-hour, or military, clock; for
example, 5 P.M. is displayed as "17".

Symbols
h or H

Displays the hour without a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit hours. For example, the hour of 9 A.M. is displayed as "9".

hh or HH

Displays the hour with a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit hours. For example, the hour of 9 A.M. is displayed as "09".

Page 878 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Minutes (m)
The letter "m" must be lowercase to distinguish minutes from months.

Displays minutes without a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit minutes. For example =CSC|CALL TIME("m") displays "2".

mm

Displays minutes with a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit minutes. For example, =CSC|CALL TIME("mm")displays "02".

other text and punctuation

'text'

Any specified text in a date or time. Enclose the text in single quotation marks. For example, =CSC|CALL TIME("HH:mm
'Greenwich mean time' ") displays "12:45 Greenwich mean time".

character

Includes the specified character in a date or time, such as a : (colon), - (hyphen), * (asterisk), or space. For example,
=CSC|CALL TIME("HH:mm MMM-d, yy") displays "11:15 Nov-6, 03".

Date
Shows the date when the field was last calculated.

Syntax
Date( format )

Parameters
format is the format to output the data in (see below)

Remarks
The format of the date can be specified using a text string of symbols.

For example, the string "dddd, MMMM d, yyyy" in the argument =CSC|CALL DATE("dddd, MMMM d, yyyy") displays
"Friday, November 24, 2000." Combine the following date and time instructions — day (d), month (M), and year (y);
hours (h) minutes (m) and seconds (s) — to build a date-time format string. You can also include text, punctuation, and
spaces.

Page 879 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Date instructions

Month (M)
The letter "M" must be uppercase to distinguish months from minutes.

Symbols
M

Displays the month as a number without a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit months. For example, July is "7".

MM

Displays the month as a number with a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit months. For example, July is "07".

MMM

Displays the month as a three-letter abbreviation. For example, July is "Jul".

MMMM

Displays the month as its full name.

Day (d)
Displays the day of the month or the day of the week. The letter "d" can be either uppercase or lowercase.

Symbols
d

Displays the day of the week or month as a number without a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit days. For example, the sixth
day of the month is displayed as "6".

dd

Displays the day of the week or month as a number with a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit days. For example, the sixth
day of the month is displayed as "06".

ddd

Displays the day of the week or month as a three-letter abbreviation. For example, Tuesday is displayed as "Tue".

dddd

Displays the day of the week as its full name.

Page 880 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Year (y)
Displays the year as two or four digits. The letter "y" can be either uppercase or lowercase.

Symbols
yy

Displays the year as two digits with a leading 0 (zero) for years 01 through 09. For example, 1995 is displayed as "95", and
2006 is displayed as "06".

yyyy

Displays the year as four digits.

'text'

Any specified text in a date or time. Enclose the text in single quotation marks. For example, =CSC|CALL TIME("HH:mm
'Greenwich mean time' ") displays "12:45 Greenwich mean time".

character

Includes the specified character in a date or time, such as a : (colon), - (hyphen), * (asterisk), or space. For example,
=CSC|CALL TIME("HH:mm MMM-d, yy") displays "11:15 Nov-6, 03".

Page 881 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

DateTime
Shows the date and time when the field was last calculated.

Syntax
DateTime( format )

Parameters
format is the format to output the data and time in (see below)

Remarks
The format of the date or time can be specified using a text string of symbols.

For example, the string "dddd, MMMM d, yyyy" in the argument =CSC|CALL DATE("dddd, MMMM d, yyyy") displays
"Friday, November 24, 2000." Combine the following date and time instructions — day (d), month (M), and year (y);
hours (h) minutes (m) and seconds (s) — to build a date-time format string. You can also include text, punctuation, and
spaces.

Date instructions

Month (M)
The letter "M" must be uppercase to distinguish months from minutes.

Symbols
M

Displays the month as a number without a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit months. For example, July is "7".

MM

Displays the month as a number with a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit months. For example, July is "07".

MMM

Displays the month as a three-letter abbreviation. For example, July is "Jul".

MMMM

Displays the month as its full name.


Page 882 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Day (d)
Displays the day of the month or the day of the week. The letter "d" can be either uppercase or lowercase.

Symbols
d

Displays the day of the week or month as a number without a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit days. For example, the sixth
day of the month is displayed as "6".

dd

Displays the day of the week or month as a number with a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit days. For example, the sixth
day of the month is displayed as "06".

ddd

Displays the day of the week or month as a three-letter abbreviation. For example, Tuesday is displayed as "Tue".

dddd

Displays the day of the week as its full name.

Year (y)
Displays the year as two or four digits. The letter "y" can be either uppercase or lowercase.

Symbols
yy

Displays the year as two digits with a leading 0 (zero) for years 01 through 09. For example, 1995 is displayed as "95", and
2006 is displayed as "06".

yyyy

Displays the year as four digits.

Time instructions

Hours (h)
A lowercase "h" bases time on the 12-hour clock. An uppercase "H" bases time on the 24-hour, or military, clock; for
example, 5 P.M. is displayed as "17".

Page 883 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Symbols
h or H

Displays the hour without a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit hours. For example, the hour of 9 A.M. is displayed as "9".

hh or HH

Displays the hour with a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit hours. For example, the hour of 9 A.M. is displayed as "09".

Minutes (m)
The letter "m" must be lowercase to distinguish minutes from months.

Displays minutes without a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit minutes. For example =CSC|CALL TIME("m") displays "2".

mm

Displays minutes with a leading 0 (zero) for single-digit minutes. For example, =CSC|CALL TIME("mm")displays "02".

other text and punctuation

'text'

Any specified text in a date or time. Enclose the text in single quotation marks. For example, =CSC|CALL TIME("HH:mm
'Greenwich mean time' ") displays "12:45 Greenwich mean time".

character

Includes the specified character in a date or time, such as a : (colon), - (hyphen), * (asterisk), or space. For example,
=CSC|CALL TIME("HH:mm MMM-d, yy") displays "11:15 Nov-6, 03".

Page 884 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Drawing

Page 885 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

ShowDrawing
Shows a drawing in the document.

Syntax
ShowDrawing( id, maxWidth, maxHeight, alignment )

Parameters
id is the optional drawing identifier returned by the DrawCreateDrawing function. Use 0 for the active
drawing.

maxWidth is the optional maximum output width of the drawing as a percentage of the document page width.

maxHeight is the optional maximum output height of the drawing as a percentage of the document page height.

alignment is the optional vertical alignment about the document page, (0 - Left align, 1 - Centre align, 2 - Right align)

Remarks
Outputs a drawing to the document, if the drawing id is zero or it is not specified the active drawing will be shown. Once
a drawing has been output no further drawing commands can be used on that drawing because the drawing is
automatically destroyed.

If the size and alignment parameters are omitted then the settings are determined by the users Tedds options. By default
the Tedds options output a drawing at a maximum 75% of the page width, 40% of the page height and aligned to the
centre of the page. To change the default settings please refer to the ‘Calculating\Calc Items’ options page on the Tedds
Options dialog.

Example
DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm ) = ?
DrawRectangle( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 100mm ) = ?
{ =CSC|CALL ShowDrawing() }

Page 886 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

drawingId = DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm )


DrawRectangle( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 100mm ) = ?
{ =CSC|CALL ShowDrawing( drawingId, 25%, 25%, 0) }

drawingId = DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm )


DrawRectangle( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 100mm ) = ?
{ =CSC|CALL ShowDrawing( drawingId, 10%, 10%, 2) }

Page 887 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

ShowDrawings
Shows one or more drawings in the document.

Syntax
ShowDrawings( id1, maxWidth1, maxHeight1, …id[n], maxWidth[n], maxHeight[n] )

Parameters
id[n] is the drawing identifier returned by the DrawCreateDrawing function.

maxWidth[n] is the maximum output width of the drawing as a percentage of the document page width.

maxHeight[n] is the maximum output height of the drawing as a percentage of the document page height.

Remarks
Outputs one or more drawings to the document in a single paragraph. Once a drawing has been output no further
drawing commands can be used on that drawing because the drawing is automatically destroyed.

Example
drawingId1 = DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm ) = ?
DrawFillColor( "red" ) = ?
DrawFillRectangle( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 100mm ) = ?

drawingId2 = DrawCreateDrawing( 100mm, 100mm ) = ?


DrawFillColor( "green" ) = ?
DrawFillRectangle( 0mm, 0mm, 100mm, 100mm ) = ?
{ =CSC|CALL ShowDrawings( drawingId1, 40%, 100%, drawingId2, 40%,
100% ) }

Page 888 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Page 889 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Excel

Page 890 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Excel_Link
Exchange data between Tedds and Excel.

Syntax
Excel_Link( fileName, linkSheet, linkFromTedds, linkToTedds, showExcel, save, startMacro, endMacro, taskMacro,
outputCellRef, waitForClose, readPassword, writePassword ).

Parameters
fileName is the string that contains the full path to the Excel workbook file.

linksheet is the optional string that contains the name of the worksheet which includes the tables for
linking variables to and from Tedds

linkFromTedds is the optional True/False value that determines if variables are linked from Tedds to Excel

linkToTedds is the optional True/False value that determines if variables are linked from Excel to Tedds

showExcel is the optional True/False value that determines if the Excel user interface is displayed

save is the optional True/False value that determines if the workbook is saved after the linking
process is finished. If this option is False the workbook is opened in read-only mode.

startMacro is the optional string that contains the name of an Excel macro to run at the start of the linking
process.

endMacro is the optional string that contains the name of an Excel macro to run at the end of the linking
process.

taskMacro is the optional string that contains the name of an Excel macro to run during the linking process.

outputCellRef is the optional string that contains the cell reference to a region in the Excel Workbook that is
output to the field result as a table or chart.

waitForClose is the optional True/False value that determines if the Excel link should wait for the workbook to
be closed by the user before finishing the link process.

readPassword is the optional string that contains the password required to open a protected workbook. If this
argument is omitted and the workbook requires a password, the user is prompted for the password.

writePassword is the optional string that contains the password required to write to a write-reserved workbook.
If this argument is omitted and the workbook requires a password, the user will be prompted for the password.

Remarks
Tedds is an excellent tool for writing calculations however you may have existing spreadsheets that you would like to
continue using. The Tedds Excel Link allows you to link your Tedds calculations with Microsoft Excel spreadsheets by
Page 891 of 903
Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference
transferring data from Tedds to Excel and from Excel back to Tedds. This powerful linking allows you to integrate your
spreadsheets with Tedds and benefit from all the features that Tedds provides.

The easiest way to add an Excel link field is to use the Insert Tedds Field command in Tedds for Word.

If the outputCellRef parameter is used to output a table or chart to the document the size of the image is determined by
the Tedds sketch scale setting, refer to SetSketchScale for more information.

Page 892 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Input

Page 893 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Input
Shows an input dialog box to prompt you to enter a value for a variable.

Syntax
Input( prompt, name, units, default, show )

Parameters
prompt is the prompt text displayed in the dialog.

name is the name of the variable.

units is the units for the variable

default is the default value

show is the show flag (0=Only if variable not defined, 1=Always with current value, 2=Always with default
value,3=Use system option)

Remarks
The easiest way to add an input field is to use the Insert Tedds Field command available from the Tedds toolbar.

Example
{ =CSC|CALL Input("Length of beam ","L","m","1",1)}
;Length of beam; L = 10.000 m;

Page 894 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Log

Page 895 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

LogText
Adds text to the progress log.

Syntax
LogText( text )

Parameters
text is the text message to add to the Progress Log.

Remarks
The easiest way to add a log field is to use the Insert Tedds Field command available from the Tedds toolbar.

Example
L = 4 m
{=CSC|CALL LogText( "The value of L is "+string(L,”f0”,”m”)+” m" )}

{=CSC|CALL LogText(if(L<0m,”Error – a negative length has been


entered”, ”Length – OK”))}

Page 896 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Message

Page 897 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Message
Shows a message box

Syntax
Message( message, title, show ).

Parameters
message is the text message to show

title is the title of the message box

show is the optional flag that determines if the message is displayed, Hide(0) or Show(1).

Remarks
The easiest way to add a message field is to use the Insert Tedds Field command from the Tedds toolbar. The message
parameter is also displayed in the Progress Log.

Example
L=4m

{=CSC|CALL Message("The value of L is "+string(L,”f0”,”m”)+” m”,


"Length")}

{=CSC|CALL Message(if(L<0m,”Error – a negative length has been


entered”,”Length – OK”), "Length", if(L<0m,Show,Hide)).}

Page 898 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Miscellaneous

Page 899 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

RunMacro
Runs a Word macro that is available to the current document (i.e. in a template or add-in).

Syntax
Runmacro( macroName )

Parameters
macroName is the name of the Word macro to run.

Remarks
The macro will be run and the calculation process will continue once the macro has completed.

Example

{=CSC|CALL RunMacro( "MyMacro" )}

Page 900 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Output

Page 901 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Output
Outputs text in the document.

Syntax
Show( text )

Parameters
text is the text to show in the document as the field result.

Remarks
When using the Output field the text will be formatted using the current paragraph style. To output text in the Tedds
final result style use a Show field.

Example
{=CSC|CALL Output("This will be written out to the document")}
This will be written out to the document;
L = 4 m
{=CSC|CALL Output("The value of L is "+string(L,”f0”,”m”)+” m”)}
The value of L is 4 m

Page 902 of 903


Tedds 2020 - Function and Field Reference

Show
Outputs text in the document.

Syntax
Show( text, show, log, resultsStyle )

Parameters
text is the text to show in the document as the field result.

show is the optional value which determines whether the show result is displayed (Hide(0), Show(1)); the
default is True.

log is the optional value that determines whether the show text is added to the progress log. If True(1) text is
added to progress log; the default is True.

resultsStyle is the optional value that determines whether to show the field result in the current Tedds final results
style True(1), or the current paragraph style False(0) ; the default is True.

Remarks
The easiest way to add a show statement is to use the ‘Insert Tedds Field’ command on the Tedds toolbar. This will help
to build up more complicated examples of show statements.

Example
{=CSC|CALL Show("This will be written out to the document")}
This will be written out to the document;
L = 4 m
{=CSC|CALL Show("The value of L is "+string(L,"f0","m")+" m")}
The value of L is 4 m
{=CSC|CALL Show(StrFormat("The value of L is [L,f0,m]"))}
The value of L is 4 m

Page 903 of 903

You might also like